Toyota 2007 Tundra Owners Manual

2015-09-08

: Toyota Toyota-2007-Tundra-Owners-Manual-763178 toyota-2007-tundra-owners-manual-763178 toyota pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 629 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Quick Reference Guide
1-1_1
1-2_1
1-3_1
1-4_1
1-5
1-6_1
1-7_1
1-8_1
1-9_1
1-10_1
2_1
3_1
4_1
5_1
6
7-1_1
7-2_1
7-3
8_1
9
gas
impman
imptoy

Customer Experience Center 1-800-331-4331

2007 Quick Reference Guide

Interactive Owner’s Guide

MN 00452-PRG07-TUN

Printed in USA 02/07

This Quick Reference Guide and the iGuide are not full descriptions of Tundra operations.

Every Tundra owner should review the Owner’s Manual that accompanies this vehicle.

All information in this Quick Reference Guide is current at the time of printing.

Toyota reserves the right to make changes at any time without notice.

Pay special attention to the boxed “ ” information highlighted in this

reference guide and throughout the Owner’s Manual. Each box contains safe

operating instructions to help you avoid injury or equipment malfunction.

This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently from an ordinary passenger car

because it is also designed for off-road use. It has a significantly higher rollover rate than

other types of vehicles. Refer to the Owner’s Manual for important rollover information.

WINDOWS®98

PENTIUM®III 600MHZ

64MB OF RAM

800 X 600 MONITOR

16-BIT COLOR

CD-ROM DRIVE

SYSTEM 9.X,

OS X 10.2

POWERPC®

64MB OF RAM

24-BIT COLOR

CD-ROM DRIVE

MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS

This iGuide is designed to be played on

any computer—PC or Macintosh®.

Have a question about the main features of your new Toyota? Find the answers

quickly and easily in this Quick Reference Guide, which includes highlights

from the Owner’s Manual. For more detailed information, and helpful

interactive demonstrations and tips, visit www.Toyotaiguide.com or use this

handy CD-ROM in your PC or Macintosh®.

A word about safe vehicle operations !

Interactive Owner’s Guide

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

2007 Tundra Quick Reference Guide

Engine maintenance 8

Fuel tank door release and cap 7

Hood release 7

Indicator symbols 4-5

Instrument cluster 4

Instrument panel 2-3

Keyless entry16

Light control-Instrument panel 6

Accessory meter 25

Air Conditioning/Heating 20-21

Audio 22-23

Auto LSD (Auto Limited Slip Differential) 27

Automatic Transmission 9

Bottle holders 27

Cruise control 25

Cup holders 26

Door locks 10

Four-wheel drive 10

Garage door opener (HomeLink®)321

Lights1& turn signals 16

Mirrors-Power side view 10

Moonroof 12

Multi-information display218

Parking brake 26

Power outlets-12V DC 17

Power outlets-115V AC 17

Rear seat entertainment system 24

Seat adjustments-Front 12-13

Seat adjustments-Rear 13

Seats-Folding 14-15

Seat heaters 20

Seats-Head restraints 14

Telephone controls (Bluetooth®)24

Tilt and telescopic steering wheel 11

“TOW/HAUL” switch 11

Windows-Power 19

Windows-Rear 19

Windshield wiper & washer 15

Doors-Child safety locks 29

Seat belts 28

Seat belts-Shoulder belt anchor 28

Spare tire & tools 29

Tire Pressure Warning System reset 28

OVERVIEW

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

SAFETY AND

EMERGENCY FEATURES

1Visit your Toyota dealer for information on customizing this feature.

2Programmable by customer. Refer to the Owner’s Manual for instructions and

more information.

3HomeLink®is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

2 3

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

OVERVIEW

Instrument panel

Separate seat with

manual Air Conditioning

system

Steering wheel audio control1

Telephone control1

Voice command button1,2

Headlight and turn signal controls

Wiper and washer controls

Multi-information display/Accessory meter control buttons

Intuitive parking assist button1

Emergency flasher button

Audio system or navigation system-integrated audio system1,2

Outside rear view mirror/Back window defogger button1

Front passenger seat belt reminder

Front passenger occupant classification indicator or front passenger

airbag ON/OFF indicator1

Seat heater controls1

Air Conditioning controls

12V DC Power outlet

AUX audio jack

Cigarette lighter/12V DC Power outlet

“TOW/HAUL” button1

Two-wheel/Four-wheel drive selector1

Tire Pressure Warning System reset

“VSC OFF” button

115V AC Power outlet ON/OFF switch1

Cruise control1

Ignition switch

Accessory meter

Theft deterrent system/Engine immobilizer indicator1

Intuitive parking assist indicator1

Front passenger airbag manual ON/OFF switch1(in glove box)

Instrument panel light control

Interior light/Personal light main switch

“RSCA OFF” switch

Power back window switch

Cargo lamp switch

Power rear view mirror control

1If equipped

2For details, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual.”

Bench seat

Steering wheel

controls (if equipped)

4 5

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

OVERVIEW

When the anti-lock brake system (ABS) function is in action, you may feel the

brake pedal pulsating and hear a noise. In this situation, to let the anti-lock

brake system work for you, just hold the brake pedal down more firmly. Do not

pump the brake as this will result in reduced braking performance.

Indicator symbols

Instrument cluster

Tachometer

Service indicator and reminder

Speedometer

Fuel gauge

Voltmeter

Oil pressure gauge

Engine coolant temperature

Trip meter reset knob

Odometer and two trip meters

Multi-information display

Automatic Transmission shift position indicator

Automatic Transmission shift range display

Automatic Transmission fluid temperature gauge

Without multi-information display

With multi-information display

Driver/Front passenger seat belt reminder1

(alarm will sound if speed is over 12 mph)

Charging system warning1

Low engine oil pressure warning1

Brake system warning1

Malfunction/Check Engine indicator1

Engine oil replacement reminder1

Front passenger occupant classification or front passenger airbag

ON/OFF indicator

1For details, refer to “Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers,” Section 1-6, 2007

Owner’s Manual.

2If this light flashes, refer to “Four-wheel drive system,” Section 1-7, 2007 Owner’s Manual.

3If this light flashes, refer to “Cruise control,” Section 1-7, 2007 Owner’s Manual.

4If this light flashes, refer to “Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off switch,” Section 1-3,

2007 Owner’s Manual.

Anti-lock Brake System warning1

Headlight low/high beam indicator

Turn signal indicator

High/Low speed four-wheel drive indicator2

Slip indicator

Vehicle Stability Control “OFF” indicator/warning1

TOW/HAUL mode indicator

“AUTO LSD” indicator

Cruise control indicator3

Automatic Transmission fluid temperature warning1

Low Tire Pressure Warning1

Theft deterrent/Engine immobilizer system indicator

Low fuel level warning1

Open door warning1

Roll Sensing Curtain Airbags off indicator4

Airbag SRS warning1

Master warning1

Low windshield washer fluid level warning1

6 7

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

OVERVIEW

Keyless entry Fuel tank door release and cap

Hood release

Pull up latch and

raise hood

Pull

Alarm operation

NOTE: If a door is not opened within

30 seconds of unlocking, all doors

will relock for safety.

Push

Push and hold

Push ONCE: Driver door

TWICE: All doors

Locking operation Unlocking operation

NOTE: Tighten until one click is

heard. If the cap is not sealed

properly, Check Engine “ ”

indicator may illuminate.

Pull

Tu r n

Store

Light control-Instrument panel

Brightness

control

8 9

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Automatic Transmission

1The ignition switch must be ON and the brake pedal depressed to shift

from “Park.”

Downshifting increases power going uphill, or provides engine braking

downhill. For best fuel economy during normal driving conditions, always

drive with the shift lever in the “D” position.

Floor shift type:

+: Upshift (Push and release)

-: Downshift (Pull and release)

Column shift type:

+: Upshift (Turn up and release)

-: Downshift (Turn down and release)

“S” (Sequential) mode

Shift the shift lever to “S” position from “D” position.

Windshield washer fluid tank

Power steering fluid reservoir

Engine oil level dipstick

Engine coolant reservoir

Engine oil filler cap

Note: Regularly scheduled maintenance, including oil changes, will

help extend the life of your vehicle and maintain performance.

Please refer to the “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet,”

“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual

Supplement.”

Engine maintenance

6 cylinder (1GR-FE) engine

4.7L 8 cylinder (2UZ-FE) engine

5.7L 8 cylinder (3UR-FE) engine

Floor shift type

Column shift type

Park1

Reverse

Neutral

Drive

“S” mode

“S”

“D”

Park1

Reverse

Neutral

Drive

“S” mode

+(“S” mode)

-(“S” mode)

10 11

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Four-wheel drive (if equipped)

High speed (2WD)

High speed (4WD)

Turn to “4H” with speed below 62 mph.

Low speed (4WD)

Shift to “N” position when stopped, then push and turn to “4L.”

For best fuel economy and performance under normal driving conditions,

keep in “2WD” position.

Push

and turn

Tu r n

Mirrors-Power side view (if equipped)

Fold mirrors in

Return mirrors to

original position

Adjust

Select left or right

Key must be in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

Door locks (if equipped)

Lock

Unlock

Hold wheel, push lever down, set angle and length, then return lever.

Manual

Tilt steering wheel Tilt and telescopic steering wheel

Tilt and telescopic (if equipped)

steering wheel

Angle

Length

Lock release lever

Angle

Push the control switch, set angle and length.

Note: Do not attempt to adjust while the vehicle is in motion.

Power

Angle

Control switch

Length

Control switch

“TOW/HAUL” switch (if equipped)

Tow/Haul mode can be used when carrying heavy loads. As fuel economy

is reduced while in Tow/Haul mode, deactivating when driving without a

load is recommended.

Refer to the Owner‘s Manual for more details on this system before

attempting to use it.

Floor shift type

System ON/OFF

Column shift type

System

ON/OFF

12 13

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Seat adjustments-Front

Manual seat

Separate seat

-Regular cab model Separate seat

-Double cab and Crew Max models

Bench seat

-Regular cab model Bench seat

-Double cab and Crew Max models

Seats adjustments-Rear

Position

Seatback angle and fold

Moonroof (if equipped)

Sliding operation Tilting operation

Open Tilt

Close Close

Position

Seatback angle

Seat cushion angle

Seat height

Lumbar support*

Seatback angle (side)

Seatback angle (center)

Leg support

Position, cushion angle and height

* If equipped

Power seat

14 15

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Seats-Folding

Front (regular cab model)

Rear (double cab model)

(1) Pull

(2) Pull

(2)

(3) Lift up

Pull

(2)

(1) Stow

(3) Pull and

fold down

Rear (Crew Max model)

Windshield wiper & washer

With intermittent wiper Without intermittent wiper

Interval wipe

Single wipe

Slow

Fast

Pull to wash

and wipe

Adjust interval

Pull to wash

and wipe

Single wipe

Slow

Fast

Seats-Head restraints

Front (type B)

-Separate seat

Front (type A)

-Separate seat

Lock release button Lock release button

(1)

(2)

Rear (double cab model)

Front-Bench seat

Lock release button Lock release button

Rear (Crew Max model)

Lock release button

(1) Stow

16 17

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Power outlets-12V DC (if equipped)

Separate seats

Bench seat

Instrument panel Under the seat cushion

of the front center seat

Back of the center

console box

(Crew Max model only)

Instrument panel Inside of the center

console box

Back of the front

center seat

(Crew Max model only)

Key must be in the “ACC” or “ON” position to be used.

Power outlet-115V AC (if equipped)

ON/OFF switch Back of the center

console box Back of the front

center seat

Push

Lights & turn signals

Turn signals

Headlights

High beam flasher

Low beam

Front fog lights (if equipped)

Headlights

* If equipped

-Daytime Running Light system (DRL)(if equipped) Automatically turns

on the turn signal lights at a reduced intensity.

-Automatic light cut off system Automatically turns lights off after a

delay of 30 seconds, or the lock switch on remote may be pushed.

Front fog lights come on only when the headlights are on low beam.

Parking lights

Right turn

Tu r n

Lane change

Left turn

High beam

Auto*

Headlights

Parking lights

Back of the center

console box

Back of the front

center seat

18 19

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Windows-Power (if equipped)

Regular cab model

Down

Driver side

Window

lock

switch

Down

Double cab and Crew Max models

Down

Driver side

Window

lock

switch

Down

Automatic down operation (driver side only)

Push the switch completely down and release to fully open. To stop

window midway, lightly pull up on the switch.

Window lock switch Deactivates all passenger windows. Driver’s window

remains operable.

Multi-information display (if equipped)

Push “INFO” to change information in the following:

(1) Zoom display of odometer and trip meter

(2) Average gas mileage

(3) Current gas mileage

(4) Miles left on remaining fuel

(5) Running time from engine start

(6) Average vehicle speed

Push “SETUP US/M” to customize to the following settings:

(1) KEYLESS ENTRY FEEDBACK

(2) KEYLESS ENTRY RELOCK TIMER

(3) KEYLESS ENTRY ALL DOORS UNLOCK

(4) DOOR AUTO LOCKING

(5) DOOR AUTO UNLOCKING

(6) HEADLAMPS AUTO OFF TIMER

(7) COURTESY LAMPS OFF TIMER

(8) DEFAULT SETTING

Window-Rear

Open

Crew Max model

20 21

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Air Conditioning/Heating

Fan speed

Automatic climate control ON

Adjusting the temperature setting will cause the airflow vents, air

intake and fan to adjust automatically.

Temperature (driver side)

Air Conditioning ON/OFF

Airflow vent

Windshield airflow (fresh air only)

Temperature (front passenger side)

“DUAL” button

Indicator ON: Separate temperature settings for driver and

passenger.

Indicator OFF: Synchronize temperature settings for driver and

passenger.

Outside rearview mirror/Back window defogger

Fresh or recirculated cabin air

Climate control OFF

Automatic Air Conditioning

In “ ” mode, use fresh air (“ ” indicator “OFF”) to reduce

window fogging.

Manual Air Conditioning

Fan speed

Air Conditioning ON/OFF

Fresh or recirculated cabin air

Outside rearview mirror/Back window defogger*

Temperature (front passenger side)

Synchronize with driver side temperature setting

Airflow vent selector

Temperature (driver side)

Use for quick cooling. MAX A/C changes air intake to recirculate. It is

not possible to change intake to fresh, or to turn A/C OFF in this mode.

* If equipped

In “ ” or “ ” mode, use fresh air (“ ” indicator “OFF”) to

reduce window fogging.

Seat heaters (if equipped)

Left front seat Right front seat

Garage door opener (HomeLink®)*

(if equipped)

Garage door openers manufactured under license from HomeLink®*can

be programmed to operate garage doors, estate gates, security lighting, etc.

Refer to “Garage door opener,” Section 1-10 in the Owner’s Manual for

more details.

For programming assistance, contact the Toyota Customer Experience

Center at 1-800-331-4331, or visit http://www.homelink.com.

*HomeLink®is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

22 23

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Type 2 additional functions

Type 3 (with JBL speakers)

Audio

Eject CD

Push to turn

ON/OFF

View CD

information

Push to adjust

tone, balance

& ASL*

Seek

station/

CD track

select

Station/CD

track scan

Mode

View MP3

folder and/or

Satellite Radio

category type

Preset buttons - functions in other

modes indicated above number

Load CD(s)

Type 1

Push to skip

up/down

MP3 folder

“-+”

Volume control

“MODE”

Push to turn audio ON and select an audio mode. Push and hold to turn

the audio system “OFF.”

“”

-In radio mode

Push to select a preset station; push and hold to seek the next strong

station.

-In CD mode

Push to skip up or down to the next/previous track.

Steering wheel switches (if equipped)

RADIO

To preset stations Tune in the desired station and hold down a preset

button (1-6) until you hear a beep. Push desired preset button (1-6) to

select.

To scan stations Push and hold “SCAN” to scan preset stations. Push again

to hold selection.

CD PLAYER

To scan tracks on a disc Push and hold “SCAN.” Push again to hold

selection.

CD changer (Type 2 and 3 only)

-To load one disc Push “LOAD” and insert one disc.

-To load multiple discs Push and hold “LOAD” until you hear a beep.

Insert one disc. Shutter will close and then re-open for next disc.

To select a file (MP3/WMA only) Tur n “ T U N E .FILE.”

To select a folder (MP3/WMA only) Push either side of “FOLDER.”

By inserting a mini plug into the AUX audio jack, you can listen to music

from a portable audio device through the vehicle’s speaker system.

AUX audio jack

* Automatic Sound Leveling

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Rear seat entertainment system

(if equipped)

115V AC Power outlet ON/OFF switch

Front audio system

DVD player

DVD screen

Remote control

115V AC Power outlet

A/V input adapter

Bluetooth®technology allows you to place or receive calls without taking

your hands from the steering wheel or using a cable to connect the

telephone and the system.

Refer to “Hands-free telephone system,” Section 1-8 in the Owner’s

Manual for more details.

Telephone controls (Bluetooth®)

(if equipped)

Cruise control (if equipped)

1The set speed may also be cancelled by depressing the brake pedal.

2The set speed may be resumed once vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph.

Turning system ON/OFF

Functions

System ON/OFF

Resume2/Increase speed

Set/Decrease speed

Cancel1

Accessory meter (if equipped)

Outside temperature/cruise information display

Clock

Hour set

Minute set

Change information (if equipped)

“SELECT RESET” button (if equipped)

“SETUP US/M” button (if equipped) to customize unit

Refer to your Owner’s Manual for complete details on this system before

attempting to use it.

Separate seats

Bench seat

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

VSC OFF

Briefly pushing the “VSC OFF” switch activates/deactivates Auto LSD.

Note: ONLY works in 2-wheel drive at speeds under 62 mph. Should

ONLY be used when wheel spinning occurs on slippery or

unpaved surfaces. Pushing and holding “VSC OFF” for three

seconds activates/deactivates VSC (Vehicle Stability Control).

Refer to the Owner‘s Manual for more details on this system before

attempting to use it.

Auto LSD (Auto Limited Slip

Differential)

Cup holders

Separate seat Bench seat

Front center seat

Center console

Back of the center console box

(double cab model)

Back of the front center seatback

(double cab model)

Rear seat

Crew Max model

Bottle holders

Instrument panel

Rear door

(Crew Max model only)

Front door

Rear door

Parking brake

Set: Depress

Release: Depress again

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

SAFETY AND

EMERGENCY FEATURES

If belt is fully extended, then retracted even slightly, it cannot be re-

extended beyond that point, unless fully retracted again. This feature is

used to help hold child restraint systems securely.

To find more information about seat belts, and how to install a child

restraint system, refer to the Owner's Manual.

baT

elkcuB

Keep as low on

hips as possible

Take up

slack

Too high

Seat belts

Push up, or

squeeze lock

release to lower

Tire Pressure Warning System reset

If tire pressure becomes critically low on any of the tires (excluding spare),

indicator comes on. Pushing “ SET” button should not turn off the light.

Correctly adjusting tire inflation will turn off the light after a few minutes.

After replacing/rotating tire or wheels, the system must be initialized.

Refer to the Owner’s Manual for more details.

Seat belts-Shoulder belt anchor

(double cab and Crew Max models)

System reset initialization

1. Push and hold “ SET” button

until the indicator blinks 3 times.

2. Wait about 7 minutes to allow

initialization to complete.

Spare tire & tools

Tool location

Removing the spare tire

Assemble the jack handle.

Insert the jack handle end into the lowering screw.

Turn the jack handle counterclockwise.

Refer to the Owner’s Manual for tire changing and jack positioning

procedures.

Regular cab models

-behind the right seatback

Double cab models

-under the right rear seats

with storage box

Tool bag

Jack

Tool bag

Jack

Tool bag

Jack

Moving the lever to “LOCK” will allow the door to be opened only from

the outside.

Rear door

Double cab models

-under the right rear seats

without storage box

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Door-Child safety locks

(double cab and Crew Max only)

Crew Max models

-behind the right rear seatback

Tool bag

Jack

PC MACINTOSH

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Overview of instruments and controls

Instrument panel overview 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Steering switches and overhead console overview 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instrument cluster overview 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Indicator symbols on the instrument panel 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

07 04.26

SECTION 1− 1

22007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

1. Side defroster outlet

2. Instrument panel vents (side vents)

3. Instrument cluster

4. Automatic transmission selector lever

5. Instrument panel vents (center vents)

6. Glove boxes

7. Power door lock switches

8. Power window switches

9. Auxiliary boxes

10. Bottle holders

11. Instrument panel light control dial

12. Interior light/personal light main switch

13. Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags

off switch (“RSCA OFF” switch)

14. Power back window switch

(Crew Max models)

15. Cargo lamp switch

16. Hood lock release lever

17. Parking brake pedal

18. Power rear view mirror control switch

19. Window lock switch

07 04.26

Instrument panel overview

"Bench seat (view A)

XS11023a

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

1. Side defroster outlet

2. Instrument panel vents (side vents)

3. Instrument cluster

4. Instrument panel vents (center vents)

5. Glove boxes

6. Power door lock switches

7. Power window switches

8. Auxiliary boxes

9. A/V input adapter

(with rear seat entertainment system)

10. Power outlet

11. Rear vents (Crew Max models)

12. Center console box

13. Ashtray

14. Cup holders

15. Automatic transmission selector lever

16. Instrument panel light control dial

17. Interior light/personal light main switch

18. Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags

off switch (“RSCA OFF” switch)

19. Power back window switch

(Crew Max models)

20. Cargo lamp switch

21. Hood lock release lever

22. Parking brake pedal

07 04.26

"Separate seat (view A)

XS11018a

42007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

23. Power rear view mirror control switch

24. Window lock switch

25. Driving position memory switch

07 04.26

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

1. Headlight, turn signal and front fog

light switches

2. Wiper and washer switches

3. Accessory meter control switch

4. Intuitive parking assist switch

5. Emergency flasher switch

6. Audio system or navigation system

including audio system (For the

navigation system, see the separate

“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.)

7. Air conditioning controls

8. Outside rear view mirror defogger

switch/Back window and outside rear

view mirror defogger switch

9. Front passenger’s seat belt reminder

light

10. Passenger airbag on−off indicator light

11. Passenger airbag off switch

(Regular cab models)

12. AUX adapter

13. Ashtray

14. Power outlet

15. Cigarette lighter

16. Front drive control switch knob

(four−wheel drive models)

17. Tire pressure warning reset switch

07 04.26

"Bench seat (view B)

XS11022

62007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

18. “VSC OFF” switch

19. Power outlet main switch

(with rear seat entertainment system)

20. Cruise control switch

21. Ignition switch

22. Accessory meter

23. Engine immobilizer/theft deterrent

system indicator light

24. Intuitive parking assist indicator lights

07 04.26

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

1. Headlight, turn signal and front fog

light switches

2. Wiper and washer switches

3. Accessory meter control switches

4. Intuitive parking assist switch

5. Emergency flasher switch

6. Audio system or navigation system

including audio system (For the

navigation system, see the separate

“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.)

7. Air conditioning controls

8. Outside rear view mirror defogger

switch/Back window and outside rear

view mirror defogger switch

9. Front passenger’s seat belt reminder

light

10. Passenger airbag on−off indicator light

11. Passenger airbag off switch

(Regular cab models)

12. Power outlet

13. AUX adapter

14. Cigarette lighter

15. “TOW/HAUL” switch

16. Front drive control switch knob

(four−wheel drive models)

17. Tire pressure warning reset switch

07 04.26

"Separate seat with manual air conditioning system (view B)

XS11020

82007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

18. “VSC OFF” switch

19. Power outlet main switch

(with rear seat entertainment system)

20. Cruise control switch

21. Ignition switch

22. Accessory meter

23. Engine immobilizer/theft deterrent

system indicator light

24. Intuitive parking assist indicator lights

07 04.26

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

1. Headlight, turn signal and front fog

light switches

2. Wiper and washer switches

3. Multi−information display/accessory me-

ter control switches

4. Intuitive parking assist switch

5. Emergency flasher switch

6. Audio system or navigation system

including audio system (For the

navigation system, see the separate

“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.)

7. Outside rear view mirror defogger

switch/Back window and outside rear

view mirror defogger switch

8. Front passenger’s seat belt reminder

light

9. Passenger airbag on−off indicator light

10. Seat heater dials

11. Air conditioning controls

12. Power outlet

13. AUX adapter

14. Cigarette lighter

15. “TOW/HAUL” switch

16. Front drive control switch knob

(four−wheel drive models)

17. Tire pressure warning reset switch

07 04.26

"Separate seat with automatic air conditioning system (view B)

XS11021

10 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

18. “VSC OFF” switch

19. Power outlet main switch

(with rear seat entertainment system)

20. Cruise control switch

21. Ignition switch

22. Accessory meter

23. Engine immobilizer/theft deterrent sys-

tem indicator light

24. Intuitive parking assist indicator lights

XS10010a

1. Audio remote control switches

2. Telephone switches

3. Talk switch

XS11007a

Type A

XS11024

Type B

07 04.26

Steering switches and

overhead console overview

"Steering switches "Overhead console

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS11009e

Type C

1. Card holder

2. Interior light switch

3. Interior light

4. Sunglass holder

5. Microphone

6. Personal lights

7. Auxiliary boxes

8. Moon roof switches

(on some Crew Max models)

07 04.26

12 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS11002c

1. Tachometer

2. Service reminder indicators and

indicator lights

3. Speedometer

4. Fuel gauge

5. Voltmeter

6. Oil pressure gauge

7. Engine coolant temperature gauge

8. Trip meter reset knob

9. Odometer and two trip meters

10. Automatic transmission shift position

indicator lights

11. Automatic transmission shift range

display

12. Automatic transmission fluid

temperature gauge

07 04.26

Instrument cluster overview

"Type A

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS11003c

1. Tachometer

2. Service reminder indicators and

indicator lights

3. Speedometer

4. Fuel gauge

5. Voltmeter

6. Oil pressure gauge

7. Engine coolant temperature gauge

8. Trip meter reset knob

9. Multi−information display

10. Automatic transmission shift position

indicator lights

11. Automatic transmission shift range

display

12. Automatic transmission fluid

temperature gauge

07 04.26

"Type B

14 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Driver’s seat belt reminder light∗1

Low engine oil pressure warning light∗1

Brake system warning light∗1

Charging system warning light∗1

Malfunction indicator lamp∗1

Anti−lock brake system warning light∗1

SRS warning light∗1

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light∗1

Passenger airbag on−off indicator light

Engine oil replacement reminder light∗1

(for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

Open door warning light∗1

Tire pressure warning light∗1

Automatic transmission fluid temperature

warning light∗1

Engine immobilizer/theft deterrent system

indicator light

Low fuel level warning light∗1

Master warning light∗1

Low windshield washer fluid level warning light∗1

07 04.26

Indicator symbols on the instrument panel

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

∗1: For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warning

buzzers” on page 197 in Section 1−6.

∗2: If this light flashes, see “Cruise control” on page 259 in

Section 1−7.

∗3: If this light flashes, see “Four−wheel drive system” on page

239 in Section 1−7.

∗4: For details, see “—Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off

switch” on page 113 in Section 1−3.

Cruise control indicator light∗2

Slip indicator light

Vehicle stability control system off

indicator/warning light∗1

“AUTO LSD” indicator light

Headlight high beam indicator light

Turn signal indicator lights

Tail light indicator light

Low speed four−wheel drive indicator light∗3

(four−wheel drive models)

Tow/haul mode indicator light

Headlight low beam indicator light

High speed four−wheel drive indicator light∗3

(four−wheel drive models)

Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off

indicator light∗4

07 04.26

16 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

397

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Other equipment

Accessory meter 398. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Intuitive parking assist 402. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Compass 407. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cigarette lighter and ashtray 411. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power outlets (12 VDC) 412. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power outlet (115 VAC) 414. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Glove boxes 416. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Garage door opener 416. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Auxiliary boxes 420. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sunglass holder 421. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Card holder 422. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Map holder 423. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pen holder 425. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tissue pocket 425. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Center console box 426. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front cup holders 428. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear cup holders 429. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bottle holders 430. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Storage box 431. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seatback table 432. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Deck hooks 432. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Grocery bag/cargo net hooks 433. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Floor mat 433. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

07 04.26

SECTION 1− 10

398 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Accessory meter—

1. Outside temperature and cruise infor-

mation display or outside temperature

display

2. Clock

3. “H” button

4. “M” button

5. “INFO” button (with cruise information)

6. “SELECT RESET” button

(with cruise information)

7. “SETUP US/M” button

07 04.26

XS10001c

399

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Operate the accessory meter with the

ignition switch on.

When the ignition switch is turned to

“ON”, the last previously used mode dis-

played just before the ignition switch is

turned off will appear.

When the instrument panel lights are

turned on, the brightness of the display

will be reduced.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while the

vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust

the display only when the vehicle is

stopped.

SELECTING UNIT

You can select the unit between En-

glish/U.S. customary system and metric

unit.

To select the unit A (English/U.S. custom-

ary system) or unit B (metric unit), push

“SETUP US/M” button.

The unit variations are as follows:

Information Unit A Unit B

Average fuel

consumption and

Instantaneous

fuel consumption

MPG L/100 km

Driving range MILES km

Outside

temperature _F_C

XS10003b

The displayed temperature ranges from

−40_C (−40_F) up to 50_C (122_F).

The ignition switch must be in the “ON”

position.

If an abnormality exists in the connection

of the outside air temperature sensor,

“−−−_C” (“−−−_F”) will appear on the dis-

play. If “−−−_C” (“−−−_F”) appears on the

display, contact your Toyota dealer.

There may be a case that “−−−_C”

(“−−−_F”) appears momentarily when the

ignition switch is quickly turned to “ON”.

It is normal if it goes out soon.

07 04.26

—Before using the accessory

meter

—Outside temperature display

(without cruise information)

400 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS10004e

The outside temperature display and

cruise information display indicates the

following information.

Every time you push the “INFO” button,

the display toggles through this infor-

mation.

1. Outside temperature

2. Average fuel consumption

3. Instantaneous fuel consumption

4. Driving range

5. Display off

The displayed values in the cruise infor-

mation display indicate general driving

conditions. Accuracy varies with driving

habits and road conditions.

To set the unit, push the “SETUP US/M”

button until the desired unit display ap-

pears.

When the ignition switch is on, the last

previously used mode displayed just be-

fore the ignition switch is off will appear.

1. Outside temperature (“OUTSIDE _F”

or “OUTSIDE _C”)

The outside temperature display indicates

the outside air temperature.

The displayed temperature ranges from

−40_C (−40_F) up to 50_C (122_F).

If an abnormality exists in the connection

of the outside air temperature sensor,

“−−−_C” (“−−−_F”) will appear on the dis-

play. If “−−−_C” (“−−−_F”) appears on the

display, contact your Toyota dealer.

There may be a case that “−−−_C”

(“−−−_F”) appears momentarily when the

ignition switch is quickly turned to the

“ON” position. It is normal if it goes out

soon.

2. Average fuel consumption (“AVG

MPG” or “AVG L/100 km”)

Average fuel consumption is calculated

and displayed based on total driving

distance and total fuel consumption

with the engine running.

The displayed value is updated about ev-

ery 10 seconds.

To reset the calculation, push the

“SELECT RESET” button about 2 second.

07 04.26

—Outside temperature and

cruise information display

401

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

3. Instantaneous fuel consumption

(“INST MPG” or “INST L/100 km”)

The instantaneous fuel consumption is

calculated and displayed based on dis-

tance and fuel consumption at 20 revo-

lutions of the engine.

The displayed value is updated for a short

time.

An accurate figure may not be shown if

the vehicle is driving down a long slope,

and engine brake is applied. (The display

will indicate the extremely low fuel con-

sumption.)

When the vehicle is stopped with the en-

gine running, “−−, −MPG” will be shown

on the display.

The calculation is reset when the ignition

switch is turned off.

4. Driving range (“RANGE MI” or

“RANGE km”)

The distance the vehicle can travel with

the remaining fuel is calculated and

displayed based on the quantity of re-

maining fuel and past fuel consumption.

The driving range display indicates the

approximate distance that you can drive

until the fuel gauge reaches “E”. It is

different from the actual distance traveled.

The displayed value is updated every time

the fuel equivalent for 1 mile or 1 km is

consumed.

Every time you refuel the vehicle, the cal-

culation is reset.

The actual driving range varies with driv-

ing habits and road conditions. If fuel con-

sumption is good, the driving range will be

longer than indicated. If fuel consumption

is poor, the driving range will be shorter

than indicated.

If the low fuel level warning light comes

on, refuel the vehicle even if the display

indicates that the vehicle can be driven

further.

—Clock

XS10002

Type A (with cruise information)

XS10074

Type B (without cruise information)

07 04.26

402 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

To reset the hour: Push the “H” button.

To reset the minutes: Push the “M” button.

Vehicle with cruise information only—

For quicker adjustment of the clock, hold

down “M” or “H” button continuously. This

allows faster advancement of the minutes

and hours while setting.

The ignition switch must be in the “ACC”

or “ON” position.

If the electrical power source has been

disconnected from the clock, the time dis-

play will automatically be set to 1:00 (one

o’clock).

When the instrument panel lights are

turned on, the brightness of the time indi-

cation will be reduced.

Intuitive parking assist

XS10061a

1: Rear sensors

2: Rear corner sensors

3: Front corner sensors

The intuitive parking assist is designed

to inform you of the approximate dis-

tance between your vehicle and an ob-

struction by indicator and buzzer when

parking the vehicle. This system uses

sensors to detect obstructions.

This system works when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position and the

transmission is not in the “P” position.

Rear and rear corner sensors work only

when the transmission is in the “R” posi-

tion.

Front corner sensors works when:

DTransmission is in the “R” position.

DTransmission is not in the “P” or “R”

position and vehicle speed is approxi-

mate 10 km/h (6 mph) or less.

07 04.26

403

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS10062a

To turn on: Push the switch.

The indicator comes on and the buzzer

will sound.

To turn off: Push the switch again.

In the following cases, the buzzer will

sound several times and the indicator

will stay on to indicate that the system

is not working properly.

DWhen the temperature is extremely low.

DWhen any of the sensors are malfunc-

tion.

If the indicator is continuously on, have

your Toyota dealer check the system.

If the indicator remains blinking but

you do not hear the buzzer sound,

clean the sensors with soft cloth.

XS10064a

Rear sensors

Rear corner sensors

Front corner sensors

07 04.26

404 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

This system is designed to inform you of

the approximate distance between your

vehicle and an obstacle by indicator and

buzzer.

Rear sensors

Distance shown as A in

mm (in.)

Indicator and

buzzer

Approximately

1800—1150 (70.9—45.7) Intermittent

Approximately

1150—850 (45.7—33.5)

Fast

intermittent

Approximately

850 (33.5) or less Continuous

Rear corner sensors

Distance shown as B in

mm (in.)

Indicator and

buzzer

Approximately

850—520 (33.5—20.5) Intermittent

Approximately

520—400 (20.5—15.7)

Fast

intermittent

Approximately

400 (15.7) or less Continuous

Front corner sensors

Distance shown as C in

mm (in.)

Indicator and

buzzer

Approximately

600—400 (23.6—15.7) Intermittent

Approximately

400—250 (15.7—9.8)

Fast

intermittent

Approximately

250 (9.8) or less Continuous

How the buzzer sounds when obstacles

are simultaneously detected at the front

and rear of the vehicle.

The buzzer sounds as described below:

DWhen an obstacle is detected within

approximately 400 mm (15.7 in.) of the

front corner sensor or approximately

850 mm (33.5 in.) of the rear sensor

(buzzer is sounding continuously) and

another obstacle is detected at the oth-

er end of the vehicle, the buzzer

sounds 7 times intermittently then

sounds continuously and it continues to

sound approximately every 1.5 sec-

onds.

DWhen an obstacle is detected within

approximately 400 mm (15.7 in.) of the

front corner sensor or approximately

850 mm (33.5 in.) of the rear sensor

(buzzer is sounding continuously) and

another obstacle is detected in the

same way at the other end of the ve-

hicle, the buzzer sounds 3 times inter-

mittently then sounds continuously and

it continues to sound approximately ev-

ery 0.5 seconds.

07 04.26

405

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS10066b

1: Front corner sensors

2: Rear corner sensors

3: Rear sensors

Perceptible area

A: Approximately 1800 mm (70.9 in.)

B: Approximately 850 mm (33.5 in.)

C: Approximately 600 mm (23.6 in.)

Perceptible area is limited as shown in

the previous illustration. Check the area

around the vehicle before driving and start

driving slowly.

The maximum detection distance of the

sensor varies depending on the size of

the obstacle, the sensor can detect a

large obstacle such as a wall, up to 1800

mm (70.9 in.) away. However, the detec-

tion distance of a thin obstacle such as a

pole is less than 1800 mm (70.9 in.).

CAUTION

DThe intuitive parking assist is in-

tended as an aid to assist you to

park and is not a substitute for

your personal judgment. Make your

driving decisions based on your ob-

servations.

DDo not attach accessories or other

objects to the vehicle within the

sensor perceptible area. Doing so

may cause the system to malfunc-

tion, which might result in an acci-

dent.

DIn certain situations, the system

will not function properly and when

the vehicle approaches certain ob-

jects, the system will not detect

those objects. Therefore, always ob-

serve the area around the vehicle

and do not rely solely on the sys-

tem.

07 04.26

406 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

For vehicles sold in Canada

This ISM device compiles with

Canadian ICES−001.

In the following cases, the system may

not work properly.

DWhen ice, snow, mud or other objects

build up on the sensor

DWhen the vehicle is parked in extreme-

ly high or extremely low temperature

for a long period

DWhen driving on bumpy or graveled

roads or on grass

DWhen a device such as a horn from

another vehicle, motorcycle engine, or

an air brake sound from a heavy−duty

vehicle, issues ultrasonic waves, near

your vehicle

DWhen attaching a two−way radio anten-

DWhen rain or water splashes on the

sensor

DWhen operating the vehicle on an in-

clined surface

DWhen a radio antenna or fender pole

is mounted on your vehicle

DWhen a towing hitch is mounted on

your vehicle

DWhen a towing eyelet is mounted on

your vehicle

DWhen the tail−gate is opened

DWhen the bumper is damaged

The system may not detect the follow-

ing.

DThin objects such as a wire or rope

DObjects with a surface area too small

to reflect ultrasonic waves such as

wire gauze or fence

DSound wave absorbing objects or mate-

rial such as cotton or snow

DA person near the vehicle (depending

on the type of clothes worn)

DObjects with a sharp edge

DSmall or short objects

DTall objects with an upper part project-

ing toward the vehicle

DObjects just under the bumper

DObjects very close to your vehicle

DWhen the bumper is damaged

In the following cases, have your

Toyota dealer check the system.

DWhen the bumper is damaged

DWhen the indicator is continuously on

07 04.26

407

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Compass

XS10005a

The direction is indicated on the inside

rear view mirror.

If the ignition switch was turned off with

the system on, the system will automati-

cally turn back on when the ignition switch

is turned on.

Push the “ ” switch to turn the com-

pass system on and off.

The compass indicates the direction

that the vehicle is heading. In the

above case, it shows that the vehicle is

heading north.

Displays Directions

North

Northeast

East

Southeast

South

Southwest

West

Northwest

The compass may not show the correct

direction in the following conditions:

DThe vehicle is stopped immediately af-

ter turning.

DThe compass does not adjust while the

vehicle is stopped.

DThe ignition switch is turned off imme-

diately after turning.

DThe vehicle is on an inclined surface.

DThe vehicle is in a place where the

earth’s magnetic field is subject to in-

terference by artificial magnetic fields

(underground parking, under a steel

tower, between buildings, roof parking,

near a crossing, near a large vehicle,

etc.).

DThe vehicle is magnetized. (There is a

magnet or a metal object on or near

the inside rear view mirror.)

DThe battery has been disconnected.

If your vehicle is out of the set zone,

refer to “CALIBRATING THE COMPASS”

below to set the zone number.

If the deviation is small, the compass

works to calibrate the direction automati-

cally while the vehicle is in motion.

For additional precision or for complete

calibrating, see “CALIBRATING THE

COMPASS” below.

07 04.26

408 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS10006

The compass sensor is in the inside

rear view mirror.

NOTICE

Do not put magnets or a metal object

on or near the inside rear view mirror

of the vehicle. Doing this may cause

malfunction of the compass sensor.

XS10007a

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (deviation

calibration)

The direction display on the compass

deviates from the true direction deter-

mined by the earth’s magnetic field. The

angle of deviation varies according to the

geographic position of the vehicle.

To adjust this deviation, stop the vehicle,

then push and hold the “ ” switch until

the zone number appears on the display.

Then push the “ ” switch, referring to

the following map to select the number of

the zone where the vehicle is.

07 04.26

409

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Zone number

After calibration, leaving the system for

several seconds returns it to the compass

mode.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while the

vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust

the display only when the vehicle is

stopped.

07 04.26

XS10008

Samoa: 5 Guam: 8 Saipan: 8

410 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS10009a

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (circling

calibration)

Sometimes the direction display on the

compass may not change after a turn. To

rectify this, stop the vehicle and push and

hold the “ ” switch until “CAL” appears

on the display.

If “CAL” appears on the display because

of a drastic change in the magnetic field,

perform circling calibration.

LS10039

Drive the vehicle in a circle at 8 km/h (5

mph) or less. If there is not enough space

to drive in a circle, drive around the

block.

After driving 1 to 3 circles in the above

method, calibration is completed when the

direction is shown on the display.

If calibration cannot be performed because

of the magnetized vehicle etc., take your

vehicle to Toyota dealer.

Perform circling calibration just after

you have purchased your Toyota. And

then always perform circling calibration

after the battery has been removed, re-

placed or disconnected.

DDo not perform circling calibration of

the compass in a place where the

earth’s magnetic field is subject to in-

terference by artificial magnetic fields

(underground parking, under a steel

tower, between buildings, roof parking,

near a crossing, near a large vehicle,

etc.).

DDuring calibration, do not operate elec-

tric systems (moon roof, power win-

dows, etc.) as they may interfere with

the calibration.

CAUTION

DWhen doing the circling calibration,

be sure to secure a wide space,

and watch out for people and ve-

hicles in the neighborhood. Do not

violate any local traffic rules while

performing circling calibration.

DDo not adjust the display while the

vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust

the display only when the vehicle is

stopped.

07 04.26

411

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS10076a

Type A (separate seats)

XS10016

Type B (bench seats)

CIGARETTE LIGHTER

To use the cigarette lighter, press it in.

After it finishes heating up, it automati-

cally pops out ready for use.

If the engine is not running, the ignition

switch must be in the “ACC” or “ON” posi-

tion to use the lighter.

Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed

in.

Use a Toyota genuine cigarette lighter or

equivalent for replacement.

ASHTRAY

Type A —

To use the ashtray, open the lid. The

ashtray can be removed and used out-

side the vehicle.

When finished with your cigarette, thor-

oughly extinguish it in the ashtray to pre-

vent other cigarette butts from catching

fire. After using the ashtray, close the lid

completely.

To remove the ashtray, pull it out from the

front cup holder as shown in the illustra-

tion.

Type B —

To use the ashtray, pull it out.

When finished with your cigarette, thor-

oughly extinguish it in the ashtray to pre-

vent other cigarette butts from catching

fire. After using the ashtray, push it back

completely.

To remove the ashtray, press down on the

lock spring plate and pull out.

07 04.26

Cigarette lighter and ashtray

412 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or sudden stop

while driving, always completely close

the ashtray after use. XS10033a

Type A (instrument panel)

XS10032a

Type B (instrument panel)

XS10038c

Type C (under the seat cushion of the

front center seat)

XS10039c

Type D (back of the front center seatback)

07 04.26

Power outlets (12 VDC)

413

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS10034

Type E (inside of the center console box)

XS10035a

Type F (back of the center console box)

XS10093

Type G (back of the front center seatback)

XS10095

Type H (back of the center console box)

The power outlets (12 VDC) are de-

signed for power supply for car acces-

sories.

NOTICE

zTo prevent the fuse from being

blown, do not use the electricity

over the total vehicle capacity of

12V/120W.

zTo prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not use the power

outlets longer than necessary when

the engine is not running.

zClose the power outlet lids when

the power outlets are not in use.

Inserting anything other than an ap-

propriate plug that fits the outlet,

or allowing any liquid to get into

the outlet may cause electrical fail-

ure or short circuits.

07 04.26

414 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

INFORMATION

Depending on operating time and cur-

rent consumption, the power outlets

may not be used due to the electrical

component protection function. Please

start engine and use the power out-

lets again after turn off the ignition in

this case.

XS10092

Type A (back of the front center seatback)

XS10094

Type B (back of the center console box)

This power outlet (115 VAC) is designed

for use as a power supply for electric

appliances in the vehicle.

The key must be in the “ON” position for

the power outlet to be used.

The maximum capacity for this power out-

let is 115 VAC/100W. If you attempt to

use an appliance that requires more than

115 VAC or 100W, the protection circuit

will activate and cut the power supply.

The power supply will restart automatically

when you use an appliance that operates

within the 115 VAC/100W limits.

07 04.26

Power outlet (115 VAC)

415

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS10079

Main switch

To use the power outlet, push the main

switch on the instrument panel.

An indicator light will illuminate to indicate

that the power outlet is ready for use.

Push the main switch once again to turn

the power outlet off. When the power out-

let is not in use, make sure that the main

switch is turned off.

NOTICE

zTo prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not use the power

outlet longer than necessary when

the engine is not running.

zClose the power outlet lid when the

power outlet is not in use. Inserting

anything other than an appropriate

plug that fits the outlet may cause

electrical failure or short circuits.

The power outlet is not designed for

the following electric appliances even

though their power consumption is un-

der 115 VAC/100W. These appliances

may not operate properly.

DAppliances with high initial peak watt-

age: cathode−ray tube type televisions,

compressor−driven refrigerators, electric

pumps, electric tools, etc.

DMeasuring devices which process pre-

cise data: medical equipment, measur-

ing instruments, etc.

DOther appliances requiring an extremely

stable power supply: microcomputer−

controlled electric blankets, touch sen-

sor lamps, etc.

Certain electrical appliances may cause

radio noise.

07 04.26

416 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS10020a

Upper glove box

XS10019a

Lower glove box

Upper glove box—

To open the glove box, push the button.

Lower glove box—

Open by pulling the lever.

Lock by inserting the master key and turn-

ing it clockwise.

Unlock by inserting the master key and

turning it counterclockwise.

On some model—With the tail lights are

on, glove box light will come on when the

globe box is open.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop,

always keep the glove box door

closed while driving.

NOTICE

Upper glove box: During hot weather,

the interior of the vehicle becomes

very hot. Do not leave anything flam-

mable or deformable such as a light-

er, glasses, etc. inside.

Garage door opener

XS10011

Indicator light

Buttons

The garage door opener ( R

Universal Transceiver) is manufactured

under license from HomeLinkR and can

be programmed to operate garage

doors, gates, entry doors, door locks,

home lighting systems, and security

systems, etc.

07 04.26

Glove boxes

417

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

(a) Programming the HomeLinkR

The HomeLinkR in your vehicle has 3

buttons and you can store one program

for each button.

To ensure correct programming into the

HomeLinkR, install a new battery in the

hand−held transmitter prior to program-

ming.

The battery side of the hand−held trans-

mitter must be pointed away from the

HomeLinkR during the programming pro-

cess.

For Canadian users, follow the procedure

in “Programming an entrance

gate/Programming all devices in the

Canadian market”.

1. Decide which of 3 HomeLinkR buttons

you want to program.

XS10012

HomeLinkR

25 to

75 mm

(1 to

3 in.)

Hand−held

garage

transmitter

2. Place your hand−held garage transmit-

ter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) away from

the surface of the HomeLinkR.

Keep the indicator light on the HomeLinkR

in view while programming.

XS10013

3. Simultaneously press and hold the

hand−held garage transmitter button

along with the selected HomeLinkR but-

ton.

Do not release the buttons until step 4

has been completed.

4. When the indicator light on the

HomeLinkR changes from a slow to a

rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can

release both buttons.

07 04.26

418 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS10014

5. Test the operation of the HomeLinkR by

pressing the newly programmed button.

If programming a garage door opener,

check to see if the garage door opens

and closes.

If the garage door does not operate,

identify if your garage transmitter is of the

“Rolling Code” type. Press and hold the

programmed HomeLinkR button. The

garage door has the rolling code feature if

the indicator light (on the HomeLinkR)

flashes rapidly and then remains lit after 2

seconds. If your garage transmitter is the

“Rolling Code” type, proceed to the

heading “Programming a rolling code

system”.

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each re-

maining HomeLinkR button to program

another device.

Programming a rolling code system

If your device is “Rolling Code”

equipped, it is necessary to follow

steps 1 through 4 under the heading

“Programming the HomeLinkR” before

proceeding with the steps listed below.

1. Locate the “training” button on the ceil-

ing mounted garage door opener motor.

The exact location and color of the

button may vary by brand of garage

door opener. Refer to the owner’s

guide supplied by the garage door

opener manufacturer for the location of

this “training” button.

2. Press the “training” button on the ceil-

ing mounted garage door opener motor.

Following this step, you have 30 seconds

in which to initiate step 3 below.

3. Press and release the vehicle’s pro-

grammed HomeLinkR button twice. The

garage door may open. If the door

does open, the programming process is

complete. If the door does not open,

press and release the button a third

time. This third press and release will

complete the programming process by

opening the garage door.

The ceiling mounted garage door opener

motor should now recognize the

HomeLinkR unit and be able activate the

garage door up/down.

4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each re-

maining HomeLinkR button to program

another rolling code system.

Programming an entrance gate/Program-

ming all devices in the Canadian market

1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLinkR but-

tons you want to program.

2. Place your hand−held gate/device

transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.)

away from the surface of the

HomeLinkR.

Keep the indicator light on the HomeLinkR

in view while programming.

3. Press and hold the selected

HomeLinkR button.

4. Continuously press and release (cycle)

the hand−held gate/device transmitter

button every two seconds until step 5

is complete.

5. When the indicator light on the Home-

LinkR changes from a slow to a rapid

flash after 20 seconds, you can release

both buttons.

07 04.26

419

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

6. Test the operation of the HomeLinkR by

pressing the newly programmed button.

Check to see if the gate/device oper-

ates correctly.

7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each re-

maining HomeLinkR button to program

another device.

Programming other devices

To program other devices such as home

security systems, home door locks or

lighting, contact your authorized Toyota

dealer for assistance.

Reprogramming a button

Individual HomeLinkR buttons cannot be

erased, however, to reprogram a single

button, follow the procedure “Programming

the HomeLinkR”.

(b) Operating the HomeLinkR

To operate the HomeLinkR, press the

appropriate HomeLinkR button to activate

the programmed device. The HomeLinkR

indicator light should come on. The

HomeLinkR continues to send the signal

for up to 20 seconds as long as the

button is pressed.

XS10015

memory (all three programs)

To erase all previously programmed codes

at one time, press and hold down the 2

outside buttons for 20 seconds until the

indicator light flashes.

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase

the programs stored in the HomeLinkR

memory.

For additional programming assistance

with your HomeLinkR Universal

Transceiver call the:

DToyota Customer Experience Center at

1−800−331−4331 (U.S.A.)

DToyota Canada Customer Interaction

Centre at 1−888−869−6828 (Canada)

Refer to HomeLinkR on the internet at:

WWW.HOMELINK.COM

CAUTION

DWhen programming the HomeLinkR

Universal Transceiver, you may be

operating a garage door or other

device. Make sure people and ob-

jects are out of the way of the ga-

rage door or other device to pre-

vent potential harm or damage.

DDo not use this HomeLinkR Univer-

sal Transceiver with any garage

door opener that lacks the safety

stop and reverse feature as re-

quired by federal safety standards.

(This includes any garage door

opener model manufactured before

April 1, 1982.) A garage door open-

er which cannot detect an object

(signaling the door to stop and re-

verse), does not meet current feder-

al safety standards. Using a garage

door opener without these features

increases risk of serious injury or

death.

07 04.26

420 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and with RSS−210 of the IC

Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

WARNING: This transmitter has been

tested and complies with FCC and IC

rules. Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

device.

To use the auxiliary boxes, open the

lids as shown in the following illustra-

tions.

CAUTION

DTo reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden

stop, always keep the auxiliary box

closed while driving.

DType A only—As these holders are

designed for holding a light object

such as an eyeglass, do not place

any heavy objects in them. Heavy

objects may cause the holder to

open and contents to fly out result-

ing in injuries.

NOTICE

Type A only—During hot weather, the

interior of the vehicle becomes very

hot. Do not leave anything flammable

or deformable such as a lighter,

glasses, etc. inside.

XS10088

Type A (overhead console)

XS10029a

Type B (front door)

07 04.26

Auxiliary boxes

421

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS10040b

Type C (under the seat cushion of the

front center seat)

XS10041a

Type D (back of the front center seatback)

XS10049a

Type E (back of the front center seatback)

Sunglass holder

XS12021b

To use the holder, open the lid as shown

in the illustration.

CAUTION

DTo reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden

stop, always keep the holder closed

while driving.

DAs this holder is designed for hold-

ing a light object such as an eye-

glass, do not place any heavy ob-

jects in them. Heavy objects may

cause the holder to open and con-

tents to fly out resulting in injuries.

07 04.26

422 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

NOTICE

During hot weather, the interior of the

vehicle becomes very hot. Do not

leave anything flammable or deform-

able such as a lighter, glasses, etc.

inside. XS10022a

Type A (overhead console)

XS10057b

Type B (overhead console)

XS10082a

Type C (back of the front center seatback)

07 04.26

Card holder

423

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS10083a

Type D (center console box)

The card holder is designed for holding

cards, tickets, etc.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop,

always keep the auxiliary box, con-

sole box or holder box closed while

driving.

Map holder

XS10084a

Type A (back of the front center seatback)

07 04.26

424 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS10085a

Type B (center console box)

XS10043a

Remove the lid.

Stow the lid

Type C (center console)

The map holder is designed for holding

maps, magazines, etc.

Type C—

Remove the lid and stow it as shown in

the illustration.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop,

always keep the auxiliary or console

box closed while driving.

07 04.26

425

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Pen holder

XS10050

Type A (back of the front center seatback)

XS10052

Type B (inside of the center console box)

The pen holder is designed for holding

pens, pencils, etc.

CAUTION

Type B only—To reduce the chance of

injury in case of an accident or a

sudden stop, always keep the console

box closed while driving.

Tissue pocket

XS10045

Type A (back of the front center seatback)

07 04.26

426 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS10046

Type B (center console box)

The console box is equipped with a

tissue pocket on the inside of the auxil-

iary or console box lid.

To use the tissue pocket:

1. Pull up the auxiliary or console box lid

while pushing the lock release lever.

2. Place a tissue pack in the pocket.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop,

always keep the auxiliary or console

box lid closed while driving.

Center console box

XS10075

Inside—

Outside—

Tray

Box

07 04.26

427

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Outside—

To open or slide the console box lid, pull

up on the lock release lever.

Inside—

The tray slides forward or backward. The

tray and box can be removed.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop,

always keep the console box closed

while driving.

XS10055

Tray

XS10056a

hooks

Box

07 04.26

428 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Remove the tray and box as shown in the

illustration.

Hanging file folders can be hung on the

hooks when the tray and box are re-

moved.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance on injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop,

always keep the console box closed

while driving.

Front cup holders

XS10086a

Type A (center console)

XS10026c

Type B (front center seat)

The cup holders are designed for hold-

ing cups or drink−cans securely.

Type A only—

Cup holder is detachable. Replace it in its

original position when using the cup hold-

er. The drink will not be held securely.

CAUTION

Do not place anything else other than

cups or drink−cans in the cup holder,

as such items may be thrown about

in the compartment and possibly in-

jure people in the vehicle during sud-

den braking or in an accident.

07 04.26

429

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS10025a

Type A (back of the center console box)

XS10027a

Type B (back of the front center seatback)

The cup holders are designed for hold-

ing cups or drink−cans securely.

CAUTION

Do not place anything else other than

cups or drink−cans in the cup holder,

as such items may be thrown about

in the compartment and possibly in-

jured people in the vehicle during

sudden braking or in an accident.

XS10097

Rear center seat

The cup holders are designed for hold-

ing cups or drink−cans securely.

To use the holder, pull down the rear arm-

rest as shown in the illustration.

CAUTION

Do not place anything else other than

cups or drink−cans in the cup holder,

as such items may be thrown about

in the compartment and possibly in-

jured people in the vehicle during

sudden braking or in an accident.

07 04.26

Rear cup holders

(Double cab models)

Rear cup holders

(Crew Max models)

430 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS10023

Type A (instrument panel)

XS10030

Type B (front door)

XS10031

Type C (rear door)

XS10098

type D (rear door)

The bottle holders are designed to hold

bottles securely.

Type A only—

The adapter for bottle holder is detach-

able. Replace it in its original position

when using the bottle holder. Otherwise

the drinks will not be held securely.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to use the holder for

any other purpose for which it was

intended. Inappropriately sized or

shaped objects may be thrown about

in the compartment and possibly in-

jure people in the vehicle during a

sudden braking or an accident.

NOTICE

Do not put a cup or open bottle in

the bottle holder because the con-

tents may spill when the door opens

or closes.

07 04.26

Bottle holders

431

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS10071a

Before using the box, lift up the rear

seats. (For detailed information, see

“—Raising rear seat cushion (Double

cab models)” on page 59 in Section

1−3.)

To open the storage box, turn the

knobs “OPEN” direction indicated by

the arrow and open the lid as shown in

the illustration.

The storage box can be removed. For

detailed information, see “—Removing the

storage box” on page 431 in this Section.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop,

always keep the storage box closed

and locked while driving.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the storage

box, avoid putting heavy loads on the

storage box lids.

XS10087

To remove the storage box:

1. Remove the storage box lids.

2. Remove the knobs by turning them

counterclockwise.

3. Remove the storage box.

07 04.26

Storage box (on some Double

cab models) —Removing the storage box

432 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13006

You should use the front passenger’s

seatback as a temporary table only when

the vehicle is stopped.

To use the seatback table, fold the seat-

back down. (For detailed information, see

“—Folding front passenger’s seat” on page

54 in Section 1−3.)

CAUTION

To avoid serious injury:

DDo not set up the seatback table

while the vehicle is moving.

DDo not sit on the seatback table.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the seat, avoid

putting heavy loads on the temporary

table.

XS10070a

To secure your luggage, use the deck

hooks.

See “—Stowage precautions” on page 464

in Section 2 for precautions when loading

luggage.

07 04.26

Seatback table (Regular cab

models) Deck hooks

433

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS10096

Cargo net hooks

Grocery bag hooks These hooks are designed to hang

things like grocery bags or cargo net.

Although the cargo net itself is not in-

cluded as an original equipment, these

hooks can be used to hang the cargo net.

NOTICE

zTo prevent damage to the hooks,

avoid hanging heavy loads on them

when using them as grocery bag

hooks.

zTo prevent damage to the hooks,

avoid hanging things other than a

cargo net on it when using them as

cargo net hooks.

XS10080

Use a floor mat of the correct size.

If the vehicle carpet and floor mat have

two holes, then they are designed for use

with two locking clips. Attach the floor mat

to the vehicle carpet using the clips. Lock

the clips into the holes in the vehicle

carpet.

07 04.26

Grocery bag/cargo net hooks

(Crew Max models) Floor mat

434 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS10081

CAUTION

Make sure the floor mat is properly

placed on the vehicle carpet and the

correct side face upward. If the floor

mat slips and interferes with the

movement of the pedals during driv-

ing, it may cause an accident.

07 04.26

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Keys and Doors

Keys 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine immobilizer system 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wireless remote control 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Side doors 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power windows 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Back window 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power back window 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tailgate 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hood 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Theft deterrent system 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuel tank cap 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Electric moon roof 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

07 04.26

SECTION 1− 2

18 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS12045

These keys work in every lock.

Your vehicle is supplied with two kinds

of keys.

1. Master keys—These keys work in ev-

ery lock.

2. Sub key—This key will not work in the

glove box and tailgate.

To protect items locked in the glove box

when using valet parking, leave the sub

key with the attendant.

Since the side doors can be locked with-

out a key, you should always carry a

spare key in case you accidentally lock

your keys inside the vehicle.

XS12046

KEY NUMBER PLATE

Your key number is shown on the plate.

Keep the plate in a safe place such as

your wallet, not in the vehicle.

If you should lose your keys or if you

need additional keys, duplicates can be

made by a Toyota dealer using the key

number.

We recommend writing down the key num-

ber and storing it in a safe place.

XS12049

Your vehicle is supplied with the two

kinds of keys.

1. Master keys (black)—These keys work

in every lock. Your Toyota dealer will

need one of them to make a new key

with a built−in transponder chip.

2. Sub key (gray)—This key will not work

in the glove box and tailgate.

A transponder chip for engine immobilizer

system has been placed in the head of

the master and sub keys. These chips are

needed to enable the system to function

correctly, so be careful not to lose these

keys. If you make your own duplicate key,

you will not be able to cancel the system

or start the engine.

07 04.26

Keys (without engine

immobilizer system)

Keys (with engine immobilizer

system)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

To protect items locked in the glove box

when using valet parking, leave the sub

key with the attendant.

Since the side doors can be locked with-

out a key, you should always carry a

spare key in case you accidentally lock

your keys inside the vehicle. LS12040

NOTICE

When using a key containing a trans-

ponder chip, observe the following

precautions:

zWhen starting the engine, do not

use the key with a key ring resting

on the key grip and do not press

the key ring against the key grip.

Otherwise the engine may not start,

or may stop soon after it starts.

LS12041

zWhen starting the engine, do not

use the key with other transponder

keys around (including keys of oth-

er vehicles) and do not press other

key plates against the key grip.

Otherwise the engine may not start,

or may stop soon after it starts. If

this happens, remove the key once

and then insert it again after remov-

ing other transponder keys (includ-

ing keys of other vehicles) from the

ring or while gripping or covering

them with your hand to start the

engine.

07 04.26

20 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

LS12042

zDo not bend the key grip.

zDo not cover the key grip with any

material that cuts off electromagnet-

ic waves.

zDo not knock the key hard against

other objects.

zDo not leave the key exposed to

high temperatures for a long period,

such as on the dashboard and hood

under direct sunlight.

zDo not put the key in water or

wash it in an ultrasonic washer.

zDo not use the key with electromag-

netic materials.

LS12043

KEY NUMBER PLATE

Your key number is shown on the plate.

Keep the plate in a safe place such as

your wallet, not in the vehicle.

If you should lose your keys or if you

need additional keys, duplicates can be

made by a Toyota dealer using the key

number.

We recommend writing down the key num-

ber and storing it in a safe place.

07 04.26

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

LS12044

The engine immobilizer system is a

theft prevention system. When you in-

sert the key in the ignition switch, the

transponder chip in the key’s head

transmits an electronic code to the ve-

hicle. The engine will start only when

the electronic code in the chip corre-

sponds to the registered ID code for

the vehicle.

Never leave the keys inside the vehicle

when you leave the vehicle.

XS12001

The system is automatically set when the

key is removed from the ignition switch.

The indicator light will start flashing to

show the system is set.

If any of the following indicator conditions

occurs, contact your Toyota dealer.

DThe indicator light stays on except

when the theft deterrent system is set-

ting or activating. (See “Theft deterrent

system” on page 39 in this Section.)

DThe indicator light does not start flash-

ing when the key is removed from the

ignition switch.

DThe indicator light flashes inconsistent-

ly.

Inserting the registered key in the ignition

switch automatically cancels the system,

which enables the engine to start. The

indicator light will go off.

The system is maintenance−free.

For your Toyota dealer to make you a

new key with built−in transponder chip,

your dealer will need your key number

and master key. However, there is a limit

to the number of additional keys your

Toyota dealer can make for you.

If you make your own duplicate key,

you will not be able to cancel the sys-

tem or start the engine.

NOTICE

Do not modify, remove or disas-

semble the engine immobilizer sys-

tem. If any unauthorized changes or

modifications are made, proper opera-

tion of the system cannot be guaran-

teed.

07 04.26

Engine immobilizer system

22 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

FCCID:MOZRI−21BTY

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, includ-

ing interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

This device complies with RSS−210 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference, including interference

that may cause undesired operation of

the device.

XS12030

1. “ ” (lock) switch

2. “ ” (unlock) switch

3. “ ” (alarm) switch

The wireless remote control system is

designed to lock or unlock all doors or

activate the alarm from a distance with-

in approximately 1 m (3 ft.) of the ve-

hicle.

When you operate any switch, push it

slowly and securely.

07 04.26

Wireless remote control—

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

The wireless remote control transmitter is

an electronic component. Observe the fol-

lowing instructions in order not to cause

damage to the transmitter.

DDo not leave the transmitter in places

where the temperature becomes high

such as on the dashboard.

DDo not disassemble it.

DAvoid knocking it hard against other

objects or dropping it.

DAvoid putting it in water.

You can use up to 4 wireless remote con-

trol transmitters for the same vehicle.

Contact your Toyota dealer for detailed

information.

If the wireless remote control transmitter

does not actuate the doors or alarm, or

operate from a normal distance:

DCheck for closeness to a radio trans-

mitter such as a radio station or an

airport which can interfere with normal

operation of the transmitter.

DThe battery may be depleted. Check

the battery in the transmitter. To

replace the battery, see “—Replacing

battery” on page 25.

If you lose your transmitter, contact your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible to

avoid the possibility of theft, or an

accident. (See “If you lose your wireless

remote control transmitter” on page 518 in

Section 4.)

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, includ-

ing interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

For vehicles sold in Canada

NOTE

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference, including interference

that may cause undesired operation of

the device.

XS12035a

Locking operation

XS12034a

Unlocking operation

07 04.26

—Locking and unlocking

doors

24 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

To lock and unlock all doors, push the

switches of the transmitter slowly and

securely.

To lock: Push the “ ” (lock) switch. All

the doors are locked simultaneously. At

this time one beep will be heard, and the

turn signal lights flash once.

Check to see that all the doors are se-

curely locked after locking.

If any of the doors is not securely closed,

locking cannot be performed by the “ ”

(lock) switch and a beep will sound con-

tinuously for 10 seconds. However, if the

key is in the ignition switch, a beep will

not sound.

To stop the beep, close all the doors se-

curely or push the “ ” (unlock) switch.

The beep and flashing turn signal lights

can be disabled. If your vehicle is

equipped with the multi−information display

(For further information, see

“Multi−information display” on page 187 in

Section 1−6.), these can be changed by

yourself. For details, contact your Toyota

dealer.

To unlock: Push the “ ” (unlock) switch

once to unlock the driver’s door alone.

Pushing the switch twice within 3 seconds

unlocks all the side doors and back door

simultaneously. Each time the “ ” (un-

lock) switch is pushed, two beeps will be

heard, and the turn signal lights flash

twice.

This double switch operation to unlock all

the doors can be changed to a single

switch operation. If your vehicle is

equipped with the multi−information display

(For further information, see

“Multi−information display” on page 187 in

Section 1−6.), it can be changed by

yourself. For details, contact your Toyota

dealer.

When you unlock all the doors using the

wireless remote control, the Illuminated

entry system, interior lights, personal

lights and cargo lamp will be activated.

(For further information, see “Interior

lights” on page 170, “Personal lights” on

page 171, “Illuminated entry system” on

page 173 and “Cargo lamp” on page 174

in Section 1−5.)

You have 30 seconds to open a door after

using the wireless remote unlock feature.

If a door is not opened by then, all the

doors will be automatically locked again.

The time for automatic door lock function

can be changed. If your vehicle is

equipped with the multi−information display

(For further information, see

“Multi−information display” on page 187 in

Section 1−6.), it can be changed by

yourself. For details, contact your Toyota

dealer.

If the “ ” (lock) or “ ” (unlock) switch

is kept pressed in, the locking the unlock-

ing operation is not repeated. Release the

switch and then push again.

07 04.26

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS12036

Holding the “ ” (alarm) switch blows

the horn intermittently and flashes the

headlights, tail lights, turn signal lights,

interior light and personal lights.

The “ ” switch is used to deter vehicle

theft when you witness anyone attempting

to break into or damage your vehicle.

The alarm will last for one minute. To stop

alarm midway, push the “ ” switch once

again, lock or unlock a door with transmit-

ter, or turn the ignition switch from the

“LOCK” to “ON” position.

The alarm does not work when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

For replacement, use a CR2032 lithium

battery or equivalent.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken to pre-

vent small children from swallowing

the removed transmitter battery or

components.

NOTICE

zWhen replacing the battery, be care-

ful not to lose the components.

zReplace only with the same or

equivalent type recommended by a

Toyota dealer.

zDispose of used batteries according

to the local laws.

Replace the transmitter battery by follow-

ing these procedures:

LS12017

1. Using a coin or equivalent, open the

transmitter case.

07 04.26

—Activating alarm —Replacing battery

26 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

LS12018

2. Remove the circuit board, then remove

the discharged transmitter battery.

NOTICE

zTake care not to damage the circuit

board.

zDo not bend the terminals.

LS12019

3. Put in a new transmitter battery with

positive (+) side up. Install the circuit

board into the transmitter case.

Close the transmitter case securely.

NOTICE

zMake sure the positive side and

negative side of the transmitter bat-

tery are faced correctly.

zDo not replace the battery with wet

hands. Water may cause unexpected

rust.

zDo not touch or move any compo-

nents inside the transmitter, or it

may interfere with proper operation.

zBe careful not to bend the electrode

when inserting the transmitter bat-

tery and that dust or oils do not

adhere to the transmitter case.

zClose the transmitter case securely.

After replacing the battery, check that the

transmitter operates properly. If the trans-

mitter still does not operate properly, con-

tact your Toyota dealer.

07 04.26

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS12002

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY

Insert the key into the keyhole and turn

it.

To lock: Turn the key forward.

To unlock: Turn the key backward.

Vehicles with power door lock system—

All the doors lock and unlock simulta-

neously with the driver’s door. In the driv-

er’s door lock, turning the key once will

unlock the driver’s door and twice in suc-

cession will unlock all the door simulta-

neously.

Vehicles with power door lock system—

When the interior light/personal light main

switch and cargo lamp switch is in the

“DOOR” position and the driver’s door is

unlocked using the key, the Illuminated

entry system, interior lights, personal

lights and cargo lamp will be activated.

(For further information, see “Interior

lights” on page 170, “Personal lights” on

page 171, “Illuminated entry system” on

page 173 and “Cargo lamp” on page 174

in Section 1−5.)

When the interior light/personal light main

switch and cargo lamp switch is in the

“DOOR” position and any of the doors is

opened, the light will come on. After all

the doors are closed, the light remains on

for about 15 seconds before fading out.

(For further information, see “Interior

lights” on page 170, “Personal lights” on

page 171, “Illuminated entry system” on

page 173 and “Cargo lamp” on page 174

in Section 1−5.)

XS12003

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH

INSIDE LOCK KNOB

Move the lock knob.

To lock: Push the knob forward.

To unlock: Pull the knob backward.

The front doors can be opened by pulling

the inside handles even if the lock knobs

are in the locked position.

07 04.26

Side doors

28 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

CAUTION

Do not pull the inside handle of the

front doors while driving. The doors

will open and an accident may occur.

Toyota strongly recommends that all

children be placed in the rear seat of

the vehicle.

Closing the door with the lock knob in the

lock position will also lock the door. Be

careful not to lock your keys in the ve-

hicle.

Vehicles with power door lock system—

The door will not lock if the key is left in

the ignition switch when closing the front

doors.

XS12005a

Driver’s side

XS12006a

Passenger’s side

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH

POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Push the switch.

To lock: Push the switch down on the

right side.

To unlock: Push the switch down on

the left side.

Operating the switch simultaneously locks

or unlocks all the doors.

If you do either of the following, no door

can be unlocked with the power door lock

switch.

DLock all the doors with the key or wire-

less remote control transmitter when all

the doors are closed.

DOpen the driver’s door or front passen-

ger’s door and move the inside lock

knobs of both front doors to the lock

position, then close the doors.

The power door lock switch can be reset

in the following ways.

DTurn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

DUnlock all the doors with the key or

wireless remote control transmitter.

07 04.26

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

DUnlock the driver’s door or front pas-

senger’s door with the inside lock

knob, and then unlock all the doors

with the power door lock switch.

XS12007

REAR DOOR CHILD−PROTECTORS

(Double cab and Crew Max models)

Move the lock lever to the “LOCK”

position as shown on the label.

When the child−protector is locked, you

cannot open the rear door by the inside

door handle. We recommend using this

feature whenever small children are in the

vehicle.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the doors

are closed and locked, especially

when small children are in the ve-

hicle. Along with the proper use of

seat belts, locking the doors helps

prevent the driver and passengers

from being thrown out from the ve-

hicle in an accident. It also helps pre-

vent the doors from being opened

unintentionally.

07 04.26

30 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Vehicles with power door lock system—

Locking function—All doors are automati-

cally locked when the vehicle speed goes

above about 20 km/h (12 mph).

Unlocking function—All doors are automat-

ically unlocked when the selector lever is

moved to the “P” position with the engine

started.

The following functions can be changed:

DShift position linked auto lock.

DDriver’s door open linked auto unlock.

If your vehicle is equipped with the multi−

information display (For further informa-

tion, see “Multi−information display” on

page 187 in Section 1−6.), these can be

changed by yourself.

For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

XS12051b

Regular cab models

XS12009b

Double cab and Crew Max models

The windows can be operated with the

switch on either front door (Regular

cab models)/each door (Double cab and

Crew Max models).

The power windows work when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

Key off operation: If both front doors are

closed, they work for 43 seconds even

after the ignition switch is turned off. They

stop working when either front door is

opened.

The indicator light (“AUTO”) on the switch

tells you the switch can be operated.

OPERATING THE DRIVER’S WINDOW

Use the switch on the driver’s door.

Normal operation: The window moves as

long as you hold the switch.

To open: Lightly push down the switch.

To close: Pull up the switch.

07 04.26

—Automatic door locking and

unlocking functions Power windows

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS12054

Regular cab models

XS12053

Double cab and Crew Max models

Automatic operation (to open only):

Push the switch completely down and then

release it. The window will fully open. To

stop the window partway, lightly pull the

switch up and then release it.

XS12052b

Window

lock

switch

Driver’s door switch (Regular cab models)

XS12013b

Window

lock

switch

Driver’s door switches (Double cab and

Crew Max models)

07 04.26

32 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS12023a

Passenger’s door switch

(Regular cab models)

XS12024a

Passenger’s door switches (Double cab

and Crew Max models)

OPERATING THE PASSENGERS’

WINDOWS

Use the switches on the passenger’s

door (Regular cab models)/passenger’s

doors (Double cab and Crew Max mod-

els) or the switch on the driver’s door

that controls each passenger’s window.

The window moves as long as you hold

the switch.

To open: Push down the switch.

To close: Pull up the switch.

If you push in the window lock switch on

the driver’s door, the passenger’s window

(Regular cab models)/passenger’s windows

(Double cab and Crew Max models) can-

not be operated.

07 04.26

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

CAUTION

To avoid death or serious personal

injury, you must do the following.

DBefore you close the power win-

dows, always make sure there is

nobody around the power windows.

You must also make sure the

heads, hands and other parts of the

bodies of all occupants are kept

completely inside the vehicle. If

someone’s neck, head or hands get

caught in a closing window, it

could result in death or serious in-

jury. When anyone closes the power

windows, make sure he or she op-

erates the windows safely.

DWhen small children are in the ve-

hicle, never let them use the power

window switches without supervi-

sion. Use the window lock switch to

prevent them from making unex-

pected use of the switches.

DBe sure to remove the ignition key

when you leave your vehicle.

DNever leave anyone (particularly a

small child) alone in your vehicle,

especially with the ignition key still

inserted. Otherwise, he/she could

use the power window switches and

get trapped in a window. Unat-

tended person (particularly a small

child) can be involved in a serious

accident.

XS12043a

To open the rear window, push the le-

ver and slide the window.

After closing the window, make sure it is

completely closed.

07 04.26

Back window

(on some models)

34 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS12057a

The back window can be operated with

the switch on the instrument panel.

The ignition switch must be in the “ON”

position.

Normal operation: The window moves as

long as you hold the switch.

To open: Push the switch on the “ ”

side.

To close: Push the switch on the “ ”

side.

CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury, you

must do the following.

DBefore you close the power back

window, always make sure there is

nobody around the power back win-

dow. You must also make sure the

heads, hands and other parts of the

bodies of all occupants are kept

completely inside the vehicle. If

someone’s neck, head or hands get

caught in a closing window, it

could result in death or serious in-

jury. When anyone closes the power

back window, make sure he or she

operates the window safely.

DWhen small children are in the ve-

hicle, never let them use the power

back window switch without super-

vision.

DBe sure to remove the ignition key

when you leave your vehicle.

DNever leave anyone (particularly a

small child) alone in your vehicle,

especially with the ignition key still

inserted. Otherwise, he/she could

use the power back window switch

and get trapped in a window. Unat-

tended person (particularly a small

child) can be involved in a serious

accident.

DKeep the back window closed while

driving. This not only keeps the

luggage from being thrown out but

also prevents exhaust gases from

entering the vehicle.

07 04.26

Power back window

(Crew Max models)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS12014

To open the tailgate, pull the handle up.

The support cables will hold the tailgate

horizontal.

See “—Stowage precautions” on page 464

in Section 2 for precautions when loading

luggage.

After closing the tailgate, try pulling it to-

ward you to make sure it is securely

locked.

NOTICE

Avoid driving with the tailgate open.

XS12039c

These connector covers are used when

removing the tailgate, to prevent the wire

harness connectors from being contami-

nated. Store the connector covers in the

glove box in the plastic bag when not

using.

Connector cover A—Gray connector cover

Connector cover B—White connector cover

CAUTION

Prior to removing the tailgate, discon-

nect the wire harnesses between the

rear view monitor system camera and

the vehicle. Failure to do so could

cause damage to the vehicle and may

result in personal injury.

07 04.26

Tailgate—

—Before removing the tailgate

(with rear view monitor

system only)

36 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS12031b

1. To disconnect the wire harness connec-

tors, press and hold the lock of the

connector 1 and pull apart. The con-

nectors are located on the vehicle body

frame, behind the bumper.

Connector 1—Rear view monitor

system camera wire

harness connector

(white)

Connector 2—Vehicle wire harness

connector (gray)

XS12040b

Connector cover B

Connector 2

2. Attach the connector cover B (white) to

the connector 2.

XS12048

3. Lower the tailgate. Remove the protec-

tor C located in the vehicle bed by

pressing the tabs and pulling the pro-

tector. Pull the wire harness D through

the hole.

C: Plastic wire protector

D: Rear view monitor system camera

wire harness

07 04.26

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS12042a

Connector cover A

Connector 1

4. Attach the connector cover A (gray) to

the connector 1 (white).

—Removal

XS12015b

Support cable bracket

Clip

1. Open the tailgate to the angle where

you can release the brackets on the

support cables from the lugs on

both sides.

To unhook the support cable bracket, keep

pulling up the clip on the bracket and

unhook the bracket.

XS12016a

2. Tilt the tailgate to about 45° from

vertical and pull up the right side of

the tailgate to unhook the right side.

07 04.26

38 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS12017a

3. Tilt the tailgate up to about 15° open

and slide the tailgate a little to the

right to unhook the left side.

To attach the tailgate, follow the removal

procedure in reverse order.

After closing the tailgate, try pulling it to-

ward you to make sure it is securely

closed.

We recommend you keep the tailgate

closed when not in use.

NOTICE

zMake sure the support brackets are

securely latched on both side pan-

els when installing the tailgate.

zWith rear view monitor system—

Store the removed tailgate with the

back−up camera lens facing upward.

Failure to do so could cause dam-

age to the camera lens.

XS12047

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY

Insert the master key into the keyhole

and turn it to lock or unlock the tail-

gate.

To lock: Turn the key clockwise.

To unlock: Turn the key counterclockwise.

07 04.26

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS12018a

To open the hood:

1. Pull the hood lock release lever. The

hood will spring up slightly.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the hood

is securely closed and locked. Other-

wise, the hood may open unexpected-

ly while driving and an accident may

occur.

XS12019b

2. In front of the vehicle, pull up the

auxiliary catch lever and lift the

hood.

Before closing the hood, check to see that

you have not forgotten any tools, rags,

etc. Then lower the hood and make sure

it locks into place. If necessary, press

down gently on the front edge to lock it.

XS12026a

The system sounds alarm and flashes

lights when forcible entry is detected.

The alarm is triggered if any of the

doors or hood is forcibly unlocked or

opened or the battery terminal is dis-

connected and then reconnected when

the vehicle is locked.

On some models, the alarm also

sounds, when someone attempts to

break the side windows.

07 04.26

Hood Theft deterrent system

40 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS12001

Indicator light

XS12027a

Glass breakage sensor (on some models)

SETTING THE SYSTEM

1. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK”

position and remove it.

The indicator light will start flashing when

the key is removed from the ignition

switch. (See “Engine immobilizer system”

on page 21 in this Section for details.)

2. Have all passengers get out of the

vehicle.

3. Close and lock all the doors and hood.

The indicator light will remain on when all

the doors and hood are closed and

locked.

The system will automatically be set after

30 seconds. When the system is set, the

indicator light will start flashing again.

4. After making sure the indicator light

starts flashing, you may leave the ve-

hicle.

Never leave anyone in the vehicle when

you set the system, because unlocking

from the inside will activate the system.

WHEN THE SYSTEM IS SET

Activating the system

The system will sound the alarm under

the following conditions:

DIf any of the doors is unlocked or

opened without the key or wireless re-

mote control transmitter, or if the hood

is forcibly opened

DIf the battery terminal is disconnected

and then reconnected

Vehicles with the glass breakage sensor—

DThe side windows are tapped or bro-

ken.

The indicator light will come on when the

system is activated.

If the alarm has been activated and the

key is not in the ignition switch, all the

doors will re−lock automatically.

After one minute, the alarm will automati-

cally stop and the indicator light will start

flashing again.

07 04.26

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Reactivating the alarm

Once set, the system automatically resets

the alarm after the alarm stops.

The alarm will activate again under the

same circumstances described in

“Activating the system”.

Stopping the alarm

The alarm will be stopped by the following

two ways:

DTurn the ignition switch from the

“LOCK” to “ON” position.

DUnlock any of the doors with the key

or wireless remote control transmitter.

These ways cancel the system at the

same time.

TESTING THE SYSTEM

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the system as described above.

The side doors should be locked with

the key or wireless remote control

transmitter. Be sure to wait until the

indicator light goes off or starts flash-

ing.

3. Unlock any door from the inside. The

system should activate the alarm.

4. Stop the alarm as described above.

5. Repeat this operation for the other

doors and hood. When testing the

hood, also check that the system is

activated when the battery terminal is

disconnected and then reconnected.

If the system does not work properly,

have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

XS12038c

This indicates that the fuel filler door

is on the left side of your vehicle.

07 04.26

Fuel tank cap

42 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS12020a

1. To open the fuel filler door, pull the

door toward out as shown.

When refueling, turn off the engine.

CAUTION

DDo not smoke, cause sparks or al-

low open flames when refueling.

The fumes are flammable.

DWhen opening the cap, do not re-

move the cap quickly. In hot weath-

er, fuel under pressure could cause

injury by spraying out of the filler

neck if the cap is suddenly re-

moved.

DDo not fill a fuel container in the

bed under any circumstances. A

static electricity charge could cause

a spark and fire hazard. The proper

procedure is to place an approved

fuel container on the ground away

from the truck for filling. XS12021a

2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turn

the cap slowly counterclockwise,

then pause slightly before removing

it. After removing the cap, hang it

on the cap hanger.

It is not unusual to hear a slight swoosh

when the cap is opened.

When installing the cap, turn it clock-

wise until one click is heard, in order

to fully close it. The cap returns slight-

ly when your hand is released from the

cap after closure, however this does

not cause any problems.

If the cap is not tightened securely, the

malfunction indicator lamp comes on.

Make sure the cap is tightened securely.

07 04.26

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

The indicator lamp goes off after driving

several times. If the indicator lamp does

not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as

soon as possible.

CAUTION

DMake sure the cap is installed se-

curely to prevent fuel spillage in

the event of an accident.

DUse only a genuine Toyota fuel tank

cap for replacement. It is designed

to regulate fuel tank pressure.

XS12058a

Sliding operation

XS12059

Tilting operation

To operate the moon roof, use the

switches on the overhead console.

The moon roof works when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

The sun shade can be opened or closed

by hand.

Sliding operation—

To open: Push and hold the “SLIDE”

switch for 1 second on the “ ” (rear)

side.

The roof will fully open automatically. To

stop the roof partway, push one of the

moon roof switches briefly.

When you quickly push and release the

switch, the moon roof will open while the

switch is being pushed and stop when

released.

The sun shade will be opened together

with the roof.

When the moon roof is opened fully, the

deflector will raise to reduce the entering

of the strong wind. The angle of the de-

flector will be adjusted according to the

vehicle speed.

To close: Push and hold the “SLIDE”

switch for 1 second on the “ ” (front)

side.

07 04.26

Electric moon roof (on some

Crew Max models)

44 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

The roof will fully close automatically. To

stop the roof partway, push one of the

moon roof switches briefly.

When you quickly push and release the

switch, the moon roof will close while the

switch is being pushed and stop when

released.

Tilting operation—

To tilt up: Push and hold the “TILT” switch

for 1 second on the “UP” side.

The roof will fully tilt up automatically. To

stop the roof partway, push one of the

moon roof switches briefly.

When you quickly push and release the

switch, the moon roof will tilt up while the

switch is being pushed and stop when

released.

To tilt down: Push and hold the “TILT”

switch for 1 second on the indented

(front) side.

The roof will fully tilt down automatically.

To stop the roof partway, push one of the

moon roof switches briefly.

When you quickly push and release the

switch, the moon roof will tilt down while

the switch is being pushed and stop when

released.

Key off operation: If both front doors are

closed, the moon roof works for about 43

seconds even after the ignition switch is

turned off. It stops working when either

door is opened.

Jam protection function:

DIf something gets caught between the

moon roof and frame during slide clos-

ing operation, the moon roof stops and

opens, and the deflector stops and

raises fully.

DIf something gets caught between the

moon roof and frame during tilting

down operation, the moon roof stops

and opens fully.

If the moon roof receives a strong impact,

this function may work even if nothing is

caught.

If the moon roof does not operate auto-

matically or the jam protection function

does not operate correctly, you should

normalize the moon roof.

To normalize the moon roof, push and

hold the switch toward the “UP” (tilt up)

side or “ ” (sliding close) side. The

moon roof will tilt up and down, then re-

lease the switch.

Make sure that the moon roof opens and

closes automatically. If the moon roof can-

not be operated properly, have it checked

by your Toyota dealer.

07 04.26

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS12061

OPERATING FROM OUTSIDE

The moon roof can be opened and closed

with the key operation in the driver’s door

keyhole.

To open: Turn the key fully backward and

hold it.

After the door is unlocked, the moon roof

begins to open. To stop in the middle,

return the key.

To close: Turn the key fully forward and

hold it.

After the door is locked, the moon roof

begins to close. To stop in the middle,

return the key.

CAUTION

To avoid death or serious personal

injury, you must do the following.

DWhile the vehicle is moving, always

keep the heads, hands and other

parts of the bodies of all occupants

away from the roof opening. Other-

wise, they could be killed or seri-

ously injured if the vehicle stops

suddenly or if the vehicle is in-

volved in an accident.

DBefore you close the moon roof,

always make sure there is nobody

around the moon roof. You must

also make sure nobody places his

or her head, hands and other parts

of the body in the roof opening. If

someone’s neck, head or hands get

caught in the closing roof, it could

result in death or serious injury.

When anyone closes the moon roof,

first make sure it is safe to do so.

DBe sure to remove the ignition key

when you leave your vehicle.

DNever leave anyone (particularly a

small child) alone in your vehicle,

especially with the ignition key still

inserted. Otherwise, he/she could

use the moon roof switch and get

trapped in the roof opening. Unat-

tended person (particularly a small

child) can be involved in a serious

accident.

DNever sit on top of the vehicle

around the roof opening.

DNever try jamming any part of your

body to activate the jam protection

function intentionally, as it could re-

sult in death or serious injury.

07 04.26

46 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

DThe jam protection function may

not work if something gets caught

just before the moon roof is fully

closed.

07 04.26

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Occupant restraint systems

Seats 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front seats 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Driving position memory system 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear seats 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Head restraints 62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Armrest 64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seat heaters 64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seat belts 65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SRS airbags 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Child restraint 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

07 04.26

SECTION 1− 3

48 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

While the vehicle is being driven, all ve-

hicle occupants should have the seatback

upright, sit well back in the seat and prop-

erly wear the seat belts provided.

CAUTION

DDo not drive the vehicle unless the

occupants are properly seated. Do

not allow any passengers to sit on

top of a folded−down seatback, or

in the luggage compartment or car-

go area. Persons not properly

seated and/or not properly re-

strained by seat belts can be killed

or severely injured in the event of

emergency braking or a collision.

DDuring driving, do not allow any

passengers to stand up or move

around between seats. Otherwise,

death or severe injuries can occur

in the event of emergency braking

or a collision.

Driver seat

CAUTION

The SRS driver airbag deploys with

considerable force, and can cause

death or serious injury especially if

the driver is very close to the airbag.

The National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:

Since the risk zone for driver airbag

is the first 50—75 mm (2—3 in.) of

inflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10

in.) from your driver airbag provides

you with a clear margin of safety.

This distance is measured from the

center of the steering wheel to your

breastbone. If you sit less than 250

mm (10 in.) away now, you can

change your driving position in sever-

al ways:

DMove your seat to the rear as far

as you can while still reaching the

pedals comfortably.

DSlightly recline the back of the

seat. Although vehicle designs vary,

many drivers can achieve the 250

mm (10 in.) distance, even with the

driver seat all the way forward, sim-

ply by reclining the back of the

seat somewhat. If reclining the back

of your seat makes it hard to see

the road, raise yourself by using a

firm, non−slippery cushion, or raise

the seat if your vehicle has that

feature.

DIf your steering wheel is adjustable,

tilt it downward. This points the air-

bag toward your chest instead of

your head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as rec-

ommended by NHTSA above, while

still maintaining control of the foot

pedals, steering wheel, and your view

of the instrument panel controls.

07 04.26

Seats

Front seats—

—Front seat precautions

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Front passenger seats

CAUTION

The SRS front passenger airbag also

deploys with considerable force, and

can cause death or serious injury es-

pecially if the front passenger is very

close to the airbag. The front passen-

ger seat should be as far from the

airbag as possible with the seatback

adjusted, so the front passenger sits

upright.

Front seats

CAUTION

The SRS side airbags are installed in

the driver and front passenger seats.

Observe the following precautions.

DDo not lean against the front door

when the vehicle is in use, since

the side airbag inflates with consid-

erable speed and force. Otherwise,

you may be killed or seriously in-

jured.

DDo not use seat accessories which

cover the area where the side air-

bags inflate. Such accessories may

prevent the side airbags from acti-

vating correctly, causing death or

serious injury.

DDo not modify or replace the seats

or upholstery of the seats with side

airbags. Such change may prevent

the side airbag system from activat-

ing correctly, disable the system, or

cause the side airbags to inflate ac-

cidentally, resulting in death or seri-

ous injury.

CAUTION

DDo not adjust the seat while the

vehicle is moving as the seat may

unexpectedly move and cause the

driver to lose control of the vehicle.

DBe careful that the seat does not

hit a passenger or luggage.

DAfter adjusting the seat position, re-

lease the lever and try sliding the

seat forward and backward to make

sure it is locked in position.

DAfter adjusting the seatback, push

your body back against the seat to

make sure the seat is locked in

position.

DDo not put objects under the seats.

Otherwise, the objects may interfere

with the seat−lock mechanism or

unexpectedly push up the seat posi-

tion adjusting lever and the seat

may suddenly move, causing the

driver to lose control of the vehicle.

07 04.26

—Seat adjustment precautions

50 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

DWhile adjusting the seat, do not put

your hands under the seat or near

the moving parts. Otherwise, your

hands or fingers may be caught and

injured.

XS13002a

Separate seats (Regular cab models)

XS13001b

Separate seats (Double cab and Crew Max

models)

07 04.26

—Adjusting front seats

(manual seat)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVER

Hold the center of the lever and pull

it up. Then slide the seat to the de-

sired position with slight body pres-

sure and release the lever.

2. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING

LEVER

Lean forward and pull the lever up.

Then lean back to the desired angle

and release the lever.

3. DRIVER’S SEAT CUSHION ANGLE

ADJUSTING KNOB

To change the angle of the seat

cushion on the front side, turn the

knob either way.

4. DRIVER’S SEAT HEIGHT ADJUSTING

LEVER

To change the height of the seat,

pull up or push down the lever.

5. DRIVER’S SEAT LUMBAR SUPPORT

ADJUSTING SWITCH

Push the switch on either side.

The amount of lumbar support will

change while the switch is pushed.

CAUTION

Avoid reclining the seatback any

more than needed. The seat belts pro-

vide maximum protection in a frontal

or rear collision when the driver and

the front passenger are sitting up

straight and well back in the seats. If

you are reclined, the lap belt may

slide past your hips and apply re-

straint forces directly to the abdomen

or your neck may contact the shoul-

der belt. In the event of a frontal

collision, the more the seat is re-

clined, the greater the risk of death

or personal injury.

XS13145b

Bench seats (Regular cab models)

07 04.26

52 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13003f

Bench seats (Double cab and Crew Max

models)

1. SIDE SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING

LEVERS

Hold the center of the lever and pull

it up. Then slide the seat to the de-

sired position with slight body pres-

sure and release the lever.

2. SIDE SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING

LEVERS

Lean forward and pull the lever up.

Then lean back to the desired angle

and release the lever.

3. CENTER SEAT SEATBACK ANGLE

ADJUSTING LEVER

Pull the lever up. Then lean back to

the desired angle and release the

lever.

4. DRIVER’S SEAT CUSHION ANGLE

ADJUSTING KNOB

To change the angle of the seat

cushion on the front side, turn the

knob either way.

5. DRIVER’S SEAT HEIGHT ADJUSTING

LEVER

To change the height of the seat,

pull up or push down the lever.

CAUTION

Avoid reclining the seatback any

more than needed. The seat belts pro-

vide maximum protection in a frontal

or rear collision when the driver and

the front passenger are sitting up

straight and well back in the seats. If

you are reclined, the lap belt may

slide past your hips and apply re-

straint forces directly to the abdomen

or your neck may contact the shoul-

der belt. In the event of a frontal

collision, the more the seat is re-

clined, the greater the risk of death

or personal injury.

07 04.26

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13097a

Driver’s seat

XS13147a

Front passenger’s seat

1. DRIVER’S SEAT LEG SUPPORT

ADJUSTING SWITCH (on some

models)

Operating this switch raises the

front edge of the seat cushion.

Push the switch on either side.

Releasing the switch will stop the seat

cushion at that position.

Do not place anything under the front

seats, as this might interfere with the

seat movement.

2. DRIVER’S SEAT: SEAT POSITION,

SEAT HEIGHT AND SEAT CUSHION

ANGLE ADJUSTING SWITCH

PASSENGER’S SEAT: SEAT POSITION

ADJUSTING SWITCH

Move the control switch in the de-

sired direction.

Releasing the switch will stop the seat

at that position.

Do not place anything under the front

seats, as this might interfere with the

seat movement.

07 04.26

—Adjusting front seats

(power seat)

54 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

3. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING

SWITCH

Move the control switch in the de-

sired direction.

Releasing the switch will stop the seat-

back at that position.

CAUTION

Avoid reclining the seatback any

more than needed. The seat belts pro-

vide maximum protection in a frontal

or rear collision when the driver and

the front passenger are sitting up

straight and well back in the seats. If

you are reclined, the lap belt may

slide past your hips and apply re-

straint forces directly to the abdomen

or your neck may contact the shoul-

der belt. In the event of a frontal

collision, the more the seat is re-

clined, the greater the risk of death

or serious injury.

4. SEAT LUMBER SUPPORT ADJUSTING

SWITCH

Push the switch on either side.

The amount of lumbar support will

change while the switch is pushed.

XS13209

BEFORE FOLDING FRONT

PASSENGER’S SEAT

1. Push the seat belt hanger down as

far as it will go when it is in the

raised position.

XS13160

2. Make sure the shoulder belt passes

through the hanger when folding the

front passenger’s seat.

This prevents the shoulder belt from being

damaged.

CAUTION

The seat belt must be removed from

the hanger when the seat belt is in

use.

07 04.26

—Folding front passenger’s

seat (Regular cab models)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13004a

1. Pull the seatback angle adjusting le-

ver and raise the seatback to its up-

right position.

XS13005a

2. Pull the seatback folding lever and

fold the seatback down.

XS13006

You should use the seatback as a tempo-

rary table only when the vehicle is

stopped.

CAUTION

To avoid death or serious injury:

DDo not set up the seatback table

while the vehicle is moving.

DDo not sit on the folded seatback.

DMake sure the front passenger’s

seat is securely locked in sliding

position when you set the seat as

a temporary table.

07 04.26

56 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the seat, avoid

putting heavy loads on the temporary

table.

This system can memorize the position

of the driver’s seat, the tilt and tele-

scopic steering and outside rear view

mirrors, and recall them at the touch of

a button.

Buttons “1” and “2” can memorize two

separate positions. XS13098a

SETTING THE DRIVING POSITION

The ignition switch must be in the “ON”

position and the selector lever is in the

“P” position.

1. Adjust the driver’s seat, tilt and

telescopic steering and outside rear

view mirrors to the desired position.

2. While pushing the “SET” button,

push button “1” or “2” until a beep

in heard.

The system can memorize up to 2 posi-

tions by repeating the above steps. If step

2 is performed when both buttons “1” and

“2” are memorized, the previous position

will be erased and a new position will be

set.

07 04.26

Driving position memory

system (on some models)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

To make only slight changes to an already

memorized position, the easiest way is to

first activate the memorized position, then

make the desired changes and perform

step 2 above.

XS13099a

RECALLING THE MEMORIZED POSITION

When you push button “1” or “2”, a

beep will sound and the driving posi-

tion will be automatically adjusted to

the position recorded for that button.

The memorized position can be recalled

under the following conditions:

DThe ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-

tion and the selector lever is in the “P”

position.

DThe key is not in the ignition switch

and less than 30 seconds have passed

since opening the driver’s door.

To stop the operation, push any driving

position memory button.

To reactivate the system, push the button

“1” or “2” again.

If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected,

the memory will be erased and the posi-

tions will have to be set again.

CAUTION

DDo not start the vehicle while the

adjustment are being made.

DTake care not to select the wrong

button, or the seat could strike the

rear passenger or hit your body

against the steering wheel. If this

happens, you can stop the move-

ment by pressing another driving

position memory switch, or de-

pressing the brake pedal.

07 04.26

58 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

CAUTION

DDo not adjust the seat while the

vehicle is moving.

DBe careful that the seat does not

hit a passenger or luggage.

DBe careful not to get your hands or

feet pinched in the seat.

DAfter adjusting the seat position, re-

lease the lever and try sliding the

seat forward and backward to make

sure it is locked in position.

DAfter adjusting the seatback, push

your body back against the seat to

make sure the seat is locked in

position.

DWhen returning the seatback to the

upright position, observe the follow-

ing precautions in order to prevent

personal injury in a collision or

sudden stop:

Make sure the seatback is securely

locked by pushing forward and rear-

ward on the top of the seatback.

Failure to do so will prevent the

seat belt from operating properly.

Make sure the seat belts are not

twisted or caught in the seatback

and are arranged in their proper

position and are ready to use.

Folding down the rear seatbacks will en-

large the luggage compartment. See

“—Stowage precautions” on page 464 in

Section 2 for precautions when loading

luggage.

XS13158

07 04.26

Rear seats—

—Rear seat precautions

—Adjusting rear seats

(Crew Max models)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVERS

Hold the center of the lever and pull it

up. Then slide the seat to the desired

position with slight body pressure and

release the lever.

2. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING

LEVERS

Pull the lever up. Then lean back to the

desired angle and release the lever.

CAUTION

DDo not adjust the seat while the

vehicle is moving.

DBe careful that the seat does not

hit a passenger or luggage.

DAvoid reclining the seatback any

more than needed. The seat belts

provide maximum protection in a

frontal or rear collision when the

passengers are sitting up straight

and well back in the seats. If you

are reclined, the lap belt may slide

past your hips and apply restraint

forces directly to the abdomen or

your neck may contact the shoulder

belt. In the event of a frontal colli-

sion, the more the seat is reclined,

the greater the risk of death or se-

rious injury.

DAfter adjusting the seat position, re-

lease the lever and try sliding the

seat forward and backward to make

sure it is locked in position.

DAfter adjusting the seatback, push

your body back against the seat to

make sure the seat is locked in

position.

NOTICE

Do not fold the rear seat seatback

forward with the luggage cover hooks

attached.

XS13146b

BEFORE RAISING REAR SEAT CUSHION

1. Stow the rear seat belt buckles as

shown in the illustration.

This prevents the seat belt buckles from

falling out when you fold the seatback.

NOTICE

The seat belt and buckles must be

stowed before you raise the rear

seats cushion.

07 04.26

—Raising rear seat cushion

(Double cab models)

60 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13122

2. Make sure the shoulder belt passes

through the hanger when folding the

rear seat.

This prevents the shoulder belt from being

damaged.

CAUTION

The seat belt must be removed from

the hanger when the seat belt is in

use.

XS13007

3. Raising rear seat cushion.

Pull the lever on the side of the bottom

cushion and lift up the cushion until it

locks.

When returning the rear seat, pull the le-

ver on the back of the bottom cushion

and pull the cushion downward until it

locks.

Folding down the rear seats will enlarge

the luggage compartment. See “—Stowage

precautions” on page 464 in Section 2 for

precautions when loading luggage.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the box under

the seat, do not sit on the box when

the bottom cushion is in the raised

position.

CAUTION

When returning seats to their original

position, observe the following pre-

cautions in order to prevent death or

serious injury in a collision or sud-

den stop:

DMake sure the bottom cushion is

securely locked by trying to pull up

the edge of the bottom cushion.

Failure to do so will prevent the

seat belt from operation properly.

DMake sure the seat belts are not

twisted or caught under the bottom

cushion and are arranged in their

proper position and are ready to

use.

07 04.26

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13157

BEFORE FOLDING DOWN REAR SEATS

1. Stow the rear seat belt buckles as

shown in the illustration.

This prevents the seat belt buckles from

falling out when you fold the seatback.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the seat belt

buckles, the seat belt buckles must

be stowed before you fold the seat-

back.

XS13161

2. Make sure the shoulder belt passes

through the hanger when folding the

rear seat.

This prevents the shoulder belt from being

damaged.

CAUTION

The seat belt must be removed from

the hanger when the seat belt is in

use.

XS13159

FOLDING DOWN REAR SEATS

Pull the seatback angle adjusting lever

to unlock the seatback and fold the

seatback down until it locks.

CAUTION

Be careful that the seat does not hit

a passenger or luggage.

NOTICE

Do not fold the rear seat seatback

forward with the luggage cover hooks

attached.

07 04.26

—Folding down rear seats

(Crew Max models)

62 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Folding down the rear seats will enlarge

the luggage compartment. See “—Stowage

precautions” on page 464 in Section 2 for

precautions when loading luggage.

CAUTION

When returning the seatback to the

upright position, observe the follow-

ing precautions in order to prevent

death or serious injury in a collision

or sudden stop:

DMake sure the seatback is securely

locked by pushing forward and rear-

ward on the top of the seatback.

Failure to do so will prevent the

seat belt from operating properly.

DMake sure the seat belts are not

twisted or caught in the seatback

and are arranged in their proper

position and are ready to use.

XS13008

Front separate seats

XS13152

Front separate seats (with seat heater)

07 04.26

Head restraints

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13009

Front bench seat

XS13010

Rear seats (Double cab models)

XS13196

Rear seats (Crew Max models)

For your safety and comfort, adjust the

head restraint before driving.

To raise: Pull it up.

To lower: Push it down while pressing the

lock release button.

Front separate seats (with seat heater)

only—

You can pull up or push down the head

restraint. You can also move the front

head restraint forward or backward. If

such adjustment is desired, pull or push

the base of the head restraint.

Rear center head restraint and front cen-

ter head restraint (bench seats)—When an

occupant sits on the center position of the

rear seats (Double cab and Crew Max

models) or the front seats (bench seats),

always pull up the center head restraint to

the lock position.

The head restraint is most effective when

it is close to your head. Therefore, using

a cushion on the seatback is not recom-

mended.

CAUTION

DAdjust the center of the head re-

straint so that it is closest to the

top of your ears.

DAfter adjusting the head restraint,

make sure it is locked in position.

DDo not drive with the head re-

straints removed.

07 04.26

64 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13207

To use the armrest, pull it down as

shown in the illustrations.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the armrest,

avoid putting heavy loads on it.

XS13100c

To turn on the seat heater, move the

dial upward (“L” dial for the left front

seat or “R” dial for the right front

seat). At this time, the indicator light

will illuminate to indicate the seat heat-

er is operating.

Move the dial upward or downward to ad-

just to the desired temperature.

To turn it off, move the dial downward

until it stops.

When the seat heater is not in use, move

the dial fully downward.

The ignition switch must be in the “ON”

position to operate seat heaters.

CAUTION

Occupants must use caution when op-

erating the seat heater because it

may make them feel too hot or cause

burns at low temperatures (erythema,

varicella). Use extra caution for;

DBabies, small children, elderly per-

sons, sick persons or persons with

physical disabilities

DPersons who have sensitive skin

DPersons who are exhausted

DPersons who have taken alcohol or

drugs which induce sleep (sleeping

drug, cold remedy, etc.)

To prevent the seat from overheating,

do not use the seat heater with a

blanket, cushion, or other insulating

objects which cover the seat.

07 04.26

Armrest (Crew Max models) Seat heaters

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

NOTICE

zDo not put unevenly weighed ob-

jects on the seat and do not stick

sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.)

into the seat.

zWhen cleaning the seats, do not

use organic substances (paint thin-

ner, benzine, alcohol, gasoline,

etc.). They may damage the heater

and seat surface.

zTo prevent the battery from being

discharged, turn the switch off

when the engine is not running.

Toyota strongly urges that the driver and

passengers in the vehicle be properly re-

strained at all times with the seat belts

provided. Failure to do so could increase

the chance of injury and/or the severity of

injury in accidents.

The seat belts provided for your vehicle

are designed for people of adult size,

large enough to properly wear them.

Child. Use a child restraint system ap-

propriate for the child until the child be-

comes large enough to properly wear the

vehicle’s seat belts. See “Child restraint”

on page 114 in this Section for details.

REGULAR CAB MODELS—

If a child is too large for a child restraint

system, the child should sit in the seat

and must be restrained using the vehicle’s

seat belt.

DOUBLE CAB AND CREW MAX

MODELS—

If a child is too large for a child restraint

system, the child should sit in the rear

seat and must be restrained using the

vehicle’s seat belt. According to accident

statistics, the child is safer when properly

restrained in the rear seat than in the

front seat.

If a child must sit in the front seat, the

seat belts should be worn properly. If an

accident occurs and the seat belts are not

worn properly, the force of the rapid infla-

tion of the airbag may cause death or

serious injury to the child.

Do not allow any children to stand up or

kneel on either rear or front seats. An

unrestrained child could suffer serious in-

jury or death during emergency braking or

a collision. Also, do not let the child sit

on your lap. Holding a child in your arms

does not provide sufficient restraint.

Pregnant woman. Toyota recommends the

use of a seat belt. Ask your doctor for

specific recommendations. The lap belt

should be worn securely and as low as

possible over the hips and not on the

waist.

Injured person. Toyota recommends the

use of a seat belt. Depending on the inju-

ry, first check with your doctor for specific

recommendations

07 04.26

Seat belts—

—Seat belt precautions

66 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

CAUTION

Persons should ride in their seats

properly wearing their seat belts

whenever the vehicle is moving.

Otherwise, they are much more likely

to suffer serious bodily injury or

death in the event of sudden braking

or a collision.

When using the seat belts, observe

the following:

DUse the belt for only one person at

a time. Do not use a single belt for

two or more people—even children.

DAvoid reclining the seatback any

more than needed. The seat belts

provide maximum protection in a

frontal or rear collision when the

driver and the front passenger are

sitting up straight and well back in

the seats. If you are reclined, the

lap belt may slide past your hips

and apply restraint forces directly

to the abdomen or your neck may

contact the shoulder belt. In the

event of a frontal collision, the

more the seat is reclined, the great-

er the risk of death or serious inju-

ry.

DBe careful not to damage the belt

webbing or hardware. Take care that

they do not get caught or pinched

in the seat or side doors.

DInspect the belt system periodically.

Check for cuts, fraying, and loose

parts. Damaged parts should be re-

placed. Do not disassemble or

modify the system.

DKeep the belts clean and dry. If

they need cleaning, use a mild soap

solution or lukewarm water. Never

use bleach, dye, or abrasive clean-

ers, or allow them to come into

contact with the belts—they may

severely weaken the belts. (See

“Cleaning the interior” on page 524

in Section 5.)

DReplace the belt assembly (includ-

ing bolts) if it has been used in a

severe impact. The entire assembly

should be replaced even if damage

is not obvious.

XS13012a

USING FRONT SEAT BELT HANGERS

(Regular cab models)

Raise the front seat belt hanger until it

locks before you fasten the front seat

belt.

You will hear a click when the seat belt

hanger locks in raised position.

CAUTION

Make sure the seat belt hanger is

secured in the raised position before

you fasten the seat belt. If it is not,

the seat belt may not work properly.

07 04.26

—Fastening front and rear

seat belts

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13125 Tab

Buckle

Adjust the seat as needed and sit up

straight and well back in the seat. To

fasten your belt, pull it out of the re-

tractor and insert the tab into the

buckle.

You will hear a click when the tab locks

into the buckle.

The seat belt length automatically adjusts

to your size and the seat position.

The retractor will lock the belt during a

sudden stop or on impact. It also may

lock if you lean forward too quickly. A

slow, easy motion will allow the belt to

extend, and you can move around freely.

When a passenger’s shoulder belt is com-

pletely extended and is then retracted

even slightly, the belt is locked in that

position and cannot be extended. This fea-

ture is used to hold the child restraint

system securely. (For details, see “Child

restraint” on page 114 in this Section.) To

free the belt again, fully retract the belt

and then pull the belt out once more.

If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the

retractor, firmly pull the belt and release

it. You will then be able to smoothly pull

the belt out of the retractor.

CAUTION

DAfter inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and

that the belt is not twisted.

DDo not insert coins, clips, etc. in

the buckle as this may prevent you

from properly latching the tab and

buckle.

DIf the seat belt does not function

normally, immediately contact your

Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat

until the seat belt is fixed, because

it cannot protect an adult occupant

or your child from death or serious

injury.

XS13126

Tak e u p

slack

Keep as low on

hips as possible

Too h i gh

Adjust the position of the lap and

shoulder belts.

Position the lap belt as low as possible

on your hips—not on your waist, then ad-

just it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulder

portion upward through the latch plate.

07 04.26

68 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

CAUTION

DBoth high−positioned lap belts and

loose−fitting belts could cause

death or serious injuries due to

sliding under the lap belt during a

collision or other unintended event.

Keep the lap belt positioned as low

on hips as possible.

DDo not place the shoulder belt un-

der your arm.

XS13011

Seat belts with an adjustable shoulder

anchor (Double cab and Crew Max

models)—

Adjust the shoulder anchor position to

your size.

To raise: Slide the anchor up.

To lower: Push in the lock release button

and slide the anchor down.

After adjustment, make sure the anchor is

locked in position.

CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder belt

is positioned across the center of

your shoulder. The belt should be

kept away from your neck, but not

falling off your shoulder. Failure to

do so could reduce the amount of

protection in an accident and cause

death or serious injuries in a colli-

sion.

07 04.26

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13124

To release the belt, press the buckle

release button and allow the belt to

retract.

If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull

it out and check for kinks or twists. Then

make sure it remains untwisted as it re-

tracts.

XS13146b

Double cab models

XS13157

Crew Max models

The rear seat belt buckles can be

stowed when not in use.

Seat belt buckles must be stowed before

you fold the seatback.

07 04.26

—Stowing the rear seat belt

buckles (Double cab and Crew

Max models)

70 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

If your seat belts cannot be fastened se-

curely because they are not long enough,

a personalized seat belt extender is avail-

able from your Toyota dealer free of

charge.

Please contact your local Toyota dealer so

that the dealer can order the proper re-

quired length for the extender. Bring the

heaviest coat you expect to wear for prop-

er measurement and selection of length.

Additional ordering information is available

at your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

When using the seat belt extender,

observe the following precautions.

Failure to follow these instructions

could reduce the effectiveness of the

seat belt restraint system in case of

an accident, increasing the chance of

death or serious injury.

DRemember that the extender pro-

vided for you may not be safe when

used on a different vehicle, for

another person, or at a different

seating position than the one origi-

nally intended.

XS13127

DIf the seat belt extender has been

connected to the driver’s seat belt

buckle without the driver actually

wearing the seat belt, the SRS driv-

er’s airbag system will judge that

the driver is wearing it. In this

case, the driver’s airbag may not

activate correctly, causing death or

serious injury in the event of colli-

sion. Be sure to wear the seat belt

with the seat belt extender.

DMake sure the passenger airbag on−

off indicator light indicates “ON”

when using the seat belt extender

for the front passenger seat. If the

indicator light indicates “OFF”, dis-

connect the extender tongue from

the seat belt buckle, then reconnect

the seat belt. Reconnect the seat

belt extender after making sure the

indicator light indicates “ON”. If

you use the seat belt extender

while the indicator light indicates

“OFF”, the front passenger airbag

and side airbag on the front pas-

senger side may not activate cor-

rectly, which could cause death or

serious injury in the event of colli-

sion.

DDo not use the seat belt extender

if it is not absolutely necessary.

07 04.26

—Seat belt extender

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

DDo not use the seat belt extender

when installing a child restraint

system on the front or rear passen-

ger seat. If installing a child re-

straint system with the seat belt ex-

tender connected to the seat belt,

the seat belt will not securely hold

the child restraint system, which

could cause death or serious injury

to the child or other passengers in

the event of collision.

XS13128

To connect the extender to the seat

belt, insert the tab into the seat belt

buckle so that the “PRESS” signs on

the buckle release buttons of the ex-

tender and the seat belt are both facing

outward as shown.

You will hear a click when the tab locks

into the buckle.

When releasing the seat belt, press on

the buckle release button on the extender,

not on the seat belt. This helps prevent

damage to the vehicle interior and extend-

er itself.

As far as the seat belt extender on the

front passenger side is concerned, do not

fail to disconnect the extender from the

seat belt after the above operation in or-

der to activate the front passenger airbag

correctly when getting into the vehicle

next time.

When not in use, remove the extender

and store in the vehicle for future use.

CAUTION

DAfter inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and

that the lap and shoulder portions

of the belt and the seat belt extend-

er are not twisted.

DDo not insert coins, clips, etc. in

the buckle as this may prevent you

from properly latching the tab and

buckle.

DIf the seat belt does not function

normally, immediately contact your

Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat

until the seat belt is fixed, because

it cannot protect an adult occupant

or your child from death or serious

injury.

07 04.26

72 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13020

The driver and front passenger seat

belt pretensioners are designed to be

activated in response to a severe fron-

tal impact. On vehicles equipped with

curtain shield airbags, the pretensioners

are also activated during vehicle roll

over.

When the sensor detects a severe frontal

impact or a vehicle roll over, the front

seat belts are quickly drawn back by the

retractors so that the belts snugly restrain

the occupants.

The front passenger’s seat belt pretension-

er will not activate if no passenger is

detected in the front passenger seat by

the front passenger occupant classification

system. However, the front passenger’s

seat belt pretensioner may activate if lug-

gage is put on the seat, or the seat belt

is buckled up regardless of the presence

of an occupant in the seat. (As for the

front passenger occupant classification

system, see “—Front passenger occupant

classification system” on page 104 in this

Section.)

The seat belt pretensioners and SRS air-

bags may not operate together in all colli-

sions.

XS13132a

The seat belt pretensioners will not oper-

ate in a vehicle rollover if the “RSCA

OFF” indicator light is on. For details, see

“—Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags

off switch” on page 113 in this Section.

07 04.26

—Seat belt pretensioners

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13139

The seat belt pretensioner system con-

sists mainly of the following components

and their locations are shown in the il-

lustration.

1. Front airbag sensors

2. Passenger airbag on−off indicator light

3. Front passenger occupant classification

ECU

4. Load sensor

5. Seat belt pretensioner assemblies

6. Front passenger’s seat belt buckle

switch

7. Airbag sensor assembly

8. SRS warning light

The seat belt pretensioners are controlled

by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag

sensor assembly consists of a safing sen-

sor and airbag sensor.

When the seat belt pretensioners are acti-

vated, an operating noise may be heard

and a small amount of non−toxic gas may

be released. This does not indicate that

a fire is occurring. This gas is normally

harmless.

Once the seat belt pretensioners have

been activated, the seat belt retractors

remain locked.

CAUTION

DDo not modify, remove, strike or

open the seat belt pretensioner as-

semblies, airbag sensor or sur-

rounding area or wiring. Failure to

follow these instructions may pre-

vent the seat belt pretensioners

from activating correctly, cause sud-

den operation of the system or dis-

able the system, which could result

in death or serious injury. Consult

your Toyota dealer about any repair

and modification.

DDo not modify or change the sus-

pension system. Such changes may

cause the driver airbag, front pas-

senger airbag, seat belt pretension-

ers and curtain shield airbags to

inflate accidentally, which could re-

sult in death or serious injury.

DDo not use tires or wheels other

than the manufacturer’s recom-

mended size. Such a use may cause

the driver airbag, front passenger

airbag, seat belt pretensioners and

curtain shield airbags to inflate ac-

cidentally, which could result in

death or serious injury. For details,

see “Checking and replacing tires”

on page 551 in Section 7−2.

07 04.26

74 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the following

changes without consulting your

Toyota dealer. Such changes can

interfere with proper operation of the

seat belt pretensioners in some

cases.

zInstallation of electronic devices

such as a mobile two−way radio,

cassette tape player or compact

disc player

zRepairs on or near the front seat

belt pretensioner assemblies

zModification of the suspension sys-

tem

zModification of the front end struc-

ture

zAttachment of a grille guard (bull

bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,

winches or any other equipment to

the front end

zRepairs made on or near the front

fenders, front end structure or con-

sole

XS13135a

This indicator comes on when the igni-

tion switch is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion. It goes off after about 6 seconds.

This means the seat belt pretensioners

are operating properly.

This warning light system monitors the

airbag sensor assembly, front airbag

sensors, side and curtain shield airbag

sensors, curtain shield airbag sensors,

driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat

belt buckle switch, front passenger

occupant classification system∗, passenger

airbag off switch, passenger airbag on−off

indicator light, seat belt pretensioner

assemblies, inflators, “RSCA OFF”

indicator light, interconnecting wiring and

power sources. (For details, see “Service

reminder indicators and warning buzzers”

on page 197 in Section 1−6.)

∗: The front passenger occupant classifica-

tion system includes the front passenger

occupant classification ECU, load sensor,

front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch.

If any of the following conditions occurs,

this indicates a malfunction of the airbags

or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

DThe light does not come on when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position or remains on for more than

6 seconds.

DThe light comes on while driving.

07 04.26

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

DIf any seat belt does not retract or can

not be pulled out due to a malfunction

or activation of the relevant seat belt

pretensioner.

DThe seat belt pretensioner assembly or

surrounding area has been damaged. XS13121

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible:

DThe front of the vehicle (shaded in the

illustration) was involved in an accident

that was not severe enough to cause

the seat belt pretensioners to operate.

DEither seat belt pretensioner assembly

or surrounding area is scratched,

cracked, or otherwise damaged.

XS13130a

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-

tem) front airbags are designed to pro-

vide further protection for the driver

and right front passenger in addition to

the primary safety protection provided

by the seat belts.

Your vehicle is equipped with “ADVANCED

AIRBAGS” designed based on US motor

vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The

airbag system controls airbag deployment

power for the driver and right front pas-

senger. The driver airbag system consists

of the driver seat’s position sensor etc.

The front passenger’s airbag system con-

sists of the front passenger occupant clas-

sification sensor etc.

07 04.26

SRS airbags—

—SRS driver airbag and front

passenger airbag (Regular cab

models)

76 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Vehicles with bench seats—The SRS air-

bags are designed to protect the driver

and right front passenger and they are not

designed to protect an occupant in the

front center seating position.

In response to a severe frontal impact,

the SRS front airbags work with the seat

belts to help reduce injury by inflating.

The SRS front airbags help reduce injuries

mainly to the driver’s or front passenger’s

head or chest caused by hitting the ve-

hicle interior.

The SRS front passenger airbag will not

activate if there is no passenger sitting in

the right front passenger seat. However,

the front passenger airbag may deploy if

luggage is put in the seat. (As for the

front passenger occupant classification

system, see “—Front passenger occupant

classification system” on page 104 in this

Section.)

Always wear your seat belt properly.

CAUTION

DThe SRS front airbag system is de-

signed only as a supplement to the

primary protection of the driver and

front passenger seat belt systems.

The driver and front passenger can

be killed or seriously injured by the

inflating airbags if they do not wear

the available seat belts properly.

During sudden braking just before

a collision, an unrestrained driver

or front passenger can move for-

ward into direct contact with or

close proximity to the airbag which

may then deploy during the colli-

sion. To ensure maximum protection

in an accident, the driver and all

passengers in the vehicle must

wear their seat belts properly. Wear-

ing a seat belt properly during an

accident reduces the chances of

death or serious injury or being

thrown out of the vehicle. For in-

structions and precautions concern-

ing the seat belt system, see “Seat

belts” on page 65 in this Section.

DImproperly seated and/or restrained

infants and children can be killed

or seriously injured by the

deploying airbags. An infant or

child who is too small to use a seat

belt should be properly secured

using a child restraint system. For

instructions concerning the

installation of a child restraint

system, see “Child restraint” on

page 114 in this Section.

07 04.26

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13153

Indicator light

The passenger airbag system is

equipped with a off switch and indica-

tor light. Turning the passenger airbag

off switch clockwise to the “AUTO”

position makes the front passenger air-

bag system operational. To disable the

front passenger airbag system, turn the

off switch counterclockwise to the

“OFF” position and remove the key. The

“OFF” indicator light on the passenger

airbag off switch will come on when

the front passenger airbag system has

been disabled.

See “—Passenger airbag off switch” on

page 85 in this Section for detail.

CAUTION

DDo not turn off the passenger air-

bag off switch except when a mem-

ber of a passenger risk group iden-

tified in TABLE 1 is occupying the

right front passenger seating posi-

tion.

DWhen the passenger airbag off

switch is turned off, the front pas-

senger airbag will not inflate in a

collision and turning off the front

passenger airbag can reduce the

occupant protection which your ve-

hicle safety systems can provide to

you in certain accidents and in-

crease the likelihood of death or

serious injuries.

07 04.26

78 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

The SRS front airbags are designed to

deploy in severe (usually frontal) colli-

sions where the magnitude and duration

of the forward deceleration of the ve-

hicle exceeds the designed threshold

level.

The SRS front airbags will deploy if the

severity of the impact is above the de-

signed threshold level, comparable to an

approximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision

when the vehicle has the impact straight

into a fixed barrier that does not move or

deform.

However, this threshold velocity will be

considerably higher if the vehicle strikes

an object, such as a parked vehicle or

sign pole, which can move or deform on

impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an

underride collision (e.g. a collision in

which the front of the vehicle “underrides”,

or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).

It is possible that in some collisions

where the forward deceleration of the ve-

hicle is very close to the designed thresh-

old level, the SRS front airbags and seat

belt pretensioners may not activate togeth-

er.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

07 04.26

TABLE 1: A PASSENGER RISK GROUP

Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) who must ride in the front seat because:

DVehicle has no rear seat;

DVehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear−facing infant seat;

DThe infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s physician,

makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver

can constantly monitor the child’s condition.

Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat because:

DVehicle has no rear seat:

DAlthough children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat(s) whenever possible,

children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front because no space is

available in the rear seat(s) of vehicle; or

DThe child has a medical condition which, according to the child’s physician,

makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so that the driver can

constantly monitor the child’s condition.

Medical condition. A passenger has a medical condition which according to his

or her physician:

DCauses the passenger airbag to pose a special risk for the passenger: and

DMakes the potential harm from the passenger airbag in a crash greater than the

potential harm from turning off the airbag and allowing the passenger, even if

belted, to hit the dashboard, or windshield in a crash.

For more detailed information concerning about the passenger risk group, please

contact NHTSA at 1−888−327−4236 or Transport Canada at 1−800−333−0371.

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13118

Collision from the rear

Collision from the side

Vehicle rollover

The SRS front airbags are not generally

designed to inflate if the vehicle is in-

volved in a side or rear collision, if it

rolls over, or if it is involved in a low−

speed frontal collision. But, whenever a

collision of any type causes sufficient

forward deceleration of the vehicle, de-

ployment of the SRS front airbags may

occur.

XS13110

Hitting a curb,

edge of pavement

or hard surface

Landing hard or vehicle falling

Falling into or

jumping over a

deep hole

The SRS front airbags may also deploy

if a serious impact occurs to the under-

side of your vehicle. Some examples

are shown in the illustration.

XS13141a

The SRS front airbag system consists

mainly of the following components, and

their locations are shown in the illustra-

tion.

1. Front airbag sensors

2. Passenger airbag on−off indicator light

3. Airbag module for front passenger

(airbag and inflator)

4. Passenger airbag off switch

5. Front passenger occupant classification

ECU

6. Load sensor

7. Front passenger’s seat belt buckle

switch

8. Driver’s seat belt buckle switch

07 04.26

80 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

9. Driver’s seat position sensor

10. Airbag sensor assembly

11. Airbag module for driver

(airbag and inflator)

12. SRS warning light

The airbag sensor assembly consists of a

safing sensor and airbag sensor.

The airbag sensors constantly monitor the

forward deceleration of the vehicle. If an

impact results in a forward deceleration

beyond the designed threshold level, the

system triggers the airbag inflators. At this

time a chemical reaction in the inflators

very quickly fills the airbags with non−tox-

ic gas to help restrain the forward motion

of the occupants. The front airbags then

quickly deflate, so that there is no ob-

struction of the driver’s vision should it be

necessary to continue driving.

When the airbags inflate, they produce a

loud noise and release some smoke and

residue along with non−toxic gas. This

does not indicate a fire. This smoke may

remain inside the vehicle for some time,

and may cause some minor irritation to

the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to

wash off any residue as soon as possible

to prevent any potential skin irritation with

soap and water. If you can safely exit

from the vehicle, you should do so imme-

diately.

Deployment of the airbags happens in a

fraction of a second, so the airbags must

inflate with considerable force. While the

system is designed to reduce serious inju-

ries, primarily to the head and chest, it

may also cause other, less severe injuries

to the face, chest, arms and hands. These

are usually in the nature of minor burns

or abrasions and swelling, but the force of

a deploying airbag can cause more seri-

ous injuries, especially if an occupant’s

hands, arms, chest or head is in close

proximity to the airbag module at the time

of deployment. This is why it is important

for the occupant to: avoid placing any

object or part of the body between the

occupant and the airbag module; sit

straight and well back into the seat; wear

the available seat belt properly; and sit as

far as possible from the airbag module,

while still maintaining control of the ve-

hicle.

Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel

hub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hot

for several minutes after deployment, so

do not touch! The airbags inflate only

once. The windshield may be damaged by

absorbing some of the force of the inflat-

ing airbag.

07 04.26

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

CAUTION

The driver or front passenger who is

too close to the steering wheel or

dashboard during airbag deployment

can be killed or seriously injured.

Toyota strongly recommends that:

DThe driver sit as far back as pos-

sible from the steering wheel while

still maintaining control of the ve-

hicle.

DThe front passenger sit as far back

as possible from the dashboard.

DAll vehicle occupants be properly

restrained using the available seat

belts.

DIf the seat belt extender has been

connected to the driver’s seat belt

buckle without the driver actually

wearing the seat belt, the SRS driv-

er’s airbag system will judge that

the driver is wearing it. In this

case, the driver’s airbag may not

activate correctly, causing death or

serious injury in the event of colli-

sion. Be sure to wear the seat belt

with the seat belt extender.

For instructions and precautions con-

cerning the seating position, see

“—Front seat precautions” on page

48 in this Section.

CAUTION

A member of a passenger risk group

should never sit or be occupied in

the right front passenger seat with

airbag off switch in the “AUTO” posi-

tion. (For details, see “—SRS driver

airbag and front passenger airbag” on

page 75 in this Section.)

07 04.26

82 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13018

DDo not sit on the edge of the seat

or lean against the dashboard when

the vehicle is in use, since the

front passenger airbag could inflate

with considerable speed and force.

Anyone who is up against, or very

close to, an airbag when it inflates,

can be killed or seriously injured.

Sit up straight and well back in the

seat, and always use your seat belt

properly.

XS13019

DToyota strongly recommends that all

infants and children be placed in

the rear seat of the vehicle and be

properly restrained.

DDo not hold a child on your lap or

in your arms. Use a child restraint

system in the seat. For instructions

concerning the installation of a

child restraint system, see “Child

restraint” on page 114 in this Sec-

tion.

XS13022b

DDo not put anything or any part of

your body on or in front of the

dashboard or steering wheel pad

that houses the front airbag sys-

tem. They might restrict inflation or

cause death or serious injury as

they are projected rearward by the

force of the deploying airbags. Like-

wise, the driver and front passenger

should not hold objects in their

arms or on their knees.

07 04.26

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

DDo not modify or remove any wir-

ing. Do not modify, remove, strike

or open any components such as

the steering wheel pad, steering

wheel, column cover, dashboard

near the front passenger airbag,

front passenger airbag cover, front

passenger airbag or airbag sensor

assembly. Doing so may prevent the

front airbag system from activating

correctly, cause sudden activation

of the system or disable the sys-

tem, which could result in death or

serious injury.

DDo not modify or change the sus-

pension system. Such changes may

cause the driver airbag, front pas-

senger airbag, seat belt pretension-

ers and curtain shield airbags to

inflate accidentally, which could re-

sult in death or serious injury.

DDo not use tires or wheels other

than the manufacturer’s recom-

mended size. Such a use may cause

the driver airbag, front passenger

airbag, seat belt pretensioners and

curtain shield airbags to inflate ac-

cidentally, which could result in

death or serious injury. For details,

see “Checking and replacing tires”

on page 551 in Section 7−2.

Failure to follow these instructions

can result in death or serious injury.

Consult your Toyota dealer about any

repair and modification.

If you wish to modify your vehicle for

a person with a physical disability,

consult your Toyota dealer. It may

dangerously interfere with the SRS

front airbags operation.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the following

changes without consulting your

Toyota dealer. Such changes can

interfere with proper operation of the

SRS airbag system in some cases.

zInstallation of electronic devices

such as a mobile two−way radio,

cassette tape player or compact

disc player

zModification of the suspension sys-

tem

zModification of the front end struc-

ture

zAttachment of a grille guard (bull

bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,

winches or any other equipment to

the front end

zRepairs made on or near the front

fenders, front end structure, con-

sole, steering column, steering

wheel, front passenger’s seat or

dashboard near the front passenger

airbag

07 04.26

84 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13135a

This indicator comes on when the igni-

tion switch is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion. It goes off after about 6 seconds.

This means the SRS airbags are operat-

ing properly.

This warning light system monitors the

airbag sensor assembly, front airbag

sensors, side and curtain shield airbag

sensors, driver’s seat position sensor,

driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front

passenger occupant classification system∗,

passenger airbag off switch, passenger

airbag on−off indicator light, seat belt

pretensioner assemblies, inflators, “RSCA

OFF” indicator light, interconnecting wiring

and power sources. (For details, see

“Service reminder indicators and warning

buzzers” on page 197 in Section 1−6.)

∗: The front passenger occupant classifica-

tion system includes the front passenger

occupant classification ECU, load sensor

and front passenger’s seat belt buckle

switch.

If either of the following conditions occurs,

this indicates a malfunction of the airbags

or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

DThe light does not come on when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position or remains on for more than

6 seconds.

DThe light comes on while driving.

The SRS warning light will come on and

passenger airbag on−off indicator light will

indicate “OFF” if there is a malfunction in

the front passenger occupant classification

system.

07 04.26

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13134a

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible:

DThe SRS airbags have been inflated.

DThe front of the vehicle (shaded in the

illustration) was involved in an accident

that was not severe enough to cause

the SRS airbags to inflate.

DThe pad section of the steering wheel

or front passenger airbag cover

(shaded in the illustration) is scratched,

cracked, or otherwise damaged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cables

before contacting your Toyota dealer.

XS13153

Indicator light

This off switch is designed to disable

the front passenger airbag in order to

allow usage, if necessary, of a member

of a passenger risk group identified in

TABLE 1 is occupying the right front

passenger seating position. (For details,

see “—SRS driver airbag and front

passenger airbag” on page 75 in this

Section.)

Operate off switch as follows:

Insert key into the keyhole.

To turn the front passenger airbag

on—Turn the key clockwise to the “AUTO”

position. At this time, the indicator light

condition varies depending on the

occupant in the right front passenger seat.

(For details, see “—Front passenger

occupant classification system” on page

104 in this Section.)

To turn the front passenger airbag

off—Turn the key counterclockwise to the

“OFF” position and remove it. At this time,

the “OFF” indicator light comes on. If the

key is removed at any other position than

“OFF”, the switch will automatically return

to the “AUTO” position.

07 04.26

—Passenger airbag off switch

(Regular cab models)

86 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13034g

The SRS warning light and the passen-

ger airbag on−off indicator light will in-

dicate “OFF” if there is a malfunction

in the passenger airbag off switch.

CAUTION

DDo not turn off the passenger air-

bag off switch except when a mem-

ber of a passenger risk group iden-

tified in TABLE 1 is occupying the

right front passenger seating posi-

tion.

DWhen the passenger airbag off

switch is turned off, the front pas-

senger airbag will not inflate in a

collision and turning off the front

passenger airbag can reduce the

occupant protection which your ve-

hicle safety systems can provide to

you in certain accidents and in-

crease the likelihood of death or

serious personal injuries.

For details, see “—SRS driver airbag

and front passenger airbag” on page

75 in this Section.

XS13131

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-

tem) front airbags are designed to pro-

vide further protection for the driver

and right front passenger in addition to

the primary safety protection provided

by the seat belts.

07 04.26

—SRS driver airbag and front

passenger airbag

(Double cab and Crew Max models)

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Your vehicle is equipped with “ADVANCED

AIRBAGS” designed based on US motor

vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The

airbag system controls airbag deployment

power for the driver and front passenger.

The driver airbag system consists of the

driver seat’s position sensor etc. The front

passenger’s airbag system consists of the

front passenger occupant classification

sensor etc.

Vehicles with bench seats—The SRS air-

bags are designed to protect the driver

and right front passenger, and they are

not designed to protect an occupant in the

front center seating position.

In response to a severe frontal impact,

the SRS front airbags work with the seat

belts to help reduce injury by inflating.

The SRS front airbags help reduce injuries

mainly to the driver’s or front passenger’s

head or chest caused by hitting the ve-

hicle interior.

The SRS front passenger airbag will not

activate if there is no passenger sitting in

the right front passenger seat. However,

the front passenger airbag may deploy if

luggage is put in the seat. (As for the

front passenger occupant classification

system, see “—Front passenger occupant

classification system” on page 109 in this

Section.)

Always wear your seat belt properly.

CAUTION

DThe SRS front airbag system is de-

signed only as a supplement to the

primary protection of the driver and

front passenger seat belt systems.

The driver and front passenger can

be killed or seriously injured by the

inflating airbags if they do not wear

the available seat belts properly.

During sudden braking just before

a collision, an unrestrained driver

or front passenger can move for-

ward into direct contact with or

close proximity to the airbag which

may then deploy during the colli-

sion. To ensure maximum protection

in an accident, the driver and all

passengers in the vehicle must

wear their seat belts properly. Wear-

ing a seat belt properly during an

accident reduces the chances of

death or serious injury or being

thrown out of the vehicle. For in-

structions and precautions concern-

ing the seat belt system, see “Seat

belts” on page 65 in this Section.

07 04.26

88 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

DImproperly seated and/or restrained

infants and children can be killed

or seriously injured by the

deploying airbags. An infant or

child who is too small to use a seat

belt should be properly secured

using a child restraint system.

Toyota strongly recommends that all

infants and children be placed in

the rear seat of the vehicle and

properly restrained. The rear seat is

the safest for infants and children.

For instructions concerning the

installation of a child restraint

system, see “Child restraint” on

page 114 in this Section.

The SRS front airbags are designed to

deploy in severe (usually frontal) colli-

sions where the magnitude and duration

of the forward deceleration of the ve-

hicle exceeds the designed threshold

level.

The SRS front airbags will deploy if the

severity of the impact is above the de-

signed threshold level, comparable to an

approximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision

when the vehicle has the impact straight

into a fixed barrier that does not move or

deform.

However, this threshold velocity will be

considerably higher if the vehicle strikes

an object, such as a parked vehicle or

sign pole, which can move or deform on

impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an

underride collision (e.g. a collision in

which the front of the vehicle “underrides”,

or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).

It is possible that in some collisions

where the forward deceleration of the ve-

hicle is very close to the designed thresh-

old level, the SRS front airbags and the

seat belt pretensioners may not activate

together.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

XS13119

Collision from the

rear

Vehicle rollover

Collision from

the side

The SRS front airbags are not generally

designed to inflate if the vehicle is in-

volved in a side or rear collision, if it

rolls over, or if it is involved in a low−

speed frontal collision. But, whenever a

collision of any type causes sufficient

forward deceleration of the vehicle, de-

ployment of the SRS front airbags may

occur.

07 04.26

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13111

Hitting a curb,

edge of pavement

or hard surface

Landing hard or vehicle falling

Falling into or

jumping over a

deep hole

The SRS front airbags may also deploy

if a serious impact occurs to the under-

side of your vehicle. Some examples

are shown in the illustration.

XS13104a

The SRS front airbag system consists

mainly of the following components, and

their locations are shown in the illustra-

tion.

1. Front airbag sensors

2. Passenger airbag on−off indicator light

3. Airbag module for front passenger

(airbag and inflator)

4. Front passenger occupant classification

ECU

5. Load sensor

6. Front passenger’s seat belt buckle

switch

7. Driver’s seat belt buckle switch

8. Driver’s seat position sensor

9. Airbag sensor assembly

10. Airbag module for driver

(airbag and inflator)

11. SRS warning light

The airbag sensor assembly consists of a

safing sensor and airbag sensor.

The airbag sensors constantly monitor the

forward deceleration of the vehicle. If an

impact results in a forward deceleration

beyond the designed threshold level, the

system triggers the airbag inflators. At this

time a chemical reaction in the inflators

very quickly fills the airbags with non−tox-

ic gas to help restrain the forward motion

of the occupants. The front airbags then

quickly deflate, so that there is no ob-

struction of the driver’s vision should it be

necessary to continue driving.

When the airbags inflate, they produce a

loud noise and release some smoke and

residue along with non−toxic gas. This

does not indicate a fire. This smoke may

remain inside the vehicle for some time,

and may cause some minor irritation to

the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to

wash off any residue as soon as possible

to prevent any potential skin irritation with

soap and water. If you can safely exit

from the vehicle, you should do so imme-

diately.

07 04.26

90 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Deployment of the airbags happens in a

fraction of a second, so the airbags must

inflate with considerable force. While the

system is designed to reduce serious inju-

ries, primarily to the head and chest, it

may also cause other, less severe injuries

to the face, chest, arms and hands. These

are usually in the nature of minor burns

or abrasions and swelling, but the force of

a deploying airbag can cause more seri-

ous injuries, especially if an occupant’s

hands, arms, chest or head is in close

proximity to the airbag module at the time

of deployment. This is why it is important

for the occupant to: avoid placing any

object or part of the body between the

occupant and the airbag module; sit

straight and well back into the seat; wear

the available seat belt properly; and sit as

far as possible from the airbag module,

while still maintaining control of the ve-

hicle.

Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel

hub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hot

for several minutes after deployment, so

do not touch! The airbags inflate only

once. The windshield may be damaged by

absorbing some of the force of the inflat-

ing airbag.

CAUTION

The driver or front passenger who is

too close to the steering wheel or

dashboard during airbag deployment

can be killed or seriously injured.

Toyota strongly recommends that:

DThe driver sit as far back as pos-

sible from the steering wheel while

still maintaining control of the ve-

hicle.

DThe front passenger sit as far back

as possible from the dashboard.

DAll vehicle occupants be properly

restrained using the available seat

belts.

DIf the seat belt extender has been

connected to the driver’s seat belt

buckle without the driver actually

wearing the seat belt, the SRS driv-

er’s airbag system will judge that

the driver is wearing it. In this

case, the driver’s airbag may not

activate correctly, causing death or

serious injury in the event of colli-

sion. Be sure to wear the seat belt

with the seat belt extender.

For instructions and precautions con-

cerning the seating position, see

“—Front seat precautions” on page

48 in this Section.

07 04.26

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13018

DDo not sit on the edge of the seat

or lean against the dashboard when

the vehicle is in use, since the

front passenger airbag could inflate

with considerable speed and force.

Anyone who is up against, or very

close to, an airbag when it inflates,

can be killed or seriously injured.

Sit up straight and well back in the

seat, and always use your seat belt

properly.

XS13019

DToyota strongly recommends that all

infants and children be placed in

the rear seat of the vehicle and be

properly restrained.

DDo not hold a child on your lap or

in your arms. Use a child restraint

system in the rear seat. For instruc-

tions concerning the installation of

a child restraint system, see “Child

restraint” on page 114 in this Sec-

tion.

XS13022b

DDo not put anything or any part of

your body on or in front of the

dashboard or steering wheel pad

that houses the front airbag sys-

tem. They might restrict inflation or

cause death or serious injury as

they are projected rearward by the

force of the deploying airbags. Like-

wise, the driver and front passenger

should not hold objects in their

arms or on their knees.

07 04.26

92 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

DDo not modify or remove any wir-

ing. Do not modify, remove, strike

or open any components such as

the steering wheel pad, steering

wheel, column cover, dashboard

near the front passenger airbag,

front passenger airbag cover, front

passenger airbag or airbag sensor

assembly. Doing so may prevent the

front airbag system from activating

correctly, cause sudden activation

of the system or disable the sys-

tem, which could result in death or

serious injury.

DDo not modify or change the sus-

pension system. Such changes may

cause the driver airbag, front pas-

senger airbag, seat belt pretension-

ers and curtain shield airbags to

inflate accidentally, which could re-

sult in death or serious injury.

DDo not use tires or wheels other

than the manufacturer’s recom-

mended size. Such a use may cause

the driver airbag, front passenger

airbag, seat belt pretensioners and

curtain shield airbags to inflate ac-

cidentally, which could result in

death or serious injury. For details,

see “Checking and replacing tires”

on page 551 in Section 7−2.

Failure to follow these instructions

can result in death or serious injury.

Consult your Toyota dealer about any

repair and modification.

If you wish to modify your vehicle for

a person with a physical disability,

consult your Toyota dealer. It may

dangerously interfere with the SRS

front airbags operation.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the following

changes without consulting your

Toyota dealer. Such changes can

interfere with proper operation of the

SRS front airbag system in some

cases.

zInstallation of electronic devices

such as a mobile two−way radio,

cassette tape player or compact

disc player

zModification of the suspension sys-

tem

zModification of the front end struc-

ture

zAttachment of a grille guard (bull

bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,

winches or any other equipment to

the front end

zRepairs made on or near the front

fenders, front end structure, con-

sole, steering column, steering

wheel, front passenger’s seat or

dashboard near the front passenger

airbag

07 04.26

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13135a

This indicator comes on when the igni-

tion switch is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion. It goes off after about 6 seconds.

This means the SRS front airbags are

operating properly.

This warning light system monitors the

airbag sensor assembly, front airbag

sensors, side and curtain shield airbag

sensors, curtain shield airbag sensors,

driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat

belt buckle switch, front passenger

occupant classification system∗, passenger

airbag on−off indicator light, seat belt

pretensioner assemblies, inflators, “RSCA

OFF” indicator light, interconnecting wiring

and power sources. (For details, see

“Service reminder indicators and warning

buzzers” on page 197 in Section 1−6.)

∗: The front passenger occupant classifica-

tion system includes the front passenger

occupant classification ECU, load sensor

and front passenger’s seat belt buckle

switch.

If either of the following conditions occurs,

this indicates a malfunction of the airbags

or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

DThe light does not come on when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position or remains on for more than

6 seconds.

DThe light comes on while driving.

The SRS warning light will come on and

passenger airbag on−off indicator light will

indicate “OFF” if there is a malfunction in

the front passenger occupant classification

system.

XS13133a

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible:

DThe SRS front airbags have been in-

flated.

DThe front of the vehicle (shaded in the

illustration) was involved in an accident

that was not severe enough to cause

the SRS front airbags to inflate.

DThe pad section of the steering wheel

or front passenger airbag cover

(shaded in the illustration) is scratched,

cracked, or otherwise damaged.

07 04.26

94 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cables

before contacting your Toyota dealer.

XS13102

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-

tem) side airbags and curtain shield air-

bags are designed to provide further

protection for the driver and all win-

dow−side passengers in addition to the

primary safety protection provided by

the seat belts.

In response to a severe side impact, the

SRS side airbags and curtain shield air-

bags in the impacted side work with the

seat belts to help reduce injury by inflat-

ing. The SRS side airbags help reduce

injuries mainly to the driver’s or right front

passenger’s chest. The SRS curtain shield

airbags help reduce injuries mainly to the

driver’s and all window−side passenger’s

head and help prevent them from being

thrown out of the vehicle.

The SRS side airbag on the passenger

seat will not activate if there is no pas-

senger sitting in the right front passenger

seat. However, the side airbag on the pas-

senger seat may deploy if luggage is put

in the seat. (As for the front passenger

occupant classification system, see

“—Front passenger occupant classification

system” on page 109 in this Section.)

The SRS curtain shield airbag on the pas-

senger side are activated even with no

passenger in the front seat or rear outside

seat.

07 04.26

—SRS side airbags and

curtain shield airbags

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Roll sensing function:

In response to a vehicle rollover, the cur-

tain shield airbags on both sides work

with the seat belts to help reduce injury

by inflating. The curtain shield airbags

help reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s,

all window−side passenger’s head and

help prevent them from being thrown out

of the vehicle. (This function can be

turned off if inflation is not desired. See

“—Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags

off switch” on page 113 in this Section.)

The SRS curtain shield airbags may acti-

vate even when the side airbags are not

activated.

Always wear your seat belt properly.

CAUTION

DThe SRS side airbag and curtain

shield airbag system is designed

only as a supplement to the prima-

ry protection of the driver, right

front passenger and rear outside

passenger seat belt systems. To en-

sure maximum protection in an ac-

cident, the driver and all passenger

in the vehicle must wear their seat

belts properly. Wearing a seat belt

properly during an accident reduces

the chances of death or serious in-

jury or being thrown out of the ve-

hicle. For instructions and precau-

tions concerning the seat belt sys-

tem, see “Seat belts” on page 65 in

this Section.

DDo not allow anyone to lean his/her

head or any part of his/her body

against the door or the area of the

seat, front pillar, rear pillar or roof

side rail from which the SRS side

airbag and curtain shield airbag

deploy even if he/she is a child

seated in the child restraint system.

It is dangerous if the SRS side air-

bag and curtain shield airbag in-

flate, and the impact of the deploy-

ing airbag could cause death or se-

rious injury to the occupant.

DImproperly seated and/or restrained

infants and children can be killed

or seriously injured by the deploy-

ing airbags. An infant or child who

is too small to use a seat belt

should be properly secured using a

child restraint system. Toyota

strongly recommends that all in-

fants and children be placed in the

rear seats of the vehicle and prop-

erly restrained. The rear seats are

the safest for infants and children.

For instructions concerning the

installation of a child restraint sys-

tem, see “Child restraint” on page

114 in this Section.

07 04.26

96 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13113

The SRS side airbags and curtain shield

airbag system may not activate if the

vehicle is subjected to a collision from

the side at certain angles, or a collision

to the side of the vehicle body other

than the passenger compartment as

shown in the illustration.

The SRS side airbags are designed to

inflate when the passenger compartment

area suffers a severe impact from the

side.

The curtain shield airbags are designed to

inflate when the passenger compartment

area suffers a severe impact from the

side or vehicle rollover.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

XS13115

Collision from the rear

Vehicle rollover

Collision from the front

The SRS side airbags are not generally

designed to inflate if the vehicle is in-

volved in a front or rear collision, if it

rolls over, or if it is involved in a low−

speed side collision.

XS13116

The angle of

vehicle tip−up

is marginal

Skidding vehicle

hitting a curb

stone

The SRS curtain shield airbags may in-

flate if the angle of vehicle tip−up is

marginal or if the skidding vehicle’s

tires hit a curb stone laterally as shown

in the illustration.

07 04.26

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13109

Collision from

the front Collision from the

rear

Pitch end over end

The SRS curtain shield airbags are not

generally designed to inflate if the ve-

hicle is involved in a front or rear colli-

sion, if it pitches end over end, or if

it is involved in a low−speed side colli-

sion.

XS13111

Hitting a curb, edge

of pavement or

hard surface

Falling into or

jumping over

a deep hole

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS side and curtain shield airbags

may deploy if a serious impact occurs

to the underside of your vehicle. Some

examples are shown in the illustration.

XS13105c

Regular cab models

XS13107c

Double cab models

07 04.26

98 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13165

Crew Max models

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield

airbag system consists mainly of the fol-

lowing components, and their locations are

shown in the illustration.

1. SRS warning light

2. Passenger airbag on−off indicator light

3. Curtain shield airbag modules

(airbag and inflator)

4. Front passenger occupant classification

ECU

5. Load sensor

6. Side airbag modules

(airbag and inflator)

7. Side and curtain shield airbag sensors

8. Front passenger’s seat belt buckle

switch

9. Airbag sensor assembly

10. Curtain shield airbag sensors

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield

airbag system is controlled by the airbag

sensor assembly.

In a severe side impact, the side and

curtain shield airbag sensor and/or the

curtain shield airbag sensor trigger(s) the

side airbag inflators and/or the curtain

shield airbag inflators. At this time a

chemical reaction in the inflators quickly

fills the airbags with non−toxic gas to help

restrain the lateral motion of the occu-

pants.

In a vehicle rollover, the airbag sensor

assembly triggers the curtain shield airbag

inflator. At this time, a chemical reaction

in the inflators quickly fills the airbags

with non−toxic gas to help restrain the

lateral motion of the occupants.

When the airbags inflate, they produce a

fairly loud noise and release some smoke

and residue along with non−toxic gas. This

does not indicate a fire. This smoke may

remain inside the vehicle for some time,

and may cause some minor irritation to

the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to

wash off any residue as soon as possible

to prevent any potential skin irritation with

soap and water. If you can safely exit

from the vehicle, you should do so imme-

diately.

Deployment of the airbags happens in a

fraction of a second, so the airbags must

inflate with considerable force. While the

system is designed to reduce serious inju-

ries, it may also cause minor burns or

abrasions and swelling.

Front seats as well as parts of the front

and rear pillars, and roof side rail may be

hot for several minutes, but the airbags

themselves will not be hot. The airbags

are designed to inflate only once.

07 04.26

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

CAUTION

SRS side airbags and curtain shield

airbags inflate with considerable

force. To reduce the possibility of

death or serious injury when they in-

flate, the driver, front passenger and

rear outside passengers must:

DWear their seat belts properly.

DRemain properly seated with their

backs upright and against the seats

at all times.

Improper sitting and wearing of the

seat belts may not retain you inside

the vehicle.

XS13031

DDo not allow anyone to lean against

the door when the vehicle is in use,

since the side airbag and curtain

shield airbag could inflate with con-

siderable speed and force. Other-

wise, he/she may be killed or seri-

ously injured. Special care should

be taken especially when you have

a small child in the vehicle.

DSit up straight and well back in the

seat, distributing your weight evenly

in the seat. Do not apply excessive

weight to the outer side of the

seats with a side airbag, and to the

front pillar, rear pillar and roof side

rail with a curtain shield airbag.

XS13132a

DMake sure the “RSCA OFF”

indicator light is off. The curtain

shield airbags will not inflate in a

vehicle rollover if this indicator

light is on and you may be killed or

seriously injured. For details, see

“—Roll sensing of curtain shield

airbags off switch” on page 113 in

this Section.

07 04.26

100 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13030

DDo not allow anyone to get his/her

head closer to the area where the

side airbag and curtain shield air-

bag inflate, since these airbags

could inflate with considerable

speed and force. Otherwise, he/she

may be killed or seriously injured.

Special care should be taken espe-

cially when you have a small child

in the vehicle.

XS13033

DDo not allow anyone to kneel on

the passenger seat, facing the pas-

senger’s side door, since the side

airbag and curtain shield airbag

could inflate with considerable

speed and force. Otherwise, he/she

may be killed or seriously injured.

Special care should be taken espe-

cially when you have a small child

in the vehicle.

XS13035

DDo not allow anyone to get his/her

head or hands out of windows

since the curtain shield airbags

could inflate with considerable

speed and force. Otherwise, he/she

may be killed or seriously injured.

Special care should be taken espe-

cially when you have a small child

in the vehicle.

07 04.26

101

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13023

DDo not attach a cup holder or any

other device or object on or around

the door. When the side airbag in-

flates, the cup holder or any other

device or object will be thrown with

great force or the side airbag may

not activate correctly, resulting in

death or serious injury. Likewise,

the driver and front passenger

should not hold objects in their

arms or on their knees.

XS13024

DDo not attach a microphone or any

other device or object around the

area where the curtain shield airbag

activates such as on the windshield

glass, side door glass, front and

rear pillars, roof side rail and assist

grips. When the curtain shield air-

bags inflate, the microphone or oth-

er device or object will be thrown

away with great force or the curtain

shield airbags may not activate cor-

rectly, resulting in death or serious

injury.

DDo not hook a hanger, heavy or

sharp pointed objects on the coat

hook. If the curtain shield airbag

inflates, those items will be thrown

away with great force or the curtain

shield airbag may not activate cor-

rectly, resulting in death or serious

injury. When you hang clothes,

hang them on the coat hook direct-

ly.

DDo not use seat accessories which

cover the parts where the side air-

bags inflate. Such accessories may

prevent the side airbags from acti-

vating correctly, causing death or

serious injury.

DDo not modify or replace the seats

or upholstery of the seats with side

airbags. Such changes may prevent

the side airbag system from activat-

ing correctly, disable the system or

cause the side airbags to inflate ac-

cidentally, resulting in death or seri-

ous injury.

07 04.26

102 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

DDo not disassemble or repair the

front and rear pillars and roof side

rail containing the curtain shield

airbags. Such changes may disable

the system or cause the curtain

shield airbags to inflate accidental-

ly, resulting in death or serious in-

jury.

DDo not modify or change the sus-

pension system. Such changes may

cause the driver airbag, front pas-

senger airbag, seat belt pretension-

ers and curtain shield airbags to

inflate accidentally, which could re-

sult in death or serious injury.

DDo not use tires or wheels other

than the manufacturer’s recom-

mended size. Such a use may cause

the driver airbag, front passenger

airbag, seat belt pretensioners and

curtain shield airbags to inflate ac-

cidentally, which could result in

death or serious injury. For details,

see “Checking and replacing tires”

on page 551 in Section 7−2.

Failure to follow these instructions

can result in death or serious injury.

Consult your Toyota dealer about any

repair and modification.

If you wish to modify your vehicle for

a person with a physical disability,

consult your Toyota dealer. It may

dangerously interfere with the SRS

side airbags and curtain shield air-

bags operation.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the following

changes without consulting your

Toyota dealer. Such changes can

interfere with proper operation of the

SRS side airbag and curtain shield

airbag system in some cases.

zInstallation of electronic devices

such as a mobile two−way radio,

cassette tape player or compact

disc player

zModification of the suspension sys-

tem

zModification of the side structure of

the passenger compartment

zRepairs made on or near the con-

sole or front seat

XS13135a

This indicator comes on when the igni-

tion switch is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion. It goes off after about 6 seconds.

This means the SRS side airbags and

curtain shield airbags are operating

properly.

07 04.26

103

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

This warning light system monitors the

airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-

sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-

sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-

er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt

buckle switch, front passenger occupant

classification system∗, passenger airbag

off switch, passenger airbag on−off indica-

tor light, seat belt pretensioner assem-

blies, inflators, “RSCA OFF” indicator light,

interconnecting wiring and power sources.

(For details, see “Service reminder indica-

tors and warning buzzers” on page 197 in

Section 1−6.)

∗: The front passenger occupant classifica-

tion system includes the front passenger

occupant classification ECU, load sensor

and front passenger’s seat belt buckle

switch.

If either of the following conditions occurs,

this indicates a malfunction of the airbags

or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

DThe light does not come on when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position or remains on for more than

6 seconds.

DThe light comes on while driving.

The SRS warning light will come on and

passenger airbag on−off indicator light will

indicate “OFF” if there is a malfunction in

the front passenger occupant classification

system.

XS13137

07 04.26

104 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible:

DAny of the SRS side airbags and cur-

tain shield airbags have been inflated.

DThe portion of the doors (shaded in the

illustration) was involved in an accident

that was not severe enough to cause

the SRS side airbags and curtain

shield airbags to inflate.

DThe surface of the seats with the side

airbag (shaded in the illustration) is

scratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-

aged.

DThe portion of the front pillars, rear

pillars or headlining (padding) contain-

ing the curtain shield airbag inside

(shaded in the illustration) is scratched,

cracked, or otherwise damaged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cables

before contacting your Toyota dealer.

Your vehicle is equipped with a front

passenger occupant classification sys-

tem. The system detects conditions

1—4 (Shown in the table on page 106)

Based on these conditions, the systems

below are activated or deactivated:

DFront passenger airbag

DSide airbag on the right front passen-

ger seat

DFront passenger’s seat belt pretension-

The system monitors the weight and

load on the right front passenger seat,

and the seat belt buckle switch to de-

termine conditions 1—4.

In order to ensure that the system de-

tects the conditions correctly:

DDo not place a heavy load on the right

front passenger seat or the seatback

table, etc.

DDo not attach a commercial seatback

table or other heavy item to the back

of the right front passenger seat.

DDo not apply pressure to the right front

passenger seat by resting hands or

legs on the seatback.

XS13025a

The passenger airbag on−off indicator

light indicates the actuation of the front

passenger airbag, side airbag on the

front passenger seat and front passen-

ger seat belt pretensioner.

The passenger airbag on−off indicator

light will indicate “ON” and “OFF”

when the ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position. After about four sec-

onds, it will go off. After that, the front

passenger occupant classification sys-

tem operates and judges whether to in-

dicate “ON” or “OFF”.

07 04.26

—Front passenger occupant

classification system (Regular

cab models)

105

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

The indicator light will indicate “OFF”

when the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position with the condition 2 in the table

shown below.

If the front passenger occupant classifica-

tion system determines that a person of

adult size sits in the front passenger seat

but the “OFF” indicator is illuminated, one

of the following is likely to have occurred:

DObjects are placed under the front pas-

senger seat.

DThe front passenger seatback is in

contact with the back wall.

To ensure that the system correctly de-

tects the presence or absence of a person

of adult size sitting in the right front pas-

senger seat, make sure that none of the

above occur.

Make sure that the “ON” indicator is illu-

minated when a person of adult size is

seated in the right front passenger seat.

If the “OFF” indicator is illuminated, follow

the procedure below:

1. Turn the ignition off.

2. Make sure the airbag off switch is set

to the “AUTO” position.

3. Make sure the right front passenger

seat belt is worn correctly.

4. Ask the front passenger to adjust the

seatback to the upright position and to

sit up straight on the center of the seat

cushion, with his/her legs comfortably

extended forward.

5. Turn the ignition on, having the pas-

senger remain in that position until the

passenger airbag on−off indicator light

indicates “ON”.

If the “OFF” indicator remains illuminated,

move the right front passenger seat fully

rearward.

XS13034g

The SRS warning light will come on

and the passenger airbag on−off indica-

tor light will indicate “OFF” if there is

a malfunction in the front passenger

occupant classification system. Contact

your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

07 04.26

106 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system

Condition detected by

the front passenger

occupant classification

system∗1

Passenger

airbag off

switch

position

Indicator/warning light Devices

Passenger

airbag

on−off

indicator

light

SRS

warning

light

Front

passenger’s

seat belt

reminder

light

Front

passenger

airbag

Side airbag

on the right

front

passenger

seat

Curtain

shield

airbag in

the front

passenger

side

Front

passenger’s

seat belt

pretensioner

1. Adult∗2“AUTO” “ON”

Off Flashing∗5Activated

Activated

“OFF” “OFF” Deactivated

2. Child∗3 or child

restraint system∗4

“AUTO”

“OFF”∗6Off Flashing∗5Deactivated

Activated

“OFF”

3. Unoccupied

“AUTO” Not

illuminated Off Off Deactivated Deactivated

“OFF” “OFF”

4. There is a

malfunction in the

system

“AUTO”

“OFF” On Off Deactivated Activated

“OFF”

∗1: The right front passenger on the bench seat

∗2: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may

recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.

∗3: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her

as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.

07 04.26

107

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

∗4: Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward−facing child restraint system should only

be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (See “Child restraint” on page 114 in this Section as for installing the

child restraint system.)

∗5: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.

∗6: In case the indicator is not illuminated, see “Child restraint” on page 114 as for installing the child restraint system properly.

07 04.26

108 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

CAUTION

To avoid potential death or serious

injury when the front passenger occu-

pant classification system does not

detect the conditions correctly, ob-

serve the following.

DMake sure the passenger airbag on−

off indicator light indicates “ON”

when using the seat belt extender

for the front passenger seat. If the

indicator light indicates “OFF”, dis-

connect the extender tongue from

the seat belt buckle, then reconnect

the seat belt. Reconnect the seat

belt extender after making sure the

indicator light indicates “ON”. If

you use the seat belt extender

while the indicator light indicates

“OFF”, the front passenger airbag

and side airbag on the front pas-

senger side may not activate cor-

rectly, which could cause death or

serious injury in the event of colli-

sion.

DDo not recline the front passenger

seatback so far that it touches a

backwall. This may cause the “OFF”

indicator to be illuminated, which

indicates that the passenger’s air-

bags will not deploy in the event of

a severe accident. If the seatback

touches the backwall, return the

seatback to a position where it

does not touch the backwall.

Keep the front passenger seatback

as upright as possible when the ve-

hicle is moving. Reclining the seat-

back excessively may lessen the ef-

fectiveness of the seat belt system.

DIf an adult sits in the front passen-

ger seat, the passenger airbag on−

off indicator light should indicate

“ON”. If the “OFF” indicator is illu-

minated, ask the passenger to sit

up straight, well back in the seat,

feet on the floor and with the seat

belt worn correctly. If the “OFF”

indicator still remains illuminated,

move the front passenger seat fully

rearward.

DWear the seat belt properly.

DMake sure the front passenger’s

seat belt tab has not been left in-

serted in the buckle before some-

one sits in the front passenger

seat.

DDo not place a heavy load on the

front passenger seat, etc.

DDo not apply pressure to the front

passenger seat by resting hands or

legs on the seatback.

DDo not put objects under the front

passenger seat.

DDo not attach any heavy items to

the back of the front passenger

seat.

DWhen it is unavoidable to install the

forward−facing child restraint sys-

tem on the front passenger seat,

install the child restraint system on

the front passenger seat in the

proper order. (As for the installation

order, see “—Installation with seat

belt” on page 117 in this Section.)

07 04.26

109

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

DDo not modify or remove the front

seats.

DDo not kick the front passenger

seat or subject it to severe impact.

Otherwise, the SRS warning light

may come on to indicate a malfunc-

tion of the detection system. In this

case, contact your Toyota dealer im-

mediately.

The passenger airbag on−off indicator light

may indicate “ON” (the front passenger

airbag and side airbag on the front

passenger seat may deploy) even if

observing the above cautions, when a

child sits in, or a forward−facing child

restraint system is installed on the front

passenger seat. Refer to all the cautions

in “—SRS driver airbag and front

passenger airbag” on page 75, “—SRS

side airbags and curtain shield airbags” on

page 94 and “Child restraint” on page 114

in this Section.

Your vehicle is equipped with a front

passenger occupant classification sys-

tem. The system detects conditions

1—4 (Shown in the table on page 111)

Based on these conditions, the systems

below are activated or deactivated:

DFront passenger airbag

DSide airbag on the right front passen-

ger seat

DFront passenger’s seat belt pretension-

The system monitors the weight and

load on the right front passenger seat,

and the seat belt buckle switch to de-

termine conditions 1—4.

In order to ensure the system detects

the conditions correctly:

DDo not place a heavy load on the right

front passenger seat or the seatback

table, etc.

DDo not attach a commercial seatback

table or other heavy item to the back

of the right front passenger seat.

DDo not apply pressure to the right front

passenger seat by resting hands or

legs on the seatback.

XS13025a

The passenger airbag on−off indicator

light indicates the actuation of the front

passenger airbag, side airbag on the

front passenger seat and front passen-

ger seat belt pretensioner.

The passenger airbag on−off indicator

light will indicate “ON” and “OFF”

when the ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position. After about four sec-

onds, it will go off. After that, the front

passenger occupant classification sys-

tem operates and judges whether to in-

dicate “ON” or “OFF”.

07 04.26

—Front passenger occupant

classification system

(Double cab and Crew Max models)

110 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

The indicator light will indicate “OFF”

when the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position with the condition 2 in the table

shown below.

If the front passenger occupant classifica-

tion system determines that a person of

adult size sits in the right front passenger

seat but the “OFF” indicator is illuminated,

one of the following is likely to have oc-

curred:

DA rear passenger lifts the front passen-

ger seat cushion with their legs.

DObjects are placed under the front pas-

senger seat.

DThe front passenger seatback is in

contact with the rear seat.

To ensure that the system correctly de-

tects the presence or absence of a person

of adult size sitting in the right front pas-

senger seat, make sure that none of the

above occur.

Make sure that the “ON” indicator is illu-

minated when a person of adult size is

seated in the right front passenger seat.

If the “OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask

the passenger to sit up straight, well back

in the seat, and with the seat belt worn

correctly. If the “OFF” indicator remains

illuminated, either ask the passenger to

move to the rear seat, or if that is not

possible, move the right front passenger

seat fully rearward.

XS13034g

The SRS warning light will come on

and the passenger airbag on−off indica-

tor light will indicate “OFF” if there is

a malfunction in the front passenger

occupant classification system. Contact

your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

07 04.26

111

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system

Condition detected by

the front passenger

occupant classification

system∗1

Indicator/warning light Devices

Passenger

airbag on−off

indicator light

SRS warning

light

Front

passenger’s

seat belt

reminder light

Front

passenger

airbag

Side airbag

on the right

front

passenger

seat

Curtain shield

airbag in the

front

passenger

side

Front

passenger’s

seat belt

pretensioner

1. Adult∗2“ON” Off Flashing∗5Activated

2. Child∗3 or child

restraint system∗4“OFF”∗6Off Flashing∗5Deactivated

Activated

3. Unoccupied Not

illuminated Off Off Deactivated Deactivated

4. There is a

malfunction in the

system

“OFF” On Off Deactivated Activated

∗1: The right front passenger on the bench seat.

∗2: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may

recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.

∗3: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her

as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.

∗4: Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward−facing child restraint system should only be

installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (See “Child restraint” on page 114 in this Section as for installing the

child restraint system.)

∗5: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.

∗6: In case the indicator is not illuminated, see “Child restraint” on page 114 as for installing the child restraint system properly.

07 04.26

112 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

CAUTION

To avoid potential death or serious

injury when the front passenger occu-

pant classification system does not

detect the conditions correctly, ob-

serve the following.

DMake sure the passenger airbag on−

off indicator light indicates “ON”

when using the seat belt extender

for the front passenger seat. If the

indicator light indicates “OFF”, dis-

connect the extender tongue from

the seat belt buckle, then reconnect

the seat belt. Reconnect the seat

belt extender after making sure the

indicator light indicates “ON”. If

you use the seat belt extender

while the indicator light indicates

“OFF”, the front passenger airbag

and side airbag on the front pas-

senger side may not activate cor-

rectly, which could cause death or

serious injury in the event of colli-

sion.

DDo not recline the front passenger

seatback so far that it touches a

rear seat. This may cause the

“OFF” indicator to be illuminated,

which indicates that the passen-

ger’s airbags will not deploy in the

event of a severe accident. If the

seatback touches the rear seat re-

turn the seatback to a position

where it does not touches the rear

seat.

Keep the front passenger seatback

as upright as possible when the ve-

hicle is moving. Reclining the seat-

back excessively may lessen the ef-

fectiveness of the seat belt system.

DIf an adult sits in the front passen-

ger seat, the passenger airbag on−

off indicator light should indicate

“ON”. If the “OFF” indicator is illu-

minated, ask the passenger to sit

up straight, well back in the seat,

feet on the floor and with the seat

belt worn correctly. If the “OFF”

indicator still remains illuminated,

either ask the passenger to move to

the rear seat, or if that is not pos-

sible, move the front passenger

seat fully rearward.

DWear the seat belt properly.

DMake sure the front passenger’s

seat belt tab has not been left in-

serted in the buckle before some-

one sits in the right front passen-

ger seat.

DDo not place a heavy load on the

front passenger seat or the seat-

back table, etc.

DDo not apply pressure to the front

passenger seat by resting hands or

legs on the seatback.

DDo not let a rear passenger lift the

front passenger seat with their feet

or press on the seatback with their

legs.

DDo not put objects under the front

passenger seat.

DDo not attach a commercial seat-

back table or other heavy item to

the back of the right front passen-

ger seat.

DChild restraint systems installed on

the rear seat should not contact the

front seatbacks.

07 04.26

113

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

DWhen it is unavoidable to install the

forward−facing child restraint sys-

tem on the front passenger seat,

install the child restraint system on

the right front passenger seat in

the proper order. (As for the instal-

lation order, see “—Installation with

seat belt” on page 127 in this Sec-

tion.)

DDo not modify or remove the front

seats.

DDo not kick the front passenger

seat or subject it to severe impact.

Otherwise, the SRS warning light

may come on to indicate a malfunc-

tion of the detection system. In this

case, contact your Toyota dealer im-

mediately.

The passenger airbag on−off indicator light

may indicate “ON” (the front passenger

airbag and side airbag on the front

passenger seat may deploy) even if

observing the above cautions, when a

child sits in, or a forward−facing child

restraint system is installed on the front

passenger seat. Refer to all the cautions

in “—SRS driver airbag and front

passenger airbag” on page 86, “—SRS

side airbags and curtain shield airbags” on

page 94 and “Child restraint” on page 114.

XS13029

The roll sensing of curtain shield air-

bags off switch (“RSCA OFF” switch)

can turn off the curtain shield airbags

and seat belt pretensioners in a vehicle

rollover. This switch should only be

used if inflation is not desired (such as

extreme off−road driving).

07 04.26

—Roll sensing of curtain

shield airbags off switch

114 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

When you push the “RSCA OFF” switch

for a few seconds with the ignition switch

on, the “RSCA OFF” indicator light comes

on and the roll sensing function is turned

off. When you push the switch again, the

indicator light goes off and the roll sens-

ing function is turned on. (For details

about the roll sensing function, see

“—SRS side airbags and curtain shield

airbags” on page 94 in this Section.)

In a severe side impact, the curtain shield

airbags on impacted side will inflate even

if the roll sensing function is turned off.

(For details about the curtain shield air-

bags, see “—SRS side airbags and curtain

shield airbags” on page 94 in this Sec-

tion.)

In a severe frontal impact, the seat belt

pretensioners will work even if the roll

sensing function is turned off. (For details

about the seat belt pretensioners, see

“—Seat belt pretensioners” on page 72 in

this Section.)

If the ignition switch is turned to “ACC” or

“LOCK” with the roll sensing function off

and then the ignition switch is turned back

to “ON”, the roll sensing function will turn

back on automatically.

CAUTION

DBefore normal driving, make sure

the “RSCA OFF” indicator light is

off.

DWhen the roll sensing function is

turned off (and the “RSCA OFF”

indicator light is on), the curtain

shield airbags and seat belt preten-

sioners will not work in a vehicle

rollover. Turning off the curtain

shield airbags and seat belt preten-

sioners reduces occupant protection

which your vehicle safety systems

can provide in accidents and in-

crease the likelihood of death or

serious injuries.

Toyota strongly urges the use of ap-

propriate child restraint systems for

children.

The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A.

and Canada now require the use of a

child restraint system.

Your vehicle conforms to SAEJ1819.

If a child is too large for a child restraint

system, the child should sit in the rear

seat and must be restrained using the

vehicle’s seat belt. See “Seat belts” on

page 65 in this Section for details.

CAUTION

DFor effective protection in automo-

bile accidents and sudden stops, a

child must be properly restrained,

using a seat belt or child restraint

system depending on the age and

size of the child. Holding a child in

your arms is not a substitute for a

child restraint system. In an acci-

dent, the child can be crushed

against the windshield, or between

you and the vehicle’s interior.

07 04.26

Child restraint—

—Child restraint precautions

115

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

DRegular cab models—

Toyota strongly urges use of a

proper child restraint system which

conforms to the size of the child.

Double cab and Crew Max models—

Toyota strongly urges use of a

proper child restraint system which

conforms to the size of the child,

installed on the rear seat. Accord-

ing to accident statistics, the child

is safer when properly restrained in

the rear seat than in the front seat.

DRegular cab models—

Never put infant or child age 1 to

12 in a passenger risk group on the

right front passenger seat with the

passenger airbag off switch in the

“AUTO” position. In the event of an

accident, the force of the rapid

inflation of the front passenger air-

bag can cause death or serious in-

jury to the child.

If you must put infant or child age

1 to 12 in a passenger risk group

on the right front seat, make sure

that the passenger airbag off switch

is in the “OFF” position with the

key removed and that the indicator

light is on. (For details, see “—SRS

driver airbag and front passenger

airbag” on page 75 in this Section.)

DNever install a rear−facing child re-

straint system on the front passen-

ger seat even if the passenger air-

bag on−off indicator light indicates

“OFF”. In the event of an accident,

the impact of the rapid inflation of

the front passenger airbag could

cause death or serious injury to the

child if the rear−facing child re-

straint system is installed on the

front passenger seat.

DA forward−facing child restraint sys-

tem should be allowed to be

installed on the front passenger

seat only when it is unavoidable.

Always move the seat as far back

as possible even if the passenger

airbag on−off indicator light indi-

cates “OFF”, because the front pas-

senger airbag could inflate with

considerable speed and force.

Otherwise, the child may be killed

or seriously injured.

DDo not allow the child to lean his/

her head or any part of his/her

body against the door or the area

of the seat, front or rear pillar or

roof side rail from which the side

airbags or curtain shield airbags

deploy even if the child is seated in

the child restraint system. It is dan-

gerous if the side airbag and cur-

tain shield airbag inflate, and the

impact could cause death or seri-

ous injury to the child.

07 04.26

116 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

DDo not use the seat belt extender

when installing a child restraint

system on the front or rear passen-

ger seat. If installing a child re-

straint system with the seat belt

extender connected to the seat belt,

the seat belt will not securely hold

the child restraint system, which

could cause death or serious injury

to the child or other passengers in

the event of collision.

DMake sure you have complied with

all installation instructions provided

by the child restraint manufacturer

and that the system is properly se-

cured. If it is not secured properly,

it may cause death or serious injury

to the child in the event of a sud-

den stop or accident.

A child restraint system for a small

child or baby must itself be properly

restrained on the seat with the lap por-

tion of the lap/shoulder belt. You must

carefully consult the manufacturer’s

instructions which accompany the child

restraint system.

To provide proper restraint, use a child

restraint system following the manufactur-

er’s instructions about the appropriate age

and size of the child for the child restraint

system.

Install the child restraint system correctly

following the instructions provided by its

manufacturer. General directions are also

provided under the following illustrations.

The child restraint system should be

installed in the rear seat if your vehicle

is equipped with rear seats. According to

accident statistics, the child is safer when

properly restrained in the rear seat than

in the front seat.

When not using the child restraint system,

keep it secured with the seat belt or place

it somewhere other than the passenger

compartment. This will prevent it from in-

juring passengers in the event of a sud-

den stop or accident.

Child restraint systems are classified into

the following 3 types depending on the

child’s age and size.

(A) Infant seat

(B) Convertible seat

Install the child restraint system following

the instructions provided by its manufac-

turer.

Your vehicle has anchor brackets for se-

curing the top strap of a child restraint

system.

For instructions about how to use the an-

chor bracket, see “—Using a top strap” on

page 138 or 141 in this Section.

The child restraint lower anchorages

approved for your vehicle may also be

used. See “—Installation with child

restraint lower anchorages” on page 146 or

148 in this Section.

07 04.26

—Child restraint system

—Types of child restraint

system

117

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13028

(A) Infant seat

XS13026

(B) Convertible seat

XS13027

XS13036

(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION

An infant seat must be used in rear−

facing position only.

07 04.26

—Installation with seat belt

(Regular cab models)

118 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13154

CAUTION

Never install a rear−facing child re-

straint system on the front passenger

seat with the passenger airbag off

switch in the “AUTO” position. In the

event of an accident, the force of the

rapid inflation of the front passenger

airbag can cause death or serious in-

jury to the child if the rear−facing

child restraint system is installed on

the front passenger seat.

XS13156

When you install a rear−facing child re-

straint system which belongs to a pas-

senger risk group on the right front

passenger seat, turn the passenger air-

bag off switch counterclockwise to the

“OFF” position and remove the key.

(For details, see “—SRS driver airbag

and front passenger airbag” on page 75

in this Section.)

The indicator light comes on when the

system is off.

CAUTION

DIf you must install a rear−facing

child restraint system on the right

front passenger seat, make sure

that the front passenger airbag off

switch is in the “OFF” position with

the key removed and that the indi-

cator light is on.

DNever install a rear−facing child re-

straint system on the center front

seat.

07 04.26

119

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13150a

Same angle

Same position

DBench seat: In order to firmly se-

cure the child restraint system to

the right front passenger seat, align

the seatback angle and seat posi-

tion of the right front passenger

seat to match the center front pas-

senger seat. Otherwise, it could

cause death or injury in a collision.

XS13039

To install the infant seat:

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the infant seat following the

instructions provided by its manufactur-

er and insert the tab into the buckle

taking care not to twist the belt. Keep

the lap portion of the belt tight.

CAUTION

DAfter inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and

that the lap and shoulder portions

of the belt are not twisted.

DDo not insert coins, clips, etc. in

the buckle as this may prevent your

child from properly latching the tab

and buckle.

DIf the seat belt does not function

normally, it cannot protect your

child from death or serious injury.

Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-

ately. Do not install the child

restraint system on the seat until

the seat belt is fixed.

07 04.26

120 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13040

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it

in the lock mode. When the belt is

then retracted even slightly, it cannot

be extended.

To hold the infant seat securely, make

sure the belt is in the lock mode before

letting the belt retract.

XS13041

3. While pressing the infant seat firmly

against the seat cushion and seatback,

let the shoulder belt retract as far as

it will go to hold the infant seat secure-

ly.

XS13042

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-

tem in different directions to be sure

it is secure. Follow all the installation

instructions provided by its manufac-

turer.

07 04.26

121

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13044

To remove the infant seat:

Press the buckle release button and allow

the belt to retract completely. The belt will

move freely again and be ready to work

for an adult or older child passenger.

XS13067

(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION

A convertible seat must be used in for-

ward−facing or rear−facing position de-

pending on the child’s age and size of

the child. When installing, follow the

manufacturer’s instructions about the

applicable age and size of the child as

well as directions for installing the

child restraint system.

XS13155

CAUTION

Rear−facing child restraint system:

Never install a rear−facing child re-

straint system on the front passenger

seat with the passenger airbag off

switch in the “AUTO” position. In the

event of an accident, the force of the

rapid inflation of the front passenger

airbag can cause death or serious in-

jury to the child if the rear−facing

child restraint system is installed on

the front passenger seat.

07 04.26

122 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13156

When you install a rear−facing child re-

straint system which belongs to a pas-

senger risk group on the right front

passenger seat, turn the passenger air-

bag off switch counterclockwise to the

“OFF” position and remove the key.

(For details, see “—SRS driver airbag

and front passenger airbag” on page 75

in this Section.)

The indicator light comes on when the

system is off.

CAUTION

DIf you must install a rear−facing

child restraint system on the right

front passenger seat, make sure

that the passenger airbag off switch

is in the “OFF” position with the

key removed and that the indicator

light is on.

DNever install a rear−facing child re-

straint system on the center front

seat.

CAUTION

Forward−facing child restraint system:

A forward−facing child restraint

system which belongs to a passenger

risk group should never be installed

on the right front passenger seat with

the passenger airbag off switch in the

“AUTO” position, because the force

of the deploying airbag could cause

death or serious injury to the child in

forward seating position. (For details,

see “—SRS driver airbag and front

passenger airbag” on page 75 in this

Section.)

07 04.26

123

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13151

Same angle

Same position

DBench seat: In order to firmly se-

cure the child restraint system to

the center front passenger seat,

align the seatback angle and seat

position of the right front passen-

ger seat to match the center front

passenger seat. If the child restraint

system cannot be firmly secured,

install it onto the right front pas-

senger seat. Otherwise, it could

cause death or injury in a collision.

DBench seat: If the child restraint

system installed on the center front

passenger seat interferes with the

driver, install it onto the right front

passenger seat.

XS13047

To install the forward−facing convertible

seat:

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the convertible seat following

the instructions provided by its

manufacturer and insert the tab into

the buckle taking care not to twist the

belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt

tight.

For instructions concerning the installation

of the rear−facing convertible seat, see

“(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION” on

page 117.

CAUTION

DAfter inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and

that the lap and shoulder portions

of the belt are not twisted.

DDo not insert coins, clips, etc. in

the buckle as this may prevent your

child from properly latching the tab

and buckle.

DIf the seat belt does not function

normally, it cannot protect your

child from death or serious injury.

Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-

ately. Do not install the child

restraint system on the seat until

the seat belt is fixed.

07 04.26

124 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13048

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it

in the lock mode. When the belt is

then retracted even slightly, it cannot

be extended.

To hold the convertible seat securely,

make sure the belt is in the lock mode

before letting the belt retract.

XS13049

3. While pressing the convertible seat

firmly against the seat cushion and

seatback, let the shoulder belt retract

as far as it will go to hold the convert-

ible seat securely.

XS13050

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-

tem in different directions to be sure

it is secure. Follow all the installation

instructions provided by its manufac-

turer.

07 04.26

125

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13051

To remove the convertible seat:

Press the buckle release button and allow

the belt to retract completely. The belt will

move freely again and be ready to work

for an adult or older child passenger.

XS13052

A booster seat must be used in for-

ward−facing position only.

CAUTION

A forward−facing child restraint

system which belongs to a passenger

risk group should never be installed

on the right front passenger seat with

the passenger airbag off switch in the

“AUTO” position, because the force

of the deploying airbag could cause

death or serious injury to the child in

forward seating position. (For details,

see “—SRS driver airbag and front

passenger airbag” on page 75 in this

Section.)

07 04.26

126 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13053

To install the booster seat:

Sit the child on a booster seat. Run the

lap and shoulder belt through or around

the booster seat and across the child fol-

lowing the instructions provided by its

manufacturer and insert the tab into the

buckle taking care not to twist the belt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is correctly

across the child’s shoulder and that the

lap belt is positioned as low as possible

on the child’s hips. See “Seat belts” on

page 65 in this Section for details.

CAUTION

DAlways make sure the shoulder belt

is positioned across the center of

child’s shoulder. The belt should be

kept away from child’s neck, but

not falling off child’s shoulder.

Otherwise, the child may be killed

or seriously injured in case of sud-

den braking or a collision.

DBoth high−positioned lap belts and

loose−fitting belts could cause

death or serious injuries due to

sliding under the lap belt during a

collision or other unintended event.

Keep the lap belt positioned as low

on a child’s hips as possible.

DFor child’s safety, do not place the

shoulder belt under child’s arm.

DAfter inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and

that the lap and shoulder portions

of the belt are not twisted.

DDo not insert coins, clips, etc. in

the buckle as this may prevent your

child from properly latching the tab

and buckle.

DIf the seat belt does not function

normally, it cannot protect your

child from death or serious injury.

Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-

ately. Do not install the child

restraint system on the seat until

the seat belt is fixed.

07 04.26

127

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13051

To remove the booster seat:

Press the buckle release button and allow

the belt to retract.

XS13054

(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION

An infant seat must be used in rear−

facing position only.

XS13055

CAUTION

DNever install a rear−facing child re-

straint system on the front passen-

ger seat even if the passenger air-

bag on−off indicator light indicates

“OFF”. In the event of an accident,

the force of the rapid inflation of

the front passenger airbag could

cause death or serious injury to the

child if the rear−facing child re-

straint system is installed on the

front passenger seat.

07 04.26

—Installation with seat belt

(Double cab and Crew Max

models)

128 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13056

DDo not install a child restraint sys-

tem on the rear seat if it interferes

with the lock mechanism of the

front seats. Otherwise, the child or

front seat occupant, may be killed

or seriously injured in case of sud-

den braking or a collision.

DIf the driver’s seat position does

not allow sufficient space for safe

installation, install the child re-

straint system on the rear right

seat. Child restraint system

installed on the rear seat should

not contact the front seatbacks.

XS13193

Same angle

Same position

DCrew Max models: When installing

a child restraint system in the rear

seat center position, adjust both

seat cushions to the same position

and align both seatbacks at the

same angle. Otherwise, the child re-

straint system cannot be securely

restrained and this may cause death

or serious injuries in a collision.

XS13057

To install the infant seat:

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the infant seat following the

instructions provided by its manufactur-

er and insert the tab into the buckle

taking care not to twist the belt. Keep

the lap portion of the belt tight.

07 04.26

129

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

CAUTION

DAfter inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and

that the lap and shoulder portions

of the belt are not twisted.

DDo not insert coins, clips, etc. in

the buckle as this may prevent your

child from properly latching the tab

and buckle.

DIf the seat belt does not function

normally, it cannot protect your

child from death or serious injury.

Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-

ately. Do not install the child

restraint system on the seat until

the seat belt is fixed.

XS13058

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it

in the lock mode. When the belt is

then retracted even slightly, it cannot

be extended.

To hold the infant seat securely, make

sure the belt is in the lock mode before

letting the belt retract.

XS13059

3. While pressing the infant seat firmly

against the seat cushion and seatback,

let the shoulder belt retract as far as

it will go to hold the infant seat secure-

ly.

07 04.26

130 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13060

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-

tem in different directions to be sure

it is secure. Follow all the installation

instructions provided by its manufac-

turer.

XS13061

To remove the infant seat:

Press the buckle release button and allow

the belt to retract completely. The belt will

move freely again and be ready to work

for an adult or older child passenger.

XS13062

(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION

A convertible seat must be used in for-

ward−facing or rear−facing position de-

pending on the age and size of the

child. When installing, follow the

manufacturer’s instructions about the

applicable age and size of the child as

well as directions for installing the

child restraint system.

07 04.26

131

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Install the child restraint system on the

front passenger seat only when it is un-

avoidable. Your vehicle is equipped with a

front passenger occupant classification

system. In order to activate the occupant

classification system correctly, install the

forward−facing child restraint system on

the front passenger seat in the following

order:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

2. Move the right front passenger seat to

the rearward position.

3. When it is unavoidable, put the child

restraint system on the front passenger

seat without putting your weight on the

front passenger seat.

4. Insert the seat belt tab into the seat

belt buckle.

5. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it

in the lock mode. When the belt is

then retracted even slightly, it cannot

be extended. To hold the seat securely,

make sure the belt is in the lock mode

before letting the belt retract.

6. While pressing the convertible seat

firmly against the seat cushion and

seatback, let the shoulder belt retract

as far as it will go to hold the convert-

ible seat securely.

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-

tem in different directions to be sure

it is secure. Follow all the installation

instructions provided by its manufac-

turer.

7. Put a child on the child restraint sys-

tem and secure the child, complying

with the instructions provided by the

child restraint system manufacturer.

The passenger airbag on−off indicator light

should indicate “OFF” when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position and the

child is in the child restraint system after

following these procedures. The “OFF” in-

dicator indicates the SRS front passenger

airbag and side airbag on the passenger

side will not deploy. if the indicator light

indicates “ON”, do the following procedure:

1. Turn the ignition off.

2. Remove the child restraint system.

3. When reinstalling a child restraint sys-

tem, make sure the seatback does not

press the child restraint system into

the seat cushion. If this occurs, adjust

the seatback angle slightly.

4. Then make sure the head restraint is

not pressing the child restraint system

into the seat cushion. If this occurs,

raise the head restraint.

5. Turn the ignition on again.

The passenger airbag on−off indicator light

should indicate “OFF”. If the indicator light

still indicates “ON” when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position, then

the SRS front passenger airbag and side

airbag on the passenger side may deploy

in an accident. Do not drive the vehicle

in this condition. Remove the child re-

straint system and contact your Toyota

dealer.

07 04.26

132 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

CAUTION

DNever install a rear−facing child re-

straint system on the front passen-

ger seat. A forward−facing child re-

straint system should only be

installed on the front passenger

seat when unavoidable. If you must

install the child restraint system on

the front passenger seat, put the

seat in its most rearward position,

and install the forward−facing child

restraint system in the proper or-

der. Otherwise, the front passenger

occupant classification system can

not detect the presence of the child

restraint system and the front pas-

senger airbag and side airbag on

the front passenger seat could

deploy, and the impact could cause

death or serious injury to the child.

XS13063

CAUTION

DNever install a rear−facing child re-

straint system on the front passen-

ger seat even if the passenger air-

bag on−off indicator light indicates

“OFF”. In the event of an accident,

the impact of the rapid inflation of

the front passenger airbag could

cause death or serious injury to the

child if the rear−facing child re-

straint system is installed on the

front passenger seat.

XS13064

Move seat

fully back

DA forward−facing child restraint sys-

tem should be allowed to be

installed on the front passenger

seat only when it is unavoidable.

Always move the seat as far back

as possible even if the passenger

airbag on−off indicator light indi-

cates “OFF”, because the front pas-

senger airbag could inflate with

considerable speed and force.

Otherwise, the child may be killed

or seriously injured.

07 04.26

133

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

DDo not allow the child to lean his/

her head or any part of his/her

body against the door or the area

of the seat, front or rear pillar or

roof side rail from which the side

airbags or curtain shield airbags

deploy even if the child is seated in

the child restraint system. It is dan-

gerous if the side airbag and cur-

tain shield airbag inflate, and the

impact could cause death or seri-

ous injury to the child.

XS13065

DDo not install a child restraint sys-

tem on the rear seat if it interferes

with the lock mechanism of the

front seats. Otherwise, the child or

front seat occupants may be killed

or seriously injured in case of sud-

den braking or a collision.

DIf the driver’s seat position does

not allow sufficient space for safe

installation, install the child re-

straint system on the rear right

seat. Child restraint system

installed on the rear seat should

not contact the front seatbacks.

XS13194

Same angle

Same position

DCrew Max models: When installing

a child restraint system in the rear

seat center position, adjust both

seat cushions to the same position

and align both seatbacks at the

same angle. Otherwise, the child re-

straint system cannot be securely

restrained and this may cause death

or serious injuries in a collision.

07 04.26

134 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13066

To install the forward−facing convertible

seat:

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the convertible seat following

the instructions provided by its

manufacturer and insert the tab into

the buckle taking care not to twist the

belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt

tight.

For instructions concerning the installation

of the rear−facing convertible seat, see

“(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION” on

page 127.

CAUTION

DAfter inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and

that the lap and shoulder portions

of the belt are not twisted.

DDo not insert coins, clips, etc. in

the buckle as this may prevent your

child from properly latching the tab

and buckle.

DIf the seat belt does not function

normally, it cannot protect your

child from death or serious injury.

Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-

ately. Do not install the child

restraint system on the seat until

the seat belt is fixed.

XS13068

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it

in the lock mode. When the belt is

then retracted even slightly, it cannot

be extended.

To hold the convertible seat securely,

make sure the belt is in the lock mode

before letting the belt retract.

07 04.26

135

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13069

3. While pressing the convertible seat

firmly against the seat cushion and

seatback, let the shoulder belt retract

as far as it will go to hold the convert-

ible seat securely.

XS13070

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-

tem in different directions to be sure

it is secure. Follow all the installation

instructions provided by its manufac-

turer.

XS13071

To remove the convertible seat:

Press the buckle release button and allow

the belt to retract completely. The belt will

move freely again and be ready to work

for an adult or older child passenger.

07 04.26

136 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13072

A booster seat must be used in for-

ward−facing position only.

XS13073

Move seat

fully back

CAUTION

DA forward−facing child restraint sys-

tem should be allowed to be

installed on the front passenger

seat only when it is unavoidable.

Always move the seat as far back

as possible even if the passenger

airbag on−off indicator light indi-

cates “OFF”, because the front pas-

senger airbag could inflate with

considerable speed and force.

Otherwise, the child may be killed

or seriously injured.

DDo not allow the child to lean his/

her head or any part of his/her

body against the door or the area

of the seat, front or rear pillar or

roof side rail from which the side

airbags or curtain shield airbags

deploy even if the child is seated in

the child restraint system. It is dan-

gerous if the side airbag and cur-

tain shield airbag inflate, and the

impact could cause death or seri-

ous injury to the child.

07 04.26

137

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13195

Same angle

Same position

DCrew Max models: When installing

a child restraint system in the rear

seat center position, adjust both

seat cushions to the same position

and align both seatbacks at the

same angle. Otherwise, the child re-

straint system cannot be securely

restrained and this may cause death

or serious injuries in a collision.

XS13074

To install the booster seat:

Sit the child on a booster seat. Run the

lap and shoulder belt through or around

the booster seat and across the child fol-

lowing the instructions provided by its

manufacturer and insert the tab into the

buckle taking care not to twist the belt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is correctly

across the child’s shoulder and that the

lap belt is positioned as low as possible

on the child’s hips. See “Seat belts” on

page 65 in this Section for details.

CAUTION

DAlways make sure the shoulder belt

is positioned across the center of

child’s shoulder. The belt should be

kept away from child’s neck, but

not falling off child’s shoulder.

Otherwise, the child may be killed

or seriously injured in case of sud-

den braking or a collision.

DBoth high−positioned lap belts and

loose−fitting belts could cause

death or serious injuries due to

sliding under the lap belt during a

collision or other unintended event.

Keep the lap belt positioned as low

on a child’s hips as possible.

DFor child’s safety, do not place the

shoulder belt under child’s arm.

DAfter inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and

that the lap and shoulder portions

of the belt are not twisted.

DDo not insert coins, clips, etc. in

the buckle as this may prevent your

child from properly latching the tab

and buckle.

07 04.26

138 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

DIf the seat belt does not function

normally, it cannot protect your

child from death or serious injury.

Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-

ately. Do not install the child

restraint system on the seat until

the seat belt is fixed. XS13071

To remove the booster seat:

Press the buckle release button and allow

the belt to retract.

XS13075

Follow the procedure below for a child

restraint system that requires the use

of a top strap.

07 04.26

—Using a top strap

(Regular cab models)

139

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13076a

Symbol mark

Anchor brackets

Bench seats

XS13144a

Symbol mark

Anchor

bracket

Separate seats

Use the anchor bracket on the back panel

to attach the top strap.

Anchor brackets are installed for each

passenger seating position.

This symbol indicates the locations of the

anchor brackets. XS13077

TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:

1. Remove the passenger head re-

straint.

07 04.26

140 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13078

2. Lightly push down on the top sur-

face of the anchor bracket cover,

then pull it forward to remove.

XS13079

3. Fix the child restraint system with

the seat belt.

Latch the hook onto the anchor

bracket and tighten the top strap.

For instructions on installing the child re-

straint system, see “Child restraint” on

page 114 in this Section.

XS13080

4. Replace the passenger head re-

straint.

Store any removed covers in a safe place

such as the glove box.

Be sure to replace all covers when the

anchor bracket is not in use.

07 04.26

141

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

CAUTION

DWhen returning the seatback to its

original position, make sure the

seatback is securely locked by

pushing forward and rearward on

the top of the seatback.

DMake sure the top strap is securely

latched, and check that the child

restraint system is secure by push-

ing and pulling it in different direc-

tions. Follow all the installation in-

structions provided by its manufac-

turer.

XS13082a

Right position

XS13083a

Center position

XS13084a

Left position

Follow the procedure below for a child

restraint system that requires the use

of a top strap.

07 04.26

—Using a top strap

(Double cab models)

142 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13085d

Inner anchor

strap ring(s)

Strap or

routing device

Use the strap or routing device and the

inner anchor strap rings to attach the top

strap.

Anchor strap ring are installed for each

rear seating position.

XS13086a

TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:

1. Raise the head restraints.

XS13087b

2. Pull up the strap.

07 04.26

143

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13088b

Routing

device

3. Fix the child restraint system with

the seat belt.

Route the top strap through the

routing device as shown in the il-

lustration.

XS13089b

Inner anchor

strap ring

4. Latch the hook onto the inner an-

chor strap ring and tighten the top

strap.

XS13090b

5. Lower the head restraints.

For instructions on installing the child re-

straint system, see “Child restraint” on

page 114 in this Section.

CAUTION

Make sure the top strap is securely

latched, and check that the child re-

straint system is secure by pushing

and pulling it in different directions.

Follow all the installation instructions

provided by its manufacturer.

6. If two child seats will be installed,

use the outboard seating positions.

07 04.26

144 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13197

Follow the procedure below for a child

restraint system that requires the use

of a top strap.

XS13198Symbol

Anchor brackets

Use the anchor brackets behind the rear

seat seatbacks to secure the top strap.

Anchor brackets are installed for each

seating position of the rear seat.

This symbol indicates the locations of

user ready anchor brackets.

XS13199

TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:

1. Remove the head restraint.

07 04.26

—Using a top strap

(Crew Max models)

145

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13200

2. Open the anchor bracket cover with

the symbol as shown in the illustra-

tion.

XS13210

3. Pull the seatback release lever and

swing the seatback forward slightly,

then latch the hook onto the anchor

bracket. Return the seatback to its

original position.

Fix the child restraint system with

the seat belt and tighten the top

strap.

For instructions on installing the child re-

straint system, see “Child restraint” on

page 114 in this Section.

CAUTION

DWhen returning the seatback to its

original position, make sure the

seatback is securely locked by

pushing forward and rearward on

the top of the seatback. Failure to

do so will prevent the seat belt

from operating properly.

DMake sure the top strap is securely

latched, and check that the child

restraint system is secure by push-

ing and pulling it in different direc-

tions. Follow all the installation in-

structions provided by its manufac-

turer.

07 04.26

146 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13202

4. Replace the head restraint.

5. If two child seats will be installed,

use the outboard seating positions.

XS13091

Lower anchorages for the child restraint

systems complying with the FMVSS225

or CMVSS210.2 specifications are

installed in the front seat.

The anchorages are installed in the gap

between the seat cushion and seatback of

the right side of the seat as shown in the

illustration.

Child restraint systems complying with the

FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specification

can be fixed to these anchorages. In this

case, it is not necessary to fix the child

restraint system with a seat belt on the

vehicle.

XS13143

12th lock

position

1st lock

position

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

INSTALLATION

1. Fold down the seatback and back to

the 1st lock position until it locks

into place. Adjust the seatback to

the 12th lock position.

Make sure the seatback is locked secure-

ly.

07 04.26

—Installation with child

restraint lower anchorages

(Regular cab models)

147

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13092e

Canada only

Type A

XS13093e

Canada only

Type B

2. Widen the slits of the seat cushion

slightly and confirm the position of

the lower anchorages near the but-

ton on the seat cushion.

3. Type A—Latch the hooks of lower

straps onto the anchorages and

tighten the lower straps.

Type B—Latch the buckles onto the

anchorages.

For owners in Canada—The symbol on

a child restraint system indicates the pres-

ence of a lower connector system.

If your child restraint system has a top

strap, it should be anchored. (For the

installation of the top strap, see “—Using

a top strap” on page 138 in this Section.)

For installation details, refer to the instruc-

tion manual equipped with each product.

07 04.26

148 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

CAUTION

DWhen using the lower anchorages

for the child restraint system, be

sure that there are no irregular ob-

jects around the anchorages or that

the seat belt is not caught.

DPush and pull the child restraint

system in different directions to be

sure it is secure. Follow all the

installation instructions provided by

its manufacturer.

DAfter securing the child restraint

system, never slide or recline the

seat.

XS13094

Lower anchorages for the child restraint

systems complying with the FMVSS225

or CMVSS210.2 specifications are

installed in the rear seat.

The anchorages are installed in the gap

between the seat cushion and seatback of

both outside rear seats as shown in the

illustration.

Child restraint systems complying with the

FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specification

can be fixed to these anchorages. In this

case, it is not necessary to fix the child

restraint system with a seat belt on the

vehicle.

XS13095

Canada only

Type A

07 04.26

—Installation with child

restraint lower anchorages

(Double cab models)

149

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13096

Canada only

Type B

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

INSTALLATION

1. Widen the gap between the seat

cushion and seatback slightly and

confirm the position of the lower an-

chorages near the button on the

seatback.

2. Type A—Latch the hooks of lower

straps onto the anchorages and

tighten the lower straps.

Type B—Latch the buckles onto the

anchorages.

For owners in Canada—The symbol on

a child restraint system indicates the pres-

ence of a lower connector system.

If your child restraint system has a top

strap, it should be anchored. (For the

installation of the top strap, see “—Using

a top strap” on page 141 in this Section.)

For installation details, refer to the instruc-

tion manual equipped with each product.

CAUTION

DWhen using the lower anchorages

for the child restraint system, be

sure that there are no irregular ob-

jects around the anchorages or that

the seat belt is not caught.

DPush and pull the child restraint

system in different directions to be

sure it is secure. Follow all the

installation instructions provided by

its manufacturer.

DAfter securing the child restraint

system, never lift up the seat cush-

ion.

DDo not install a child restraint sys-

tem on the rear seat if it interferes

with the lock mechanism of the

front seats. Otherwise, the child or

front seat occupant(s) may be killed

or seriously injured in case of sud-

den braking or a collision.

07 04.26

150 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13203

Lower anchorages for the child restraint

systems complying with the FMVSS225

or CMVSS210.2 specifications are

installed in the rear seat.

The anchorages are installed in the gap

between the seat cushion and seatback of

both outside rear seats as shown in the

illustration.

Child restraint systems complying with the

FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specification

can be fixed to these anchorages. In this

case, it is not necessary to fix the child

restraint system with a seat belt on the

vehicle.

XS13206

3rd lock

position

1st lock

position

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

INSTALLATION

1. Fold down the seatback and back to

the 1st lock position (most upright

position) until it locks into place.

Adjust the seatback to the 3rd lock

position.

Make sure the seatback is locked secure-

ly.

XS13204

Canada only

Type A

07 04.26

—Installation with child

restraint lower anchorages

(Crew Max models)

151

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS13205

Canada only

Type B

2. Widen the gap between the seat

cushion and seatback slightly and

confirm the position of the lower an-

chorages near the button on the

seatback.

3. Type A—Latch the hooks of lower

straps onto the anchorages and

tighten the lower straps.

Type B—Latch the buckles onto the

anchorages.

For owners in Canada—The symbol on

a child restraint system indicates the pres-

ence of a lower connector system.

If your child restraint system has a top

strap, it should be anchored. (For the

installation of the top strap, see “—Using

a top strap” on page 144 in this Section.)

For installation details, refer to the instruc-

tion manual equipped with each product.

CAUTION

DWhen using the lower anchorages

for the child restraint system, be

sure that there are no irregular ob-

jects around the anchorages or that

the seat belt is not caught.

DPush and pull the child restraint

system in different directions to be

sure it is secure. Follow all the

installation instructions provided by

its manufacturer.

DWhen using the lower anchorages

for the child restraint system, en-

sure that the seat is moved to the

rear−most position, with the seat-

back close to the child restraint

system.

DAfter securing the child restraint

system, never slide or recline the

seat.

DDo not install a child restraint sys-

tem on the rear seat if it interferes

with the lock mechanism of the

front seats. Otherwise, the child or

front seat occupant(s) may be killed

or seriously injured in case of sud-

den braking or a collision.

07 04.26

152 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

153

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Steering wheel and Mirrors

Tilt steering wheel 154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tilt and telescopic steering wheel 154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power tilt and telescopic steering wheel 155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Outside rear view mirrors 156. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Anti−glare inside rear view mirror 159. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Auto anti−glare inside rear view mirror 160. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sun visors 161. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vanity mirrors 161. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

07 04.26

SECTION 1− 4

154 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS14002

To change the steering wheel angle,

hold the steering wheel, push down the

lock release lever, tilt the steering

wheel to the desired angle and return

the lever to its original position.

CAUTION

DDo not adjust the steering wheel

while the vehicle is moving. Doing

so may cause the driver to mishan-

dle the vehicle and an accident may

occur resulting in death or serious

injuries.

DAfter adjusting the steering wheel,

try moving it up and down to make

sure it is locked in position.

XS14001

To adjust the steering wheel position,

push down the lock release lever. Then

tilt the steering wheel to the desired

angle, push or pull it to the desired

steering column length and pull up the

lock release lever.

07 04.26

Tilt steering wheel

Tilt and telescopic steering

wheel

155

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

CAUTION

DDo not adjust the steering wheel

while the vehicle is moving. Doing

so may cause the driver to mishan-

dle the vehicle and an accident may

occur resulting in death or serious

injuries.

DAfter adjusting the steering wheel,

try moving it up and down to make

sure it is locked in position.

XS14003

ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING WHEEL

TILT

To adjust the tilt of the steering wheel,

push the control switch upward or

downward to set it to the desired posi-

tion.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the steering wheel

while the vehicle is moving. Doing so

may cause the driver to mishandle

the vehicle and an accident may oc-

cur resulting in death or serious inju-

ries.

XS14004

ADJUSTMENT OF TELESCOPIC STEER-

ING COLUMN

To adjust the steering column length,

push the control switch forward or

backward to set the steering wheel to

the desired position.

When the ignition key is removed, the

steering column moves forward away from

the driver and also tilts up for easy exit

and entry.

When the key is inserted into the ignition

switch, the steering column returns to the

previously set position.

This feature can be set inoperative. Ask

your Toyota dealer.

07 04.26

Power tilt and telescopic

steering wheel

156 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

CAUTION

Do not adjust the steering column

while the vehicle is moving. Doing so

may cause the driver to mishandle

the vehicle and an accident may oc-

cur resulting in death or serious inju-

ries.

XS14005

Normal type

XS14021

Extend type

Adjust the mirror so that you can just

see the side of your vehicle in the mir-

ror.

Extend type only—Each mirror is divided

into two and has two different curvatures.

The lower part of the mirror offers a wider

field of vision than the upper part. Dis-

tances will therefore appear to be different

in the lower and upper part of the mirrors.

Be careful when judging the size or dis-

tance of any object seen in the outside

rear view mirror on the passenger’s side

because it is a convex mirror. Any object

seen in a convex mirror will look smaller

and farther away than when seen in a flat

mirror.

On some models, when you push the

outside rear view mirror defogger switch,

the heater panels in the outside rear view

mirrors will quickly clear the mirror

surface. (See “Outside rear view mirror

defogger” on page 177 in Section 1−5.)

07 04.26

Outside rear view mirrors—

157

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

CAUTION

DDo not adjust the mirror while the

vehicle is moving. Doing so may

cause the driver to mishandle the

vehicle and an accident may occur

resulting in death or serious inju-

ries.

DOn some models, since the mirror

surfaces can get hot, do not touch

them when the defogger switch is

on.

XS14006a

Type A

XS14007a

Type B

To adjust a mirror, use the switches.

1. Master switch—To select the mirror to

be adjusted

Push the switch to “L” (left) or “R”

(right).

2. Control switch—To move the mirror

Push the switch in the desired direc-

tion.

Mirrors can be adjusted when the ignition

switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

Vehicles with the driving position memory

system—The position of the outside rear

view mirrors and driver’s seat can be

memorized. For details, see “Driving

position memory system” on page 56 in

Section 1−3.

NOTICE

If ice should jam the mirror, do not

operate the control or scrape the mir-

ror face. Use a spray de−icer to free

the mirror.

07 04.26

—Power rear view mirror

control

158 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS14008

FOLDING MIRRORS (type B only)

To fold mirrors for parking in restricted

areas, push the mirror folding button.

The ignition switch must be in the “ACC”

or “ON” position.

Position 1—To fold the mirrors

Position 2—To return the mirrors back to

their original positions

CAUTION

To avoid personal injury and any mir-

ror malfunction, do not touch the mir-

ror while it is moving.

XS14009

Normal type

XS14023a

Extend type

The rear view mirrors can be folded

backward for parking in compact areas.

To fold the rear view mirror, push back-

ward.

Vehicles with a mirror folding button

only—

If the ignition switch is turned from

“LOCK” to “ACC” the mirror will move au-

tomatically according to the position of the

mirror folding button.

If folding button is not fully depressed, the

mirror may come out of its normal posi-

tion. If this happens, depress the button

again to return it to the normal position.

CAUTION

Do not drive with the mirrors folded

backward. Both the driver and pas-

senger side rear view mirrors must

be extended and properly adjusted

before driving.

07 04.26

—Folding rear view mirrors

159

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS14022

The mirrors can be slid outward to im-

prove visibility around wide trailers.

XS14010

Adjust the mirror so that you can just

see the rear of your vehicle in the mir-

ror.

To reduce glare from the headlights of

the vehicle behind you during night

driving, operate the lever on the lower

edge of the mirror.

Daylight driving—Lever at position 1

The reflection in the mirror has greater

clarity at this position.

Night driving—Lever at position 2

Remember that by reducing glare you also

lose some rear view clarity.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while the

vehicle is moving. It may cause the

driver to mishandle the vehicle and

an accident may occur resulting in

death or serious injuries.

07 04.26

—Extending rear view mirrors

Anti−glare inside rear view

mirror

160 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS14011

Adjust the mirror so that you can just

see the rear of your vehicle in the mir-

ror.

This mirror is equipped with auto anti−

glare function. The function is designed

to reduce glare from the headlights of

the vehicle behind you during night

driving.

When the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position, the inside rear view mirror al-

ways turns on in the automatic function

mode.

The indicator illuminates to show you that

the function is on.

In automatic function mode, if the mirror

detects light from the headlights of the

vehicle behind you, the mirror surface

darkens slightly to reduce the reflected

light.

To turn off and on the automatic function,

push the “ ” switch.

Adjust it before driving so that the rear

view is in the best condition.

When the inside air temperature is low, it

may take a little longer for the mirror to

darken in response to the detection of

headlights.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while the

vehicle is moving. Doing so may

cause the driver to mishandle the ve-

hicle and an accident may occur re-

sulting in death or serious injuries.

XS14012

To ensure correct functioning of anti−

glare mirror sensors located on both

sides of the mirror, do not touch or

cover the sensors with your finger or

a piece of cloth, etc.

07 04.26

Auto anti−glare inside rear

view mirror

161

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS14013

To block out glare, move the sun visor.

To block out glare from the front—Swing

down the sun visor (position 1).

To block out glare from the side—Swing

down the sun visor, remove it from the

hook and swing it to the lateral side (posi-

tion 2).

If glare comes from obliquely behind you,

slide the sun visor backward (to position

3).

XS14014

On some models: To block the glare from

the front when the main sun visor is

swung to the lateral side (position 2),

swing down the sub visor.

CAUTION

Do not extend the plate at the end of

the sun visor when the visor is in the

position 1. It can cover the anti−glare

inside rear view mirror and obstruct

the rear view.

Vanity mirrors

XS14015

Type A

XS14016

Type B

07 04.26

Sun visors

162 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

To use the vanity mirror, swing down

the sun visor and open the cover.

Vanity lights (type B only)—

The lights come on when you open the

cover.

To adjust the brightness of the lights, slide

the switch.

07 04.26

163

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Lights and Wipers

Headlights and turn signals 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Emergency flashers 169. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instrument panel light control 169. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front fog lights 170. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Interior lights 170. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Personal lights 171. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Illuminated entry system 173. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cargo lamp 174. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Exterior foot lights 175. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Windshield wipers and washer 176. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Outside rear view mirror defogger 177. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Back window and outside rear view mirror defoggers 178. . . . . . . . . . .

07 04.26

SECTION 1− 5

164 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

LS15028a

For the U.S.A.

LS15027

For Canada

HEADLIGHTS

To turn on the following lights: Twist

the headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate and

instrument panel lights

For Canada—The tail light indicator (green

light) on the instrument panel will tell you

that the tail lights are on.

Position 2—Headlights and all of the

above

For the U.S.A.—The headlight low beam

indicator light (green light) on the instru-

ment panel will tell you that the low

beams are on.

Automatic light cut off system

The lights automatically turn off after 30

seconds when all the doors are closed

with the ignition switch in the “ACC” or

“LOCK” position and the lever at position

The lights also automatically turn off when

the driver’s door is opened with the lever

at position 1.

If the doors are locked by the wireless

remote control transmitter, the lights auto-

matically turn off immediately.

To turn them on again, turn the ignition

switch to the “ON” position or actuate the

headlight switch.

If you are going to park for over one

week, make sure the headlight switch is

off.

The timing for the headlights turning off

can be changed. For details, contact your

Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-

charged, do not leave the lights on

for a long period when the engine is

not running.

07 04.26

Headlights and turn signals

(without automatic light

control system)

165

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Daytime running light (DRL) system (on

some models)

The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system

can make it easier for others to see the

front of your vehicle during the day. The

DRL system can be helpful in many differ-

ent driving conditions, but they can be

especially helpful in the short periods after

dawn and before sunset.

The DRL system will make your front turn

signal lights come on when:

DThe ignition switch is on with the en-

gine running.

DThe knob is in the “OFF” position or

position 1.

DThe parking brake is released.

To turn off the DRL system, twist the knob

to position 2, flashing the high beam

headlights or turn the ignition switch to

the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

LS15025a

High−Low beams—For high beams, turn

the headlights on and push the lever away

from you (position 1). Pull the lever to-

ward you (position 2) for low beams.

The headlight high beam indicator light

(blue light) on the instrument panel will

tell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights

(position 3)—Pull the lever all the way

back. The high beam headlights turn off

when you release the lever.

You can flash the high beam headlights

with the knob turned to “OFF”.

LS15026a

TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/

turn signal lever up or down to position

The ignition switch must be in the “ON”

position.

The lever automatically returns after you

make a turn, but you may have to return

it by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the lever

up or down to the pressure point (position

2) and hold it.

If the turn signal indicator lights (green

lights) on the instrument panel flash faster

than normal, a front or rear turn signal

bulb is burned out.

07 04.26

166 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS15019b

For the U.S.A.

XS15010b

For Canada

HEADLIGHTS

To turn on the following lights: Twist

the headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,

side marker and instrument panel lights

For Canada—The tail light indicator lights

up in the instrument cluster.

Position 2—Headlights and all of the

above

For the U.S.A.—The headlight indicator

lights up in the instrument cluster.

Position 3 (“AUTO”)—Headlights and/or all

of the lights in position 1

They automatically turn on or off depend-

ing on the darkness of the surroundings.

Manually twist the knob to the position 2

to turn on the headlights if they are need-

ed immediately when entering a dark tun-

nel, parking structure, etc.

When the tail lights/headlights are turned

on, the brightness of the instrument clus-

ter will be reduced slightly unless the in-

strument panel light control knob is turned

fully upward.

However, the brightness of the instrument

cluster, air conditioning controls indicator

lights and passenger airbag on−off indica-

tor light will not be reduced in daytime

even when the tail lights/headlights are

turned on.

07 04.26

Headlights and turn signals

(with automatic light control

system)

167

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS15011

The automatic light control sensor is on

the top of the driver’s side instrument

panel.

Do not place anything on the instrument

panel, and/or do not affix anything on the

windshield to block this sensor.

If you feel that the automatic light control

comes into operation too early or too late,

have the sensor adjusted by your Toyota

dealer.

Automatic light cut off system

Position 1 or position 3 with the tail

lights on—

The lights automatically turn off when the

driver’s door is opened with the ignition

switch in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

Position 2 or 3 with the headlights on—

The lights automatically turn off after 30

seconds when all the doors are closed

with the ignition switch in the “ACC” or

“LOCK” position.

If the lock switch of the wireless remote

control transmitter is pushed when all the

doors are already locked, the lights auto-

matically turn off immediately.

The time before the headlights turn off

can be changed. If your vehicle is

equipped with the multi−information dis-

play, it can be changed by yourself. For

details, contact your Toyota dealer.

If any of the doors is left open, the lights

automatically turn off after 20 minutes.

To turn them on again, turn the ignition

switch to the “ON” position or actuate the

headlight switch.

If you are going to park for over one

week, make sure the headlight switch is

off.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-

charged, do not leave the lights on

for a long period when the engine is

not running.

Daytime Running Light (DRL) system

(on some models)

The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system

can make it easier for others to see the

front of your vehicle during the day. The

DRL system can be helpful in many differ-

ent driving conditions, but they can be

especially helpful in the short periods after

dawn and before sunset.

The DRL system will make the front turn

signal lights come on when:

DThe ignition is on with the engine run-

ning.

DThe knob is in the “OFF” position,

position 1 or position 3 with the tail

lights on.

DThe parking brake is released.

To turn off the DRL system, twist the knob

to position 2 or position 3 with the head-

lights on, flashing the high beam head-

lights or turn the ignition switch to the

“ACC” or “LOCK” position.

07 04.26

168 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS15020b

High−Low beams—For high beams, turn

the headlights on and push the lever away

from you (position 1). Pull the lever to-

ward you (position 2) for low beams.

The headlight high beam indicator light

(blue light) on the instrument panel will

tell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights

(position 3)—Pull the lever all the way

back. The high beam headlights turn off

when you release the lever.

You can flash the high beam headlights

with the knob turned to “OFF”.

XS15031a

TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/

turn signal lever up or down to position

The ignition switch must be in the “ON”

position.

The lever automatically returns after you

make a turn, but you may have to return

it by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the lever

up or down to the pressure point (position

2) and hold it.

If the turn signal indicator lights (green

lights) on the instrument panel flash faster

than normal, a front or rear turn signal

bulb is burned out. See “Replacing light

bulbs” on page 564 in Section 7−3.

07 04.26

169

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS15002a

To turn on the emergency flashers,

push the switch.

All the turn signal lights will flash. To turn

them off, push the switch once again.

Turn on the emergency flashers to warn

other drivers if your vehicle must be

stopped where it might be a traffic hazard.

Always pull as far off the road as pos-

sible.

The turn signal light switch will not work

when the emergency flashers are operat-

ing.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-

charged, do not leave the switch on

longer than necessary when the en-

gine is not running. XS15003

To adjust the brightness of the instru-

ment panel lights, turn the dial.

With the dial set in the full intensity posi-

tion, the intensity of the instrument panel

lights will not be reduced even when the

tail lights/headlights are turned on.

07 04.26

Emergency flashers Instrument panel light control

170 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS15001a

To turn on the front fog lights, twist

the band of the headlight and turn sig-

nal switch lever. They will come on

only when the headlights are on low

beam.

XS15012

Type A (front)

XS15014

Type B (rear)

XS15022a

Type C (rear)

XS15005

Interior/personal light main switch

07 04.26

Front fog lights Interior lights

171

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

To turn on the interior lights, operate

the interior/personal light main switch.

The lights can be turned on or off by

pushing each switch when the interior/

personal light main switch is in the

“DOOR” or “OFF” position.

The interior/personal light main switch has

the following positions:

“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.

“OFF”— The lights can be turned on or off

by pushing each switch.

“DOOR”—Turn the light on when any of

the doors is opened.

If all the doors are closed, when the igni-

tion switch is turned to the “LOCK” posi-

tion, the lights will come on and remain

on for about 15 seconds.

If all the doors are closed and the ignition

switch is in the “ACC” position interior

light will go off immediately.

Type B and Type C—For details, see

“Illuminated entry system” on page 173 in

this Section.

To prevent the battery being discharged,

the lights will automatically turn off when

the key is removed and the door is left

opened with the switch at the “DOOR”

position for 20 minutes or more.

XS15004

Type A

XS15032

Type B

XS15005

Interior/personal light main switch

07 04.26

Personal lights (with power

door lock system)

—Front personal lights

172 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

To turn on the front personal lights,

operate the interior/personal light main

switch.

The lights on your side can be turned

on or off by pushing each lens when

the interior/personal light main switch

is in the “DOOR” or “OFF” position.

The interior/personal light main switch has

the following positions:

“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.

“OFF”—The lights can be turned on or off

by pushing each lens.

“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any of

the doors is opened. For details, see

“Illuminated entry system” on page 173 in

this Section.

To prevent the battery being discharged,

the lights will automatically turn off when

the key is removed and the door is left

opened with the switch at the “DOOR”

position for 20 minutes or more.

XS15033

Type A

XS15015

Type B

To turn on the rear personal lights, op-

erate the interior/personal light main

switch.

The lights on your side can be turned

on or off by pushing each lens or

switch when the interior/personal light

main switch is in the “DOOR” or “OFF”

position.

The interior/personal light main switch has

the following position:

“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.

“OFF”—The lights can be turned on or off

by pushing each lens or switch.

“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any of

the doors is opened. For details, see

“Illuminated entry system” on page 173 in

this Section.

To prevent the battery being discharged,

the lights will automatically turn off when

the key is removed and the door is left

opened with the switch at the “DOOR”

position for 20 minutes or more.

07 04.26

—Rear personal lights

(Crew Max models)

173

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Illuminated entry system (with power door lock system)

The following lights will come on when

any of the doors are opened. After all

the doors are closed, the lights remain

on for about 15 seconds before fading

out.

1. Foot light

2. Ignition switch light

3. Front personal lights—with the “DOOR”

position

4. Rear personal lights/Interior light

(rear)—with the “DOOR” position

When any of the doors are unlocked, the

lights will come on and remain on for

about 15 seconds before fading out.

If all the doors are closed, when the igni-

tion switch is turned to the “LOCK” posi-

tion, the lights will come on and remain

on for about 15 seconds.

The duration of the lighting can be

changed. If your vehicle is equipped with

the multi−information display, it can be

changed by yourself. For details, contact

your Toyota dealer.

If all the doors are closed and the ignition

switch is in the “ACC” position, the igni-

tion switch light, interior light, foot light

and personal lights will go off immediately.

07 04.26

XS15017a

174 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

If all the doors are locked, all the lights

will fade out.

To prevent the battery being discharged,

the lights will automatically turn off when

the ignition key is removed and the door

is left opened for about 20 minutes.

XS15008

The cargo lamp is designed to light up

the rear deck of your vehicle.

CARGO LAMP OPERATION

The cargo lamp should only be kept on

during cargo loading or unloading.

The cargo lamp switch has the following

positions:

“ON” position—Keeps the light on all the

time.

“OFF” position—Keeps the light off all the

time.

“DOOR” position—The cargo lamp comes

on under the following cases:

DWhen locking and unlocking the doors

(vehicles with the power door lock sys-

tem)

You can operate the cargo lamp by this

method when all the doors are closed

and the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”

position or the key is removed.

To turn on: Unlock the door with the

key or the wireless remote control

transmitter.

The cargo lamp will automatically turn

off after 15 seconds.

To turn off: Lock the doors with the

key, the power door lock switch or the

wireless remote control transmitter.

07 04.26

Cargo lamp

175

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

DWhen opening and closing the doors

To turn on: Open any of the doors.

To turn off: Close all the doors.

DWhen the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position, the cargo lamp will go off im-

mediately.

DWhen the ignition switch is in the

“LOCK” position or the key is removed,

the cargo lamp will automatically go off

after 15 seconds.

To prevent the battery being discharged,

the lights will automatically turn off in

about 20 minutes after the ignition key is

removed.

This feature is deactivated when the igni-

tion switch is in the “ON” position.

XS15018b

The lights will come on when the doors

are unlocked simultaneously using either

the power door lock switches or the wire-

less remote control. This light remains on

for 15 seconds before fading out when

any door is opened, and additional 15

seconds after all the doors are closed.

However, in the following cases, the light

goes off immediately.

DDoors are locked with wireless remote

control.

DThe selector lever is put in a position

other than “P” with the ignition switch

on.

DThe doors are locked via the driver’s

door key cylinder.

DThe doors are locked via the switches

either inside the driver’s or front pas-

senger’s door.

07 04.26

Exterior foot lights (with

driving position memory

system)

176 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS15029a

To turn on the windshield wipers, move

the lever to the desired setting.

The ignition switch must be in the “ON”

position.

Lever position Speed setting

Position 1 Intermittent

Position 2 Slow

Position 3 Fast

For a single sweep of the windshield,

push the lever up and release it.

The “INT TIME” band lets you adjust the

wiping time interval when the wiper lever

is in the intermittent position (position 1).

Twist the band upward to increase the

time between sweeps, and downward to

decrease it.

To squirt washer fluid, pull the lever

toward you and release it.

If the windshield wipers are off, they will

operate a couple of times after the washer

squirts.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,

see “Adding washer fluid” on page 563 in

Section 7−3.

In freezing weather, warm the windshield

with the defroster before using the washer.

This will help prevent the washer fluid

from freezing on your windshield, which

can block your vision.

NOTICE

Do not operate the wipers if the wind-

shield is dry. It may scratch the

glass.

When waxing your vehicle, make sure that

the washer nozzles do not become

blocked. If a nozzle becomes blocked,

contact your Toyota dealer to have the

vehicle serviced.

NOTICE

If a nozzle becomes blocked, do not

try to clear it with a pin or other

object. The nozzle will be damaged.

07 04.26

Windshield wipers and washer

(type A)

177

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS15030a

To turn on the windshield wipers, move

the lever to the desired setting.

The ignition switch must be in the “ON”

position.

Lever position Speed setting

Position 1 Slow

Position 2 Fast

For a single sweep of the windshield,

push the lever up and release it.

To squirt washer fluid, pull the lever

toward you and release it.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,

see “Adding washer fluid” on page 563 in

Section 7−3.

In freezing weather, warm the windshield

with the defroster before using the washer.

This will help prevent the washer fluid

from freezing on your windshield, which

can block your vision.

NOTICE

Do not operate the wipers if the wind-

shield is dry. It may scratch the

glass.

When waxing your vehicle, make sure that

the washer nozzles do not become

blocked. If a nozzle becomes blocked,

contact your Toyota dealer to have the

vehicle serviced.

NOTICE

If a nozzle becomes blocked, do not

try to clear it with a pin or other

object. The nozzle will be damaged.

XS14017b

Type A

XS14018b

Type B

07 04.26

Windshield wipers and washer

(type B)

Outside rear view mirror

defoggers and front

windshield de−icer (on some

models)

178 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

To defog or defrost the outside rear

view mirrors, push the switch.

The ignition switch must be in the “ON”

position.

The heater panels in the outside rear view

mirrors will quickly clear the mirror sur-

faces. An indicator light will illuminate to

indicate the mirror heaters are operating.

On some models, the front windshield wip-

er de−icer also operates simultaneously by

this switch. On vehicles with the front

windshield wiper de−icer, the front wind-

shield wiper blades will be de−iced.

Push the switch once again to turn the

mirror heaters off.

The system will automatically shut off af-

ter the defogger have operated about 15

minutes.

CAUTION

Since the mirror surfaces can get hot,

do not touch them when the switch

is on.

Make sure you turn the mirror heaters off

when the mirror surfaces are clear. Leav-

ing the mirror heaters on for a long time

could cause the battery to discharge, es-

pecially during stop−and−go driving. The

mirror heaters are not designed for drying

rain water or for melting snow.

If the outside rear view mirrors are heavi-

ly coated with ice, use a spray de−icer

before operating the switch.

XS15034

Type A

XS15035a

Type B

07 04.26

Back window and outside rear

view mirror defoggers and

front windshield de−icer (Crew

Max models)

179

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

To defog or defrost the back window,

push the switch with the back window

closed.

The key must be in the “ON” position.

The thin heater wires on the inside of the

back window will quickly clear the surface.

An indicator light will illuminate to indicate

the defogger is operating.

On some models, the outside rear view

mirror defoggers and/or the front wind-

shield wiper de−icer also operate simulta-

neously by this switch. On vehicles with

the outside rear view mirror defoggers, the

heater panel in the outside rear view mir-

rors will quickly clear the mirror surfaces.

On vehicles with the front windshield wip-

er de−icer, the front windshield wiper

blades will be de−iced.

Push the switch once again to turn the

defogger off.

The system will automatically shut off af-

ter the defoggers have operated about 15

minutes.

CAUTION

On some models, since the mirror

surfaces can get hot, do not touch

them when the defogger switch is on.

Make sure you turn the defoggers off

when the surfaces are clear. Leaving the

defoggers on for a long time could cause

the battery to discharge, especially during

stop−and−go driving. The defoggers are

not designed for drying rain water or for

melting snow.

On some models, if the outside rear view

mirrors are heavily coated with ice, use a

spray de−icer before operating the switch.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the back

window, be careful not to scratch or

damage the heater wires or connec-

tors.

07 04.26

180 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

181

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Gauges, Meters and Service reminder indicators

Fuel gauge 182. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine coolant temperature gauge 182. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Oil pressure gauge 183. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic transmission fluid temperature gauge 184. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Voltmeter 185. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tachometer 185. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Odometer and two trip meters 186. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Multi−information display 187. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers 197. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

07 04.26

SECTION 1− 6

182 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS16001a

Low fuel

level

warning

light

Type A

XS16002a

Low fuel

level

warning

light

Type B

The gauge indicates the approximate

quantity of fuel remaining in the tank

when the ignition switch is on.

Nearly full—Needle at “F”

Nearly empty—Needle at “E”

It is a good idea to keep the tank over

1/4 full.

The needle moves when braking, acceler-

ating or making turns. This is caused by

the movement of the fuel in the tank.

If the fuel level approaches “E” or the low

fuel level warning light comes on, fill the

fuel tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move-

ment of fuel in the tank, the fuel gauge

needle may fluctuate or the low fuel level

warning light may come on earlier than

usual.

If the fuel tank is completely empty, the

malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Fill

the fuel tank immediately.

The indicator lamp will go off after driving

several times. If the indicator lamp does

not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as

soon as possible.

XS16003a

Type A

XS16004a

Type B

07 04.26

Fuel gauge

Engine coolant temperature

gauge

183

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

The gauge indicates the engine coolant

temperature when the ignition switch is

on. The engine operating temperature

will vary with changes in weather and

engine load.

If the needle moves into the red zone,

your engine is too hot. If your vehicle

overheats, stop your vehicle and allow the

engine to cool.

Your vehicle may overheat during severe

operating conditions, such as:

DDriving up a long hill on a hot day.

DReducing speed or stopping after high

speed driving.

DIdling for a long period with the air

conditioning on in stop−and−go traffic.

DTowing a trailer.

NOTICE

zDo not remove the thermostat in

the engine cooling system as this

may cause the engine to overheat.

The thermostat is designed to con-

trol the flow of coolant to keep the

temperature of the engine within

the specified operating range.

zDo not continue driving with an

overheated engine. See “If your

vehicle overheats” in Section 4.

XS16005

Normal

driving

Idling

Type A

XS16006

Normal

driving

Idling

Type B

07 04.26

Oil pressure gauge

184 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

The oil pressure gauge indicates engine

oil pressure when the ignition switch is

on. Check it while driving to make sure

that the needle is in the proper range.

If the oil pressure should stay below the

normal range, pull off the road to a safe

place and stop the engine immediately.

Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair

shop for assistance.

Oil pressure may not build up when the

oil level is too low. The oil pressure

gauge is not designed to indicate oil level,

and the oil level must be checked using

the level dipstick.

NOTICE

Do not drive the vehicle with the oil

pressure below the normal range until

the cause is fixed—it may ruin the

engine.

XS16015c

High range

Type A

XS16016c

High range

Type B

Automatic transmission fluid tempera-

ture gauge indicates automatic trans-

mission fluid temperature when the

ignition switch is on. Check it while

driving to make sure that the needle is

in the proper range.

The gauge displays the current tempera-

ture of the automatic transmission fluid.

The gauge informs the driver of changes

in the automatic transmission fluid temper-

ature especially if it becomes too high

while towing a heavy trailer or hauling a

heavy load.

If the needle reads high range while you

are driving, slow down and pull off the

road. Stop the vehicle at a safe place and

put the selector lever in “P”. With the

engine idling, wait until the needle reads

below the high range. If the needle reads

below the high range, you may start the

vehicle again. If the needle reads the high

range, call a Toyota dealer or qualified

repair shop for assistance.

NOTICE

Continued driving with reading in the

high range may damage the automatic

transmission.

07 04.26

Automatic transmission fluid

temperature gauge (with

towing package)

185

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS16007b

Normal range

Type A

XS16008b

Normal range

Type B

The voltmeter tells whether the battery

is charged or discharged. Check it

while the engine is running—the needle

should always indicate as shown above.

If the needle reads below or above the

normal range while the engine is running,

it indicates the charging system needs im-

mediate repair.

However, it is normal for the needle to

drop below the normal range during en-

gine starting.

XS16009

Type A

XS16010

Type B

07 04.26

Voltmeter Tachometer

186 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

The tachometer indicates engine speed

in thousands of rpm (revolutions per

minute). Use it while driving to select

correct shift points and to prevent en-

gine lugging and over−revving.

Driving with the engine running too fast

causes excessive engine wear and poor

fuel economy. Remember, in most cases

the slower the engine speed, the greater

the fuel economy.

NOTICE

Do not let the indicator needle get

into the red zone. This may cause

severe engine damage.

XS16011b

This meter displays the odometer and

two trip meters.

1. Odometer—Shows the total distance

the vehicle has been driven.

2. Two trip meters—Show two different

distances independently driven since

the last time each trip meter was set

to zero.

You can use one trip meter to calculate

the fuel economy and the other to

measure the distance on each trip. All

trip meter data is cancelled if the elec-

trical power source is disconnected.

3. Trip meter reset knob—Resets the two

trip meters to zero, and also change

the meter display.

To change the meter display, quickly

push and release the knob. The meter

display changes in the order from the

odometer to trip meter A to trip meter

B, then back to the odometer each

time you push.

To reset the trip meter A to zero, dis-

play the meter A reading, then push

and hold the knob until the meter is

set to zero. The same process can be

applied for resetting the trip meter B.

07 04.26

Odometer and two trip meters

(without multi−information

display)

187

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

The following information is displayed

on the multi−information display when

the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position.

DCruise information

DOdometer and two trip meters

DWarning messages

DFeature customization

During ordinary driving, cruise information

is displayed. However, in case the vehicle

has a system malfunction or if there is

some information that the driver should be

informed of, a warning message appears

on the display. See “—Warning messages”

on page 193 for details.

If the electrical power source has been

disconnected from the cruise information

display, the display will automatically be

set to the initial mode.

When the instrument panel lights are

turned on, the brightness of the display

will be reduced.

At extremely low temperatures, the multi−

information display may respond slowly,

and the display changes may be delayed.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while the

vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust

the display only when the vehicle is

stopped.

SELECTING UNIT

You can select the unit between En-

glish/U.S. customary system and metric

unit.

To select unit A (English/U.S. customary

system) or unit B (metric unit), push

“SELECT RESET” button to display

“UNITS” screen, and push “SETUP US/M”

button while the screen is displayed.

The unit variations are as follows;

Information Unit A Unit B

Average fuel

consumption and

Instantaneous fuel

consumption

MPG L/100

Driving range MILES km

Average vehicle

speed MPH km/h

07 04.26

Multi−information display—

188 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Each time you push the “INFO” button,

the display toggles through the follow-

ing

1. Zoom display of odometer and trip me-

ter

2. Average fuel consumption

3. Instantaneous fuel consumption

4. Driving range

5. Driving time

6. Average vehicle speed

The displayed values in the cruise infor-

mation display indicate general driving

conditions. Accuracy varies with driving

habits and road conditions.

When the ignition switch is on, the last

previously used mode displayed just be-

fore the ignition switch is off will appear.

07 04.26

—Cruise information

XS16012c

189

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

1. Zoom display of odometer and trip

meter

The odometer and one of the trip meters

are displayed simultaneously. See

“—Odometer and two trip meters”.

2. Average fuel consumption

(“Average Fuel Economy”)

Average fuel consumption is calculated

and displayed based on total driving

distance and total fuel consumption

with the engine running.

The displayed value is updated every 10

seconds.

To reset the calculations, push and hold

the “SELECT RESET” button for more

than 2 seconds.

3. Instantaneous fuel consumption

(“Current Fuel Economy”)

The instantaneous fuel consumption is

calculated and displayed based on dis-

tance and fuel consumption at 20 revo-

lutions of the engine.

The displayed value is updated for a short

time.

An accurate figure may not be shown if

the vehicle is driving down a long slope,

and engine brake is applied. (The display

will indicate the extremely low fuel con-

sumption.)

The display indicates 0 when the vehicle

is stopped with the engine running.

The calculation is reset when the ignition

switch is turned off.

4. Driving range (“Distance To Empty”)

The distance the vehicle can travel with

the remaining fuel is calculated and

displayed based on the quantity of re-

maining fuel and past fuel consumption.

The driving range display indicates the

approximate distance that you can drive

until the fuel gauge reaches “E”. It is

different from the actual distance traveled.

The displayed value is updated every time

the fuel equivalent for 1 mile or 1 km is

consumed.

Every time you refuel the vehicle, the cal-

culation is reset. However, when only a

small amount of fuel is added to the tank,

the display may not be reset.

The actual driving range varies with driv-

ing habits and road conditions. If fuel con-

sumption is good, the driving range will be

longer than indicated. If fuel consumption

is poor, the driving range will be shorter

than indicated.

If the low fuel level warning light comes

on, refuel the vehicle even if the display

indicates that the vehicle can be driven

further.

5. Driving time (“Trip Timer”)

To calculate the driving time, display

the “Trip Timer” after the engine has

been started. Then press the “SELECT

RESET” button. To stop the calculation,

press the “SELECT RESET” button

again.

Driving time is counted from 00:00:00. Up

to 99:59:59 (99 hours, 59 minutes and 59

seconds) can be displayed. When the driv-

ing time exceeds 99:59:59, the counter

returns to 00:00:00.

If the ignition switch is turned off while

the driving time is being calculated, the

calculation will cease. When the engine is

next started, it will automatically resume

from the previous value.

If the “SELECT RESET” button is pressed

to cease the calculation and then the igni-

tion switch is turned off, the calculation

will not resume when the engine is next

started. In this case, press the “SELECT

RESET” button to start the calculation.

To reset the calculation, push and hold

the “SELECT RESET” button for more

than 2 seconds.

07 04.26

190 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

6. Average vehicle speed

(“Average Speed”)

Average vehicle speed is calculated and

displayed based on total driving dis-

tance and total driving time with the

engine running.

The displayed value is updated every 10

seconds.

To rest the calculations, push and hold the

“SELECT RESET” button for more than 2

seconds.

Your vehicle includes a variety of electron-

ic features that can be personalized to

your preferences. The vehicle can be cus-

tomized while the vehicle is stopped.

“KEYLESS ENTRY” is used for some cus-

tomization item names in the screen dis-

play. It means “Wireless door lock” in this

owner’s manual.

1. Select the item you want to customize

unit with the “SETUP US/M” button.

KEYLESS ENTRY FEEDBACK

KEYLESS ENTRY

ALL DOORS UNLOCK

KEYLESS ENTRY RELOCK TIMER

DOOR AUTO LOCKING

DOOR AUTO UNLOCKING

HEADLAMPS AUTO OFF TIMER

COURTESY LAMPS OFF TIMER

DEFAULT SETTING

UNITS

2. Customize the item with the “SELECT

RESET” button.

DDoor lock and unlock warning function

Screen text: KEYLESS ENTRY

FEEDBACK

“LAMPS + TONE”∗

“TONE”

“LAMPS”

“OFF”

DTime for automatic door lock function

Screen text: KEYLESS ENTRY

RELOCK TIMER

“60 SECONDS”∗“120 SECONDS”

“OFF”

“30 SECONDS”

DDouble switch operation to unlock all

the doors

Screen text: KEYLESS ENTRY ALL

DOORS UNLOCK

“2 PRESSES”∗ ⇔ “1 PRESS”

07 04.26

—Feature customization

191

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

DAutomatic door locking function

Screen text: DOOR AUTO LOCKING

“ABOVE 12MPH

(Metric: 20 km/h)”∗

“SHIFT OUT

OF PARK”

“OFF”

DAutomatic door unlocking function

Screen text: DOOR AUTO UNLOCKING

“SHIFT TO

PARK”∗

“DRIVER DOOR

OPEN”

“OFF”

DTime period before lights turn off (if a

door is opened and closed, and ignition

switch is in ACC or LOCK)

Screen text: HEADLAMPS AUTO OFF

TIMER

“30 SECONDS”∗

“90 SECONDS”

“60 SECONDS”

“0 SECONDS”

DTime period before lights turn off

Screen text: COURTESY OFF TIMER

“15 SECONDS”∗“30 SECONDS”

“8 SECONDS”

∗: Default setting

After customizing is complete, press the

“SET UP” button to set the selected item.

If the customization fails, the previously

set item will be displayed. If no button is

pressed for 10 seconds, the display

switches to INFO mode.

As for any items except “UNITS”, the set-

tings cannot be changed at a vehicle

speed of 5 km/h (3 mph) or more. A mes-

sage, “PLEASE STOP VEHICLE TO

CHANGE SETTINGS”, will be indicated on

the screen and customizing operation can-

not be accomplished.

If the “SYSTEM ERROR” message is indi-

cated on the screen, the customizing op-

eration cannot be performed due to a

communication error. In such cases, turn

the ignition switch off and then on again.

When the communication returns to nor-

mal, the customizing operation can then

be performed. If the “SYSTEM ERROR”

message is indicated again, contact your

Toyota dealer.

07 04.26

192 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS16013d

Normal display

XS16014c

Zoom display

This meter displays the odometer and

two trip meters.

Selecting the zoom display of the

odometer and trip meter when the

cruise information is displayed causes

the odometer and one of the trip me-

ters to be displayed simultaneously.

1. Odometer—Shows the total distance

the vehicle has been driven.

2. Two trip meters—Show two different

distances independently driven since

the last time each trip meter was set

to zero.

You can use one trip meter to calculate

the fuel economy and the other to

measure the distance on each trip. All

trip meter data is cancelled if the elec-

trical power source is disconnected.

3. Trip meter reset knob—Resets the two

trip meters to zero, and also changes

the meter display.

To change the meter display, quickly

push and release the knob. The meter

display changes in the order from the

odometer to trip meter A to trip meter

B, then back to the odometer each

time you push.

To reset the trip meter A to zero, dis-

play the meter A reading, then push

and hold the knob until the meter is

set to zero. The same process can be

applied for resetting the trip meter B.

07 04.26

—Odometer and two trip

meters

193

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Message Status Action

(a) Parking brake is not released. Release parking brake.

(b) Engine coolant temperature is too high. Stop your vehicle and allow engine to cool.

07 04.26

—Warning messages

194 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Message Status Action

(d) Fuel in tank becomes nearly empty. Fill up tank.

(e) Automatic transmission fluid temperature is

too high. Stop and check.

(f) Oil change is nearly due. Check engine oil.

(g) Oil change is due. Replace engine oil.

(h) Washer fluid level is low. Add washer fluid.

07 04.26

195

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

(a)

This message is to warn the driver that

the parking brake is not completely re-

leased at the vehicle speed of 5 km/h

(3 mph) or more.

Stop the vehicle and release the park-

ing brake fully.

The message appears with the master

warning light flashes, brake system warn-

ing light and a warning tone sounds.

(b)

This message is to warn the driver that

the engine coolant temperature is too

high.

Stop the vehicle and allow the engine

to cool.

The message appears with the master

warning light flashes and a warning tone

sounds.

NOTICE

Do not continue driving with an over-

heated engine. See “If your vehicle

overheats” on page 497 in Section 4.

(c)

This message is to remind the driver

that any of the doors are opened.

Close the door securely.

The message appears with the master

warning light flashes, open door warning

light and a warning tone sounds when the

vehicle speed rises above 5 km/h (3

mph).

(d)

This message is to remind the driver

that the fuel level in the tank becomes

nearly empty.

If the message appears with the low fuel

level warning light comes on and a warn-

ing tone sounds, fill up the tank as soon

as possible.

The message disappears by pressing

“SELECT RESET” button when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position. However,

the low fuel level warning light remains

on.

(e)

This message is to warn the driver that

automatic transmission fluid tempera-

ture is too high.

If the automatic transmission fluid temper-

ature is too high, the message appears

with the automatic transmission fluid tem-

perature warning light comes on and a

warning tone sounds.

If this message appears while you are

driving, slow down and pull off the road.

Stop the vehicle at a safe place and put

the selector lever in “P”. With the engine

idling, wait until the message goes off. If

the message goes off, you may start the

vehicle again. If the message does not go

off, call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair

shop for assistance.

07 04.26

196 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

NOTICE

Continue driving with the warning

message on may result in damage of

the automatic transmission.

(f) (U.S.A. only)

This message is to remind the driver to

change the engine oil. The message is

a prior notice.

Toyota recommends that the engine oil

be changed as soon as possible.

If the driving range after the previous oil

change reaches 7200 km (4500 miles), the

message appears for about 15 seconds

with the master warning light and a warn-

ing tone sounds.

The engine oil maintenance data must be

reset after the engine oil change. See

following “Resetting the engine oil

maintenance data”.

(g) (U.S.A. only)

This message is to remind the driver to

change the engine oil.

Change the engine oil as soon as pos-

sible.

If the driving range after the previous oil

change reaches 8000 km (5000 miles), the

message appears with the master warning

light and a warning tone sounds. The

message stays on with the ignition switch

is turned to the “ON” position.

The engine oil maintenance data must be

reset after the engine oil change. See

“Resetting the engine oil maintenance

data” below for the procedure to reset the

system.

Resetting the engine oil maintenance

data

The engine oil maintenance data must be

reset after replacement of the engine oil.

Reset the data by the following procedure:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC”

or “LOCK” position with the trip meter

A reading shown. (For details, see

“Odometer and two trip meters” on

page 186 in this Section.)

2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position while holding down the trip

meter reset knob.

Hold down the knob for at least 5

seconds. The information display indicates

“MAINT REQD RESET MODE

COMPLETE”, the master warning light

turns on and the tone sounds.

If the system fails to reset, perform the

above procedure again.

(h)

This message appears when the washer

fluid level becomes very low.

Fill the tank as soon as possible.

The message appears with the master

warning light, low windshield washer fluid

level warning light and a warning tone

sounds.

If the message appears, fill the washer

tank as soon as possible. For instruc-

tions, see “Adding washer fluid” on

page 563 in Section 7−3.

07 04.26

197

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(a)

(indicator and buzzer)

If parking brake is off, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(b)

(indicator and buzzer)

Fasten driver’s seat belt.

(c)

(indicator and buzzer)

Fasten front passenger’s seat belt.

(d) Stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(e) Stop and check.

(f) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

07 04.26

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers

198 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(g) Replace engine oil.

(h) Fill up tank.

(i) or Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

If brake system warning light is also on, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(j) If the light flashes, take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(k) Close all doors.

(l) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer immediately.

(m) Adjust tire inflation pressure. If the warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute,

contact Toyota dealer.

07 04.26

199

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(n) Stop and check.

(o) Read a warning message on multi−information display.

(p) Add washer fluid.

(q) Key reminder buzzer Remove key.

(r) Parking brake reminder buzzer Release parking brake.

(s) Four−wheel drive system warning

buzzer

Shift the transfer mode correctly.

(t) Open moon roof reminder buzzer Close moon roof.

07 04.26

200 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

(a) Brake System Warning Light and

buzzer

This light comes on in the following cases

when the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position.

DWhen the parking brake is applied...

This light comes on for a few seconds

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position even after the parking brake

is released.

DWhen the brake fluid level is low...

CAUTION

It is dangerous to continue driving

normally when the brake fluid level is

low.

Have your vehicle checked at your

Toyota dealer in the following case:

DThe light does not come on even if the

parking brake is applied when the igni-

tion switch is in the “ON” position.

DThe light does not come on even if the

ignition switch is turned on with the

parking brake released.

A warning light turning on briefly during

operation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION

If either of the following conditions

occurs, immediately stop your vehicle

at a safe place and contact your

Toyota dealer.

DThe light does not turn off even

after the parking brake is released

while the engine is running.

In this case, the brakes may not

work properly and your stopping

distance will become longer. De-

press the brake pedal firmly and

bring the vehicle to an immediate

stop.

DThe brake system warning light re-

mains on together with the “ABS”

warning light.

In this case, not only the anti−lock

brake system will fail but also the

vehicle will become extremely un-

stable during braking.

(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light

and Buzzer

The light and buzzer act as a reminder to

buckle up the driver’s seat belt.

Once the ignition switch is turned to “ON”

or “START”, the reminder light flashes and

buzzer sounds if the driver’s seat belt is

not fastened. Unless the driver fastens the

belt, the light continues flashing and the

buzzer stops after about 4 to 8 seconds.

If the vehicle speed rises above 20 km/h

(12 mph) with the seat belt unfastened,

the buzzer will sound for about 10 sec-

onds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfas-

tened, the buzzer will sound in a different

tone for 20 seconds. Even if the vehicle

speed drops below 20 km/h (12 mph), the

buzzer will continue to sound. To stop the

buzzer, fasten the seat belt. If the buzzer

still sounds, make sure the front passen-

ger’s seat belt is fastened.

07 04.26

201

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

minder Light and Buzzer

The light and buzzer act as a reminder to

have the front passenger buckle up the

seat belt.

Once the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the reminder light flashes if

a passenger sits in the right front passen-

ger seat and does not fasten the seat

belt.

If the vehicle speed rises above 20 km/h

(12 mph) with the seat belt unfastened,

the buzzer will sound for 10 seconds.

Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened,

the buzzer will sound in a different tone

for 20 seconds. Even if the vehicle speed

drops below 20 km/h (12 mph), the buzzer

will continue to sound. To stop the buzzer,

fasten the seat belt. If the buzzer still

sounds, make sure the driver’s seat belt

is fastened.

The buzzer can be disabled. For details,

contact your Toyota dealer.

If luggage or other load is placed on the

front passenger seat, depending on its

weight, the reminder light to flash and

buzzer to sounds.

(d) Charging System Warning Light

This warning light comes on when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion, and goes off when the engine is

started.

When there are problems in the charging

system while the engine is running, the

warning light comes on.

NOTICE

When the charging system warning

light comes on while the engine is

running, malfunctions such as the en-

gine drive belt being broken may have

occurred. If the warning light comes

on, immediately stop the vehicle in a

safe place and contact your Toyota

dealer.

(e) Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning

Light

This light warns that the engine oil pres-

sure is too low.

If it flickers or stays on while you are

driving, pull off the road to a safe place

and stop the engine immediately. Call a

Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for

assistance.

The light may occasionally flicker when

the engine is idling or it may come on

briefly after a hard stop. There is no

cause for concern if it then goes out when

the engine is accelerated slightly.

The light may come on when the oil level

is extremely low. It is not designed to

indicate low oil level, and the oil level

must be checked using the level dipstick.

NOTICE

Do not drive the vehicle with the

warning light on—even for one block.

It may ruin the engine.

07 04.26

202 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

(f) Malfunction Indicator Lamp

This lamp comes on when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position

and goes off after the engine starts.

This means that the warning light sys-

tem is operating properly.

If the lamp remains on, or the lamp

comes on while driving, first check the

followings.

DEmpty fuel tank

If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immedi-

ately.

DLoose fuel tank cap

If the fuel tank cap is loose, securely

tighten it.

These cases are temporary malfunctions.

The malfunction indicator lamp will go off

after taking several driving trips.

If the lamp does not go off even after

several trips, contact your Toyota dealer

as soon as possible.

If the fuel tank is not empty or the fuel

tank cap is not loose...

DThere is a problem somewhere in the

engine, emission control system, elec-

tronic throttle control system, automatic

transmission electrical system or warn-

ing light system itself.

Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as

possible to service the vehicle.

If engine speed does not increase when

the accelerator pedal is depressed, there

may be a problem somewhere in the elec-

tronic throttle control system.

At this time, vibration may occur. Howev-

er, if you depress the accelerator pedal

more firmly and slowly, you can drive your

vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle

checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as

possible.

Even if the abnormality of the electronic

throttle control system is corrected during

low speed driving, the system may not be

recovered until the engine is stopped and

the ignition switch is turned to the “ACC”

or “LOCK” position.

CAUTION

Be especially careful to prevent erro-

neous pedal operation.

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance

(I/M) programs

Your vehicle may not pass a state

emission inspection if the malfunction

indicator lamp remains on. Contact your

Toyota dealer to check your vehicle’s

emission control system and OBD

(On−Board Diagnostics) system before

taking your vehicle for the inspection.

For details, see “Emissions Inspection and

Maintenance (I/M) programs” in Section 6.

(g) Engine Oil Replacement Reminder

Light (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

This light acts as a reminder to replace

the engine oil.

This light will come on when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position and

will go off after about a few seconds.

When you drive for about 7200 km (4500

miles) after the engine oil replacement,

this light illuminates for about 3 seconds

and then flashes for about 12 seconds

with the ignition switch turned to the “ON”

position. If you continue driving without

replacing the engine oil, and if the

distance driven exceeds 8000 km (5000

miles), the light will come on after the

ignition switch is turned to “ON” position.

The light will remain on thereafter.

07 04.26

203

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

If the light is flashing, we recommend that

you replace the engine oil at an early

opportunity depending on the driving and

road conditions. If the light comes on,

replace it as soon as possible.

The system must be reset after the

engine oil replacement. Reset the system

by the following procedure:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”

position with the trip meter A reading

shown. (For details, see “Odometer and

two trip meters” on page 186 in this

Section.)

2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position while holding down the trip

meter reset knob.

Hold down the knob for at least 5

seconds. The trip meter A indicates

“000000” and the light goes off.

If the system fails to reset, the light will

continue flashing.

(h) Low Fuel Level Warning Light

This light comes on when the fuel level

in the tank becomes nearly empty. Fill up

the tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move-

ment of fuel in the tank, the low fuel level

warning light may come on earlier than

usual.

(i) “ABS” Warning Light

The light comes on when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position. If

the anti−lock brake system and the brake

assist system work properly, the light

turns off after a few seconds. Thereafter,

if either of the systems malfunctions, the

light comes on again.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and

the brake system warning light is off), the

following systems do not operate, but the

brake system still operates conventionally.

DAnti−lock brake system

DBrake assist system

DTraction control system

D“AUTO LSD” system

DVehicle stability control system

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and

the brake system warning light is off), the

anti−lock brake system does not operate,

so that the wheels will lock up during a

sudden braking or braking on slippery

road surfaces.

If either of the following conditions oc-

curs, this indicates a malfunction some-

where in the components monitored by

the warning light system. Contact your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible to

service the vehicle.

DThe light does not come on when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position, or remains on.

DThe light comes on while you are dri-

ving.

A warning light turning on briefly during

operation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION

If the “ABS” warning light remains on

together with the brake system warn-

ing light, immediately stop your ve-

hicle at a safe place and contact your

Toyota dealer.

In this case, not only the anti−lock

brake system will fail but also the

vehicle will become extremely unsta-

ble during braking.

07 04.26

204 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

(j) “VSC OFF” warning light

The light flashing warns that there is a

problem somewhere in the following.

DVehicle stability control system

DTraction control system

D“AUTO LSD” system

The light will come on when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position, and

will go off after a few seconds.

If the light flashes on while driving, the

above mentioned systems do not work.

However, as conventional braking operates

when applied, there is no problem to con-

tinue your driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer:

DThe warning light does not come on

after the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position.

DThe warning light remains on after the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

DThe warning light flashes while driving.

(k) Open Door Warning Light

This light remains on until all the doors

are completely closed.

The buzzer also sounds once when any

of the doors is not completely closed at

the vehicle speed 5 km/h (3 mph) or

more. Stop the vehicle and close all the

door completely.

(l) SRS Warning Light

This light will come on when the igni-

tion switch is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion. After about 6 seconds, the light

will go off. This means the systems of

the airbag and front seat belt preten-

sioners are operating properly.

This warning light system monitors the

airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-

sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-

sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-

er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt

buckle switch, front passenger occupant

classification system∗, passenger airbag

off switch, passenger airbag on−off indica-

tor light, seat belt pretensioner assem-

blies, inflators, “RSCA OFF” indicator light,

interconnecting wiring and power sources.

∗: The front passenger occupant classifica-

tion system includes the front passenger

occupant classification ECU, load sensor

and front passenger’s seat belt buckle

switch.

If either of the following conditions occurs,

this indicates a malfunction somewhere in

the parts monitored by the warning light

system. Contact your Toyota dealer as

soon as possible to service the vehicle.

DThe light does not come on when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position or remains on for more than

6 seconds.

DThe light comes on while driving.

(m) Tire Pressure Warning Light

This light warns that the tire inflation pres-

sure of one or more of your tires (except

for the temporary spare tire) is low. The

light comes on when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position. It goes off

after a few seconds. This indicates that

the tire pressure warning system is func-

tioning properly.

07 04.26

205

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

If the light comes on, stop your vehicle in

a safe place as soon as possible and

check that the tire inflation pressure of all

four tires is as specified on the tire and

loading information label. (See “Checking

tire inflation pressure” on page 548 in

Section 7−2.) The light should go off 3 to

6 minutes after the tire inflation pressure

is adjusted.

If the warning light comes on after blink-

ing for 1 minute, the tire pressure warning

system may be malfunctioning. Contact

your Toyota dealer.

For details, see “Tire pressure warning

system” on page 251 in Section 1−7.

(n) Automatic Transmission Fluid Tem-

perature Warning Light

This light warns that the automatic trans-

mission fluid temperature is too high.

If this light comes on while you are driv-

ing, slow down and pull off the road. Stop

the vehicle at a safe place and put the

selector lever in “P”. With the engine id-

ling, wait until the light goes off. If the

light goes off, you may start the vehicle

again. If the light does not go off, call a

Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for

assistance.

NOTICE

Continued driving with the warning

light on may damage the automatic

transmission.

(o) Master Warning Light

If the master warning light comes on, a

message appears on the multi−information

display. Depending on the conditions a

warning tone may sound. (See “—Warning

messages” on page 193 in this Section for

instructions.)

(p) Low Windshield Washer Fluid Level

Warning Light

The light warns that the windshield washer

fluid level is too low. Add washer fluid at

your earliest opportunity. (For instructions,

see “Adding washer fluid” on page 563 in

Section 7−3.)

The light will come on when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position and

will go off after a few seconds.

(q) Key Reminder Buzzer

This buzzer acts as a reminder to remove

the key when you open the driver’s door

with the ignition switch in the “ACC” or

“LOCK” position.

(r) Parking Brake Reminder Buzzer

The buzzer acts once when the parking

brake is not completely released at the

vehicle speed of 5 km/h (3 mph) or more.

Stop the vehicle and release the parking

brake fully.

(s) Four−wheel Drive System Warning

Buzzer (four−wheel drive models)

This buzzer reminds you that the transfer

mode is not selected correctly.

If the buzzer sounds when you shift the

transfer from “2WD” to “4H”, “4L” to “4H”,

“4H” to “4L”, or “4L” to “2WD” mode, fol-

low the instructions in “Four−wheel drive

system” on page 239 in Section 1−7.

(t) Open Moon Roof Reminder Buzzer

This buzzer acts as a reminder to close

the moon roof when you turn the ignition

switch off and open the driver’s door.

07 04.26

206 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

CHECKING SERVICE REMINDER

INDICATORS (except the low fuel level

warning light)

Without multi−information display—

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Open one of the doors.

The open door warning light should

come on.

3. Close the door.

The open door warning light should go

off.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position, but do not start the engine.

All the service reminder indicators ex-

cept the open door warning light should

come on.

The following service reminder indica-

tors go off after a few seconds:

DEngine oil replacement reminder light

D“ABS” warning light

D“RSCA OFF” indicator light

D“VSC OFF” indicator/warning light

D“AUTO LSD” indicator light

DTire pressure warning light

DSlip indicator light

DLow windshield washer fluid level warn-

ing light

The SRS warning light goes off after

about 6 seconds.

With multi−information display—

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Open one of the doors.

The open door warning light should

come on.

3. Close the door.

The open door warning light should go

off.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position, but do not start the engine.

All the service reminder indicators ex-

cept the open door warning light should

come on.

The following service reminder indica-

tors go off after a few seconds:

DEngine oil replacement reminder light

D“ABS” warning light

D“RSCA OFF” indicator light

D“VSC OFF” indicator/warning light

D“AUTO LSD” indicator light

DTire pressure warning light

DSlip indicator light

DMaster warning light

The SRS warning light goes off after

about 6 seconds.

If any service reminder indicator or warn-

ing buzzer does not function as described

above, have it checked by your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible.

07 04.26

207

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Ignition switch, Transmission and Parking brake

Ignition switch 208. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic transmission 209. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Four−wheel drive system 239. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Traction control system 242. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

”AUTO LSD” system 244. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle stability control system 248. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tire pressure warning system 251. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Parking brake 258. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cruise control 259. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

07 04.26

SECTION 1− 7

208 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS17001a

“START”—Starter motor on. The key

will return to the “ON” position when

released.

For starting tips, see page 468 in Section

“ON”—Engine on and all accessories

on.

This is the normal driving position.

“ACC”—Accessories such as the radio

operate, but the engine is off.

If you leave the key in the “ACC” or

“LOCK” position and open the driver’s

door, a buzzer will remind you to remove

the key.

“LOCK”—Engine is off and the steering

wheel is locked. The key can be re-

moved only at this position.

You must push in the key to turn the key

from “ACC” to the “LOCK” position. The

selector lever must be put in the “P” posi-

tion before pushing the key.

Vehicles with engine immobilizer system—

Once you remove the key, the engine im-

mobilizer system is automatically set. (See

“Engine immobilizer system” on page 21

in Section 1−2.)

When starting the engine, the key may

seem stuck at the “LOCK” position. To

free it, first be sure the key is pushed all

the way in, and then rock the steering

wheel slightly while turning the key gently.

Approximately five hours after the engine

is turned off, you may hear sound coming

from underneath the deck for several min-

utes. This is normal operation and does

not indicate a malfunction. (See “Leak

detection pump” on page ix.)

It is not a malfunction if the needles on

all meters and gauges move slightly when

the ignition switch is turned to the “ACC”,

“ON” or “START” position.

NOTICE

Do not leave the key in the “ON”

position if the engine is not running.

The battery will discharge and the

ignition could be damaged.

07 04.26

Ignition switch

209

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Your automatic transmission has a shift

lock system to minimize the possibility of

incorrect operation. This means you can

only shift out of “P” position when the

brake pedal is depressed (with the ignition

switch in “ON” position).

(a) Selector lever

The shift position is also displayed on the

instrument cluster.

P: Parking, engine starting and key re-

moval

R: Reverse

N: Neutral

D: Normal driving

S: “S” mode driving

+: Upshift range

−: Downshift range

07 04.26

Automatic transmission (floor shift type)

"5−speed models

XS17002a

Shift with the brake pedal

depressed. (The ignition switch

must be in “ON” position.)

Shift normally.

To select “S” or “D”, lean the

selector lever leftward or rightward.

Selector lever

210 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

(b) Normal driving

1. Start the engine as instructed in “How

to start the engine” on page 468 in

Section 3. The transmission must be in

“P” or “N”.

When the front drive control switch knob

is in “4L” (low−speed position, four−wheel

drive), the driving pattern selector setting

has no effect on gear shift timing. (See

“Four−wheel drive system” on page 239 in

this Section for information of the front

drive control lever.)

2. With your foot holding down the brake

pedal, shift the selector lever to “D”.

When the lever is in the “D” position, the

automatic transmission system will select

the most suitable gear for running condi-

tions such as normal cruising, hill climb-

ing, hard towing, etc.

Always use the “D” position for better fuel

economy and quieter driving. If the engine

coolant temperature is low or when the

front drive control switch knob is in “4L”

(low−speed position, four−wheel drive), the

transmission will not shift into the over-

drive gear even in the “D” position. (See

“Four−wheel drive system” on page 239 in

this Section for information of the front

drive control.)

CAUTION

Never put your foot on the accelera-

tor pedal while shifting.

3. Release the parking brake and brake

pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal

slowly for smooth starting.

AI (Artificial Intelligence) shifting con-

trol—

AI shifting control selects the most

suitable shift range automatically ac-

cording to the driver’s operation and

driving condition.

AI shifting control operates automatical-

ly with the selector lever in the “D”

position. When the lever is moved to

the “S” position, this function will be

cancelled.

DShifting control on the slope:

On inclines, you can drive smoothly

with reduced shifting quantity. On de-

clines, the vehicle will shift down auto-

matically to obtain optimum engine

braking and reduce the driver’s foot

braking load.

DAutomatic shifting point change con-

trol:

The most suitable shift range is se-

lected depending on the driver’s accel-

erator pedal operation and vehicle con-

dition.

The shift range position can be

changed in “S” mode. When the selec-

tor lever is in the “S” position, the

shift range position can be switched

between “5” (fifth range) and “1” (first

range) by shifting the selector lever to

the “+” (up) or “−” (down) position. By

shifting the lever to the “+” (up) posi-

tion and holding it for at least 1 sec-

ond, the highest shift range position

can be obtained. However, it cannot be

changed while cruise control is acti-

vated. When the selector lever is

shifted to the “S” position, shift range

position “4” (fourth range) is selected

automatically.

However, if the selector lever is shifted

to the “S” position when AI shifting

control is being performed, the initial

shift range position may be “3” (third

range). This is because the suitable

shift range is selected depending on

the driving condition.

07 04.26

211

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

The “S” mode indicator light and the cur-

rent shift range position are shown on the

instrument cluster.

XS17028

1: Upshift range

2: Downshift range

Shift range positions

D“5” (Fifth range):

The most suitable gear is selected au-

tomatically between first and overdrive

(fifth) gears according to the vehicle

speed and driving conditions.

D“4” (Fourth range):

The most suitable gear is selected au-

tomatically between first and fourth

gears according to the vehicle speed

and driving conditions. Slight engine

braking will be obtained on a downhill

road. Smooth running with less shifting

will be obtained on an uphill road.

D“3” (Third range):

The most suitable gear is selected au-

tomatically between first and third

gears according to the vehicle speed

and driving conditions. This range is to

be used when stronger engine braking

is necessary.

D“2” (Second range):

First or second gear will be selected

automatically according to the vehicle

speed and driving conditions. This

range is to be used when engine brak-

ing stronger than that of the “3” range

position is necessary.

07 04.26

212 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

D“1” (First range):

The gear is fixed in first regardless of

vehicle speed and driving conditions.

This range is to be used when maxi-

mum engine braking is necessary.

If you attempt to downshift the transmis-

sion when it is not possible to downshift

due to high vehicle speed, a warning tone

sounds twice.

NOTICE

Do not drive in the “3”, “2” or “1”

range when driving at high speed or

climbing a gentle slope for a long

time. Otherwise the transmission or

engine may overheat causing damage.

Maximum allowable speeds

To get on a highway or to pass slower

traffic, maximum acceleration may be nec-

essary. Make sure you observe the follow-

ing maximum allowable speed in each

range:

4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine

range km/h (mph)

1 59 (36)

2 102 (63)

3 148 (91)

4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine

Without towing package

range km/h (mph)

1 61 (37)

2 105 (65)

3 154 (95)

With towing package

range km/h (mph)

1 58 (36)

2 100 (62)

3 147 (91)

Four−wheel drive models without towing

package

—Front drive control switch knob at “4L”

range km/h (mph)

1 23 (14)

2 40 (24)

3 58 (36)

4 68 (42)

5 68 (42)

Four−wheel drive models with towing

package

—Front drive control switch knob at “4L”

range km/h (mph)

1 22 (13)

2 38 (23)

3 56 (34)

4 64 (39)

5 64 (39)

NOTICE

Do not downshift if you are going

faster than the maximum allowable

speed for the next lower range.

07 04.26

213

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

When the “S” mode indicator light does

not come on even with the selector lever

moved to the “S” position, there may be a

problem somewhere in the system. Have

your vehicle checked/repaired by your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible. In this

case, you can drive in the same condition

as in the “D” position.

(d) Using engine braking

To use engine braking, you can downshift

the transmission as follows:

DWhen driving in the “D” position—

Shift the selector lever to “S” position.

When driving in the “5” range within

the “S” position—

Move the selector lever down to the

“−” side to select the “4” range. The

transmission will downshift to fourth

range when the vehicle speed drops

down to or lower than the following

speed, and engine braking will be en-

abled.

4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine

Four−wheel drive models without tow-

ing package

—Front drive control switch knob

at “4L”

75 km/h (46 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Four−wheel drive models with towing

package

—Front drive control switch knob

at “4L”

72 km/h (44 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

When the cruise control is being used,

engine braking can not be enabled be-

cause the cruise control is not can-

celled. However, engine braking will be

automatically enabled if the vehicle

speed is higher than the set speed of

the cruise control depending on the

driving conditions.

For decreasing the vehicle speed, see

“Cruise control” on page 259 in this

Section.

DMove the selector lever down to the

“−” side to select the “3” range. The

transmission will downshift to third

range when the vehicle speed drops

down to or lower than the following

speed, and stronger engine braking will

be enabled.

4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine

136 km/h (84 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine

Two−wheel drive models

—without towing package

138 km/h (85 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—with towing package

132 km/h (82 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Four−wheel drive models without tow-

ing package

—Front drive control switch knob

at “2WD” or “4H”

138 km/h (85 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—Front drive control switch knob

at “4L”

52 km/h (32 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Four−wheel drive models with towing

package

—Front drive control switch knob

at “2WD” or “4H”

132 km/h (82 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—Front drive control switch knob

at “4L”

50 km/h (31 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

07 04.26

214 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

DMove the selector lever down to the

“−” side to select the “2” range. The

transmission will downshift to second

range when the vehicle speed drops

down to or lower than the following

speed, and more powerful engine brak-

ing than that of the “3” range position

will be enabled.

4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine

92 km/h (57 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine

Two−wheel drive models

—without towing package

93 km/h (57 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—with towing package

89 km/h (55 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Four−wheel drive models without tow-

ing package

—Front drive control switch knob

at “2WD” or “4H”

93 km/h (57 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—Front drive control switch knob

at “4L”

35 km/h (21 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Four−wheel drive models with towing

package

—Front drive control switch knob

at “2WD” or “4H”

89 km/h (55 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—Front drive control switch knob

at “4L”

33 km/h (20 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DMove the selector lever down to the

“−” side to select the “1” range. The

transmission will downshift to first

range when the vehicle speed drops

down to or lower than the following

speed, and maximum engine braking

will be enabled.

4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine

39 km/h (24 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine

Two−wheel drive models

—without towing package

40 km/h (24 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—with towing package

38 km/h (23 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Four−wheel drive models without tow-

ing package

—Front drive control switch knob

at “2WD” or “4H”

40 km/h (24 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—Front drive control switch knob

at “4L”

15 km/h (9 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Four−wheel drive models with towing

package

—Front drive control switch knob

at “2WD” or “4H”

38 km/h (23 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—Front drive control switch knob

at “4L”

14 km/h (8 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on a

slippery surface. The abrupt change

in engine speed could cause the ve-

hicle to skid or spin.

07 04.26

215

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

(e) Backing up

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal held down with

your foot, shift the selector lever to the

“R” position.

NOTICE

Never shift into reverse while the ve-

hicle is moving.

(f) Parking

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal pressed down,

fully depress the parking brake pedal

to apply the parking brake securely.

3. With the brake pedal pressed down,

shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-

tion.

CAUTION

Never attempt to move the selector

lever into “P” position under any cir-

cumstances while the vehicle is mov-

ing. Serious mechanical damage and

loss of vehicle control may result.

(g) Good driving practice

DIf the transmission repeatedly shifts up

and down between third gear and over-

drive when climbing a gentle slope,

shift the selector lever into “S” posi-

tion.

DWhen towing a trailer, in order to main-

tain engine braking efficiency, do not

use the transmission in “D”. Select an

appropriate shift range in “S” mode.

CAUTION

Always keep your foot on the brake

pedal while stopped with the engine

running. This prevents the vehicle

from creeping.

NOTICE

Always use the brake pedal or the

parking brake to hold the vehicle on

an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold

the vehicle using the accelerator ped-

al, as this can cause the transmission

to overheat.

(h) If you cannot shift the selector le-

ver out of “P” position

If you cannot shift the selector lever from

the “P” position even though the brake

pedal is depressed, use the shift lock

override button. For instructions, see “If

you cannot shift automatic transmission

selector lever” on page 516 in Section 4.

07 04.26

216 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Your automatic transmission has a shift

lock system to minimize the possibility of

incorrect operation. This means you can

only shift out of “P” position when the

brake pedal is depressed (with the ignition

switch in “ON” position).

(a) Selector lever

The shift position is also displayed on the

instrument cluster.

P: Parking, engine starting and key re-

moval

R: Reverse

N: Neutral

D: Normal driving

S: “S” mode driving

+: Upshift range

−: Downshift range

07 04.26

"6−speed models

XS17002a

Shift with the brake pedal

depressed. (The ignition switch

must be in “ON” position)

Shift normally.

To select “S” or “D”, lean the

selector lever leftward or

rightward.

Selector lever

217

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

(b) Normal driving

1. Start the engine as instructed in “How

to start the engine” on page 468 in

Section 3. The transmission must be in

“P” or “N”.

When the front drive control switch knob

is in “4L” (low−speed position, four−wheel

drive), the driving pattern selector setting

has no effect on gear shift timing. (See

“Four−wheel drive system” on page 239 in

this Section for information of the front

drive control lever.)

2. With your foot holding down the brake

pedal, shift the selector lever to “D”.

When the lever is in the “D” position, the

automatic transmission system will select

the most suitable gear for running condi-

tions such as normal cruising, hill climb-

ing, hard towing, etc.

Always use the “D” position for better fuel

economy and quieter driving. If the engine

coolant temperature is low or when the

front drive control switch knob is in “4L”

(low−speed position, four−wheel drive), the

transmission will not shift into the over-

drive gear even in the “D” position. (See

“Four−wheel drive system” on page 239 in

this Section for information of the front

drive control.)

CAUTION

Never put your foot on the accelera-

tor pedal while shifting.

3. Release the parking brake and brake

pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal

slowly for smooth starting.

AI (Artificial Intelligence) shifting con-

trol—

AI shifting control selects the most

suitable shift range automatically ac-

cording to the driver’s operation and

driving condition.

AI shifting control operates automatical-

ly with the selector lever in the “D”

position. When the lever is moved to

the “S” position, this function will be

cancelled.

DShifting control on the slope:

On inclines, you can drive smoothly

with reduced shifting quantity. On de-

clines, the vehicle will shift down auto-

matically to obtain optimum engine

braking and reduce the driver’s foot

braking load.

DAutomatic shifting point change con-

trol:

The most suitable shift range is se-

lected depending on the driver’s accel-

erator pedal operation and vehicle con-

dition.

The shift range position can be

changed in “S” mode. When the selec-

tor lever is in the “S” position, the

shift range position can be switched

between “6” (sixth range) and “1” (first

range) by shifting the selector lever to

the “+” (up) or “−” (down) position. By

shifting the lever to the “+” (up) posi-

tion and holding it for at least 1 sec-

ond, the highest shift range position

can be obtained. However, it cannot be

changed while cruise control is acti-

vated. When the selector lever is

shifted to the “S” position, shift range

position “4” (fourth range) or “5” (fifth

range) is selected depending on the ve-

hicle speed.

07 04.26

218 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

However, if the selector lever is shifted

to the “S” position when AI shifting

control is being performed, the initial

shift range position may be “2” (second

range) or “3” (third range). This is be-

cause the suitable shift range is se-

lected depending on the driving condi-

tion.

The “S” mode indicator light and the cur-

rent shift range position are shown on the

instrument cluster.

XS17028

1: Upshift range

2: Downshift range

Shift range positions

D“6” (Sixth range):

The most suitable gear is selected au-

tomatically between first and overdrive

(sixth) gears according to the vehicle

speed and driving conditions.

D“5” (Fifth range):

The most suitable gear is selected au-

tomatically between first and fifth gears

according to vehicle speed and driving

conditions. This range is suitable for

acceleration such as when you want to

pass a vehicle running ahead of you

during high speed driving.

D“4” (Fourth range):

The most suitable gear is selected au-

tomatically between first and fourth

gears according to the vehicle speed

and driving conditions. Slight engine

braking will be obtained on a downhill

road. Smooth running with less shifting

will be obtained on an uphill road.

D“3” (Third range):

The most suitable gear is selected au-

tomatically between first and third

gears according to the vehicle speed

and driving conditions. This range is to

be used when stronger engine braking

is necessary.

07 04.26

219

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

D“2” (Second range):

First or second gear will be selected

automatically according to the vehicle

speed and driving conditions. This

range is to be used when engine brak-

ing stronger than that of the “3” range

position is necessary.

D“1” (First range):

The gear is fixed in first regardless of

vehicle speed and driving conditions.

This range is to be used when maxi-

mum engine braking is necessary.

If you attempt to downshift the transmis-

sion when it is not possible to downshift

due to high vehicle speed, a warning tone

sounds twice.

Maximum allowable speeds

To get on a highway or to pass slower

traffic, maximum acceleration may be nec-

essary. Make sure you observe the follow-

ing maximum allowable speeds in each

range:

5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine

Without towing package

range km/h (mph)

1 62 (38)

2 106 (65)

3 154 (95)

With towing package

range km/h (mph)

1 59 (36)

2 101 (62)

3 147 (91)

Four−wheel drive models without towing

package

—Front drive control switch knob at “4L”

range km/h (mph)

1 23 (14)

2 40 (24)

3 58 (36)

4 68 (42)

5 68 (42)

6 68 (42)

Four−wheel drive models with towing

package

—Front drive control switch knob at “4L”

range km/h (mph)

1 22 (13)

2 38 (23)

3 56 (34)

4 64 (39)

5 64 (39)

6 64 (39)

NOTICE

Do not downshift if you are going

faster than the maximum allowable

speed for the next lower range.

When the “S” mode indicator light does

not come on even with the selector lever

moved to the “S” position, there may be a

problem somewhere in the system. Have

your vehicle checked/repaired by your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible. In this

case, you can drive in the same condition

as in the “D” position.

07 04.26

220 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

(d) Using engine braking

To use engine braking, you can downshift

the transmission as follows:

DWhen driving in the “D” position—

Shift the selector lever to the “S”

position.

When driving in the “6” range within

the “S” position—

Move the selector lever down to the

“−” side to select the “5” range. The

transmission will downshift to fifth

range when the vehicle speed drops

down to or lower than the following

speed, and engine braking will be

enabled.

5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine

Four−wheel drive models

—Front drive control switch knob

at “4L”

79 km/h (49 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

When the cruise control is being used,

even if you downshift the transmission,

engine braking will not be enabled be-

cause the cruise control is not can-

celled. However, engine braking will be

automatically enabled if the vehicle

speed is higher than the set speed of

the cruise control depending on the

driving conditions.

For ways to decrease the vehicle

speed, see “Cruise control” on page

259 in this Section.

DMove the selector lever down to the

“−” side to select the “4” range. The

transmission will downshift to fourth

range when the vehicle speed drops

down to or lower than the following

speed, and stronger engine braking will

be enabled.

5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine

Four−wheel drive models

—Front drive control switch knob

at “4L”

79 km/h (49 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

When the cruise control is being

used, even if you downshift the

transmission, engine braking will not

be enabled because the cruise con-

trol is not cancelled. However, engine

braking will be automatically enabled

if the vehicle speed is higher than

the set speed of the cruise control

depending on the driving conditions.

DMove selector lever down to the “−”

side to select the “3” range. The trans-

mission will downshift to third range

when the vehicle speed drops down to

or lower than the following speed, and

more powerful engine braking than that

of the “4” range position will be en-

abled.

07 04.26

221

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine

Two−wheel drive models

—without towing package

138 km/h (85 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—with towing package

131 km/h (81 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Four−wheel drive models without tow-

ing package

—Front drive control switch knob

at “2WD” or “4H”

138 km/h (85 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—Front drive control switch knob

at “4L”

55 km/h (34 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Four−wheel drive models with towing

package

—Front drive control switch knob

at “2WD” or “4H”

131 km/h (81 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—Front drive control switch knob

at “4L”

52 km/h (32 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DMove the selector lever down to the

“−” side to select the “2” range. The

transmission will downshift to second

range when the vehicle speed drops

down to or lower than the following

speed, and more powerful engine brak-

ing will be enabled.

5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine

Two−wheel drive models

—without towing package

94 km/h (58 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—with towing package

90 km/h (55 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Four−wheel drive models without tow-

ing package

—Front drive control switch knob

at “2WD” or “4H”

94 km/h (58 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—Front drive control switch knob

at “4L”

37 km/h (22 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Four−wheel drive models with towing

package

—Front drive control switch knob

at “2WD” or “4H”

90 km/h (55 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—Front drive control switch knob

at “4L”

36 km/h (22 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DMove selector lever down to the “−”

side to select the “1” range. The down-

shift to first range when the vehicle

speed drops down to or lower than the

following speed, and maximum engine

braking will be enabled.

5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine

Two−wheel drive models

—without towing package

41 km/h (25 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—with towing package

39 km/h (24 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Four−wheel drive models without tow-

ing package

—Front drive control switch knob

at “2WD” or “4H”

41 km/h (25 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—Front drive control switch knob

at “4L”

15 km/h (9 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Four−wheel drive models with towing

package

—Front drive control switch knob

at “2WD” or “4H”

39 km/h (24 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—Front drive control switch knob

at “4L”

14 km/h (8 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

07 04.26

222 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on a

slippery surface. The abrupt change

in engine speed could cause the ve-

hicle to skid or spin.

(e) Backing up

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal held down with

your foot, shift the selector lever to the

“R” position.

NOTICE

Never shift into reverse while the ve-

hicle is moving.

(f) Parking

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal pressed down,

fully depress the parking brake pedal

to apply the parking brake securely.

3. With the brake pedal pressed down,

shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-

tion.

CAUTION

Never attempt to move the selector

lever into “P” position under any cir-

cumstances while the vehicle is mov-

ing. Serious mechanical damage and

loss of vehicle control may result.

(g) Good driving practice

DIf the transmission repeatedly shifts up

and down between fourth gear and

overdrive when climbing a gentle slope,

shift the selector lever into “S” posi-

tion.

DWhen towing a trailer, in order to main-

tain engine braking efficiency, do not

use the transmission in “D”. Select an

appropriate shift range in “S” mode.

CAUTION

Always keep your foot on the brake

pedal while stopped with the engine

running. This prevents the vehicle

from creeping.

NOTICE

Always use the brake pedal or the

parking brake to hold the vehicle on

an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold

the vehicle using the accelerator ped-

al, as this can cause the transmission

to overheat.

(h) If you cannot shift the selector le-

ver out of “P” position

If you cannot shift the selector lever from

the “P” position even though the brake

pedal is depressed, use the shift lock

override button. For instructions, see “If

you cannot shift automatic transmission

selector lever” on page 516 in Section 4.

07 04.26

223

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS17036a

(i) “TOW/HAUL” switch

(on some models)

Use “TOW/HAUL” mode when pulling a

trailer or hauling a heavy load. In this

mode, the driving and engine braking per-

formance is improved in accordance with

towing conditions or increased load.

To turn on: Push “TOW/HAUL” switch

“TOW/HAUL” mode is activated and

“TOW/HAUL” mode indicator light comes

on by pressing “TOW/HAUL” switch.

To turn off: Push “TOW/HAUL” switch

once again and the “TOW/HAUL” mode

indicator light goes off.

“TOW/HAUL” mode is canceled by press-

ing “TOW/HAUL” switch again or by turn-

ing the ignition switch to “OFF”.

Even when “TOW/HAUL” mode is used

during normal driving, no damage is

caused to the engine or the transmission.

However, fuel economy is reduced and the

transmission and/or engine driving charac-

teristics may feel unusual.

Toyota recommends using “TOW/HAUL”

mode only when a heavy trailer or a large

heavy load is towed.

07 04.26

224 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Your automatic transmission has a shift

lock system to minimize the possibility of

incorrect operation. This means you can

only shift out of “P” position when the

brake pedal is depressed (with the ignition

switch in “ON” position).

(a) Selector lever

The shift position is also displayed on the

instrument cluster.

P: Parking, engine starting and key re-

moval

R: Reverse

N: Neutral

D: Normal driving

S: “S” mode driving

+: Upshift range

−: Downshift range

07 04.26

Automatic transmission (column−shift type)

"5−speed models

XS17026a

Shift with the brake pedal

depressed. (The ignition switch

must be in “ON” position.)

Shift normally.

To select “S” or “D”, pull the

lever toward you and shift

down. Shift the lever up and

push outward.

Selector lever

225

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

(b) Normal driving

1. Start the engine as instructed in “How

to start the engine” on page 468 in

Section 3. The transmission must be in

“P” or “N”.

When the front drive control switch knob

is in “4L” (low−speed position, four−wheel

drive), the driving pattern selector setting

has no effect on gear shift timing. (See

“Four−wheel drive system” on page 239 in

this Section for information of the front

drive control lever.)

2. With your foot holding down the brake

pedal, shift the selector lever to “D”.

When the lever is in the “D” position, the

automatic transmission system will select

the most suitable gear for running condi-

tions such as normal cruising, hill climb-

ing, hard towing, etc.

Always use the “D” position for better fuel

economy and quieter driving. If the engine

coolant temperature is low or when the

front drive control switch knob is in “4L”

(low−speed position, four−wheel drive), the

transmission will not shift into the over-

drive gear even in the “D” position. (See

“Four−wheel drive system” on page 239 in

this Section for information of the front

drive control.)

CAUTION

Never put your foot on the accelera-

tor pedal while shifting.

3. Release the parking brake and brake

pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal

slowly for smooth starting.

AI (Artificial Intelligence) shifting con-

trol—

AI shifting control selects the most

suitable shift range automatically ac-

cording to the driver’s operation and

driving condition.

AI shifting control operates automatical-

ly with the selector lever in the “D”

position. When the lever is moved to

the “S” position, this function will be

cancelled.

DShifting control on the slope:

On inclines, you can drive smoothly

with reduced shifting quantity. On de-

clines, the vehicle will shift down auto-

matically to obtain optimum engine

braking and reduce the driver’s foot

braking load.

DAutomatic shifting point change con-

trol:

The most suitable shift range is se-

lected depending on the driver’s accel-

erator pedal operation and vehicle con-

dition.

The shift range position can be

changed in “S” mode. When the selec-

tor lever is in the “S” position, the

shift range position can be switched

between “5” (fifth range) and “1” (first

range) by turning the “S” mode switch

of the selector lever to the “+” (up) or

“−” (down) direction. By turning the

“S” mode switch to the “+” (up) direc-

tion and holding it for at least 1 sec-

ond, the highest shift range position

can be obtained. However, it cannot be

changed while cruise control is acti-

vated. When the selector lever is

shifted to the “S” position, shift range

position “4” (fourth range) is selected

automatically.

However, if the selector lever is shifted

to the “S” position when AI shifting

control is being performed, the initial

shift range position may be “3” (third

range). This is because the suitable

shift range is selected depending on

the driving condition.

07 04.26

226 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

The “S” mode indicator light and the cur-

rent shift range position are shown on the

instrument cluster.

XS17027

1: Upshift range

2: Downshift range

Shift range positions

D“5” (Fifth range):

The most suitable gear is selected au-

tomatically between first and overdrive

(fifth) gears according to the vehicle

speed and driving conditions.

D“4” (Fourth range):

The most suitable gear is selected au-

tomatically between first and fourth

gears according to the vehicle speed

and driving conditions. Slight engine

braking will be obtained on a downhill

road. Smooth running with less shifting

will be obtained on an uphill road.

D“3” (Third range):

The most suitable gear is selected au-

tomatically between first and third

gears according to the vehicle speed

and driving conditions. This range is to

be used when stronger engine braking

is necessary.

D“2” (Second range):

First or second gear will be selected

automatically according to the vehicle

speed and driving conditions. This

range is to be used when engine brak-

ing stronger than that of the “3” range

position is necessary.

07 04.26

227

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

D“1” (First range):

The gear is fixed in first regardless of

vehicle speed and driving conditions.

This range is to be used when maxi-

mum engine braking is necessary.

If you attempt to downshift the transmis-

sion when it is not possible to downshift

due to high vehicle speed, a warning tone

sounds twice.

NOTICE

Do not drive in the “3”, “2” or “1”

range when driving at high speed or

climbing a gentle slope for a long

time. Otherwise the transmission or

engine may overheat causing damage.

Maximum allowable speeds

To get on a highway or to pass slower

traffic, maximum acceleration may be nec-

essary. Make sure you observe the follow-

ing maximum allowable speed in each

range:

4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine

range km/h (mph)

1 59 (36)

2 102 (63)

3 148 (91)

4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine

without towing package

range km/h (mph)

1 61 (37)

2 105 (65)

3 154 (95)

with towing package

range km/h (mph)

1 58 (36)

2 100 (62)

3 147 (91)

Four−wheel drive models without towing

package

—Front drive control switch knob at “4L”

range km/h (mph)

1 23 (14)

2 40 (24)

3 58 (36)

4 68 (42)

5 68 (42)

Four−wheel drive models with towing

package

—Front drive control switch knob at “4L”

range km/h (mph)

1 22 (13)

2 38 (23)

3 56 (34)

4 64 (39)

5 64 (39)

NOTICE

Do not downshift if you are going

faster than the maximum allowable

speed for the next lower range.

07 04.26

228 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

When the “S” mode indicator light does

not come on even with the selector lever

moved to the “S” position, there may be a

problem somewhere in the system. Have

your vehicle checked/repaired by your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible. In this

case, you can drive in the same condition

as in the “D” position.

(d) Using engine braking

To use engine braking, you can downshift

the transmission as follows:

DWhen driving in the “D” position—

Shift the selector lever to “S” position.

When driving in the “5” range within

the “S” position—

Turn the “S” mode switch of the selec-

tor lever to the “−” side to select the

“4” range. The transmission will down-

shift to fourth range when the vehicle

speed drops down to or lower than the

following speed, and engine braking will

be enabled.

4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine

Four−wheel drive models without tow-

ing package

—Front drive control switch knob

at “4L”

75 km/h (46 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Four−wheel drive models with towing

package

—Front drive control switch knob

at “4L”

72 km/h (44 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

When the cruise control is being used,

engine braking can not be enabled be-

cause the cruise control is not can-

celled. However, engine braking will be

automatically enabled if the vehicle

speed is higher than the set speed of

the cruise control depending on the

driving conditions.

For decreasing the vehicle speed, see

“Cruise control” on page 259 in this

Section.

DTurn the “S” mode switch of the selec-

tor lever to the “−” side to select the

“3” range. The transmission will down-

shift to third range when the vehicle

speed drops down to or lower than the

following speed, and stronger engine

braking will be enabled.

4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine

136 km/h (84 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine

Two−wheel drive models

—without towing package

138 km/h (85 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—with towing package

132 km/h (82 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Four−wheel drive models without tow-

ing package

—Front drive control switch knob

at “2WD” or “4H”

138 km/h (85 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—Front drive control switch knob

at “4L”

52 km/h (32 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

07 04.26

229

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Four−wheel drive models with towing

package

—Front drive control switch knob

at “2WD” or “4H”

132 km/h (82 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—Front drive control switch knob

at “4L”

50 km/h (31 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DTurn the “S” mode switch of the selec-

tor lever to the “−” side to select the

“2” range. The transmission will down-

shift to second range when the vehicle

speed drops down to or lower than the

following speed, and more powerful en-

gine braking than that of the “3” range

position will be enabled.

4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine

92 km/h (57 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine

Two−wheel drive models

—without towing package

93 km/h (57 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—with towing package

89 km/h (55 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Four−wheel drive models without tow-

ing package

—Front drive control switch knob

at “2WD” or “4H”

93 km/h (57 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—Front drive control switch knob

at “4L”

35 km/h (21 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Four−wheel drive models with towing

package

—Front drive control switch knob

at “2WD” or “4H”

89 km/h (55 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—Front drive control switch knob

at “4L”

33 km/h (20 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DTurn the “S” mode switch of the selec-

tor lever to the “−” side to select the

“1” range. The transmission will down-

shift to first range when the vehicle

speed drops down to or lower than the

following speed, and maximum engine

braking will be enabled.

4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine

39 km/h (24 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine

Two−wheel drive models

—without towing package

40 km/h (24 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—with towing package

38 km/h (23 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Four−wheel drive models without tow-

ing package

—Front drive control switch knob

at “2WD” or “4H”

40 km/h (24 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—Front drive control switch knob

at “4L”

15 km/h (9 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Four−wheel drive models with towing

package

—Front drive control switch knob

at “2WD” or “4H”

38 km/h (23 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—Front drive control switch knob

at “4L”

14 km/h (8 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

07 04.26

230 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on a

slippery surface. The abrupt change

in engine speed could cause the ve-

hicle to skid or spin.

(e) Backing up

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal held down with

your foot, shift the selector lever to the

“R” position.

NOTICE

Never shift into reverse while the ve-

hicle is moving.

(f) Parking

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal pressed down,

fully depress the parking brake pedal

to apply the parking brake securely.

3. With the brake pedal pressed down,

shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-

tion.

CAUTION

Never attempt to move the selector

lever into “P” position under any cir-

cumstances while the vehicle is mov-

ing. Serious mechanical damage and

loss of vehicle control may result.

(g) Good driving practice

DIf the transmission repeatedly shifts up

and down between third gear and over-

drive when climbing a gentle slope,

shift the selector lever into “S” posi-

tion.

DWhen towing a trailer, in order to main-

tain engine braking efficiency, do not

use the transmission in “D”. Select an

appropriate shift range in “S” mode.

CAUTION

Always keep your foot on the brake

pedal while stopped with the engine

running. This prevents the vehicle

from creeping.

NOTICE

Always use the brake pedal or the

parking brake to hold the vehicle on

an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold

the vehicle using the accelerator ped-

al, as this can cause the transmission

to overheat.

(h) If you cannot shift the selector le-

ver out of “P” position

If you cannot shift the selector lever from

the “P” position even though the brake

pedal is depressed, use the shift lock

override button. For instructions, see “If

you cannot shift automatic transmission

selector lever” on page 516 in Section 4.

07 04.26

231

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Your automatic transmission has a shift

lock system to minimize the possibility of

incorrect operation. This means you can

only shift out of “P” position when the

brake pedal is depressed (with the ignition

switch in “ON” position).

(a) Selector lever

The shift position is also displayed on the

instrument cluster.

P: Parking, engine starting and key re-

moval

R: Reverse

N: Neutral

D: Normal driving

S: “S” mode driving

+: Upshift range

−: Downshift range

07 04.26

"6 speed models

XS17026a

Shift with the brake pedal

depressed. (The ignition switch

must be in “ON” position)

Shift normally.

To select “S” or “D”, pull the

lever toward you and shift

down. Shift the lever up and

push outward.

Selector lever

232 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

(b) Normal driving

1. Start the engine as instructed in “How

to start the engine” on page 468 in

Section 3. The transmission must be in

“P” or “N”.

When the front drive control switch knob

is in “4L” (low−speed position, four−wheel

drive), the driving pattern selector setting

has no effect on gear shift timing. (See

“Four−wheel drive system” on page 239 in

this Section for information of the front

drive control lever.)

2. With your foot holding down the brake

pedal, shift the selector lever to “D”.

When the lever is in the “D” position, the

automatic transmission system will select

the most suitable gear for running condi-

tions such as normal cruising, hill climb-

ing, hard towing, etc.

Always use the “D” position for better fuel

economy and quieter driving. If the engine

coolant temperature is low or when the

front drive control switch knob is in “4L”

(low−speed position, four−wheel drive), the

transmission will not shift into the over-

drive gear even in the “D” position. (See

“Four−wheel drive system” on page 239 in

this Section for information of the front

drive control.)

CAUTION

Never put your foot on the accelera-

tor pedal while shifting.

3. Release the parking brake and brake

pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal

slowly for smooth starting.

AI (Artificial Intelligence) shifting con-

trol—

AI shifting control selects the most

suitable shift range automatically ac-

cording to the driver’s operation and

driving condition.

AI shifting control operates automatical-

ly with the selector lever in the “D”

position. When the lever is moved to

the “S” position, this function will be

cancelled.

DShifting control on the slope:

On inclines, you can drive smoothly

with reduced shifting quantity. On de-

clines, the vehicle will shift down auto-

matically to obtain optimum engine

braking and reduce the driver’s foot

braking load.

DAutomatic shifting point change con-

trol:

The most suitable shift range is se-

lected depending on the driver’s accel-

erator pedal operation and vehicle con-

dition.

The shift range position can be

changed in “S” mode. When the selec-

tor lever is in the “S” position, the

shift range position can be switched

between “6” (sixth range) and “1” (first

range) by turning the “S” mode switch

of the selector lever to the “+” (up) or

“−” (down) direction. By turning the

“S” mode switch to the “+” (up) direc-

tion and holding it for at least 1 sec-

ond, the highest shift range position

can be obtained. However, it cannot be

changed while cruise control is acti-

vated. When the selector lever is

shifted to the “S” position, shift range

position “4” (fourth range) or “5” (fifth

range) is selected depending on the ve-

hicle speed.

07 04.26

233

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

However, if the selector lever is shifted

to the “S” position when AI shifting

control is being performed, the initial

shift range position may be “2” (second

range) or “3” (third range). This is be-

cause the suitable shift range is se-

lected depending on the driving condi-

tion.

The “S” mode indicator light and the cur-

rent shift range position are shown on the

instrument cluster.

XS17027

1: Upshift range

2: Downshift range

Shift range positions

D“6” (Sixth range):

The most suitable gear is selected au-

tomatically between first and overdrive

(sixth) gears according to the vehicle

speed and driving conditions.

D“5” (Fifth range):

The most suitable gear is selected au-

tomatically between first and fifth gears

according to vehicle speed and driving

conditions. This range is suitable for

acceleration such as when you want to

pass a vehicle running ahead of you

during high speed driving.

D“4” (Fourth range):

The most suitable gear is selected au-

tomatically between first and fourth

gears according to the vehicle speed

and driving conditions. Slight engine

braking will be obtained on a downhill

road. Smooth running with less shifting

will be obtained on an uphill road.

D“3” (Third range):

The most suitable gear is selected au-

tomatically between first and third

gears according to the vehicle speed

and driving conditions. This range is to

be used when stronger engine braking

is necessary.

07 04.26

234 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

D“2” (Second range):

First or second gear will be selected

automatically according to the vehicle

speed and driving conditions. This

range is to be used when engine brak-

ing stronger than that of the “3” range

position is necessary.

D“1” (First range):

The gear is fixed in first regardless of

vehicle speed and driving conditions.

This range is to be used when maxi-

mum engine braking is necessary.

If you attempt to downshift the transmis-

sion when it is not possible to downshift

due to high vehicle speed, a warning tone

sounds twice.

Maximum allowable speeds

To get on a highway or to pass slower

traffic, maximum acceleration may be nec-

essary. Make sure you observe the follow-

ing maximum allowable speeds in each

range:

5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine

Two−wheel drive models without towing

package

range km/h (mph)

1 62 (38)

2 106 (65)

3 154 (95)

Two−wheel drive models with towing

package

range km/h (mph)

1 59 (36)

2 101 (62)

3 147 (91)

Four−wheel drive models without towing

package

—Front drive control switch knob at “4L”

range km/h (mph)

1 23 (14)

2 40 (24)

3 58 (36)

4 68 (42)

5 68 (42)

6 68 (42)

Four−wheel drive models with towing

package

—Front drive control switch knob at “4L”

range km/h (mph)

1 22 (13)

2 38 (23)

3 56 (34)

4 64 (39)

5 64 (39)

6 64 (39)

NOTICE

Do not downshift if you are going

faster than the maximum allowable

speed for the next lower range.

07 04.26

235

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

When the “S” mode indicator light does

not come on even with the selector lever

moved to the “S” position, there may be a

problem somewhere in the system. Have

your vehicle checked/repaired by your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible. In this

case, you can drive in the same condition

as in the “D” position.

(d) Using engine braking

To use engine braking, you can downshift

the transmission as follows:

DWhen driving in the “D” position—

Shift the selector lever to the “S”

position.

When driving in the “6” range within

the “S” position—

Turn the “S” mode switch of the se-

lector to the “−” side to select the “5”

range. The transmission will down-

shift to fifth range when the vehicle

speed drops down to or lower than

the following speed, and engine brak-

ing will be enabled.

5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine

Four−wheel drive models

—Front drive control switch knob

at “4L”

79 km/h (49 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

When the cruise control is being used,

even if you downshift the transmission,

engine braking will not be enabled be-

cause the cruise control is not can-

celled. However, engine braking will be

automatically enabled if the vehicle

speed is higher than the set speed of

the cruise control depending on the

driving conditions.

For ways to decrease the vehicle

speed, see “Cruise control” on page

259 in this Section.

DTurn the “S” mode switch of the selec-

tor to the “−” side to select the “4”

range. The transmission will downshift

to fourth range when the vehicle speed

drops down to or lower than the follow-

ing speed, and stronger engine braking

will be enabled.

5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine

Four−wheel drive models

—Front drive control switch knob

at “4L”

79 km/h (49 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

When the cruise control is being

used, even if you downshift the

transmission, engine braking will not

be enabled because the cruise con-

trol is not cancelled. However, engine

braking will be automatically enabled

if the vehicle speed is higher than

the set speed of the cruise control

depending on the driving conditions.

DTurn the “S” mode switch of the selec-

tor to the “−” side to select the “3”

range. The transmission will downshift

to third range when the vehicle speed

drops down to or lower than the follow-

ing speed, and more powerful engine

braking than that of the “4” range posi-

tion will be enabled.

07 04.26

236 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine

Two−wheel drive models

—without towing package

138 km/h (85 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—with towing package

131 km/h (81 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Four−wheel drive models without tow-

ing package

—Front drive control switch knob

at “2WD” or “4H”

138 km/h (85 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—Front drive control switch knob

at “4L”

55 km/h (34 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Four−wheel drive models with towing

package

—Front drive control switch knob

at “2WD” or “4H”

131 km/h (81 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—Front drive control switch knob

at “4L”

52 km/h (32 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DTurn the “S” mode switch of the selec-

tor to the “−” side to select the “2”

range. The transmission will downshift

to second range when the vehicle

speed drops down to or lower than the

following speed, and more powerful en-

gine braking will be enabled.

5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine

Two−wheel drive models

—without towing package

94 km/h (58 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—with towing package

90 km/h (55 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Four−wheel drive models without tow-

ing package

—Front drive control switch knob

at “2WD” or “4H”

94 km/h (58 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—Front drive control switch knob

at “4L”

37 km/h (22 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Four−wheel drive models with towing

package

—Front drive control switch knob

at “2WD” or “4H”

90 km/h (55 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—Front drive control switch knob

at “4L”

36 km/h (22 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DTurn the “S” mode switch of the selec-

tor to the “−” side to select the “1”

range. The downshift to first range

when the vehicle speed drops down to

or lower than the following speed, and

maximum engine braking will be en-

abled.

5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine

Two−wheel drive models

—without towing package

41 km/h (25 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—with towing package

39 km/h (24 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Four−wheel drive models without tow-

ing package

—Front drive control switch knob

at “2WD” or “4H”

41 km/h (25 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—Front drive control switch knob

at “4L”

15 km/h (9 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Four−wheel drive models with towing

package

—Front drive control switch knob

at “2WD” or “4H”

39 km/h (24 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—Front drive control switch knob

at “4L”

14 km/h (8 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

07 04.26

237

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on a

slippery surface. The abrupt change

in engine speed could cause the ve-

hicle to skid or spin.

(e) Backing up

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal held down with

your foot, shift the selector lever to the

“R” position.

NOTICE

Never shift into reverse while the ve-

hicle is moving.

(f) Parking

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal pressed down,

fully depress the parking brake pedal

to apply the parking brake securely.

3. With the brake pedal pressed down,

shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-

tion.

CAUTION

Never attempt to move the selector

lever into “P” position under any cir-

cumstances while the vehicle is mov-

ing. Serious mechanical damage and

loss of vehicle control may result.

(g) Good driving practice

DIf the transmission repeatedly shifts up

and down between fourth gear and

overdrive when climbing a gentle slope,

shift the selector lever into “S” posi-

tion.

DWhen towing a trailer, in order to main-

tain engine braking efficiency, do not

use the transmission in “D”. Select an

appropriate shift range in “S” mode.

CAUTION

Always keep your foot on the brake

pedal while stopped with the engine

running. This prevents the vehicle

from creeping.

NOTICE

Always use the brake pedal or the

parking brake to hold the vehicle on

an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold

the vehicle using the accelerator ped-

al, as this can cause the transmission

to overheat.

07 04.26

238 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

(h) If you cannot shift the selector le-

ver out of “P” position

If you cannot shift the selector lever from

the “P” position even though the brake

pedal is depressed, use the shift lock

override button. For instructions, see “If

you cannot shift automatic transmission

selector lever” on page 516 in Section 4. XS17032b

(i) “TOW/HAUL” switch

(on some models)

Use “TOW/HAUL” mode when pulling a

trailer or hauling a heavy load. In this

mode, the driving and engine braking per-

formance is improved in accordance with

towing conditions or increased load.

To turn on: Push “TOW/HAUL” switch

“TOW/HAUL” mode is activated and

“TOW/HAUL” mode indicator light comes

on by pressing “TOW/HAUL” switch.

To turn off: Push “TOW/HAUL” switch

once again and the “TOW/HAUL” mode

indicator light goes off.

“TOW/HAUL” mode is canceled by press-

ing “TOW/HAUL” switch again or by turn-

ing the ignition switch to “OFF”.

Even when “TOW/HAUL” mode is used

during normal driving, no damage is

caused to the engine or the transmission.

However, fuel economy is reduced and the

transmission and/or engine driving charac-

teristics may feel unusual.

Toyota recommends using “TOW/HAUL”

mode only when a heavy trailer or a large

heavy load is towed.

07 04.26

239

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS17003b

Use the front drive control switch knob

to select the following transfer modes.

“2WD” (high speed position, two−wheel

drive): Front drive control switch knob at

“2WD”

Use this for normal driving on dry hard−

surfaced roads. This position gives greater

economy, quietest ride, least wear and

better vehicle control.

“4H” (high speed position, four−wheel

drive): Front drive control switch knob at

“4H”

The “4HI” (high speed four−wheel drive)

indicator light comes on when the “4H”

mode is selected.

Use this for greater traction than two−

wheel drive. (When you experience a loss

of power, such as wheel spinning.) This

position provides greater traction than

two−wheel drive.

In this mode, the vehicle stability control

system is off. (See “Vehicle stability

control system” on page 248 in this

Section.)

“4L” (low speed position, four−wheel

drive): Front drive control switch knob at

“4L”

The “4LO” (low speed four−wheel drive)

indicator light comes on when the “4L”

mode is selected.

Use this for maximum power and traction.

Use “4L” position for climbing or descend-

ing steep hills, off−road driving, and hard

pulling in sand, mud or deep snow.

See “(c) Shifting procedure” for further in-

structions.

In this mode, the vehicle stability control

system is off. (See “Vehicle stability

control system” on page 248 in this

Section.)

07 04.26

Four−wheel drive system

(a) Front drive control

240 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

The A.D.D. can be engaged or disen-

gaged by the shifting operations de-

scribed in “(c) Shifting procedure”.

You should drive in four−wheel drive for

at least 16 km (10 miles) each month.

This will assure that the front drive com-

ponents are lubricated.

SHIFTING BETWEEN “2WD” AND “4H”

To shift from “2WD” to “4H”, reduce the

vehicle speed to less than 100 km/h (62

mph) and turn the front drive control

switch knob fully clockwise.

When the ambient temperature is −15_C

(5.0_F) or lower, shifting can be performed

with the vehicle speed below 70 km/h (43

mph).

If the “4HI” (high speed four−wheel drive)

indicator light continues to blink when you

operate the front drive control switch knob

from the “2WD” to the “4H” position, this

reminds you that the transfer mode is not

securely in “4H” mode. Drive straight

ahead while accelerating or decelerating.

If the “4HI” (high speed four−wheel drive)

indicator light continues to blink and the

buzzer sounds when you operate the front

drive control switch knob from the “2WD”

to the “4H” position, this reminds you that

the transfer mode is not in “4H” mode.

Stop the vehicle or reduce the vehicle

speed to less than 100 km/h (62 mph).

(When the ambient temperature is −15_C

(5.0_F) or lower, it needs to be reduced

to below 70 km/h (43 mph).) Operate the

switch knob again.

CAUTION

Never operate the front drive control

switch knob if the wheels are slip-

ping. Stop the slipping or spinning

before operating.

To shift from “4H” to “2WD”, reduce the

vehicle speed to less than 100 km/h (62

mph) and turn the front drive control

switch knob fully counterclockwise.

When you operate the front drive control

switch knob from “4H” to “2WD” with the

vehicle speed at 100 km/h (62 mph) or

higher, the “4HI” indicator light continues

to blink and buzzer sounds. When the

switch knob is returned from “2WD” to

“4H”, the indicator light turns off and the

buzzer stops sounding.

If the “4HI” (high speed four−wheel drive)

indicator light continues to blink when you

operate the front drive control switch knob

from the “4H” to the “2WD” position, this

reminds you that the transfer mode is not

securely in “2WD” mode. Drive straight

ahead while accelerating or decelerating,

or drive forward or backward in a short

distance.

07 04.26

(b) A.D.D. (automatic

disconnecting differential) (c) Shifting procedure

241

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

If there is any malfunction within the

brake system, “4HI” or “4LO” indicator

light blinks and the transfer mode may not

be able to be shifted from “4H” to “2WD”.

If the indicator light continues to blink

even if doing so, contact your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible. There may be

a trouble in the four−wheel drive system.

CAUTION

Never operate the front drive control

switch knob if the wheels are slip-

ping. Stop the slipping or spinning

before operating.

SHIFTING BETWEEN “4H” AND “4L”

To shift between “4H” and “4L”

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop

with the brake pedal held down.

2. Shift the automatic transmission selec-

tor lever into “N”.

3. To shift from “4H” to “4L”, push and

turn the front drive control switch knob

fully clockwise.

To shift from “4L” to “4H”, turn the

front drive control switch knob counter-

clockwise.

4. Maintain this condition until the “4LO”

or “4HI” indicator light comes on.

If the “4LO” indicator light continues to

blink...

If this indicator light continues to blink

when you operate the front drive control

switch knob to the “4H” or “4L” position,

stop the vehicle completely, shift the auto-

matic transmission selector lever securely

into “N” and operate the switch knob

again.

INFORMATION

zIf the engine coolant temperature is

too low the transfer mode may not

be able to be shifted. When the en-

gine is warmer operate the switch

knob again.

zIf the automatic transmission selec-

tor lever is moved before the indi-

cator comes on, the transfer mode

may not be shifted completely. In

this case, stop the vehicle com-

pletely, return the automatic trans-

mission selector lever to “N” and

operate the switch knob again.

If there is any malfunction in the brake

system or the engine, “4HI” or “4LO” indi-

cator light blinks and the transfer mode

may not be able to be shifted from “4H”

to “4L”.

If the indicator continues to blink even if

doing so, contact your Toyota dealer as

soon as possible. There may be a trouble

in the four−wheel drive system.

07 04.26

242 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

The traction control system automatical-

ly helps prevent the spinning of rear

wheels (two−wheel drive models) or 4

wheels (four−wheel drive models) when

the vehicle is started or accelerated on

slippery road surfaces.

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the system automatically

turns on.

CAUTION

Under certain slippery road condi-

tions, full traction of the vehicle and

power to the rear wheels (two−wheel

drive models) or 4 wheels (four−wheel

drive models) cannot be maintained,

even though the traction control sys-

tem is in operation. Do not drive the

vehicle under any speed or maneuver-

ing conditions which may cause the

vehicle to lose traction control. In si-

tuations where the road surface is

covered with ice or snow, your ve-

hicle should be fitted with snow tires

or tire chains. Always drive at an ap-

propriate and cautious speed for the

present road conditions.

XS17004a

Type A

XS17005a

Type B

NORMAL DRIVING MODE

Leave the system on during the ordi-

nary driving so that it can operate

when needed.

You may hear a sound in the engine

compartment for a few seconds when the

engine is started or just after the vehicle

begins to move. This means that the trac-

tion control system is in the self−check

mode, but does not indicate a malfunction.

When the traction control system is oper-

ating, the following conditions occur:

DThe system controls the spinning of the

rear wheels (two−wheel drive models)

or 4 wheels (four−wheel drive models).

At this time, the slip indicator light

blinks.

DYou may feel vibration or noise in your

vehicle, caused by operation of the

brakes. This indicates the system is

functioning properly.

The slip indicator light comes on for a few

seconds when the ignition switch is turned

to the “ON” position. If the indicator light

does not come on when the ignition is

turned on, contact your Toyota dealer.

07 04.26

Traction control system

243

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

The brake actuator temperature increases

during continuous operation of the follow-

ing systems under conditions such as on

slippery roads.

DTraction control system

D“AUTO LSD” system

If the brake actuator temperature becomes

too high while any of the systems is oper-

ating, a buzzer will start to sound intermit-

tently to indicate that the traction control

system can no longer operate. In this

case, immediately stop your vehicle at a

safe place.

If the system continues to operate, the

buzzer sound changes from intermittent to

continuous. (The continuous buzzer

sounds for about 3 seconds.)

At the time, the slip indicator light will

come on and the traction control system

temporarily stops operating in order to

protect the brake actuator. (Although the

traction control system does not operate,

it is no problem to continue driving.) The

system will be automatically restored after

a short time and the slip indicator light

goes off.

XS17010a

TRACTION CONTROL OFF MODE

(two−wheel drive mode only)

When getting the vehicle out of mud or

newly fallen snow, etc., it may be bene-

ficial to turn off the traction control

system. This system that controls en-

gine performance interferes with the

process of freeing rear wheels.

To turn off: Briefly push the “VSC OFF”

switch.

The “AUTO LSD” and slip indicator lights

will come on.

The vehicle stability control system is al-

ways activated, even if the traction control

system is turned off.

To turn on: Briefly push the “VSC OFF”

switch once again.

The “AUTO LSD” and slip indicator lights

will go off.

If the engine is turned off while the

“AUTO LSD” and slip indicator lights are

on and then restarted, the indicator lights

will turn off automatically.

When you push and hold the “VSC OFF”

switch for 3 seconds or more with the

vehicle stopped, turn off the vehicle stabil-

ity control system. See “Vehicle stability

control system” on page 248 in this Sec-

tion.

“AUTO LSD” and slip indicator lights come

on for a few seconds when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position. If

the indicator lights do not come on when

the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position, contact your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Do not drive with the traction control

system continuously turned off.

07 04.26

244 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS17006a

Type A

XS17007a

Type B

“VSC OFF” warning light

The light flashing warns that there is a

problem somewhere in the following.

DTraction control system

DVehicle stability control system

D“AUTO LSD” system

When the system is normal and the igni-

tion switch is turned to the “ON” position,

the light will come on and will go off after

a few seconds.

If the “VSC OFF” warning light flashes

while driving, the traction control system

does not work. However, if the brakes

operate normally when applied, it is no

problem to continue your driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer:

DThe warning light does not come on

after the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position.

DThe warning light remains on after the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

DThe warning light flashes while driving

XS17009

The “AUTO LSD” system aids traction

by using the traction control system to

control engine performance and braking

when one of the rear wheels begins to

spin.

This system should be used only when

wheel spinning occurs in a ditch or

rough surface.

This system is effective in case one of

the rear wheels is spinning.

07 04.26

“AUTO LSD” system

245

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

CAUTION

Do not use the “AUTO LSD” system

in conditions other than the above. A

much greater steering effort and more

careful cornering control will be re-

quired. XS17010a

To turn on the system, briefly push the

“VSC OFF” switch.

The “AUTO LSD” is activated under the

following condition. At this time, the

“AUTO LSD” and slip indicator lights

will come on.

DThe driving mode is set in the two−

wheel drive mode (In the four−wheel

drive mode, the system does not

work.)

DDriving at a speed under 100 km/h (62

mph)

To turn off the system, briefly push the

“VSC OFF” switch again and the “AUTO

LSD” and slip indicator lights will go off.

If the engine is turned off while the

“AUTO LSD” and slip indicator lights are

on and then restarted, the indicator light

will turn off automatically.

When you push and hold the “VSC OFF”

switch for 3 seconds or more with the

vehicle stopped, turn off the vehicle stabil-

ity control system. See “Vehicle stability

control system” on page 248 in this Sec-

tion.

07 04.26

246 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS17011a

Type A

XS17012a

Type B

Make sure the “AUTO LSD” and slip indi-

cator lights come on under the above con-

dition when you use the “AUTO LSD” sys-

tem.

The slip indicator light blinks when the

system is controlling the spinning of the

rear wheels.

The “AUTO LSD” and slip indicator lights

come on for a few seconds when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion. If the indicator lights does not come

on when the ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position, contact your Toyota

dealer.

The brake actuator temperature increases

during continuous operation of the follow-

ing systems under conditions such as on

slippery roads.

D“AUTO LSD” system

DTraction control system

If the brake actuator temperature becomes

too high while any of the systems is oper-

ating, a buzzer will start to sound intermit-

tently to indicate that the “AUTO LSD”

system can no longer operate. In this

case, immediately stop your vehicle at a

safe place.

If the system continues to operate, the

buzzer sound changes from intermittent to

continuous. (The continuous buzzer

sounds for about 3 seconds.)

At the time the slip indicator light will

come on and the “AUTO LSD” system

temporarily stops operating in order to

protect the brake actuator. (Although the

“AUTO LSD” system does not operate, it

is no problem to continue driving.) The

system will be automatically restored after

a short time.

07 04.26

247

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS17006a

Type A

XS17007a

Type B

“VSC OFF” warning light

The light flashing warns that there is a

problem somewhere in the following.

D“AUTO LSD” system

DTraction control system

DVehicle stability control system

When the system is normal and the igni-

tion switch is turned to the “ON” position,

the light will come on and will go off after

a few seconds.

If the “VSC OFF” warning light flashes

while driving, the “AUTO LSD” system

does not work. However, as the brakes

operate normally when applied, it is no

problem to continue your driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer:

DThe warning light does not come on

after the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position.

DThe warning light remains on after the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

DThe warning light flashes while driving.

CAUTION

Do not drive with the “AUTO LSD”

system continuously turned on.

07 04.26

248 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

The vehicle stability control system

helps provide integrated control of the

systems such as anti−lock brake sys-

tem, traction control, engine control,

etc. This system automatically controls

the output of the brakes or engine to

help prevent the vehicle from skidding

when cornering on a slippery road sur-

face or operating steering wheel abrupt-

ly.

The vehicle stability control system is acti-

vated when the vehicle speed is more

than 15 km/h (9 mph).

You may hear a sound in the engine

compartment for a few seconds when the

engine is started or just after the vehicle

begins to move. This means that the sys-

tem is in the self−check mode, but does

not indicate a malfunction.

CAUTION

DDo not rely excessively on the ve-

hicle stability control system. Even

if the vehicle stability control sys-

tem is operating, you must always

drive carefully and attentively to

avoid serious injury. Reckless driv-

ing will result in an unexpected ac-

cident. If the slip indicator light

blinks and an alarm sounds, special

care should be taken while driving.

DOnly use tires of specified size. The

size, manufacturer, brand and tread

pattern for all 4 tires should be the

same. If you use the tires other

than specified, or different type or

size, the vehicle stability control

system may not function correctly.

When replacing the tires or wheels,

contact your Toyota dealer. (See

“Checking and replacing tires” on

page 551 in Section 7−2.)

XS17004a

Type A

XS17005a

Type B

07 04.26

Vehicle stability control

system

249

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

If the vehicle is going to skid during driv-

ing, the slip indicator light blinks and an

alarm sounds intermittently. Special care

should be taken while driving.

The slip indicator light comes on for a few

seconds when the ignition switch is turned

to the “ON” position. If the indicator light

does not come on when the ignition is

turned on, contact your Toyota dealer.

XS17006a

Type A

XS17007a

Type B

The vehicle stability control system au-

tomatically turns off, and the “VSC

OFF” indicator light is illuminated,

when the four−wheel drive mode is set.

The “VSC OFF” indicator light comes on

for a few seconds when the ignition switch

is turned to the “ON” position, and then

turns off. If either one of the above condi-

tions applies, the indicator light is illumi-

nated again.

07 04.26

250 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS17035a

When getting the vehicle out of mud or

newly fallen snow, etc., it may be bene-

ficial to turn off the vehicle stability

control system. This system that con-

trols engine performance interferes with

the process of freeing rear wheels

(two−wheel drive models) or 4 wheels

(four−wheel drive models).

To turn off: First, push the “VSC OFF”

switch to turn off the traction control

system and check that the “AUTO LSD”

and slip indicator lights come on. Then,

push and hold the “VSC OFF” switch

for 3 seconds or more with the vehicle

stopped.

The “VSC OFF” and slip indicator lights

will come on.

To turn on: Briefly push the “VSC OFF”

switch once again.

The “VSC OFF” and slip indicator lights

will go off.

If the engine is turned off while the “VSC

OFF” and slip indicator lights are on and

then restarted, the indicator lights will turn

off automatically.

When you briefly push the “VSC OFF”

switch, turn off the vehicle stability control

system. See “Traction control system” on

page 242 in this Section.

The “VSC OFF” and slip indicator lights

come on for a few seconds when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion. If the indicator lights do not come on

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, contact your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Do not drive with the vehicle stability

control system continuously turned

off.

XS17006a

Type A

XS17007a

Type B

07 04.26

251

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

“VSC OFF” warning light

The light flashing warns that there is a

problem somewhere in the following.

DVehicle stability control system

DTraction control system

D“AUTO LSD” system

The light comes on when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position, and

will go off after a few seconds.

If the light flashes while driving, the ve-

hicle stability control system does not

work. However, if the brakes operate nor-

mally when applied, it is no problem to

continue your driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer:

DThe warning light does not come on

after the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position.

DThe warning light remains on after the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

DThe warning light flashes while driving.

The tire pressure warning system warns

you that the tire inflation pressure is

low.

The tire pressure warning system is not

a substitute for checking normal tire infla-

tion pressure. Check the tire inflation

pressure with a tire pressure gauge regu-

larly.

CAUTION

The warning system may not activate

immediately if blowout or sudden air

loss should occur.

XS17013b

Type A

XS17014b

Type B

07 04.26

Tire pressure warning system

252 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

The tire pressure warning light comes on

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position and goes off after a few

seconds. This means the tire pressure

warning system is operating properly. If

the tire inflation pressure becomes low,

the light comes on again. In this case,

adjusting the tire inflation pressure will

turn off the light after 3 to 6 minutes. If

the light comes on after blinking for 1

minute, the tire pressure warning system

is not working properly.

Indicator

status Meanings Do this

Tire inflation

pressure is

low

Adjust the

tire

inflation

pressure

ON after

blinking for

1 minute

Tire pressure

warning

system

malfunction

Have the

system

checked at

your Toyota

dealer

CAUTION

If the tire pressure warning light

comes on, be sure to observe the

following precautions. Failure to do

so could cause loss of vehicle control

and result in death or serious injury.

DStop your vehicle in a safe place as

soon as possible. Adjust the tire

inflation pressure immediately.

DIf the tire pressure warning light

comes on even after tire inflation

pressure adjustment, it is probable

that you have a flat tire. Check the

tires. If the tire is flat, change to

the temporary spare tire and have

the flat tire repaired by the nearest

Toyota dealer.

DAvoid abrupt maneuvering and brak-

ing. If the vehicle tires deteriorate,

you could lose control of the steer-

ing wheel or the brakes.

The tire pressure warning light may turn

on due to natural causes such as natural

air leaks or tire inflation pressure changes

caused by temperature. In this case, ad-

justing the tire inflation pressure will turn

off the light after 3 to 6 minutes.

Pushing the tire pressure warning reset

switch should not turn off the tire pressure

warning light. Adjusting the tire inflation

pressure will turn off the light.

The temporary spare tire is not equipped

with the tire pressure warning valve and

transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the warning

light will not turn off even though the flat

tire is replaced with the temporary spare

tire. Replace the temporary spare tire with

the repaired tire and adjust the proper tire

inflation pressure. The tire pressure warn-

ing light will turn off after 3 to 6 minutes.

07 04.26

253

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

CAUTION

Each tire, including the spare (if pro-

vided), should be checked monthly

when cold and inflated to the inflation

pressure recommended by the vehicle

manufacturer on the vehicle placard

or tire inflation pressure label (tire

and load information label). (If your

vehicle has tires of a different size

than the size indicated on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label

(tire and load information label), you

should determine the proper tire infla-

tion pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your ve-

hicle has been equipped with a tire

pressure monitoring system (TPMS−

tire pressure warning system) that il-

luminates a low tire pressure telltale

(tire pressure warning light) when one

or more of your tires is significantly

under−inflated. Accordingly, when the

low tire pressure telltale (tire pres-

sure warning light) illuminates, you

should stop and check your tires as

soon as possible, and inflate them to

the proper pressure. Driving on a sig-

nificantly under−inflated tire causes

the tire to overheat and can lead to

tire failure. Under−inflation also re-

duces fuel efficiency and tire tread

life, and may affect the vehicle’s han-

dling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS (tire pres-

sure warning system) is not a substi-

tute for proper tire maintenance, and

it is the driver’s responsibility to

maintain correct tire pressure, even if

under−inflation has not reached the

level to trigger illumination of the

TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire

pressure warning light).

Your vehicle has also been equipped

with a TPMS (tire pressure warning

system) malfunction indicator to indi-

cate when the system is not operat-

ing properly. The TPMS (tire pressure

warning system) malfunction indicator

is combined with the low tire pres-

sure telltale (tire pressure warning

light). When the system detects a

malfunction, the telltale will flash for

approximately one minute and then

remain continuously illuminated. This

sequence will continue upon subse-

quent vehicle start−ups as long as

the malfunction exists. When the mal-

function indicator is illuminated, the

system may not be able to detect or

signal low tire pressure as intended.

07 04.26

254 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

TPMS (tire pressure warning system)

malfunction may occur for a variety

of reasons, including the installation

of replacement or alternate tires or

wheels on the vehicle that prevent

the TPMS (tire pressure warning sys-

tem) from functioning properly. Al-

ways check the TPMS (tire pressure

warning system) malfunction telltale

after replacing one or more tires or

wheels on your vehicle to ensure that

the replacement or alternate tires and

wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure

warning system) to continue to func-

tion properly.

NOTICE

zDo not use liquid sealants for a flat

tire as tire pressure warning valve

and transmitter will be damaged.

zWhen the tires must be repaired or

replaced, have them repaired or re-

placed by the nearest Toyota dealer

or an authorized tire dealer. The

tire pressure warning valves and

transmitters will be affected by the

installation or removal of tires.

XS17018b

Type A

XS17017b

Type B

07 04.26

255

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

IF THE TIRE PRESSURE WARNING

LIGHT COMES ON AFTER BLINKING

FOR 1 MINUTE...

If the tire pressure warning light comes

on after blinking for 1 minute when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position, the tire pressure warning sys-

tem is not working properly.

The system will be disabled in the follow-

ing conditions:

(When the condition becomes normal, the

system will work properly.)

DIf tires not equipped with tire pressure

warning valves and transmitters are

used.

DIf the ID code on the tire pressure

warning valves and transmitters is not

registered in the tire pressure warning

computer.

The system may be disabled in the follow-

ing conditions:

(When the condition becomes normal, the

system will work properly.)

DIf electronic devices or facilities using

similar radio wave frequencies are

nearby.

DIf a radio set at similar frequencies is

in use in the vehicle.

DIf a window tint that affects the radio

wave signals is installed.

DIf there is a lot of snow or ice on the

vehicle, in particular around the wheels

or wheel housings.

DIf non−genuine Toyota wheels are used.

DIf tire chains are used.

If the tire pressure warning light continues

to come on after blinking for 1 minute

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, have the system checked

by your Toyota dealer.

Even if you use genuine wheels, the tire

pressure warning system may not work

properly with some types of tires.

Pushing the tire pressure warning reset

switch should not turn off the tire pressure

warning light.

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, includ-

ing interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

NOTICE:

This equipment has been tested and

found to comply with the limits for a

Class B digital device, pursuant to Part

15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are

designed to provide reasonable protec-

tion against harmful interference in a

residential installation. This equipment

generates, uses and can radiate radio

frequency energy and, if not installed

and used in accordance with the instruc-

tions, may cause harmful interference to

radio communications. However, there is

no guarantee that interference will not

occur in a particular installation. If this

equipment does cause harmful interfer-

ence to radio or television reception,

which can be determined by turning the

equipment off and on, the user is en-

couraged to try to correct the interfer-

ence by one or more of the following

measures:

07 04.26

256 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

DReorient or relocate the receiving an-

tenna.

DIncrease the separation between the

equipment and receiver.

DConnect the equipment into an outlet

on a circuit different from that to

which the receiver is connected.

DConsult the dealer or an experienced

radio/TV technician for help.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference, including interference

that may cause undesired operation of

the device.

REPLACING TIRES AND WHEELS

When replacing the tires and wheels, be

sure to install tire pressure warning valves

and transmitters. ID codes on the tire

pressure warning valves and transmitters

are registered in the tire pressure warning

computer. When replacing a tire pressure

warning valve and transmitter, it is neces-

sary to register the ID code of tire pres-

sure warning valve and transmitter. Have

the ID code registered by your Toyota

dealer.

If the ID code is not registered, the sys-

tem will not work properly. After driving

for 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning

light comes on after blinking for 1 minute

to indicate a system malfunction.

NOTICE

When the tires or tire pressure warn-

ing valves and transmitters must be

replaced, have them replaced by your

Toyota dealer. The tire pressure warn-

ing valves and transmitters will be

affected by the installation or removal

of tires.

XS17016a

TIRE PRESSURE WARNING RESET

SWITCH

When initializing the system, the present

tire inflation pressure is stored as stan-

dard. The tire pressure warning system

determines decreased air pressure by

comparing the present and the standard

tire inflation pressures. When you change

the set tire inflation pressure, it is neces-

sary to initialize the tire pressure warning

system.

DWhen rotating the tires on vehicles dif-

fering with front and rear tire inflation

pressures.

07 04.26

257

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

DWhen changing the tire inflation pres-

sure according to the instruction for

traveling speed, load weight or tire

size.

To initialize the system, perform the

following:

1. Park the vehicle in a safe place and

turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” or

“LOCK” position.

2. Adjust the pressure of all the installed

tires to the specified cold tire inflation

pressure level. (See “Tires” on page

586 in Section 8.)

3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

4. Push and hold the tire pressure warn-

ing reset switch until the tire pressure

warning light blinks slowly three times.

5. Wait for 7 minutes with the ignition

switch “ON”, and then turn the ignition

switch to the “ACC” or “LOCK” posi-

tion.

If you push the tire pressure warning re-

set switch while the vehicle is moving,

initialization is not performed.

If you push the tire pressure warning re-

set switch accidentally and initialization is

performed, adjust the tire inflation pres-

sure to the specified level and initialize

the system again.

XS17018b

Type A

XS17017b

Type B

07 04.26

258 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

If the tire pressure warning light does not

blink slowly three times when you push

and hold the tire pressure warning reset

switch, initialization has failed and the tire

pressure warning system may not work

properly. In this case, initialize the system

again. If initialization cannot be performed,

have the system checked at your Toyota

dealer.

CAUTION

Do not push the tire pressure warn-

ing reset switch without first adjust-

ing the tire inflation pressure to the

specified level. Otherwise, the tire

pressure warning light may not come

on even if the tire inflation pressure

is low, or it may come on when the

tire inflation pressure is actually nor-

mal.

XS17029

Type A

XS17030

Type B

When parking, firmly apply the parking

brake to avoid inadvertent creeping.

To set: Fully depress the parking brake

pedal. For better holding power, first de-

press the brake pedal and hold it while

setting the parking brake.

To release: Depress the parking brake

pedal once again.

To remind you that the parking brake is

set, the parking brake reminder light in

the instrument panel remains on until you

release the parking brake.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure the parking

brake is fully released and the park-

ing brake reminder light is off.

07 04.26

Parking brake

259

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

The cruise control is designed to main-

tain a set cruising speed without requir-

ing the driver to operate the accelera-

tor. Cruising speed can be set to any

speed above 40 km/h (25 mph).

Within the limits of the engine’s capabili-

ties, cruising speed can be maintained up

or down grades. However, changes in ve-

hicle speed may occur on steeper grades.

CAUTION

DTo help maintain maximum control

of your vehicle, do not use the

cruise control when driving in

heavy or varying traffic, or on slip-

pery (rainy, icy or snow−covered) or

winding roads.

DBe careful about vehicle speed as

it may increase when driving down-

hill with the cruise control on.

XS17022

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF

To turn the cruise control on, press the

“ON−OFF” button. The “CRUISE” indicator

light on the instrument panel will come on

to indicate that the cruise control is opera-

tional. Pressing the “ON−OFF” button

again turns the system off.

When the system is turned off, cruising

speed must be reset when the cruise con-

trol is turned on again.

When the ignition switch is turned off, the

system is also automatically turned off. To

use the cruise control again, press the

“ON−OFF” button again to turn it on.

CAUTION

To avoid accidentally engaging the

cruise control, turn the system off

when it is not in use. Make sure the

“CRUISE” indicator light is off.

07 04.26

Cruise control

260 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS17023

SETTING THE CRUISING SPEED

5−speed models—The transmission must

be in the “D” position or the shift range

position must be in “4” (fourth range) or

“5” (fifth range) in “S” mode before you

set the cruising speed.

6−speed models—The transmission must

be in the “D” position or the shift range

position must be in between “4” (fourth

range) and “6” (sixth range) in “S” position

before you set the cruising speed.

Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,

push the lever down in the “−SET” direc-

tion and release it. This sets the vehicle

at that speed. If the speed is not satisfac-

tory, tap the lever up for a faster speed,

or tap it down for a slower speed. Each

tap changes the set speed by 1.6 km/h

(1.0 mph). You can now take your foot off

the accelerator pedal.

If you need acceleration—for example,

when passing—depress the accelerator

pedal enough for the vehicle to exceed

the set speed. When you release it, the

vehicle will return to the speed set prior

to the acceleration.

CANCELLING THE CRUISE CONTROL

The cruise control may be temporarily

cancelled by the driver or by the system

itself under certain circumstances. Tempo-

rary cancellation allows the set cruising

speed to remain in memory.

The cruise control can be temporarily can-

celled by doing the following:

DPulling the lever in the “CANCEL” di-

rection and releasing it

DDepressing the brake pedal

Under certain circumstances, the cruise

control is temporarily cancelled:

DWhen vehicle speed falls below 40

km/h (25 mph)

DWhen vehicle stability control is acti-

vated

When vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10

mph) below the set speed, the cruise con-

trol is cancelled and the set speed is

erased from memory.

The “CRUISE” indicator light remains on

to indicate that the system is still in op-

eration.

To turn the cruise control off, press the

“ON−OFF” button. Make sure the

“CRUISE” indicator light is off.

If the cruise control automatically cancels

out other than for the above cases, have

your vehicle checked by your Toyota deal-

er at the earliest opportunity.

RESUMING THE CRUISE CONTROL

If the cruise control is temporarily can-

celled, the cruising speed can be resumed

by pushing the lever up in the “+ RES”

direction.

Vehicle speed must be above 40 km/h (25

mph).

07 04.26

261

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

RESETTING TO A FASTER SPEED

Push the lever up in the “+RES” direction

and hold it. Release the lever when the

desired speed is attained. While the lever

is held up, the vehicle will gradually gain

speed.

However, a faster way to reset is to ac-

celerate the vehicle and then push the

lever down in the “−SET” direction.

RESETTING TO A SLOWER SPEED

Push the lever down in the “−SET” direc-

tion and hold it. Release the lever when

the desired speed is attained. While the

lever is held down, the vehicle speed will

gradually decrease.

However, a faster way to reset is to de-

press the brake pedal and then push the

lever down in the “−SET” direction.

Even if you downshift from “D” to “S” with

the cruise control on, engine braking will

not be enabled because the cruise control

is not cancelled. To decrease the vehicle

speed, reset to a slower speed with the

cruise control lever or depress the brake

pedal. If you use the brake pedal, cruise

control is cancelled.

CRUISE CONTROL FAILURE WARNING

If the “CRUISE” indicator light flashes

when using the cruise control, press the

“ON−OFF” button to turn the system off

and then press it again to turn it on.

If any of the following conditions then oc-

curs, there is some trouble in the cruise

control system.

DThe indicator light does not come on.

DThe indicator light flashes again.

DThe indicator light goes out after it

comes on.

If this is the case, contact your Toyota

dealer and have your vehicle inspected.

07 04.26

262 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

07 04.26

263

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Audio and hands−free phone systems

Reference 264. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using your audio system 265. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Audio remote controls 293. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AUX adapter 295. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear seat entertainment system 296. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Audio/video system operating hints 339. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hands−free phone system 347. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

For vehicle equipped with Navigation system, please refer to the sepa-

rate “Navigation System Owner’s Manual.”

07 04.26

SECTION 1− 8

264 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS18005a

Type 1: AM·FM radio/compact disc player

(with compact disc changer controller)

XS18001a

Type 2: AM·FM radio/compact disc player

with changer (with XMr Satellite Radio∗

controller)

XS18002a

Type 3: AM·FM radio/compact disc player

with changer (with XMr Satellite Radio∗

controller)

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr tun-

er and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

NOTICE

To clean radio panel, wipe it with a

soft, lint−free cloth (for avoidance of

damage to radio panel’s paint).

07 04.26

Reference

265

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

This section describes some of the basic

features on Toyota audio systems. Some

information may not pertain to your sys-

tem.

Your audio system works when the ignition

switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-

charged, do not leave the audio sys-

tem on longer than necessary when

the engine is not running.

CAUTION

For vehicle sold in U.S.A. and

Canadas:

DPart 15 of the FCC Rules

FCC Warning:

Any unauthorized changes or modifi-

cations to this equipment will void

the user’s authority to operate this

device.

DLaser products

DDo not take this unit apart or at-

tempt to make any changes your-

self. This is an intricate unit that

uses a laser pickup to retrieve

information from the surface of

compact discs. The laser is care-

fully shielded so that its rays re-

main inside the cabinet. There-

fore, never try to disassemble the

player or alter any of its parts

since you may be exposed to la-

ser rays and dangerous voltages.

DThis product utilizes a laser. Use

of controls or adjustments or per-

formance of procedures other

than those specified herein may

result in hazardous radiation ex-

posure.

07 04.26

Using your audio system—

—Some basics

266 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system

on and off.

Push “AM”, “DISC·AUX”, “FM1”, “FM2”,

“AM·SAT”∗ or “LOAD” to turn on that func-

tion without pushing “PWR·VOL”. To turn

on the compact disc player, a compact

disc must be loaded in the player.

You can turn on the compact disc player

by inserting a compact disc.

You can turn off the compact disc player

by ejecting the compact disc. If the audio

system was previously off, then the entire

audio system will be turned off when you

eject the compact disc. If the radio was

previously on, it will come on again.

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS

Push “AM”, “DISC·AUX”, “FM1”, “FM2”,

“AM·SAT”∗ or “LOAD” if the system is al-

ready on but you want to switch from one

function to another.

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

LISTENING TO THE XMr SATELLITE

RADIO BROADCAST∗ (type 2 and type

To listen to a satellite radio broadcast in

your vehicle, an additional genuine Toyota

satellite receiver and antenna (or equiva-

lents) must be purchased and installed. A

subscription to the XMr Satellite Radio

service is also necessary.

How to subscribe to an XMr Satellite

Radio

An XMr Satellite Radio is a tuner de-

signed exclusively to receive broadcasts

provided under a separate subscription.

Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous

states.

How to subscribe:

You must enter into a separate service

agreement with the XMr Satellite Radio in

order to receive satellite broadcast pro-

gramming in the vehicle. Additional activa-

tion and service subscription fees apply

that are not included in the purchase price

of the vehicle and optional digital satellite

tuner. For complete information on sub-

scription rates and terms, or to subscribe

to the XMr radio, visit XMr on the web

at www.xmradio.com or call an XMr’s Lis-

tener Care at (800) 967−2346. The XMr

Satellite Radio is solely responsible for

the quality, availability and content of the

satellite radio services provided, which are

subject to the terms and conditions of the

XMr Satellite Radio customer service

agreement.

Customers should have their radio ID

ready; the radio ID can be found by tun-

ing to “channel 000” on the radio. For

details, see “Displaying the radio ID” be-

low.

All fees and programming are the respon-

sibility of the XMr Satellite Radio and are

subject to change.

07 04.26

267

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Satellite tuner technology notice:

Toyota’s satellite radio tuners are awarded

Type Approval Certificates from XMr Sat-

ellite Radio Inc. as proof of compatibility

with the services offered by the XMr Sat-

ellite Radio.

Displaying the radio ID

Each XMr tuner is identified with a unique

radio ID. You will need the radio ID when

activating XMr service or when reporting

a problem.

If you select the “CH 000” using the

“TUNE·FILE” knob, the ID code of 8 al-

phanumeric characters appears. If you se-

lect another channel, display of the ID

code is canceled. The channel (000) alter-

nates the display between the radio ID

and the specific radio ID code.

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

TONE AND BALANCE

For details about your system’s tone and

balance controls, see the description of

your own system.

Tone

How good an audio program sounds to

you is largely determined by the mix of

the treble, midrange (JBL brand audio sys-

tem∗ only), and bass levels. In fact, differ-

ent kinds of music and vocal programs

usually sound better with different mixes

of treble, midrange, and bass.

You can adjust sound characteristics. Dif-

ferent sound characteristics can be re-

corded for each audio source.

∗: If a JBL brand audio system is

installed, the “JBL” logo is shown on

the panel.

Balance

A good balance of the left and right stereo

channels and of the front and rear sound

levels is also important.

Keep in mind that if you are listening to

a stereo recording or broadcast, changing

the right/left balance will increase the vol-

ume of one group of sounds while de-

creasing the volume of another.

YOUR RADIO ANTENNA

To remove an antenna, carefully turn it

counterclockwise.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the antenna,

make sure it is removed before driv-

ing your Toyota through an automatic

car wash.

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER

(type 1)

When you insert a disc, gently push it in

with the label side up. The player will play

from track 1 through to the end of the

disc. Then it will play from track 1 again.

NOTICE

Never try to disassemble or oil any

part of the compact disc player. Do

not insert anything other than com-

pact discs into the slot.

8 cm (3 in.) compact disc singles

Your compact disc player does not need

an adaptor to play compact disc singles.

Compact disc singles are about 8 cm (3

in.) in diameter−smaller than standard

discs.

07 04.26

268 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

After you eject a compact disc single, do

not insert a standard 12 cm (4.7 in.) disc

until “DISC” disappears from the display.

NOTICE

Do not use an adaptor for compact

disc singles—it could cause tracking

errors or interfere with the ejection of

compact discs.

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER WITH

CHANGER (type 2 and type 3)

When you insert a disc, push the “LOAD”

button, wait for the load/eject status light

to turn green, then gently push the disc

in with the label side up. This compact

disc player can store up to six discs. The

player will play from track 1 through to

the end of the disc. Then it will play from

track 1 of the next disc.

The player is intended for use with 12 cm

(4.7 in.) discs only.

XS18007

NOTICE

zDo not stack up two discs for in-

sertion, or it will cause damage to

the compact disc player or changer.

Insert only one compact disc into

slot at a time.

zNever try to disassemble or oil any

part of the compact disc player. Do

not insert anything other than com-

pact discs into the slot.

07 04.26

269

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Details of specific buttons, controls and

features are described in the alphabetical

list that follows.

07 04.26

—Controls and features

"Type 1

XS18006a

270 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset and

tune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune in

the desired station. (See “TUNE·FILE” or

“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down the

button until you hear a beep—this will set

the station to the button. The preset but-

ton number will appear on the display.

To recall a preset station: Push the button

for the station you want. The preset but-

ton number and station frequency will ap-

pear on the display.

This radio can store one AM and two FM

stations for each button. (The display will

show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when you

push “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” button.)

(Eject button)

Push the compact disc eject button to

eject a compact disc.

(Reverse/Fast−forward button)

Push and hold “ ” (preset button 6) or

“” (preset button 5) to fast forward or

reverse within a compact disc. When you

release the button, the compact disc play-

er will resume playing.

Push the “AM” button to turn on the radio

and select the AM band. “AM” will appear

on the display.

AUDIO/CONTROL (Tone and sound bal-

ance adjustment function)

Each time you push the

“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob, the mode

changes. To adjust the tone and balance,

turn the knob.

BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The dis-

play ranges from −5 to 5.

TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The dis-

play ranges from −5 to 5.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between

the front and rear speakers. The display

ranges from F7 to R7.

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between

the right and left speakers. The display

ranges from L7 to R7.

Switching over the Speed Automatic

Sound Levelizer (ASL) level

ASL: The Automatic Sound Levelizer can

be turned on by turning the knob. In addi-

tion, turning the knob allows you to select

from LOW, MID, and HIGH volume and

tone settings. The ASL system automati-

cally adjusts volume and tone in accor-

dance with the driving speed. This helps

ensure an optimal listening experience

even if noise levels rise while driving.

DISC·AUX (Compact disc)

Push the “DISC·AUX” button to play a

compact disc.

When the audio system is set into com-

pact disc operation, the display shows the

track number currently being played.

To switch between CD and AUX (external

device) modes, press the “DISC·AUX” but-

ton. The AUX mode is only available when

AUX adapter is connected to the system.

When the AUX adapter is in use, “AUX”

will appear on the display.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-

tem will display following error messages.

“WAIT”: The compact disc player unit

may be too hot. Allow the player to cool

down.

07 04.26

271

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, dam-

aged or inserted incorrectly (up−side

down). Clean the disc and re−insert it.

“NO DISC”: Eject the disc or magazine.

Set the disc or magazine again.

“ERROR 3”: There is a problem inside

the system. Eject the disc or magazine.

Set the disc or magazine again.

“ERROR 4”: Over−current. Ask your

Toyota dealer to inspect.

“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changer

lid of separate unit is open. Close the

compact disc changer lid.

If “NO MUSIC” appears on the display,

it indicates that a disc with no MP3/WMA

data has been inserted. Remove the disc

from the player and insert an MP3/WMA

data disc.

If the malfunction still exists, take your

vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

Ɲ DISC Ɯ

With compact disc changer only—

Use these buttons to select a disc you

want to listen to.

Push “Ɲ” (preset button 3) or “Ɯ” (preset

button 4) until the number of the disc you

want to listen appears on the display.

FM1 FM2

Push the “FM1” or “FM2” button to turn on

the radio and select the FM band. “FM1”

or “FM2” will appear on the display. This

system allows you to set twelve FM sta-

tions, two for each of the preset button.

MP3/FOLDER (Folder up/down)

To skip up or down to a different folder:

Push “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the

“MP3/FOLDER” several times until the

number of the folder you want to listen to

appears on the display.

To jump to the first file in the first folder:

Push and hold the “Ɲ” side of the button

until you hear a beep.

When playing a disc featuring both audio

data (CD−DA) and MP3/WMA files, audio

data (CD−DA) is played.

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system

on and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust the

volume.

RAND (Random)

Compact disc player

There are two random features—you can

either listen to the tracks on one compact

disc in random order, or listen to the

tracks on all the compact discs in the

magazine in random order.

To play the tracks on one disc in random

order:

Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset

button 1). “ ” will appear on the

display and the player will perform the

tracks on the disc you are listening to in

random order. To turn off the random fea-

ture, push this button again.

With compact disc changer only—

To play all the tracks in the magazine in

random order:

Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-

pear on the display and the player will

perform all the tracks on all the discs in

the magazine in random order. To turn off

the random feature, push this button

again.

07 04.26

272 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

MP3/WMA player

There are two random playback features—

you can either listen to all of the files on

the compact discs in random order. You

can also listen to the files in a single

folder in random order.

To randomly play the files in a folder:

Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset

button 1). “ ” will appear on the

display.

To randomly play all of the files on the

compact disc:

Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will

appear on the display and the player will

play all of the files on the disc in random

order. To turn off the random playback

feature, push this button again.

RPT (Repeat)

Compact disc player

There are two repeat features—you can

either replay a disc track or a whole com-

pact disc.

Repeating a track:

Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset

button 2) while the track is playing.

“” will appear on the display. When

the track ends, it will automatically replay.

To turn off the repeat feature, push this

button again.

With compact disc changer only—

Repeating a disc:

Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-

pear on the display. The player will repeat

all the tracks on the disc you are listening

to. When the disc ends, the player will

automatically go back to the first track on

the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat

feature, push this button again.

MP3/WMA player

There are two repeat features—you can

repeat a single file or an entire folder.

Repeating a file:

Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset

button 2) while the file is playing.

“” will appear on the display. When

the file ends, it will repeat automatically.

This process will be continued until you

push the button again to turn off the re-

peat feature.

Repeating a folder:

Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-

pear on the display. The player will repeat

all of the files in the folder. When the last

file in the folder ends, the folder will re-

peat from the beginning. To turn off the

repeat feature, push this button again.

07 04.26

273

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies on

a band or scan only the preset stations

for that band.

To scan the preset stations:

Push and hold the “SCAN” button until

you hear a beep. The radio will tune in

the next preset station up the band, stay

there for 5 seconds, and then move to the

next preset station. To stop scanning,

push this button again.

To scan all the frequencies:

Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-

ton. The radio will find the next station up

the station band, stay there for 5 seconds,

and then scan again to the next station.

To stop scanning, push this button again.

Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can ei-

ther scan the tracks on a specific disc or

scan the first tracks of all the discs in the

magazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:

Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-

ton. “SCAN” will appear on the display

and the player will scan all the tracks on

the disc you are listening to. To stop

scanning, push this button again. If the

player scanned all the tracks on the disc,

it will stop scanning.

With compact disc changer only—

Scanning the first tracks of all the discs

in the magazine:

Push and hold the “SCAN” button until

you hear a beep. “ ·SCAN” will appear

on the display and the player will scan the

first track of the next disc. To stop scan-

ning, push this button again. If the player

has scanned all the discs, it will stop

scanning.

MP3/WMA player

There are two scan features—you can ei-

ther scan the files in a folder on a specif-

ic disc or scan the first file of all the

folder.

Scanning the files on a folder:

Quickly push and release “SCAN”. “SCAN”

will appear on the display and the player

will scan all the files in the folder you are

listening to. To select a file, push the

“SCAN” again. After all the tracks on the

disc have been scanned in one pass, nor-

mal play resumes.

Scanning the first file of all the folders:

Push “SCAN” until you hear a beep.

“” will appear on the display and

the player will scan the first file of the

next folder. To select a folder, push the

“SCAN” again. After all the folders have

been scanned in one pass, normal play

resumes.

07 04.26

274 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds and

plays the next station up or down the

station band.

To seek the next station, quickly push and

release “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the

“SEEK/TRACK” button. Do this again to

find the station after that.

Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to a

different track.

Push “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the

“SEEK/TRACK” button until the number of

the track you want to listen to appears on

the display. If you want to return to the

beginning of the current track, quickly

push the down side of the button one

time.

MP3/WMA player

Use this button to file up or down to a

different file.

Push “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the “SEEK/

TRACK” several times until the file you

want to listen to appears on the display.

If you want to return to the beginning of

the current file, push the “Ɲ” side of the

button one time.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereo

reception when a stereo broadcast is re-

ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If the

signal becomes weak, the radio reduces

the amount of channel separation to prev-

ent the weak signal from creating noise.

If the signal becomes extremely weak, the

radio switches from stereo to mono recep-

tion.

TEXT

Compact disc player

This button is used to change the display

for the compact disc that contains text

data.

To change the display, quickly push and

release the “TEXT” button while the com-

pact disc is playing. The display changes

in the order from the elapsed time to disc

title to track title, then back to the

elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compact

disc that does not contain text data is

playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on the

display.

If the entire disc or track title does not

appear on the display, push and hold the

button until you hear a beep. The rest of

the title will appear.

07 04.26

275

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

MP3/WMA player

This button is used to change the display

for the MP3/WMA file that contains text

data.

To change the display, quickly push and

release the “TEXT” button while the

MP3/WMA file is playing. The display

changes in the order from the elapsed

time to folder name to file name to album

title to track title to artist name, then back

to the elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while an

MP3/WMA file that does not contain text

data is playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on

the display.

If the entire text data is not displayed,

push and hold it until you hear a beep.

The rest of the text data will appear.

TUNE·FILE (Tuning and File up/down)

Radio

Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise to

step up the frequency. Turn the knob

counterclockwise to step down the fre-

quency.

MP3/WMA player

Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise to

file up. Turn the knob counterclockwise to

file down.

07 04.26

276 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Details of specific buttons, controls and

features are described in the alphabetical

list that follows.

07 04.26

"Type 2

XS18003a

277

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset and

tune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune in

the desired station. (See “TUNE·FILE” or

“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down the

button until you hear a beep—this will set

the station to the button. The preset but-

ton number will appear on the display.

To recall a preset station: Push the button

for the station you want. The preset but-

ton number and station frequency will ap-

pear on the display.

This radio can store one AM and two FM

stations for each button. (The display will

show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when you

push “AM·SAT”∗, “FM1” or “FM2” button.)

XMr Satellite Radio∗—

These buttons are used to preset and

tune in radio channels.

To preset a channel to a button: Tune in

the desired channel. (See “TUNE·FILE” or

“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down the

button until you hear a beep—this will set

the channel to the button. The preset but-

ton number will appear on the display.

To recall a preset channel: Push the but-

ton for the channel you want. The preset

button number and channel number will

appear on the display.

This radio can store three XMr channels

for each button. (The display will show

“SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” when you push

“AM·SAT”∗ button.)

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

(Eject button)

This button is used to eject one or all

compact discs.

To eject the current compact disc, push

and release the compact disc eject button.

To eject a specific disc, push “Ɲ” (preset

button 3) or “Ɯ” (preset button 4) until the

number of the disc you want to eject is

displayed. Push and release the eject but-

ton.

To eject all discs at a time, press and

hold the eject button until you hear a

beep. The last compact disc played before

pushing the button will be ejected first. If

the ejected disc is not removed for a long

time, the eject function will be cancelled.

(Reverse/Fast−forward button)

Push and hold “ ” (preset button 6) or

“” (preset button 5) to fast forward or

reverse within a compact disc. When you

release the button, the compact disc play-

er will resume playing.

AM·SAT (AM band and XMr Satellite Ra-

dio∗)

Push the “AM·SAT”∗ button to turn on the

radio and select the AM or XMr band.

“AM”, “SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” will ap-

pear on the display.

Error messages

If the satellite radio tuner malfunctions,

your audio system will display following

error messages.

“ANTENNA”:

DThe XMr antenna is not connected.

Check whether the XMr antenna cable

is attached securely.

DA short−circuit occurs in the antenna or

the surrounding antenna cable. See a

Toyota certified dealer.

07 04.26

278 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

“UPDATING”:

DYou have not subscribed to the XMr

Satellite Radio. The radio is being up-

dated with the latest encryption code.

Contact the XMr Satellite Radio for

subscription information. When a con-

tact is canceled, you can choose the

“CH000” and all free−to−air channels.

DThe premium channel you selected is

not authorized. Wait for about 2 sec-

onds until the radio returns to the pre-

vious channel or “CH001”. If it does

not change automatically, select anoth-

er channel. If you want to listen to the

premium channel, contact the XMr Sat-

ellite Radio.

“NO SIGNAL”: The XMr signal is too

weak at the current location. Wait until

your vehicle reaches a location with a

stronger signal.

“LOADING”: The unit is acquiring audio

or program information. Wait until the unit

has received the information.

“OFF AIR”: The channel you selected is

not broadcasting any programming. Select

another channel.

“−−−”: The channel you selected is no

longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds

until the radio returns to the previous

channel or “CH001”. If it does not change

automatically, select another channel.

The XMr Listener Care Center is also

available on the phone, please call (800)

967−2346 during the following hours:

Monday—Saturday: 6 a.m.—2 a.m. East-

ern Time

Sunday: 8 a.m.—8 p.m. Eastern Time

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

AUDIO/CONTROL (Tone and sound bal-

ance adjustment function)

Each time you push the

“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob, the mode

changes. To adjust the tone and balance,

turn the knob.

BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The dis-

play ranges from −5 to 5.

TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The dis-

play ranges from −5 to 5.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between

the front and rear speakers. The display

ranges from F7 to R7.

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between

the right and left speakers. The display

ranges from L7 to R7.

Switching over the Speed Automatic

Sound Levelizer (ASL) level

ASL: The Automatic Sound Levelizer can

be turned on by turning the knob. In addi-

tion, turning the knob allows you to select

from LOW, MID and HIGH volume and

tone settings. The ASL system automati-

cally adjusts volume and tone in accor-

dance with the driving speed. This helps

ensure an optimal listening experience

even if noise levels rise while driving.

DISC·AUX (Compact disc)

Push the “DISC·AUX” button to play a

compact disc.

When the audio system is set into com-

pact disc operation, the display shows the

track, or track and disc number currently

being played.

To switch between CD and AUX (external

device) modes, press the “DISC·AUX” but-

ton. The AUX mode is only available when

AUX adapter is connected to the system.

When the AUX adapter is in use, “AUX”

will appear on the display.

07 04.26

279

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-

tem will display following error messages.

“WAIT”: The compact disc player unit

may be too hot. Allow the player to cool

down.

“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, dam-

aged or inserted incorrectly (up−side

down). Clean the disc and re−insert it.

“NO DISC”: Eject the disc. Set the disc

again.

“ERROR 3”: There is a problem inside

the system. Eject the disc. Set the disc

again.

“ERROR 4”: Over−current. Ask your

Toyota dealer to inspect.

If “NO MUSIC” appears on the display,

it indicates that a disc with no MP3/WMA

data has been inserted. Remove the disc

from the player and insert an MP3/WMA

data disc.

If the malfunction still exists, take your

vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

Ɲ DISC Ɯ

Use these buttons to select a disc you

want to listen to.

Push “Ɲ” (preset button 3) or “Ɯ” (preset

button 4) until the number of the disc you

want to listen appears on the display.

FM1 FM2

Push the “FM1” or “FM2” button to turn on

the radio and select the FM band. “FM1”

or “FM2” will appear on the display. This

system allows you to set twelve FM sta-

tions, two for each of the preset button.

TYPE/FOLDER (Type/Folder up/down)

XMr Satellite Radio∗—

When you push the “Ɲ” or “Ɯ” side of

the “TYPE/FOLDER” button while receiving

a XMr channel, the current channel cate-

gory appears on the display.

When the channel category appears, push

either “Ɲ” or “Ɯ” side of the

“TYPE/FOLDER” button to switch to the

next or previous category.

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

MP3/WMA player

To skip up or down to a different folder:

Push “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the

“TYPE/FOLDER” several times until the

number of the folder you want to listen to

appears on the display.

To jump to the first file in the first folder:

Push and hold the “Ɲ” side of the button

until you hear a beep.

When playing a disc featuring both audio

data (CD−DA) and MP3/WMA files, audio

data (CD−DA) is played.

07 04.26

280 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

LOAD

This button is used to load the compact

discs in the compact disc player. This

player can store up to six discs.

To load one compact disc only, quickly

push and release the button. When the

indicators on both sides of the slot turn

green, insert a compact disc. After the

disc is loaded, the shutter of the slot will

close.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter

will close after 15 seconds.

To load multiple compact discs, push and

hold the button (until you hear a beep

when the audio system is on). When the

indicators on both sides of the slot turn

green, insert a compact disc. After the

disc is loaded, the shutter of the slot will

close. After a few seconds, the shutter

will automatically open again and the indi-

cators will turn green so the next disc can

be inserted. The same process can be

applied for loading the rest of the discs.

If the player is full of discs, “DISC FULL”

will appear on the display.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter

will close after 15 seconds.

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system

on and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust the

volume.

RAND (Random)

Compact disc player

There are two random features—you can

either listen to the tracks on one compact

disc in random order, or listen to the

tracks on all the compact discs in the

magazine in random order.

To play the tracks on one disc in random

order:

Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset

button 1). “ ” will appear on the

display and the player will perform the

tracks on the disc you are listening to in

random order. To turn off the random fea-

ture, push this button again.

To play all the tracks in the magazine in

random order:

Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-

pear on the display and the player will

perform all the tracks on all the discs in

the magazine in random order. To turn off

the random feature, push this button

again.

MP3/WMA player

There are two random playback features—

you can either listen to all of the files on

the compact discs in random order. You

can also listen to the files in a single

folder in random order.

To randomly play the files in a folder:

Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset

button 1). “ ” will appear on the

display.

To randomly play all of the files on the

compact disc:

Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will

appear on the display and the player will

play all of the files on the disc in random

order. To turn off the random playback

feature, push this button again.

07 04.26

281

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

RPT (Repeat)

Compact disc player

There are two repeat features—you can

either replay a disc track or a whole com-

pact disc.

Repeating a track:

Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset

button 2) while the track is playing.

“” will appear on the display. When

the track ends, it will automatically replay.

To turn off the repeat feature, push this

button again.

Repeating a disc:

Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-

pear on the display. The player will repeat

all the tracks on the disc you are listening

to. When the disc ends, the player will

automatically go back to the first track on

the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat

feature, push this button again.

MP3/WMA player

There are two repeat features—you can

repeat a single file or an entire folder.

Repeating a file:

Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset

button 2) while the file is playing.

“” will appear on the display. When

the file ends, it will repeat automatically.

This process will be continued until you

push the button again to turn off the re-

peat feature.

Repeating a folder:

Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-

pear on the display. The player will repeat

all of the files in the folder. When the last

file in the folder ends, the folder will re-

peat from the beginning. To turn off the

repeat feature, push this button again.

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies on

a band or scan only the preset stations

for that band.

To scan the preset stations:

Push and hold the “SCAN” button until

you hear a beep. The radio will tune in

the next preset station up the band, stay

there for 5 seconds, and then move to the

next preset station. To stop scanning,

push this button again.

To scan all the frequencies:

Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-

ton. The radio will find the next station up

the station band, stay there for 5 seconds,

and then scan again to the next station.

To stop scanning, push this button again.

XMr Satellite Radio∗—

You can either scan the currently selected

channel category or scan only the preset

channels for the band.

07 04.26

282 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

To scan the preset channels:

Push and hold the “SCAN” button until

you hear a beep. “SCAN” appears on the

display. The radio will tune in the next

preset channel up the band, stay there for

5 seconds, and then move to the next

preset channel. To stop scanning, push

this button again.

To scan the currently selected channel

category:

Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-

ton. “SCAN” appears on the display. The

radio will find the next channel in the

same channel category up the band, stay

there for 5 seconds, and then scan again.

To stop scanning, push this button again.

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can ei-

ther scan the tracks on a specific disc or

scan the first tracks of all the discs in the

magazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:

Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-

ton. “SCAN” will appear on the display

and the player will scan all the tracks on

the disc you are listening to. To stop

scanning, push this button again. If the

player scanned all the tracks on the disc,

it will stop scanning.

Scanning the first tracks of all the discs

in the magazine:

Push and hold the “SCAN” button until

you hear a beep. “ ·SCAN” will appear

on the display and the player will scan the

first track of the next disc. To stop scan-

ning, push this button again. If the chang-

er has scanned all the discs, it will stop

scanning.

MP3/WMA player

There are two scan features—you can ei-

ther scan the files in a folder on a specif-

ic disc or scan the first file of all the

folder.

Scanning the files on a folder:

Quickly push and release “SCAN”. “SCAN”

will appear on the display and the player

will scan all the files in the folder you are

listening to. To select a file, push the

“SCAN” again. After all the tracks on the

disc have been scanned in one pass, nor-

mal play resumes.

Scanning the first file of all the folders:

Push “SCAN” until you hear a beep.

“” will appear on the display and

the player will scan the first file of the

next folder. To select a folder, push the

“SCAN” again. After all the folders have

been scanned in one pass, normal play

resumes.

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds and

plays the next station up or down the

station band.

To seek the next station, quickly push and

release “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the

“SEEK/TRACK” button. Do this again to

find the station after that.

XMr Satellite Radio∗—

To select the next channel within the cur-

rent channel category, push the “Ɯ” or

“Ɲ” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button.

Repeat until a desired channel is found.

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

07 04.26

283

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to a

different track.

Push “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the

“SEEK/TRACK” button until the number of

the track you want to listen to appears on

the display. If you want to return to the

beginning of the current track, quickly

push the down side of the button one

time.

MP3/WMA player

Use this button to file up or down to a

different file.

Push “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the “SEEK/

TRACK” several times until the file you

want to listen to appears on the display.

If you want to return to the beginning of

the current file, push the “Ɲ” side of the

button one time.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereo

reception when a stereo broadcast is re-

ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If the

signal becomes weak, the radio reduces

the amount of channel separation to prev-

ent the weak signal from creating noise.

If the signal becomes extremely weak, the

radio switches from stereo to mono recep-

tion.

TEXT

XMr Satellite Radio∗1—

When you push the “TEXT” button, the

display changes as follows:

CH NAME → TITLE (SONG/PROGRAM

TITLE) → NAME (ARTIST NAME/FEA-

TURE) → CH NUMBER → CH NAME

Up to 10 alphanumeric characters can be

displayed. (Some information will not be

fully displayed.)

The message display will be canceled if

any button that affects the display is

pushed.

If there is no song/program title or artist

name/feature associated with the channel

at that time, “−−−−−” will appear on the

display.

This XMr tuner supports “Audio Services”

(Music and Talk) of only XMr Satellite

Radio and “Text Information”∗2 linked to

the respective audio services.

∗1: Use of satellite radio requires XMr

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

∗2: Text Information includes, Channel

Name, (Artist) Name, (Song) Title and

Category Name.

Compact disc player

This button is used to change the display

for the compact disc that contains text

data.

To change the display, quickly push and

release the “TEXT” button while the com-

pact disc is playing. The display changes

in the order from the elapsed time to disc

title to track title, then back to the

elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compact

disc that does not contain text data is

playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on the

display.

If the entire disc or track title does not

appear on the display, push and hold the

button until you hear a beep. The rest of

the title will appear.

07 04.26

284 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

MP3/WMA player

This button is used to change the display

for the MP3/WMA file that contains text

data.

To change the display, quickly push and

release the “TEXT” button while the

MP3/WMA file is playing. The display

changes in the order from the elapsed

time to folder name to file name to album

title to track title to artist name, then back

to the elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while an

MP3/WMA file that does not contain text

data is playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on

the display.

If the entire text data is not displayed,

push and hold it until you hear a beep.

The rest of the text data will appear.

TUNE·FILE (Tuning and File up/down)

Radio

Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise to

step up the frequency. Turn the knob

counterclockwise to step down the fre-

quency.

XMr Satellite Radio∗—

Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise to

step up the channel. Turn the knob coun-

terclockwise to step down the channel.

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

MP3/WMA player

Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise to

file up. Turn the knob counterclockwise to

file down.

07 04.26

285

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Details of specific buttons, controls and

features are described in the alphabetical

list that follows.

07 04.26

"Type 3

XS18004a

286 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset and

tune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune in

the desired station. (See “TUNE·FILE” or

“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down the

button until you hear a beep—this will set

the station to the button. The preset but-

ton number will appear on the display.

To recall a preset station: Push the button

for the station you want. The preset but-

ton number and station frequency will ap-

pear on the display.

This radio can store one AM and two FM

stations for each button. (The display will

show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when you

push “AM·SAT”∗, “FM1” or “FM2” button.)

XMr Satellite Radio∗—

These buttons are used to preset and

tune in radio channels.

To preset a channel to a button: Tune in

the desired channel. (See “TUNE·FILE” or

“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down the

button until you hear a beep—this will set

the channel to the button. The preset but-

ton number will appear on the display.

To recall a preset channel: Push the but-

ton for the channel you want. The preset

button number and channel number will

appear on the display.

This radio can store three XMr channels

for each button. (The display will show

“SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” when you push

“AM·SAT”∗ button.)

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

(Eject button)

This button is used to eject one or all

compact discs.

To eject the current compact disc, push

and release the compact disc eject button.

To eject a specific disc, push “Ɲ” (preset

button 3) or “Ɯ” (preset button 4) until the

number of the disc you want to eject is

displayed. Push and release the eject but-

ton.

To eject all discs at a time, press and

hold the eject button until you hear a

beep. The last compact disc played before

pushing the button will be ejected first. If

the ejected disc is not removed for a long

time, the eject function will be cancelled.

(Reverse/Fast−forward button)

Push and hold “ ” (preset button 6) or

“” (preset button 5) to fast forward or

reverse within a compact disc. When you

release the button, the compact disc play-

er will resume playing.

AM·SAT (AM band and XMr Satellite Ra-

dio∗)

Push the “AM·SAT”∗ button to turn on the

radio and select the AM or XMr band.

“AM”, “SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” will ap-

pear on the display.

Error messages

If the satellite radio tuner malfunctions,

your audio system will display following

error messages.

“ANTENNA”:

DThe XMr antenna is not connected.

Check whether the XMr antenna cable

is attached securely.

DA short−circuit occurs in the antenna or

the surrounding antenna cable. See a

Toyota certified dealer.

07 04.26

287

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

“UPDATING”:

DYou have not subscribed to the XMr

Satellite Radio. The radio is being up-

dated with the latest encryption code.

Contact the XMr Satellite Radio for

subscription information. When a con-

tact is canceled, you can choose the

“CH000” and all free−to−air channels.

DThe premium channel you selected is

not authorized. Wait for about 2 sec-

onds until the radio returns to the pre-

vious channel or “CH001”. If it does

not change automatically, select anoth-

er channel. If you want to listen to the

premium channel, contact the XMr Sat-

ellite Radio.

“NO SIGNAL”: The XMr signal is too

weak at the current location. Wait until

your vehicle reaches a location with a

stronger signal.

“LOADING”: The unit is acquiring audio

or program information. Wait until the unit

has received the information.

“OFF AIR”: The channel you selected is

not broadcasting any programming. Select

another channel.

“−−−”: The channel you selected is no

longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds

until the radio returns to the previous

channel or “CH001”. If it does not change

automatically, select another channel.

The XMr Listener Care Center is also

available on the phone, please call (800)

967−2346 during the following hours:

Monday—Saturday: 6 a.m.—2 a.m. East-

ern Time

Sunday: 8 a.m.—8 p.m. Eastern Time

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

AUDIO/CONTROL (Tone and sound bal-

ance adjustment function)

Each time you push the

“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob, the mode

changes. To adjust the tone and balance,

turn the knob.

BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The dis-

play ranges from −5 to 5.

TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The dis-

play ranges from −5 to 5.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between

the front and rear speakers. The display

ranges from F7 to R7.

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between

the right and left speakers. The display

ranges from L7 to R7.

Switching over the Speed Automatic

Sound Levelizer (ASL) level

ASL: The Automatic Sound Levelizer can

be turned on by turning the knob. In addi-

tion, turning the knob allows you to select

from LOW, MID and HIGH volume and

tone settings. The ASL system automati-

cally adjusts volume and tone in accor-

dance with the driving speed. This helps

ensure an optimal listening experience

even if noise levels rise while driving.

DISC·AUX (Compact disc)

Push the “DISC·AUX” button to play a

compact disc.

When the audio system is set into com-

pact disc operation, the display shows the

track, or track and disc number currently

being played.

To switch between CD and AUX (external

device) modes, press the “DISC·AUX” but-

ton. The AUX mode is only available when

AUX adapter is connected to the system.

When the AUX adapter is in use, “AUX”

will appear on the display.

07 04.26

288 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-

tem will display following error messages.

“WAIT”: The compact disc player unit

may be too hot. Allow the player to cool

down.

“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, dam-

aged or inserted incorrectly (up−side

down). Clean the disc and re−insert it.

“NO DISC”: Eject the disc. Set the disc

again.

“ERROR 3”: There is a problem inside

the system. Eject the disc. Set the disc

again.

“ERROR 4”: Over−current. Ask your

Toyota dealer to inspect.

If “NO MUSIC” appears on the display,

it indicates that a disc with no MP3/WMA

data has been inserted. Remove the disc

from the player and insert an MP3/WMA

data disc.

If the malfunction still exists, take your

vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

Ɲ DISC Ɯ

Use these buttons to select a disc you

want to listen to.

Push “Ɲ” (preset button 3) or “Ɯ” (preset

button 4) until the number of the disc you

want to listen appears on the display.

FM1 FM2

Push the “FM1” or “FM2” button to turn on

the radio and select the FM band. “FM1”

or “FM2” will appear on the display. This

system allows you to set twelve FM sta-

tions, two for each of the preset button.

TYPE/FOLDER (Type/Folder up/down)

XMr Satellite Radio∗—

When you push the “Ɲ” or “Ɯ” side of

the “TYPE/FOLDER” button while receiving

a XMr channel, the current channel cate-

gory appears on the display.

When the channel category appears, push

either “Ɲ” or “Ɯ” side of the

“TYPE/FOLDER” button to switch to the

next or previous category.

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

MP3/WMA player

To skip up or down to a different folder:

Push “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the

“TYPE/FOLDER” several times until the

number of the folder you want to listen to

appears on the display.

To jump to the first file in the first folder:

Push and hold the “Ɲ” side of the button

until you hear a beep.

When playing a disc featuring both audio

data (CD−DA) and MP3/WMA files, audio

data (CD−DA) is played.

07 04.26

289

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

LOAD

This button is used to load the compact

discs in the compact disc player. This

player can store up to six discs.

To load one compact disc only, quickly

push and release the button. When the

indicators on both sides of the slot turn

green, insert a compact disc. After the

disc is loaded, the shutter of the slot will

close.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter

will close after 15 seconds.

To load multiple compact discs, push and

hold the button (until you hear a beep

when the audio system is on). When the

indicators on both sides of the slot turn

green, insert a compact disc. After the

disc is loaded, the shutter of the slot will

close. After a few seconds, the shutter

will automatically open again and the indi-

cators will turn green so the next disc can

be inserted. The same process can be

applied for loading the rest of the discs.

If the player is full of discs, “DISC FULL”

will appear on the display.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter

will close after 15 seconds.

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system

on and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust the

volume.

RAND (Random)

Compact disc player

There are two random features—you can

either listen to the tracks on one compact

disc in random order, or listen to the

tracks on all the compact discs in the

magazine in random order.

To play the tracks on one disc in random

order:

Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset

button 1). “ ” will appear on the

display and the player will perform the

tracks on the disc you are listening to in

random order. To turn off the random fea-

ture, push this button again.

To play all the tracks in the magazine in

random order:

Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-

pear on the display and the player will

perform all the tracks on all the discs in

the magazine in random order. To turn off

the random feature, push this button

again.

MP3/WMA player

There are two random playback features—

you can either listen to all of the files on

the compact discs in random order. You

can also listen to the files in a single

folder in random order.

To randomly play the files in a folder:

Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset

button 1). “ ” will appear on the

display.

To randomly play all of the files on the

compact disc:

Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will

appear on the display and the player will

play all of the files on the disc in random

order. To turn off the random playback

feature, push this button again.

07 04.26

290 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

RPT (Repeat)

Compact disc player

There are two repeat features—you can

either replay a disc track or a whole com-

pact disc.

Repeating a track:

Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset

button 2) while the track is playing.

“” will appear on the display. When

the track ends, it will automatically replay.

To turn off the repeat feature, push this

button again.

Repeating a disc:

Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-

pear on the display. The player will repeat

all the tracks on the disc you are listening

to. When the disc ends, the player will

automatically go back to the first track on

the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat

feature, push this button again.

MP3/WMA player

There are two repeat features—you can

repeat a single file or an entire folder.

Repeating a file:

Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset

button 2) while the file is playing.

“” will appear on the display. When

the file ends, it will repeat automatically.

This process will be continued until you

push the button again to turn off the re-

peat feature.

Repeating a folder:

Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-

pear on the display. The player will repeat

all of the files in the folder. When the last

file in the folder ends, the folder will re-

peat from the beginning. To turn off the

repeat feature, push this button again.

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies on

a band or scan only the preset stations

for that band.

To scan the preset stations:

Push and hold the “SCAN” button until

you hear a beep. The radio will tune in

the next preset station up the band, stay

there for 5 seconds, and then move to the

next preset station. To stop scanning,

push this button again.

To scan all the frequencies:

Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-

ton. The radio will find the next station up

the station band, stay there for 5 seconds,

and then scan again to the next station.

To stop scanning, push this button again.

XMr Satellite Radio∗—

You can either scan the currently selected

channel category or scan only the preset

channels for the band.

07 04.26

291

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

To scan the preset channels:

Push and hold the “SCAN” button until

you hear a beep. “SCAN” appears on the

display. The radio will tune in the next

preset channel up the band, stay there for

5 seconds, and then move to the next

preset channel. To stop scanning, push

this button again.

To scan the currently selected channel

category:

Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-

ton. “SCAN” appears on the display. The

radio will find the next channel in the

same channel category up the band, stay

there for 5 seconds, and then scan again.

To stop scanning, push this button again.

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can ei-

ther scan the tracks on a specific disc or

scan the first tracks of all the discs in the

magazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:

Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-

ton. “SCAN” will appear on the display

and the player will scan all the tracks on

the disc you are listening to. To stop

scanning, push this button again. If the

player scanned all the tracks on the disc,

it will stop scanning.

Scanning the first tracks of all the discs

in the magazine:

Push and hold the “SCAN” button until

you hear a beep. “ ·SCAN” will appear

on the display and the player will scan the

first track of the next disc. To stop scan-

ning, push this button again. If the chang-

er has scanned all the discs, it will stop

scanning.

MP3/WMA player

There are two scan features—you can ei-

ther scan the files in a folder on a specif-

ic disc or scan the first file of all the

folder.

Scanning the files on a folder:

Quickly push and release “SCAN”. “SCAN”

will appear on the display and the player

will scan all the files in the folder you are

listening to. To select a file, push the

“SCAN” again. After all the tracks on the

disc have been scanned in one pass, nor-

mal play resumes.

Scanning the first file of all the folders:

Push “SCAN” until you hear a beep.

“” will appear on the display and

the player will scan the first file of the

next folder. To select a folder, push the

“SCAN” again. After all the folders have

been scanned in one pass, normal play

resumes.

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds and

plays the next station up or down the

station band.

To seek the next station, quickly push and

release “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the

“SEEK/TRACK” button. Do this again to

find the station after that.

XMr Satellite Radio∗—

To select the next channel within the cur-

rent channel category, push the “Ɯ” or

“Ɲ” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button.

Repeat until a desired channel is found.

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

07 04.26

292 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to a

different track.

Push “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the

“SEEK/TRACK” button until the number of

the track you want to listen to appears on

the display. If you want to return to the

beginning of the current track, quickly

push the down side of the button one

time.

MP3/WMA player

Use this button to file up or down to a

different file.

Push “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the “SEEK/

TRACK” several times until the file you

want to listen to appears on the display.

If you want to return to the beginning of

the current file, push the “Ɲ” side of the

button one time.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereo

reception when a stereo broadcast is re-

ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If the

signal becomes weak, the radio reduces

the amount of channel separation to prev-

ent the weak signal from creating noise.

If the signal becomes extremely weak, the

radio switches from stereo to mono recep-

tion.

TEXT

XMr Satellite Radio∗1—

When you push the “TEXT” button, the

display changes as follows:

CH NAME → TITLE (SONG/PROGRAM

TITLE) → NAME (ARTIST NAME/FEA-

TURE) → CH NUMBER → CH NAME

Up to 10 alphanumeric characters can be

displayed. (Some information will not be

fully displayed.)

The message display will be canceled if

any button that affects the display is

pushed.

If there is no song/program title or artist

name/feature associated with the channel

at that time, “−−−−−” will appear on the

display.

This XMr tuner supports “Audio Services”

(Music and Talk) of only XMr Satellite

Radio and “Text Information”∗2 linked to

the respective audio services.

∗1: Use of satellite radio requires XMr

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

∗2: Text Information includes, Channel

Name, (Artist) Name, (Song) Title and

Category Name.

Compact disc player

This button is used to change the display

for the compact disc that contains text

data.

To change the display, quickly push and

release the “TEXT” button while the com-

pact disc is playing. The display changes

in the order from the elapsed time to disc

title to track title, then back to the

elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compact

disc that does not contain text data is

playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on the

display.

If the entire disc or track title does not

appear on the display, push and hold the

button until you hear a beep. The rest of

the title will appear.

07 04.26

293

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

MP3/WMA player

This button is used to change the display

for the MP3/WMA file that contains text

data.

To change the display, quickly push and

release the “TEXT” button while the

MP3/WMA file is playing. The display

changes in the order from the elapsed

time to folder name to file name to album

title to track title to artist name, then back

to the elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while an

MP3/WMA file that does not contain text

data is playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on

the display.

If the entire text data is not displayed,

push and hold it until you hear a beep.

The rest of the text data will appear.

TUNE·FILE (Tuning and File up/down)

Radio

Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise to

step up the frequency. Turn the knob

counterclockwise to step down the fre-

quency.

XMr Satellite Radio∗—

Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise to

step up the channel. Turn the knob coun-

terclockwise to step down the channel.

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

MP3/WMA player

Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise to

file up. Turn the knob counterclockwise to

file down.

XS18008a

Some parts of the audio system can be

adjusted using the switches on the steer-

ing wheel.

Details of the specific switches, controls,

and features are described below.

1. Volume control switch

2. “MODE” switch

3. “ƜƝ” switch

07 04.26

Audio remote controls

(steering switches)

294 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

1. Volume control switch

Push “+” side to increase the volume. The

volume continues to increase while the

switch is being pushed.

Push “−” side to decrease the volume.

The volume continues to decrease while

the switch is being pushed.

2. “MODE” switch

Push “MODE” switch to select an audio

mode. Each push changes the mode se-

quentially if the desired mode is ready to

use.

To turn the audio system on, push the

“MODE” switch.

To turn the audio system off, push and

hold the “MODE” switch until the system

turns off.

3. “ƜƝ” switch

Radio

This switch has the following features—

To select a preset station:

Quickly push and release the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ”

side of the switch. Do this again to select

the next preset station.

To seek a station:

Push and hold the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the

switch until you hear a beep. Do this

again to find the next station. If you push

the switch on either side during the seek

mode, seeking will be cancelled.

To step up or down the frequency, push

and hold the switch even after you hear

a beep. When you release from the

switch, the radio will begin seeking up or

down for a station. Do this again to find

the next station.

XMr Satellite Radio∗—

To select a preset channel, push the “Ɯ”

or “Ɲ” side of the switch. Repeat until a

desired channel is found.

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

Compact disc player

Use this switch to skip up or down to a

different track in either direction.

Quickly push and release the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ”

side of the switch until the track you want

to listen to is set. If you want to return

to the beginning of the current track, push

the “Ɲ” side of the switch once, quickly.

With compact disc changer only—

Push and hold the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the

switch until the disc you want to listen to

is set.

MP3/WMA player

To select a desired file:

Quickly push and release the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ”

side of the switch until the file you want

to listen to is set. If you want to return

to the beginning of the current file, push

the “Ɲ” side of the switch once, quickly.

To select a desired folder:

Push and hold the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the

switch until you hear a beep. Repeat this

until the folder you want to listen to is

set.

With compact disc changer only—

To select a desired disc:

Push and hold the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the

switch until you hear a beep. Repeat this

until the disc you want to listen to is set.

07 04.26

295

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS18009

An AUX adapter is installed on the in-

strument panel.

By inserting a mini plug into the AUX

adapter, you can listen to music from a

portable audio device through the vehicle’s

speaker system.

To use the AUX adapter, switch to the

AUX mode (external device mode) by

pressing the “DISC·AUX” button. When the

AUX adapter is in use, “AUX” will appear

on the display. To adjust the volume, turn

the “PWR·VOL” knob.

When using a portable audio device con-

nected to the power outlet or cigarette

lighter, noise may occur during playback.

If this happens, use the power source of

the portable audio device.

If you install an audio system other than

a genuine audio system, you will not be

able to use the AUX adapter.

NOTICE

To reduce the chance of audio noise,

do not leave mini plug connected to

AUX adapter without auxiliary play-

back device connected.

07 04.26

AUX adapter

296 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Separate seats type

The rear seat entertainment system con-

sists of the following components.

1. Power outlet main switch

2. Front audio system

3. DVD player

4. Rear seat entertainment system display

5. Rear seat entertainment system con-

troller

6. A/V input adapter

7. Power outlet

07 04.26

Rear seat entertainment system—

XS18030b

297

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Bench seat type

The rear seat entertainment system con-

sists of the following components.

1. Power outlet main switch

2. Front audio system

3. DVD player

4. Rear seat entertainment system display

5. Rear seat entertainment system con-

troller

6. Power outlet

7. A/V input adapter

07 04.26

XS18031b

298 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

The rear seat entertainment system is de-

signed for the rear passengers to enjoy

audio and DVD video separately from the

front audio system.

The rear seat entertainment system can

be operated when the ignition switch is in

the “ACC” or “ON” position.

The rear passengers can enjoy DVD vid-

eo, audio CD, video CD, CD text, dts−CD

and MP3.

The rear seat entertainment system can

play DVD video, audio CD, video CD, CD

text, dts−CD or MP3 only when a disc is

loaded in the DVD player.

You can enjoy videos and sound when

your personal audio system is connected

to the input terminal adapter. For details,

refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.

You can enjoy the rear seat entertainment

system with a wireless headphone. The

wireless headphone can be used within

rear seat. If the signal becomes weak, the

headphone will mute. For details, refer to

the manufacturer’s instructions.

With some wireless headphone generally

available in the market, it may be difficult

to catch sound properly. Toyota recom-

mends the use of Toyota genuine wireless

headphone.

You can purchase a wireless headphone

at a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

DDo not operate a motor vehicle

while using headphones. Doing so

may cause an accident, resulting in

death or serious injury.

DWith DVD player:

Conversational speech on some

DVDs is recorded at a low volume

to emphasize the impact of sound

effects. If you adjust the volume

assuming that the conversations

represent the maximum volume lev-

el that the DVD will play, you may

be startled by louder sound effects

or when you change to a different

audio source. Be sure to adjust the

volume with this in mind.

Make sure the volume is not in-

creased, before you turn on the

headphone.

—Display

XS18017

To open the display, push the lock release

button.

07 04.26

299

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS18018

Pull the display down to an easily view-

able angle (between 90_ and 125_)

NOTICE

The screen should be cleaned with a

dry soft cloth. If the screen is pushed

by hand or wiped with a hard cloth,

the surface of the screen may be

scratched.

XS18019

To close, push the display up until you

hear a click.

The illumination of the screen is automati-

cally turned off when the display is

closed. However, the rear seat entertain-

ment system is not turned off.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or sudden stop

while driving, close the display when

it is not in use.

NOTICE

zBenzene or alkaline solutions may

damage the coated surface of the

screen.

zTo prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not turn on the rear

seat entertainment system longer

than necessary when the engine is

not running.

INFORMATION

zWipe off fingerprints on the surface

of the display using a glass clean-

ing cloth.

zThe displayed image may become

darker and moving images may be

slightly distorted when the display

is cold.

zWhen you look at the screen

through polarized material such as

polarized sunglasses, the screen

may be dark and hard to see. If so,

change the angle of the screen,

look at the screen from different

angles, adjust the screen settings

on the “Display” screen, or take off

your sunglasses.

07 04.26

300 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

The rear seat entertainment system can

be operated with the rear seat entertain-

ment system controller and buttons on the

DVD player unit. The system cannot be

operated by touching the switches on the

screen directly.

CAUTION

Do not disassemble or modify the

controller. It may cause an accident,

fire or electric shock.

NOTICE

Keep the controller away from direct

sunlight, high heat and high humidity.

These conditions could cause the

case to deform or the battery to ex-

plode or leak.

BEFORE USING THE CONTROLLER

(for new vehicle owners)

A battery is already set in the control-

ler with an insulating sheet, which pre-

vents the battery from being dis-

charged. Before using the controller,

remove the insulating sheet according

to the following procedure. Z17448

1. Remove the cover of the controller

as shown.

07 04.26

—Rear seat entertainment

system controller

301

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Z17449

2. Remove the insulating sheet. XS18020

USING THE CONTROLLER

To use the rear seat entertainment sys-

tem controller, direct the signal output

portion of the controller to the signal

reception portion of the rear seat enter-

tainment system display.

The controller does not operate properly

when the signal reception portion of the

display is exposed to direct sunlight.

Block the display from direct sunlight.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop

while driving, stow the controller in

the seatback pocket when it is not in

use.

07 04.26

302 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

NOTICE

Observe the followings, otherwise the

controller may be damaged.

zDo not drop or strongly knock the

controller against hard objects.

zDo not sit on or place heavy ob-

jects on the controller.

zDo not leave the controller exposed

to high temperatures (such as on

the instrument panel) for a long

time.

07 04.26

303

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

1. “DVD” button

This button turns on the DVD mode.

2. “VIDEO” button

This button causes the display to use

the video signal from an external video

device.

3. “OFF” button

This button turns off the rear seat en-

tertainment system.

4. Joystick

This joystick selects a control switch,

mode switch on the screen or the

menu for the disc.

5. “ENT” button

This button inputs the selected switch

or the selected menu for the disc.

6. “FOLDER ” button

This button selects a desired folder.

7. “FOLDER ” button

This button selects a desired folder.

8. “ ” button

This button fast forwards a screen

when the DVD player is operated.

07 04.26

—Control buttons

"Controller

Z18004y

304 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

9. “ ” button

This button stops a screen when the

DVD player is operated.

10. “SET UP” button

This button indicates the initial set up

screen when the DVD player is oper-

ated.

11. “MENU” button

This button indicates the menu screen

for DVD video when the DVD player is

operated.

12. “AUDIO” button

This button indicates the changing au-

dio screen when the DVD player is

operated.

13. “SUB TITLE” button

This button indicates the changing sub-

title screen when the DVD player is

operated.

14. “DISPLAY” button

This button adjusts the color, tone,

contrast and brightness of the screen.

15. “SIZE” button

This button changes the display mode

when the DVD player is operated or

the video mode is on.

16. “ANGLE” button

This button selects the angle of the

screen when the DVD player is oper-

ated.

17. “SEARCH” button

This button indicates the title search

screen when the DVD player is oper-

ated.

18. “TOP MENU” button

This button indicates the title selection

screen for DVD video when the DVD

player is operated.

19. “ ” button

This button reverse a screen when the

DVD player is operated.

20. “ ” button

This button plays or pauses a screen

when the DVD player is operated.

21. “TRACK/CHAPTER ” button

This button selects track/chapter.

22. “TRACK/CHAPTER ” button

This button selects track/chapter.

23. “OPTION” button

This button indicates the control

switches on the screen when the DVD

player is operated.

REPLACING CONTROLLER BATTERY

For replacement, use 3 AA batteries.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken to pre-

vent small children from swallowing

the removed battery or components.

NOTICE

zWhen replacing the battery, be care-

ful not to lose the components.

zReplace only with the same or

equivalent type recommended by a

Toyota dealer.

zDispose of used batteries according

to the local laws.

07 04.26

305

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Z17448

Replace the battery according to the fol-

lowing procedure:

1. Remove the cover of the controller as

shown.

Z17458

2. Remove the discharged batteries and

put in the new batteries as shown.

Install the cover.

NOTICE

zBe sure that the positive side and

negative side of the controller bat-

tery should be faced correctly.

zDo not replace the battery with wet

hands. Water may cause rust.

zDo not touch or move any compo-

nents inside of the controller, or it

may interfere with proper operation.

zBe careful not to bend the electrode

of the controller battery insertion.

zClose the battery case securely.

After replacing the battery, check that the

controller operates properly. If the control-

ler still does not operate properly, contact

your Toyota dealer.

07 04.26

306 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

1. “DVD” button

This button turns on the rear seat en-

tertainment system and selects the

mode.

2. “VIDEO” button

This button causes the display to use

the video signal from an external video

device.

3. “ TRACK·CHAPTER ” button

This button skips directly to a desire

track or chapter.

4. “ ” button

This button plays or pauses a screen

when the DVD player is operated.

5. “OPTION” button

This button indicates the control

switches on the screen when the DVD

player is operated.

6. Joystick/“ENT” button

The joystick selects a control switch

mode switch on the screen or the

menu for the disc.

The “ENT” button inputs the selected

switch or the selected menu for the

disc.

07 04.26

"Buttons on the DVD player unit

XS18021

307

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

7. “DISC” indicator light

This light indicates that the disc is

loaded.

8. “ ” button

This button ejects a disc. Z17453

Controller

XS18022

DVD player unit

To turn on the system, push the “DVD”

button or “VIDEO” button.

When the “DVD” button is pushed, the

disc load screen changes to the DVD

player operation screen.

When the “VIDEO” button is pushed, the

images and sounds from the personal au-

dio machine are output.

The “DVD” button is effective only when a

disc is inserted.

07 04.26

—Turning the rear seat

entertainment system on and

off

308 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Z17455

To turn off the system, push the “OFF”

button.

When the front audio system is turned off,

the rear audio system and the DVD player

will be turned off simultaneously.

Z18033

Vehicles with navigation system—The rear

seat entertainment system can be

switched ON and OFF by pushing the

“Rear” switch on the front audio system.

The rear DVD player can be operated

through the front audio system.

07 04.26

—Front audio system

operation

309

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

The audio system controls in the instru-

ment panel allow the operation of the rear

seat entertainment system by rear seat

passengers to be disabled.

Turning on the rear system lock prevents

small children from using the remote con-

troller or operation panel of the DVD play-

er unit to operate the rear seat entertain-

ment system during driving.

Turn the audio system on. Push the

“AUDIO CONTROL” knob repeatedly until

“RSE” is displayed. Then, turn the “AUDIO

CONTROL” knob until “ON” is displayed,

and then push the “AUDIO CONTROL”

knob.

Z18031E

Vehicles with navigation system—

Push the “INFO” button to change the

screen to “Screen Setting”.

Push the “ON” switch on the “Screen

Setting” screen to turn on the “Rear

system lock”. Then push “OK”.

Z17443

When the rear system lock is on and any

button is pushed on the remote controller

or the operation panel, the screen shown

above is displayed for approximately 6

seconds.

Even when the rear system lock is turned

on during play mode, the images and

sounds continue without interruption.

The condition of the rear system lock is

maintained, even when the ignition switch

is turned off.

07 04.26

—Rear system lock

310 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

The DVD player can play audio CDs/

MP3 CDs, DVD video discs, CD texts,

dts−CDs and video CDs.

For appropriate discs for this player, see

“Audio/video system operating hints” on

page 339 in this Section.

The DVD player works when the ignition

switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

To turn on the DVD player, a disc must

be loaded in the player.

To turn off the player, eject the disc.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-

tem will display following error messages.

If “DISC CHECK” appears on the

screen: It indicates that the disc is dirty,

damaged or it was inserted upside down.

Clean the disc or insert it correctly.

If “REGION ERROR” appears on the

screen: It indicates that the DVD region

code is not set properly.

If “DVD ERROR” appears on the

screen: There is a problem inside the

player. Eject the disc. Set the disc again.

If the malfunction still exists, take your

vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

XS18023

INSERTING THE DISC

Insert the compact disc into the slot

with the label side up.

“DISC” indicator light turns on while the

disc is loaded.

If the label faces down, the disc cannot

be played. In this case, “DISC CHECK”

and disc number appear on the screen.

If a disc which is not playable is inserted,

“DISC CHECK” will also appear on the

screen. For appropriate discs for this play-

er, see “Audio/video system operating

hints” on page 339 in this Section.

The player will play the track or chapter,

and it will play from the beginning of the

track or chapter again after it reaches the

end.

CAUTION

This product is a class 1 laser prod-

uct. Use of controls or adjustments

or performance of procedures other

than those specified herein may re-

sult in hazardous radiation exposure.

Do not open covers and do not repair

by yourself. Refer servicing to quali-

fied personnel.

NOTICE

Never try to disassemble or oil any

part of the DVD player. Do not insert

anything other than a disc into the

slot.

07 04.26

—DVD player

311

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

8 cm (3 in.) compact disc singles

Your compact disc player needs an adap-

tor to play compact disc singles. Compact

disc singles are about 8 cm (3 in.) in di-

ameter−smaller than standard discs.

XS18024

EJECTING THE DISC

Push the “ ” button.

Z17461

The DVD player can be operated with the

controller buttons directly.

1. “DVD” button

2. “SET UP” button

3. “MENU” button

4. “AUDIO” button

5. “SUB TITLE” button

6. “ANGLE” button

7. “SIZE” button

8. “SEARCH” button

9. “TOP MENU” button

10. “ ”, “ ”, “ ” and “ ” buttons

07 04.26

—DVD player operation

switches

312 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Z17456

Controller

XS18025

DVD player unit

The player can also be operated with the

switches on the screen.

To operate the switches on the screen,

select the switch by the joystick and push

the “ENT” button. You cannot select the

switches on the screen by touching them

directly.

When the switch is selected by the joys-

tick, the outline of the switch changes to

blue. Push the “ENT” button, and the

switch will be highlighted in green.

Z17462

Controller

XS18026

DVD player unit

07 04.26

313

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

TURNING THE OPERATION SWITCHES

ON AND OFF

To turn on the operation switches, push

the “OPTION” button on the controller.

Z18008

Top page (DVD video operation switch)

Z17401

Second page (DVD video operation

switch)

Z17402

Top page (video CD)

Z18009

Second page (video CD)

07 04.26

314 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

There are operation switches on the “Page

1” and “Page 2” screens.

To change the screen, push the “Page 1”

or “Page 2” switch on the screen.

Z17404

If “ ” appears on the screen when

you select a switch, it indicates that

the switch cannot work.

Z18010

On the screen

Z17462

Controller

07 04.26

315

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS18026

DVD player unit

To turn off the switches on the screen,

push the “OPTION” button on the control-

ler once again or push the “Hide Buttons”

on the screen.

—DVD player operation

NOTE: The playback condition of some

DVD video discs may be determined by

the DVD video software producer. This

DVD player plays discs as the software

producer intended. Therefore, some

functions may not work properly. Be

sure to read the instruction manual for

the DVD video disc separately provided.

For detailed information about DVD

video discs, see “—DVD video disc

information” on page 335 in this

Section.

Precautions for DVD video discs

When recording on a DVD video, video

CD or audio tracks may not record in

some cases while the menu is displayed.

As audio will not play in this case, verify

that the video tracks are playing and then

activate playback.

The title/chapter number and playback

time display may not appear while playing

back certain DVD video discs.

CAUTION

Conversational speech on some DVDs

is recorded at a low volume to em-

phasize the impact of sound effects.

If you adjust the volume assuming

that the conversations represent the

maximum volume level available for

the DVD, you may be startled by

louder sound effects or when you

change to a different audio source.

Loud sounds may have a significant

impact on the human body or pose a

driving hazard. Keep this in mind

when you adjust the volume.

07 04.26

316 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Z18011

TURNING THE MENU SCREEN FOR THE

DISC ON OR OFF

To turn on the menu screen for the disc,

push the “Top Menu” or the “Menu” switch

on the screen. You can also turn on the

menu screen by pushing the “MENU” or

“TOP MENU” button on the controller.

For the operation of the menu screen, see

the separate manual for the DVD disc.

Z18012

You can select the menu for the disc by

the joystick and the “ENT” button on the

controller.

07 04.26

317

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Z18013

OPERATING THE “ ”, “ ”, “ ”

AND “ ” SWITCHES/BUTTONS

“” switch/button: Push this switch/but-

ton to pause the disc or to cancel the

pause and return to normal playing.

“” switch/button: This switch/button

stops a screen when the DVD player is

operated.

“” and “ ” switches/buttons: Push

and hold the “ ” or “ ” switch/button

to fast forward or reverse. When you re-

lease the switch/button, the DVD player

will resume playing.

Push the “ ” switch/button while paus-

ing, the DVD video plays the slow−motion

video replay.

Z17409

07 04.26

318 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

SKIPPING TO THE PREDETERMINED

SCREEN

To skip to the predetermined screen, push

the “Return” switch. The DVD player starts

playing from the beginning of the predeter-

mined screen.

For further details of the predetermined

screen, see the separate manual for the

DVD disc.

Z17410

SELECTING THE TITLE

To display the searching title screen, push

the “Search” switch on the screen. You

can also display the screen by pushing

the “SEARCH” button on the controller.

07 04.26

319

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Z17411

Select the title number by using the

joystick and push the “ENT” button to

enter the number. The player starts play-

ing disc for that title number. The selected

title number will appear on the screen.

Push the “Back” switch to return to the

menu screen.

Z17413

CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE

Push the “Sub Title” switch on the screen,

and then the changing subtitle language

screen will appear. You can also display

the screen by pushing the “SUB TITLE”

button on the controller.

07 04.26

320 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Z17414

Each time you push the “Sub Title” switch,

another language stored on the disc is se-

lected.

To turn off the subtitles, push the “Hide

Buttons” switch.

Push the “Back” switch to return to the

previous screen.

The selected subtitle language will appear

on the screen.

Z17415

CHANGING AUDIO LANGUAGE

Push the “Audio” switch on the screen

and then the changing audio language

screen will appear. You can also display

the screen by pushing the “AUDIO” button

on the controller.

07 04.26

321

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Z17416

Each time you push the “Audio” switch,

another language stored on the disc is se-

lected.

To turn off the audio language screen,

push the “Hide Buttons” switch.

Push the “Back” switch to return to the

previous screen.

The selected audio language will appear

on the screen.

Z17417

CHANGING ANGLE SCREEN

Push the “Angle” switch on the screen,

and then the changing angle screen will

appear. You can also display the screen

by pushing the “ANGLE” button on the

controller.

07 04.26

322 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Z17413

The angle can be selected for discs that

are multi−angle compatible when the “ ”

mark appears on the screen. Each time

you push the “Angle” switch, the angle

changes. The angle number which you

can select will appear on the screen.

To turn off the screen, push the “Hide

Buttons” switch.

Push the “Back” switch to return to the

previous screen.

Z17419

CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING

Push the “Set Up” switch on the screen,

and then the initial setting screen will ap-

pear. You can also display the screen by

pushing the “SET UP” button on the con-

troller. You can change the initial setting.

After the setting is done, the player plays

from the beginning of the chapter or the

track.

07 04.26

323

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Z18017

Setup Menu screen

There are initial setting switches on the

“Setup Menu” screen.

After you change the initial setting, push

the “Enter” switch. The initial setting

switch will be turned off and return to the

picture previously.

When the “Default” switch is pushed, all

menus are initialized.

Z18018

CHANGING THE AUDIO LANGUAGE

Push the “Audio Language” switch on the

“Setup Menu” and the “Select Audio

Lang.” screen appears.

Select the language you want to hear by

pushing the appropriate switch on the

screen.

To return to the “Setup Menu” screen,

push the “Back” switch.

If you cannot find the language you want

to hear, push the “Others” switch. The

“Enter Audio Lang. Code” screen will ap-

pear.

Z18019

To select an audio language, use the joys-

tick to enter the appropriate 4−digit lan-

guage code. For details of the language

codes, see the language code list.

If a code which is not on the list is en-

tered and the “ENT” button is pushed, the

“Incorrect Code” screen will appear. Enter

the code of the language you want to hear

again.

To return to the “Select Audio Lang.”

screen, push the “Back” switch.

07 04.26

324 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Z18020

CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE

To display the “Select Subtitle Lang.”

screen, push the “Subtitle Language”

switch on the “Setup Menu” screen.

Select the language you want to read by

pushing the appropriate switch on the

screen.

To return to the “Setup Menu” screen,

push the “Back” switch.

If you cannot find the language you want

to read, push the “Others” switch. The

“Enter Subtitle Lang. Code” screen will ap-

pear.

Z18021

To enter the code of the language you

want to read, use the joystick to enter the

appropriate 4−digit language code. For de-

tails about the language codes, see the

language code list.

Push the “ENT” button on the controller. If

numbers which are not on the list are en-

tered and the “ENT” button is pushed, the

“Incorrect code” screen will appear. Enter

the language code you want to read

again.

To return to the “Select Subtitle Lang.”

screen, push the “Back” switch on the

screen.

Z18022

CHANGING THE DVD LANGUAGE

To display the “Select DVD Lang.” screen,

push the “DVD Language” switch on the

“Setup Menu” screen.

Select the language you want to read on

the screen.

To return to the “Setup Menu” screen,

push the “Back” switch.

If you cannot find a language you want to

read, push the “Others” switch. The “Enter

DVD Lang. Code” screen will appear.

07 04.26

325

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Z18023

To enter the code of the language you

want to read, use the joystick to enter the

appropriate 4−digit language code. For de-

tails about the language codes, see the

language code list.

Push the “ENT” button on the controller. If

numbers which are not on the list are en-

tered and the “ENT” button is pushed, the

“Incorrect code” screen will appear. Enter

the language code you want to read

again.

To return to the “Select DVD Lang.”

screen, push the “Back” switch on the

screen.

Z18024

TURNING THE ANGLE MARK ON OR

OFF

The angle mark can be turned on for

discs that are multi−angle compatible.

Each time you push the “Angle Mark”

switch on the screen, the angle mark

turns on or off alternately.

Z18025

SETTING LEVEL OF VIEWER

RESTRICTIONS

You can restrict the play back screen by

setting the viewer restrictions. You can

prevent the restriction with a password.

Some discs do not supply a restriction.

To set the level of viewer restriction, push

the “Parental Lock” switch on the “Setup

Menu” screen. The “Enter Personal Code”

screen will appear.

07 04.26

326 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Z18026

Enter the password and push the “ENT”

button. The “Select Restriction Level”

screen will appear.

You cannot change the setting without in-

putting the password. When you forget or

change the password, push the “A” side

of the joystick ten times to initialize the

password.

To return to the “Setup Menu” screen,

push the “Back” switch.

Z18027

Push a parental level (1—8). The smaller

the level number, the stricter the age limit.

Push the “Back” switch to return to the

“Setup Menu” screen.

SETTING THE DISPLAY MODE

Pushing the “SIZE” button on the control-

ler causes the display modes to change

sequentially as follows:

Normal Wide1 Wide2

07 04.26

327

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

LANGUAGE CODE LIST

Code Language

0514 English

1001 Japanese

0618 French

0405 German

0920 Italian

0519 Spanish

2608 Chinese

1412 Dutch

1620 Portuguese

1922 Swedish

1821 Russian

1115 Korean

0512 Greek

0101 Afar

0102 Abkhazian

0106 Afrikaans

0113 Amharic

0118 Arabic

0119 Assamese

0125 Aymara

0126 Azerbaijani

0201 Bashkir

0205 Byelorussian

0207 Bulgarian

0208 Bihari

0209 Bislama

0214 Bengali

0215 Tibetan

0218 Breton

0301 Catalan

0315 Corsican

0319 Czech

0325 Welsh

0401 Danish

0426 Bhutani

0515 Esperanto

0520 Estonian

0521 Basque

0601 Persian

0609 Finnish

0610 Fiji

0615 Faroese

0625 Frisian

0701 Irish

0704 Scots−Gaelic

0712 Galician

0714 Guarani

0721 Gujarati

0801 Hausa

0809 Hindi

0818 Croatian

0821 Hungarian

0825 Armenian

0901 Interlingua

0905 Interlingue

0911 Inupiak

0914 Indonesian

0919 Icelandic

0923 Hebrew

1009 Yiddish

1023 Javanese

07 04.26

328 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

1101 Georgian

1111 Kazakh

1112 Greenlandic

1113 Cambodian

1114 Kannada

1119 Kashmiri

1121 Kurdish

1125 Kirghiz

1201 Latin

1214 Lingala

1215 Laothian

1220 Lithuanian

1222 Latvian

1307 Malagasy

1309 Maori

1311 Macedonian

1312 Malayalam

1314 Mongolian

1315 Moldavian

1318 Marathi

1319 Malay

1320 Maltese

1325 Burmese

1401 Nauru

1405 Nepali

1415 Norwegian

1503 Occitan

1513 (Afan) Oromo

1518 Oriya

1601 Punjabi

1612 Polish

1619 Pashto, Pushto

1721 Quechua

1813 Rhaeto−Romance

1814 Kirundi

1815 Romanian

1823 Kinyarwanda

1901 Sanskrit

1904 Sindhi

1907 Sangho

1908 Serbo−Croatian

1909 Sinhalese

1911 Slovak

1912 Slovenian

1913 Samoan

1914 Shona

1915 Somali

1917 Albanian

1918 Serbian

1919 Siswati

1920 Sesotho

1921 Sundanese

1923 Swahili

2001 Ta mi l

2005 Telugu

2007 Tajik

2008 Thai

2009 Tigrinya

2011 Turkmen

2012 Tagalog

2014 Setswana

2015 Tonga

2018 Turkish

07 04.26

329

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

2019 Tsonga

2020 Ta t ar

2023 Twi

2111 Ukrainian

2118 Urdu

2126 Uzbek

2209 Vietnamese

2215 Volapük

2315 Wolof

2408 Xhosa

2515 Yoruba

2621 Zulu

Z17464

SELECTING THE CHAPTER/TRACK

To select the chapter/track, push the

“CHAPTER/TRACK ” button or

“CHAPTER/TRACK ” button on the

controller until the number of the

chapter/track you want to select appears

on the screen.

USING THE CONTROL SCREEN

When playing a disc, push the “DVD” but-

ton on the controller. The status screen

will appear on the screen.

07 04.26

330 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Z17489

SELECTING THE DISC MENU NUMBER

(video CD only)

Push the “Select Number” switch and then

the disc menu number search screen will

appear. You can also display the screen

by pushing the “SEARCH” button on the

controller.

Z17433

Enter the disc menu number by using the

joystick and push the “ENT” button. The

player starts playing the disc from the en-

tered disc menu number. The entered disc

menu number will appear on the screen.

Push the “Back” switch to return to the

menu screen.

Z18009

OPERATING THE “ ”, “ ” AND

“” SWITCHES (video CD only)

“” switch: Push this switch to pause

the disc or to cancel the pause and return

to normal playing.

“” and “ ” switches: Push this

switch to fast forward or reverse. If you

want to return to the beginning of the cur-

rent track, release the switch.

Video CD only—

Push the “ ” switch/button while paus-

ing, the DVD video plays the slow−motion

video replay.

07 04.26

—DVD player operation (video

CD/audio CD/CD text/MP3)

331

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Z17435

TURNING ON THE DISC MENU (video

CD only)

Push the “Return” switch to turn on the

menu screen for the disc.

For the operation of the menu screen, see

the manual for the video CD.

Z17490

CHANGING MENU PAGE OR TRACK

(video CD only)

Push the “Next Menu” or “Prev. Menu”

switch while the disc menu is displayed.

The next or previous page will appear on

the screen.

Push the “Next Menu” or “Prev. Menu”

switch while the player is playing video.

The next or previous track will be

searched and played.

Z18006

CHANGING A MULTIPLEX

TRANSMISSION (video CD only)

Push the “Main/Sub” switch to change a

multiplex transmission. The mode changes

from Main/Sub to Main to Sub and back

to Main/Sub by pushing the “Main/Sub”

switch.

07 04.26

332 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING (video

CD only)

Push the “Set Up” switch on the screen

and then the initial setting screen will ap-

pear. You can also display the screen by

pushing the “SET UP” button on the con-

troller. You can change the initial setting.

(See “CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING”

on page 322 in this Section for details.)

After the setting is done, the player plays

from the beginning of the chapter or the

track.

Z18028

CD Text

Z18029

CD MP3

USING THE CONTROL SCREEN

When playing a disc, push the “DVD” but-

ton on the controller. The control screen

will appear on the screen.

CD text only—

The disc title and track title will appear on

the screen when pushing the “DVD” but-

ton.

Details of the specific switches, controls

and features are described below.

1. “RPT” switch (audio CD and CD text)

Push the “RPT” switch while the track

is playing. When the track ends, it will

automatically replay. To turn off the re-

peat feature, push this switch again.

2. “RAND” switch (audio CD and CD text)

Push the “RAND” switch. The player

will play the tracks on the disc in ran-

dom order. To turn off the random fea-

ture, push this switch again.

3. “SCAN” switch (audio CD and CD text)

Push the “SCAN” switch. The player

will scan all the tracks on the disc. To

stop scanning, push this switch again.

When the player has scanned all the

tracks on the disc, it will stop scan-

ning.

07 04.26

333

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

MP3 only—

Folder and file names will appear on the

screen when the “DVD” button is pushed.

The details of the specific switches, con-

trols, and features are described below.

1. “RPT” switch

When the “RPT” switch is pushed while

a track is played, the track file will be

played repeatedly until the switch is

pushed again. When the switch is

pushed for at least 0.8 seconds, all the

files in a folder will be played repeat-

edly. To turn off repeat play mode,

push the switch again.

2. “RAND” switch

When the “RAND” switch is pushed,

the files in a current folder will be

played in random order. When the

switch is pushed for at least 0.8 sec-

onds, all the files in the disk will be

played in random. To turn off random

play mode, push the switch again.

3. “SCAN” switch

When the “SCAN” switch is pushed, all

the files in a current folder will be

scanned. Only the first 10 seconds of

each file are played sequentially until

all the files are scanned. When the

switch is pushed for at least 0.8 sec-

onds, the first 10 seconds of each ini-

tial file of all the folders in the disk will

be played sequentially until the entire

initial files are scanned. To stop scan-

ning, push the switch again.

4. “FLD ” switch

When the switch is pushed, the initial

file of the next folder will be played.

5. “ FLD” switch

When the switch is pushed, the initial

file of the previous folder will be

played.

6. “DETAIL” switch

When the switch is pushed while a

track is played, the detailed file infor-

mation of the track will be displayed.

You can adjust the color, contrast, tone

and brightness of the screen.

Push the “DISPLAY” button on the control-

ler and the “Display” screen will appear.

The screen may turn purple to deflect the

sunlight. This is not a malfunction.

07 04.26

—Screen adjustment

334 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Z18030

Operate the joystick up and down to se-

lect Brightness, Contrast, Tone, or Color

and left and right to make adjustments.

− or “RED” + or

“GREEN”

Brightness Darkens Brightens

Contrast Weakens

the contrast

Strengthens

the contrast

Tone Weakens

the tone

Strengthens

the tone

Color

Strengthens

the red

color

Strengthens

the green

color

After adjusting the screen, push the “ENT”

button or “DISPLAY” button to return to

the previous screen.

—Selecting the video mode

Z17478

The audio machine connected to the input

terminal adapter can be played in the vid-

eo mode.

To select the video mode, push the

“VIDEO” button on the controller.

07 04.26

335

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

DVD PLAYER AND DVD VIDEO DISCS

This DVD player conforms to NTSC col-

or TV formats. DVD video discs con-

forming to other formats such as PAL

or SECAM cannot be used.

Region codes: Some DVD video discs

have a region code indicating where you

can use. If the DVD video disc is not

labeled “ALL” or “1”, you cannot use it in

this DVD player. If you attempt to play an

inappropriate DVD video disc in this play-

er, “REGION CODE ERROR” appears on

the screen. Even if the DVD video disc

does not have a region code, in some

cases you cannot use it.

Marks shown on DVD video discs:

Indicates NTSC format

of color TV.

Indicates the number

of audio tracks.

Indicates the number

of language subtitles.

Indicates the number

of angles.

Indicates the screen

to be selected.

Wide screen: 16:9

Standard: 4:3

Indicates regions in

which this video disc

can be played.

ALL: all countries

Number: region code

DVD VIDEO DISC GLOSSARY

DVD video discs: Digital Versatile Disc

that holds video. DVD video discs have

adopted “MPEG2”, one of the world stan-

dards of digital compression technologies.

The picture data is compressed by 1/40

on average and stored. Variable rate en-

coded technology in which the volume of

data assigned to the picture is changed

depending on the picture format has also

been adopted. Audio data is stored using

PCM and Dolby digital, which enables

higher quality of sound. Furthermore, mul-

ti−angle and multi−language features will

also help you enjoy the more advanced

technology of DVD video.

Viewer restrictions: This feature limits

what can be viewed in conformity with the

level of restrictions of the country. The

level of restrictions varies depending on

the DVD video disc. Some DVD video

discs cannot be played at all, or violent

scenes are skipped or replaced with other

scenes.

Level 1: DVD video discs for children can

be played.

Level 2—7: DVD video discs for children

and G−rated movies can be played.

07 04.26

—DVD video disc information

336 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Level 8: All types of DVD video discs can

be played.

Multi−angle feature: You can enjoy the

same scene at different angles.

Multi−language feature: You can select

the language of the subtitles and audio.

Region codes: Region codes are provided

on DVD players and DVD discs. If the

DVD video disc does not have the same

region code as the DVD player, you

cannot play the disc on the DVD player.

For region codes, see page 335.

Audio: This DVD player can play liner

PCM, Dolby digital, dts and MPEG audio

format DVD. Other decoded type cannot

be played.

Title and chapter: Video and audio pro-

grams stored on DVD video discs are di-

vided in parts by title and chapter.

Title: The largest unit of the video and

audio programs stored on DVD video

discs. Usually, one piece of a movie, one

album, or one audio program is assigned

as a title.

Chapter: A unit smaller than a title. A title

comprises plural chapters.

Manufactured under license from Dolby

Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Dolby Digital”,

“Pro Logic”, and the double−D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Confidential unpublished works.

E1992−1997 Dolby Laboratories. All

rights reserved.

This product incorporates copyright

protection technology that is protected

by method claims of certain U.S. pat-

ents and other intellectual property

rights owned by Macrovision Corpora-

tion and other rights owners. Use of

this copyright protection technology

must be authorized by Macrovision Cor-

poration, and is intended for home and

other limited viewing uses only unless

otherwise authorized by Macrovision

Corporation. Reverse engineering or

disassembly is prohibited.

“dts” is a trademark of Digital Theater

Systems, Inc.

—A/V input adapter

The rear entertainment system plays vid-

eos and sound when an audio−video

equipment is connected to the A/V input

adapter. For details, refer to the manufac-

turer’s instructions.

07 04.26

337

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS18032

Separate seats type

XS18033

Bench seat type

To use the adapter, open the cover.

The A/V input adapter is composed of 3

input adapters.

Yellow: Image input adapter

Red: Audio input adapter

White: Audio input adapter

NOTICE

Close the cover when the A/V input

adapter is not in use. Inserting a for-

eign object other than the appropriate

plug may cause electrical failure or

short circuit.

—Power outlet

XS10094

Separate seats type

XS10092

Bench seat type

07 04.26

338 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

This power outlet is designed for use as

a power supply for the audio device con-

nected to the input terminal adapter.

The key must be in the “ON” position for

the power outlet to be used.

The maximum capacity for this power out-

let is 115 VAC/100W. If you attempt to

use an appliance that requires more than

115 VAC or 100W, the protection circuit

will activate and cut the power supply.

The power supply will restart automatically

when you use an appliance that operates

within the 115 VAC/100W limits.

XS18029

To use the power outlet, push the main

switch on the instrument panel.

An indicator light will illuminate to indicate

that the power outlet is ready for use.

Push the main switch once again to turn

the power outlet off. When the power out-

let is not in use, make sure that the main

switch is turned off.

NOTICE

zTo prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not use the power

outlet longer than necessary when

the engine is not running.

zClose the power outlet lid when the

power outlet is not in use. Inserting

a foreign object other than the ap-

propriate plug that fits the outlet

may cause electrical failure or short

circuit.

The power outlet is not designed for

the following electric appliances even if

their power consumption is under 115

VAC/100W. These appliances may not

operate properly.

DAppliances with high initial peak watt-

age: cathode−ray tube type televisions,

compressor−driven refrigerators, electric

pumps, electric tools, etc.

DMeasuring devices which process pre-

cise data: medical equipment, measur-

ing instruments, etc.

07 04.26

339

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

DOther appliances requiring an extremely

stable power supply: microcomputer−

controlled electric blankets, touch sen-

sor lamps, etc.

Certain electrical appliances may cause

radio noise.

NOTICE

To ensure correct audio system op-

eration:

zBe careful not to spill beverages

over the system.

zDo not put anything other than a

compact disc into the slot.

zDo not put anything other than a

DVD video, DVD audio, video CD,

dts−CD or audio CD into the DVD

player.

zThe use of a cellular phone inside

or near the vehicle may cause a

noise from the speakers of the sys-

tem which you are listening to.

However, this does not indicate a

malfunction.

RADIO RECEPTION

Usually, a problem with radio reception

does not mean there is a problem with

your radio—it is just the normal result of

conditions outside the vehicle.

For example, nearby buildings and terrain

can interfere with FM reception. Power

lines or telephone wires can interfere with

AM signals. And of course, radio signals

have a limited range. The farther you are

from a station, the weaker its signal will

be. In addition, reception conditions

change constantly as your vehicle moves.

Here are some common reception prob-

lems that probably do not indicate a prob-

lem with your radio:

Fading and drifting stations—Generally, the

effective range of FM is about 40 km (25

miles). Once outside this range, you may

notice fading and drifting, which increase

with the distance from the radio transmit-

ter. They are often accompanied by distor-

tion.

Multi−path—FM signals are reflective,

making it possible for two signals to reach

your antenna at the same time. If this

happens, the signals will cancel each oth-

er out, causing a momentary flutter or

loss of reception.

Static and fluttering—These occur when

signals are blocked by buildings, trees, or

other large objects. Increasing the bass

level may reduce static and fluttering.

07 04.26

Audio/video system operating

hints

340 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Station swapping—If the FM signal you

are listening to is interrupted or weak-

ened, and there is another strong station

nearby on the FM band, your radio may

tune in the second station until the origi-

nal signal can be picked up again.

Fading—AM broadcasts are reflected by

the upper atmosphere—especially at night.

These reflected signals can interfere with

those received directly from the radio sta-

tion, causing the radio station to sound

alternately strong and weak.

Station interference—When a reflected sig-

nal and a signal received directly from a

radio station are very nearly the same

frequency, they can interfere with each

other, making it difficult to hear the broad-

cast.

Static—AM is easily affected by external

sources of electrical noise, such as high

tension power lines, lightening, or electri-

cal motors. This results in static.

XMr∗

Alternation or modifications carried out

without appropriate authorization may in-

validate the user’s right to operate the

equipment.

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

NOTICE

This equipment has been tested and

found to comply with the limits for a

class B digital device, pursuant to

Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These lim-

its are designed to provide reasonable

protection against harmful interfer-

ence in a residential installation. This

equipment generates, uses and can

radiate radio frequency energy and, if

not installed and used in accordance

with the instructions, may cause

harmful interference to radio commu-

nications. However, there is no guar-

antee that interference will not occur

in a particular installation.

If this equipment does cause harmful

interference to radio or television re-

ception, which can be determined by

turning the equipment off and on, the

user is encouraged to try to correct

the interference by one or more of

the following measures:

—Reorient or relocate the receiving

antenna.

—Increase the separation between the

equipment and receiver.

—Connect the equipment into an out-

let on a circuit different from that to

which the receiver is connected.

—Consult the dealer or an experi-

enced radio/TV technician for help.

07 04.26

341

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

CARING FOR YOUR COMPACT DISC

PLAYER, DVD PLAYER AND DISCS

DType 2 and type 3—The player is in-

tended for use with 12 cm (4.7 in.)

discs only.

DExtremely high temperatures can keep

your compact disc player and DVD

player from working. On hot days, use

the air conditioning to cool the vehicle

interior before you use the players.

DBumpy roads or other vibrations may

make your compact disc player and

DVD player skip.

DIf moisture gets into your compact disc

player and DVD player, the players

may not play even though they appear

to be working. Remove the disc from

the player and wait until it dries.

CAUTION

Compact disc players and DVD play-

ers use an invisible laser beam which

could cause hazardous radiation ex-

posure if directed outside the unit. Be

sure to operate the player correctly.

XS18016

Compact disc player

DUse only compact discs marked as

shown above. The following products

may not be playable on your compact

disc player.

SACD

dts−CD

Copy−protected CD

CD−ROM

Audio CDs

DVD video

discs

Video CDs

DVD player

DUse only discs marked as shown

above. The following products may not

be playable on your DVD player.

SACD

Copy−protected CD

CD−ROM

DVD−R

DVD+R

DVD−RW

DVD+RW

DVD−ROM

DVD−RAM

07 04.26

342 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Special shaped discs

Z17058

Transparent/translucent discs

Low quality discs

Labeled discs

NOTICE

zDo not use special shaped, trans-

parent/translucent, low quality or la-

beled discs such as those shown in

the illustrations. The use of such

discs may damage the player or

changer, or it may be impossible to

eject the disc.

zThis system is not designed for use

of Dual Disc. Do not use Dual Disc

because it may cause damage to

the player or changer.

07 04.26

343

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Correct Wrong

DHandle the discs carefully, especially

when you are inserting them. Hold

them on the edge and do not bend

them. Avoid getting fingerprints on

them, particularly on the shiny side.

DDirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, or

other disc damage could cause the

player to skip or to repeat a section of

a track. (To see a pin hole, hold the

disc up to the light.)

DRemove discs from the compact disc

player when you are not playing them.

Store them in their plastic cases away

from moisture, heat, and direct sun-

light.

To clean a disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint−

free cloth that has been dampened with

water. Wipe in a straight line from the

center to the edge of the disc (not in

circles). Dry it with another soft, lint−free

cloth. Do not use a conventional record

cleaner or anti−static device.

MP3/WMA FILES

DMP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3) and WMA

(Windows Media Audio) are audio com-

pression standards.

DThe MP3/WMA player can play MP3

and WMA files on CD−ROM, CD−R and

CD−RW discs.

The unit can play disc recordings com-

patible with ISO 9660 level 1 and level

2 and with the Romeo and Joliet file

system.

DWhen naming an MP3 or WMA file,

add the appropriate file extension (.mp3

or .wma).

DThe MP3/WMA player plays back files

with .mp3 or .wma file extensions as

MP3 or WMA files. To prevent noise

and playback errors, use the appropri-

ate file extensions.

DMulti−session compatible CDs can also

be played.

DMP3 files are compatible with the ID3

Tag Ver.1.0, Ver.1.1 and Ver.2.2, and

Ver. 2.3 formats. The unit cannot dis-

play disc title, track title and artist

name in other formats.

07 04.26

344 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

DWMA files can contain a WMA tag that

is used in the same way as an ID3

tag. WMA tags carry information such

as track title, artist name.

DThe emphasis function is available only

when playing MP3/WMA files recorded

at 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz. (The system

can play MP3 files with sampling fre-

quencies of 16, 22.05, and 24 kHz.

However, the emphasis function is not

available for files recorded at these fre-

quencies.)

DThe sound quality of MP3/WMA files

generally improves with higher bit

rates. In order to achieve a reasonable

level of sound quality, discs recorded

with a bit rate of at least 128 kbps are

recommended.

Playable bit rates

MP3 files:

MPEG1 LAYER3—64 to 320 kbps

MPEG2 LSF LAYER3—64 to 160 kbps

WMA files:

Ver7, 8 CBR—48 to 192 kbps

Ver9 CBR—48 to 320 kbps

DThe MP3/WMA player does not play

back MP3/WMA files from discs record-

er using packet write data transfer

(UDF format). Discs should be re-

corded using “pre−mastering” software

rather than packet−write software.

DM3u playlists are not compatible with

the audio player.

DMP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PRO

formats are not compatible with the au-

dio player.

DThe MP3 player is compatible with

VBR (Variable Bit Rate).

DWhen playing back files recorded as

VBR (Variable Bit Rate) files, the play

time will not be correctly displayed if

fast−forward or reverse operations are

used.

DIt is not possible to check folders that

do not include MP3/WMA files.

DMP3/WMA files in folders up to 8 lev-

els deep can be played. However, the

start of playback may be delayed when

using discs containing numerous levels

of folders. For this reason, we recom-

mend creating discs with no more than

two levels of folders.

DIt is possible to play up to 192 folders

or 255 files on one disc.

RS18193

001.mp3

002.mp3

Folder 1

003.mp3

Folder 2

004.mp3

005.mp3

Folder 3

006.mp3

MP3 player (rear seat entertainment sys-

tem)

RS18193

001.mp3

002.wma

Folder 1

003.mp3

Folder 2

004.mp3

005.wma

Folder 3

006.mp3

MP3/WMA player (front audio system)

07 04.26

345

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

DThe play order of the compact disc

with the structure shown on the left is

as follows:

MP3 player (rear seat entertainment sys-

tem)

001.mp3 002.mp3 . . . 006.mp3

MP3/WMA player (front audio system)

001.mp3 002.wma . . . 006.mp3

DMP3 player (rear seat entertainment

system)—It is possible to play up to

253 folders on one disc.

DMP3/WMA player (front audio sys-

tem)—It is possible to play up to 192

folders or 255 files on one disc.

DThe order changes depending on the

PC and MP3/WMA encoding software

you use.

CD−R and CD−RW discs

DCD−R/CD−RW discs that have not been

subject to the “finalizing process” (a

process that allows discs to be played

on a conventional CD player) cannot

be played.

DIt may not be possible to play CD−

R/CD−RW discs recorded on a music

CD recorder or a personal computer

because of disc characteristics,

scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt,

condensation, etc. on the lens of the

unit.

DIt may not be possible to play discs

recorded on a personal computer de-

pending on the application settings and

the environment. Record with the cor-

rect format. (For details, contact the

appropriate application manufacturers of

the applications.)

DCD−R/CD−RW discs may be damaged

by direct exposure to sunlight, high

temperatures or other storage condi-

tions. The unit may be unable to play

some damaged discs.

DIf you insert a CD−RW disc into the

MP3/WMA player, playback will begin

more slowly than with a conventional

CD or CD−R disc.

DRecordings on CD−R/CD−RW cannot

be played using the DDCD (Double

Density CD) system.

07 04.26

346 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

TERMS

Packet write—

This is a general term that describes the

process of writing data on−demand to

CD−R, etc., in the same way that data is

written to floppy or hard discs.

ID3 Tag—

This is a method of embedding track−re-

lated information in an MP3 file. This em-

bedded information can include the track

title, the artist’s name, the album title, the

music genre, the year of production, com-

ments and other data. The contents can

be freely edited using software with ID3

tag editing functions. Although the tags

are restricted to the number of characters,

the information can be viewed when the

track is played back.

WMA Tag—

WMA files can contain a WMA tag that is

used in the same way as an ID3 tag.

WMA tags carry information such as track

title, artist name.

ISO 9660 format—

This is the international standard for the

formatting of CD−ROM folders and files.

For the ISO 9660 format, there are two

levels of regulations.

Level 1:

The file name is in 8.3 format (8 charac-

ter file names, with a 3 character file ex-

tension. File names must be composed of

one−byte capital letters and numbers. The

“_” symbol may also be included.)

Level 2:

The file name can have up to 31 charac-

ters (including the separation mark “.” and

file extension). Each folder must contain

fewer than 8 hierarchies.

m3u—

Playlists created using “WINAMP” software

have a playlist file extension (.m3u).

MP3—

MP3 is an audio compression standard

determined by a working group (MPEG) of

the ISO (International Standard Organiza-

tion). MP3 compresses audio data to

about 1/10 the size of that on convention-

al discs.

WMA—

WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an audio

compression format developed by Micro-

soft. It compresses files into a size small-

er than that of MP3 files. The decoding

formats for WMA files are Ver. 7, 8, and

07 04.26

347

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Phone Setup (see page 353)

DPair phone

To use the hands−free system, you

need to register your phone in the sys-

tem.

DChange name

The registered phone names can be

changed.

DDelete

The registered phone can be deleted.

DList phone

The registered phone names can be

checked.

DSelect phone

The registered phones can be selected.

DSet passkey

The passkey can be changed.

Security (see page 358)

DSet PIN

The PIN can be set or changed.

DPhone book lock

The phone book can be locked.

DPhone book unlock

The locked phone book can be un-

locked.

System Setup (see page 362)

DAdjust Guidance Volume

Guidance volume can be adjusted.

DInitialize

Phone Book (see page 362)

DAdd Entry

Phone numbers and voice tags can be

registered.

DChange Name

The registered names can be changed.

DDelete Entry

The registered names can be deleted.

DDelete Speed Dial

The registered speed dial can be de-

leted.

DList names

The registered names can be checked.

DSet Speed Dial

Speed dials can be set

Redial (see page 370)

Callback (see page 371)

Making a phone call (see page 373)

Receiving a phone call (see page 375)

Talking on the phone (see page 376)

07 04.26

Hands−free phone system—

—Reference

348 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

—Some basics

XS18010a

This system supports Bluetoothr, a

wireless system that allows you to

make or receive calls without taking

your hands from the steering wheel and

without using cables to connect the

phone and system.

The phone must be paired to the system

before using the hands−free feature. If

your cellular phone does not support Blue-

toothr, this system will not function.

CAUTION

While you are driving, do not use a

cellular phone or connect the Blue-

toothr phone.

NOTICE

Do not leave your cellular phone in

the car. The temperature indoor may

be high and damage the phone.

The system may not function in the follow-

ing conditions and places:

DThe cellular phone is turned off.

DThe current position is outside the

communication area.

DThe cellular phone is not connected.

DThe cellular phone has a low battery.

DThe cellular phone is hiding behind the

seat or in the glove box and console

box.

DThe cellular phone touches or is cov-

ered with metal materials.

This system supports the following ser-

vice.

DHFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver.1.0.

DOPP (Object Push Profile) Ver.1.1.

If your cellular phone does not support

HFP, you cannot enter the Bluetoothr

phone, and take OPP service individually.

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

07 04.26

349

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

When transferring ownership of the ve-

hicle:

A lot of personal data is registered

when you use the hands−free system.

When transferring ownership of the ve-

hicle, initialize the system.

If you initialize it, the former state will

never come back again. Pay much atten-

tion when initializing the data.

You can initialize the following data in the

system.

DPhone book data

DDialed numbers and received calls

DSpeed dial

DBluetoothr phone data

DSecurity code

FCC ID: HYQBTAU01A

IC ID: 1551A−BTAU01A

MADE IN MEXICO

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and RSS−210. Operation is

subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, includ-

ing interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment.

NOTE: This equipment has been tested

and found to comply with the limits for

a Class B digital device, pursuant to

part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits

are designed to provide reasonable

protection against harmful interference in

a residential installation. This equipment

generates, uses and can radiate radio

frequency energy and, if not installed

and used in accordance with the instruc-

tions, may cause harmful interference to

radio communications. However, there is

no guarantee that interference will not

occur in a particular installation. If this

equipment does cause harmful interfer-

ence to radio or television reception,

which can be determined by turning the

equipment off and on, the user is en-

couraged to try to correct the interfer-

ence by one or more of the following

measures:

—Reorient or relocate the receiving an-

tenna.

—Increase the separation between the

equipment and receiver.

—Connect the equipment into an outlet

on a circuit different from that to which

the receiver is connected.

—Consult the dealer or an experienced

radio/TV technician for help.

07 04.26

350 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation

Exposure

This equipment complies with FCC radi-

ation exposure limits set forth for uncon-

trolled equipment and meets the FCC

radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guide-

lines in Supplement C to OET65. This

equipment has very low levels of RF

energy that it deemed to comply without

maximum permissive exposure evalua-

tion (MPE). But it is desirable that it

should be installed and operated with at

least 20 cm and more between the ra-

diator and person’s body (excluding ex-

tremities: hands, wrists, feet and legs).

Co−location: This transmitter must not

be co−located or operated in conjunction

with any other antenna or transmitter.

XS18011a

Steering switches

XS18012a

Overhead console (Type A)

XS18013a

Overhead console (Type B)

1. Volume control switch

To increase the volume: Push “+”.

To decrease the volume: Push “−”.

The volume continues increasing or de-

creasing while the switch is being pushed.

When driving at 80 km/h (50 mph) or

more, the volume automatically increases

without switch adjustment. When your

speed falls below 70 km/h (43 mph), the

volume automatically returns to its original

level.

07 04.26

—Control and features

"Steering switches and microphone

351

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

2. Talk switch

Pushing the talk switch turns the hands−

free system on and initiates the speech

command system.

Pushing and holding the talk switch ends

the speech command system.

3. Off−hook switch

Pushing the off−hook switch turns the

hands−free system on.

When receiving a call, pushing the off−

hook switch allows you to talk on the

phone.

4. On−hook switch

When the hands−free system is on, push-

ing the on−hook switch turns the hands−

free system off.

5. Microphone

The microphone is used when talking on

the phone or using the speech command

system.

07 04.26

352 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

1. “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob

Turning the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob dis-

plays the menu items, names, numbers,

etc. to be selected. To select an item,

push the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob. Due to

safety concerns, the “AUDIO/CONTROL”

knob does not function while the vehicle

is in motion.

2. Display

Displays such items as the reception lev-

el, a party’s name and phone number. See

“DISPLAY” described on the following

page for further details about the display.

3. “TEXT” button

When the party’s name or phone number

is too long to be displayed, pushing and

holding the “TEXT” button displays the re-

maining characters.

4. Preset buttons

Pushing the preset button displays the

registered speed dial numbers.

07 04.26

"Audio unit

XS18014

353

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS18015a

DISPLAY

1. Bluetoothr display

Displays when a Bluetoothr connection is

made. If there is no display, the

Bluetoothr connection has not been made

and communication between the phone

and system is not possible. When using

the hands−free system, make sure that

“BT” is displayed. The display is updated

in real time.

2. Reception level display

Displays the reception level of the radio

wave signals. This may not match the

display on the cellular phone. The recep-

tion level of some cellular phones may not

be displayed.

The number of bars is greater when the

signal received is stronger.

3. Message display

Displays phone numbers, names, com-

ments, menu items, etc.

—Phone Setup

The phone setup menu includes the fol-

lowing:

DPair Phone

To use the hands−free system, you need

to register your phone in the system.

Once you have registered it, you can

make a hands−free call. Up to 6 phones

can be registered.

DSelect Phone

When the system connects to Bluetoothr,

the phone previously used is automatically

selected. Select a different phone if nec-

essary. Only the selected phone can be

used with the hands−free system.

DChange Name

The registered phone names can be

changed.

DList Phones

The registered phone names can be

checked.

The following can be performed during the

name playback:

DSelect phone

DChange name

DDelete

07 04.26

354 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

DSet Passkey

The passkey can be changed. A 4 to 8

digit code can be input as a passkey.

DDelete

The registered phones can be deleted.

To enter the phone setup menu

1. Push the off−hook switch to turn the

hands−free system on.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Setup” is displayed and push the

knob.

“Setup. Please push the talk switch and

say security, or phone setup.” is heard.

3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Phone Setup” is displayed and push

the knob.

“Phone setup. Push the talk switch and

say pair phone, select phone, change

name, list phones, set passkey or delete.”

is heard.

“XXX (phone name) already selected.” is

heard and “XXX (phone name)” is dis-

played.

If no phone has been registered, the sys-

tem may not function properly.

To pair phones

1. Push the talk switch and say “Pair

phone”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL”

knob until “Pair Phone” is displayed

and push the knob.

“Pair. Push the talk switch and say a

name for the phone.” is heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Record Name” is displayed, push the

knob and say “XXX (desired phone

name)”.

“Push the talk switch and say confirm.

Otherwise, say go back.” is heard.

3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Confirm” is displayed and push the

knob.

“XXX Ready for phone pairing. Please use

the phone to connect it to the hands−free

system. The passkey for the phone is....”

is heard.

After “HANDS FREE” is displayed, a pass-

key∗ is displayed and “Searching.” is

heard.

4. Input the passkey displayed on the

screen into the phone.

“The phone is paired and ready for use.

Returning to the main menu.” is heard and

“Paired” is displayed.

The system may not function in the follow-

ing cases:

DIf 6 phones have already been regis-

tered.

DIf the vehicle is moving.

DIf the system cannot communicate with

the phone.

∗: Passkey is a password required to reg-

ister a phone to the system.

INFORMATION

zTo use the hands−free system, you

need to register your phone in the

system. Once you have registered

it, you can make a hands−free call.

Up to 6 phones can be registered.

zFor the operation of the phone, see

the manual that comes with your

cellular phone.

zThe passkey can be changed. See

page 357 for changing the passkey.

07 04.26

355

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

To select a phone

1. Push the talk switch and say “Select

phone”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL”

knob until “Select Phone” is displayed

and push the knob.

“Select phone. Push the talk switch and

say the phone name or say list phones.”

is heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

the desired phone name is displayed

and push the knob.

When the phone is selected by a voice

command:

“XXX Push the talk switch and say

confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard

and “XXX” is displayed.

Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn

the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Confirm” is displayed and push the knob.

“XXX selected. Returning to the phone

setup.” is heard.

When the phone is selected by using

the knob:

“XXX selected. Returning to the phone

setup.” is heard.

The system may not function in the follow-

ing cases:

DIf the phone is not found.

DIf the system does not recognize the

voice command.

To change a name

1. Push the talk switch and say “Change

name”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL”

knob until “Change Name” is displayed

and push the knob.

“Change name. Push the talk switch and

say the phone name to change.” is heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

the phone name that you want to

change is displayed and push the

knob.

07 04.26

356 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

When the phone is selected by a voice

command:

“XXX Push the talk switch and say

confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard

and “XXX” is displayed.

1. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Confirm” is displayed and push the

knob.

“Push the talk switch and say a new

name.” is heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Record Name” is displayed, push the

knob and say “XXX (desired phone

name)”.

“XXX Push the talk switch and say

confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is

heard.

3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Confirm” is displayed and push the

knob.

“Name changed. Returning to the phone

setup.” is heard and “Changed” is dis-

played.

When the phone is selected by using

the knob:

“XXX Push the talk switch and say

confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard

and “XXX” is displayed.

1. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Confirm” is displayed and push the

knob.

“Push the talk switch and say a new

name.” is heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Record Name” is displayed, push the

knob and say “XXX (desired phone

name)”.

“XXX Push the talk switch and say

confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is

heard.

3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Confirm” is displayed and push the

knob.

“Name changed. Returning to the phone

setup.” is heard and “Changed” is dis-

played.

The system may not function in the follow-

ing cases:

DIf no phone has been registered.

DIf the system does not recognize the

voice command.

To list phones

1. Push the talk switch and say “List

phones”, or turn the

“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until “List

Phones” is displayed and push the

knob.

“List phones. To select a name, push the

talk switch during the name playback.” is

heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions.

“Push the talk switch and say select

phone, change name, or delete.” is heard.

Select one of the following:

07 04.26

357

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Select phone

Push the talk switch and say “Select

phone”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL”

knob until “Select Phone” is displayed and

push the knob.

For further details on selecting a phone,

see page 355.

Change name

Push the talk switch and say “Change

name”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL”

knob until “Change Name” is displayed

and push the knob.

For further details on changing a name,

see page 355.

Delete

Push the talk switch and say “Delete”, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Delete” is displayed and push the knob.

For further details on deleting a phone,

see page 358.

If no phone has been registered, the sys-

tem may not function properly.

To set a passkey

1. Push the talk switch and say “Set

passkey”, or turn the

“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until “Set

Passkey” is displayed and push the

knob.

“Set Passkey. The passkey is required for

the phone pairing process. Push the talk

switch and say a new passkey.” is heard

and passkey is displayed.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to

select a number.

When using a voice command:

“XXXX (new passkey) Push the talk switch

and say confirm. Otherwise, continue

adding numbers, or say go back or

delete.” is heard and “XXXX (new

passkey)” is displayed.

Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn

the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Confirm” is displayed and push the knob.

“Passkey changed. Returning to the phone

setup.” is heard.

When using the knob:

1. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to

select a number. Push the

“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to set.

2. When the passkey is set, push the

“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob.

“Passkey changed. Returning to the phone

setup.” is heard.

The system may not function in the follow-

ing cases:

DIf the passkey has less than 4 digits.

DIf the passkey has more than 8 digits.

07 04.26

358 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

To delete a phone

1. Push the talk switch and say “Delete”,

or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob

until “Delete” is displayed and push the

knob.

“Delete. Push the talk switch and say the

phone name to delete.” is heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

the phone name you want to delete is

displayed and push the knob.

When using a voice command:

“XXX Push the talk switch and say

confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard

and “XXX” is displayed.

Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn

the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Confirm” is displayed and push the knob.

“Deleted. Returning to the phone setup.”

is heard and “Deleted” is displayed.

When using the knob:

“Deleted. Returning to the phone setup.”

is heard and “Deleted” is displayed.

The system may not function in the follow-

ing cases:

DIf no phone has been registered.

DIf the system does not recognize the

voice command.

—Security

The security menu includes the following:

DSet PIN (Personal Identification Num-

ber)

The PIN can be set or changed.

DPhone book lock

The phone book can be locked.

When the phone book is locked, the fol-

lowing functions cannot be used:

DDial by name and number

DRedial

DCallback

DSpeed Dial

DPhone Setup

DPhoneBook

DSet PIN

DPhone book unlock

The locked phone book can be unlocked.

07 04.26

359

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

To enter the security menu

1. Push the off−hook switch to turn the

hands−free system on.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Setup” is displayed and push the

knob.

“Setup. Please push the talk switch and

say security, or phone setup.” is heard.

3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Security” is displayed and push the

knob.

“Security. Push the talk switch and say

set PIN, phone book lock, or phone book

unlock.” is heard.

To set a PIN

Push the talk switch and say “Set PIN”,

or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Set PIN” is displayed and push the knob.

“There is no PIN number set. Please

talk switch and say a four−digit PIN

number.” is heard.

When using a voice command:

1. Push the talk switch and say “XXX

(new PIN number)”.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Confirm” is displayed and push the

knob.

“The PIN number has been set. Returning

to the security.” is heard and “Completed”

is displayed.

When using the knob:

1. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to

select a number. Push the

“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to set.

2. Repeat the above procedure until the

entire four−digit number is set.

3. When the PIN is set, push the

“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob.

4. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Confirm” is displayed and push the

knob.

“The PIN number has been set. Returning

to the security.” is heard and “Completed”

is displayed.

07 04.26

360 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

If the PIN is to be changed:

“There is a PIN number in place. Push

the talk switch and say the correct PIN

number.” is heard and “Current PIN?” is

displayed.

1. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

use the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to in-

put the current PIN number.

“Please push the talk switch and say a

four−digit PIN number.” is heard.

2. Push the talk switch and say “XXXX

(new PIN number)”.

“The PIN number has been set. Returning

to the security.” is heard and “Completed”

is displayed.

If the current number is not correct, the

system may not function properly.

To lock the phone book

1. Push the talk switch and say “Phone

book lock”, or turn the

“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until “Phbk

Lock” is displayed and push the knob.

“There is a PIN number in place. Push

the talk switch and say the correct PIN

number.” is heard and “PIN?” is displayed.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to

select a number.

When using a voice command:

“XXXX Push the talk switch and say

confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard

and “XXXX” is displayed.

Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn

the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Confirm” is displayed and push the knob.

“PIN number accepted. The phone book is

now locked. Returning to the main menu.”

is heard and “Locked” is displayed.

When using the knob:

1. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to

select a number. Push the

“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to set.

2. When the PIN number is set, push the

“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob.

“XXXX Push the talk switch and say

confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard

and “XXXX” is displayed.

3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Confirm” is displayed and push the

knob.

“PIN number accepted. The phone book is

now locked. Returning to the main menu.”

is heard and “Locked” is displayed.

07 04.26

361

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

The system may not function in the follow-

ing cases:

DIf the current number is not correct.

DIf the phone book has already been

locked.

DIf the PIN number does not exist.

To unlock the phone book

1. Push the talk switch and say “Phone

book unlock”, or turn the

“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until “Phbk

Unlock” is displayed and push the

knob.

“Phonebook unlock. There is PIN number

in place. Push the talk switch and say the

correct PIN number.” is heard and

“Current PIN?” is displayed.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to

select a number.

When using a voice command:

“XXXX Push the talk switch and say

confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard

and “XXXX” is displayed.

Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn

the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Confirm” is displayed and push the knob.

“PIN number accepted. The phone book is

now unlocked. Returning to the main

menu.” is heard and “Unlocked” is dis-

played.

When using the knob:

1. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to

select a number. Push the

“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to set.

2. When the PIN number is set, push the

“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob.

“XXXX Push the talk switch and say

confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard

and “XXXX” is displayed.

3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Confirm” is displayed and push the

knob.

“PIN number accepted. The phone book is

now unlocked. Returning to the main

menu.” is heard and “Unlocked” is dis-

played.

The system may not function in the follow-

ing cases:

DIf the current number is not correct.

DIf the phone book has already been

unlocked.

INFORMATION

A shortcut to each of the following

functions is available. Enter the

phone book menu, push the off−hook

switch, and say either of the follow-

ing:

zPhone book lock

zPhone book unlock

07 04.26

362 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

The system setup menu includes the fol-

lowing:

DAdjust Guidance Volume

DInitialize

To enter the system setup menu

1. Push the off−hook switch to turn the

hands−free system on.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Setup” is displayed and push the

knob.

3. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“System Setup” is displayed and push

the knob.

“System setup. Please select guidance

volume or initialize.” is heard.

To adjust the guidance volume

1. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Guidance Vol” is displayed and push

the knob.

“Guidance will be at this volume” is heard

and the present volume level is displayed.

2. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to

adjust the volume and push the knob.

To initialize

1. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Initialize” is displayed and push the

knob.

“System initialization. This will erase all

user information in the hands free system;

including paired phones, phone book

entries, and call history. Select confirm to

initialize. Otherwise, select go back.” is

heard.

2. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Confirm” is displayed and push the

knob.

“System initialization. This will erase all

user information in the hands free system;

including paired phones, pone book

entries, and call history. Select confirm to

initialize. Otherwise, select go back.” is

heard.

3. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Confirm” is displayed and push the

knob.

“Initialized. Returning to the main menu.”

is heard.

The phone book menu includes the follow-

ing:

DAdd Entry

Phone numbers and voice tags can be

registered.

DChange Name

The registered names can be changed.

DDelete Entry

The registered names can be deleted.

DDelete Speed Dial

The registered speed dial can be deleted.

DList Names

The registered names can be checked.

DSet Speed Dial

Speed dials can be set.

07 04.26

—System Setup —Phone Book

363

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

To enter the phone book menu

1. Push the off−hook switch to turn the

hands−free system on.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Phonebook” is displayed and push the

knob.

“Phone book. Please push the talk switch

and say add entry, change name, delete

entry, list names set speed dial or delete

speed dial.” is heard.

If the phone book is locked, the system

may not function properly.

To add entry

The add entry includes the following:

(a) By Voice

(b) By Phone

(d) Manual Input

Push the talk switch and say “Add entry”,

or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Add Entry” is displayed and push the

knob.

“Add Entry. How will the number be

entered. Push the talk switch and say by

voice, by phone, or call history.” is heard.

(a) By voice

1. Push the talk switch and say “By

voice”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL”

knob until “By Voice” is displayed and

push the knob.

“Voice entry. Push the talk switch and say

the number.” is heard.

2. Push the talk switch and say the dial

number that you want to register.

“To store, push the talk switch and say

confirm. Otherwise, continue adding

numbers, or say go back or delete.” is

heard and number is displayed.

3. Follow voice guidance instruction.

07 04.26

364 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

If “Confirm” is said, then input a voice

tag.

“Push the talk switch and say a name.”

is heard.

1. Push the talk switch and say the name

of the dial number that you want to

“XXXX Push the talk switch and say

confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is

heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Confirm” is displayed and push the

knob.

“Stored. To register this as a speed dial

entry, push the talk switch and say set

speed dial. Otherwise, say confirm.” is

heard and “Stored” is displayed.

3. Select one of the following:

DConfirm

DSpeed Dial

Confirm

Push the talk switch and say “Confirm”, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Confirm” is displayed and push the knob.

“Returning to the phone book.” is heard.

Speed Dial

1. Push the talk switch and say “Set

speed dial”, or turn the

“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until “Speed

Dial” is displayed and push the knob.

“Set speed dial. Push the preset button to

assign to XXXX” is heard.

2. Push the desired preset button.

“Preset... is now assigned. Returning to

the phone book.” is heard.

The system may not function in the follow-

ing cases:

DIf the phone book is full.

DIf the dial number has more than 24

digits.

(b) By Phone

1. Push the talk switch and say “By

phone”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL”

knob until “By Phone” is displayed and

push the knob.

“Phone entry. Prepare to send the

information from the phone. When ready,

push the talk switch and say confirm.” is

heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Confirm” is displayed and push the

knob.

“Send the information at this time.” is

heard.

After the system has received the name

and phone number, “Push the talk switch

and say confirm. To select an alternate

number, say next or previous. Otherwise,

say go back.” is heard and “XXX (name)”

and “XXX (number)” is displayed.

3. Follow voice guidance instructions,

push the talk switch and say “Confirm”,

or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob

until the dial number that you want to

knob.

Next, input a voice tag.

For further details, see page 363.

07 04.26

365

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

1. Push the talk switch and say “Call

history”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL”

knob until “Call history” is displayed

and push the knob.

“Call history. Push the talk switch and say

incoming or outgoing.” is heard and “Call

History” is displayed.

2. Select one of the following:

DIncoming

DOutgoing

Incoming

1. Push the talk switch and say

“Incoming”, or turn the

“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Incoming” is displayed and push the

knob.

“Most recent incoming call was XXXX” is

heard and the incoming number is dis-

played.

“Push the talk switch and say confirm.

Otherwise, say previous, or go back.” is

heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

the dial number that you want to regis-

ter is displayed and push the knob.

Next, input a voice tag.

For further details, see page 363.

Outgoing

1. Push the talk switch and say

“Outgoing”, or turn the

“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Outgoing” is displayed and push the

knob.

“Most recent outgoing call was XXXX” is

heard and the outgoing number is dis-

played.

“Push the talk switch and say confirm.

Otherwise, say previous, or go back.” is

heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

the dial number that you want to regis-

ter is displayed and push the knob.

Next, input a voice tag.

For further details, see 363.

(d) Manual Input

1. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Manual Input” is displayed and push

the knob.

2. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to

select a number. Push the

“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to set.

3. When the number is set, push the

“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob.

Next, input a voice tag.

For further details, see page 363.

INFORMATION

zThe system can recognize single

digits from zero to nine # (pound),

∗ (star), and + (plus). Numbers that

are ten or greater are not recog-

nized.

zTo speed up input, it is a good idea

to group all digits into a continuous

string. However, you can enter each

digit individually or group digits to-

gether in preferred string lengths.

The display corresponding to each op-

eration appears on the screen as fol-

lows:

07 04.26

366 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Input operation—

You say: “Nine, nine, five”

Voice output: “995 to store push the

talk switch and say confirm.

Otherwise, continue adding numbers,

or say go back, or delete.”

Display: “995”

You say: “Seven, three, four”

Voice output: “734 to store push the

talk switch and say confirm. Other-

wise, continue adding numbers, or

say go back, or delete.”

Display: “995734”

Repeat the above procedure until the

entire number that you want to regis-

ter is input.

Go back operation—

You say: “Go back”

Voice output: “Go back. The last

numbers said have been removed.

Push the talk switch and say the

number.”

Display: “995”

Repeating the above operation deletes

the last digits in reverse order of in-

put.

Delete operation—

You say: “Delete”

Voice output: “Deleted. Push the talk

switch and say the number.”

Display: “Delete”

The display will return to the initial

screen that allows a number to be

input.

To list names

The voice tags can be edited during the

name playback.

1. Push the talk switch and say “List

names”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL”

knob until “List Names” is displayed

and push the knob.

“List names. To select a name, push the

talk switch during the name playback.” is

heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions.

“XXXX selected.” is heard and “Selected”

is displayed.

If you push the off−hook switch during the

name playback, you can dial the number

of the selected name.

07 04.26

367

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Editing the voice tags

The following can be performed:

DDial

DChange Name

DDelete Entry

DSpeed Dial

“Push the talk switch and say dial, change

name, delete entry, or set speed dial.” is

heard and “Selected” is displayed.

Dial

Push the talk switch and say “Dial”, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Dial” is displayed and push the knob.

Change Name

Push the talk switch and say “Change

name”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL”

knob until “Change Name” is displayed

and push the knob.

For further details, see page 368.

Delete Entry

Push the talk switch and say “Delete

entry”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL”

knob until “Delete Entry” is displayed and

push the knob.

For further details, see page 367.

Speed dial

Push the talk switch and say “Set speed

dial”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob

until “Speed Dial” is displayed and push

the knob.

For further details, see page 369.

To delete entry

1. Push the talk switch and say “Delete

entry”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL”

knob until “Delete Entry” is displayed

and push the knob.

“Delete entry. Push the talk switch and

say the name to delete.” is heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

the name that you want to delete is

displayed and push the knob.

When using a voice command:

“XXXX Push the talk switch and say

confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard

and “XXXX” is displayed.

Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn

the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Confirm” is displayed and push knob.

“Deleted. Returning to the phone book.” is

heard and “Deleted” is displayed.

When using the knob:

“Deleted. Returning to the phone book.” is

heard and “Deleted” is displayed.

The system may not function is the follow-

ing cases:

DIf no name has been registered.

DIf the system does not recognize the

voice command.

07 04.26

368 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

To delete speed dial

1. Push the talk switch and say “Delete

speed dial”, or turn the

“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until “Del Spd

Dial” is displayed and push the knob.

“Delete speed dial. Push the preset button

to delete from speed dial.” is heard.

2. Select the preset button that you want

to delete.

“To delete preset... push the talk switch

and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.”

is heard.

3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Confirm” is displayed and push the

knob.

“Deleted.” is heard and “Deleted” is dis-

played.

“Returning to the phone book.” is heard

The system may not function in the follow-

ing cases:

DIf not speed dial has been registered.

DIf the preset button has not been as-

signed.

To change name

1. Push the talk switch and say “Change

name”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL”

knob until “Change Name” is displayed

and push the knob.

“Change name Push the talk switch and

say the name to change” is heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

the dial number that you want to

change is displayed and push the

knob.

When using a voice command:

“XXXX Push the talk switch and say

confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard

and “XXXX” is displayed.

1. Follow voice guidance instruction, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Confirm” is displayed and push the

knob.

“Push the talk switch and say a new

name.” is heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Record Name” is displayed, push the

knob and say “XXX (new name)”.

“XXXX Push the talk switch and say

confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is

heard.

3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Confirm” is displayed and push the

knob.

“Name changed. Returning to the phone

book.” is heard and “Changed” is dis-

played.

07 04.26

369

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

When using the knob:

“Push the talk switch and say a new

name.” is heard.

1. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Record Name” is displayed, push the

knob and say “XXX (new name)”.

“XXXX Push the talk switch and say

confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is

heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instruction, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Confirm” is displayed and push the

knob.

“Name changed. Returning to the phone

book.” is heard and “Changed” is dis-

played.

The system may not function is the follow-

ing cases:

DIf no name has been registered.

DIf the system does not recognize the

voice command.

To set speed dial

1. Push the talk switch and say “Set

Speed dial”, or turn the

“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until “Speed

Dial” is displayed and push the knob.

“Set speed dial. Push the talk switch and

say a name.” is heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

the dial number that you want to regis-

ter is displayed and push the knob.

When using a voice command:

“XXXX To register this as a speed dial

entry, push the talk switch and say

confirm. Otherwise, push the talk switch

and say go back.” is heard and “XXXX” is

displayed.

1. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Confirm” is displayed and push the

knob.

“Push and hold the preset button to as-

sign to XXXX” is heard.

2. Push the desired preset button.

“preset... is now assigned. Returning to

the phone book.” is heard.

When using the knob:

“Push the preset button to assign to

XXXX” is heard.

Push and hold the desired preset button.

“preset... is now assigned. Returning to

the phone book.” is heard.

The system may not function in the follow-

ing cases:

DIf not name has been registered.

DIf the system does not recognize the

voice command.

07 04.26

370 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

INFORMATION

A shortcut to each of the following

functions is available. Push the off−

hook switch and talk switch, and say

one of the following:

zPhone book add entry

zPhone book change name

zPhone book delete entry

zPhone book delete speed dial

zPhone book list names

zPhone book set speed dial

The following can be performed:

DDial

DDelete

DStore

To enter the redial

1. Push the off−hook switch to turn the

hands−free system on.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Redial” is displayed and push the

knob.

“Redial. Most recent outgoing call was

XXXX” is heard and outgoing history is

displayed.

“Please push the off−hook switch to dial.

Otherwise, push the talk switch and say

dial, previous, go back, store, or delete.”

is heard.

Dial

Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

the number that you want to dial is dis-

played and push the knob. After that, do

the one of the following:

DPush the off−hook switch.

DPush the talk switch and say “dial”.

DTurn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Dial” is displayed and push the knob.

Delete

1. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

the dial number that you want to delete

is displayed and push the knob.

2. Push the talk switch and say “Delete”,

or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob

until “Delete” is displayed and push the

knob.

“Delete. Push the talk switch and say

confirm. Otherwise, say go back” is heard.

3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Confirm” is displayed and push the

knob.

“Deleted.” is heard.

07 04.26

—Redial

371

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Store

1. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

the dial number that you want to regis-

ter is displayed and push the knob.

2. Push the talk switch and say “Store”,

or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob

until “Store” is displayed and push the

knob.

“Store. Push the talk switch and say

confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is

heard.

3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Confirm” is displayed and push the

knob.

Next, input a voice tag.

For further details, see page 363.

The system may not function in the follow-

ing cases:

DIf there is no outgoing history.

DIf the phone book is locked.

INFORMATION

zUp to five outgoing calls can be

stored in the system.

zWhen five outgoing calls are stored

in memory, the oldest outgoing call

is deleted to make room in memory

for new calls.

zOnly the latest outgoing call is

stored when the same telephone

number is dialed.

zA shortcut to “Redial” is available.

Push the off−hook switch twice.

The following can be performed:

DDial

DDelete

DStore

To enter the callback

1. Push the off−hook switch to turn the

hands−free system on.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Callback” is displayed and push the

knob.

“Callback. Most recent incoming call was

XXXX” is heard and incoming history is

displayed.

“Please push the off−hook switch to dial.

Otherwise, push the talk switch and say

dial, previous, go back, store, or delete.”

is heard.

07 04.26

—Callback

372 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Dial

Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

the number that you want to dial is dis-

played and push the knob. After that, do

the one of the following:

DPush the off−hook switch.

DPush the talk switch and say “Dial”.

DTurn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Dial” is displayed and push the knob.

Delete

1. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

the dial number that you want to delete

is displayed and push the knob.

2. Push the talk switch and say “Delete”,

or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob

until “Delete” is displayed and push the

knob.

“Delete. Push the talk switch and say

confirm. Otherwise, say go back” is heard.

3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Confirm” is displayed and push the

knob.

“Deleted.” is heard.

Store

1. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

the dial number that you want to regis-

ter is displayed and push the knob.

2. Push the talk switch and say “Store”,

or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob

until “Store” is displayed and push the

knob.

“Store. Push the talk switch and say

confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is

heard.

3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Confirm” is displayed and push the

knob.

Next, input a voice tag.

For further details, see page 363.

The system may not function in the follow-

ing cases:

DIf there is no incoming history.

DIf the phone book is locked.

INFORMATION

zUp to five incoming calls can be

stored in the system.

zWhen five incoming calls are stored

in memory, the oldest incoming call

is deleted to make room in memory

for new calls.

07 04.26

373

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

If the cellular phone is not registered, this

system cannot be used. See page 353 for

registering a cellular phone. Make sure

that “BT” is displayed and get the cellular

phone ready to use.

There are 3 way to make a phone call

with this system.

DSpeed dial

A phone call can be made with a preset

button in which a phone number is regis-

tered. See page 369 for setting the preset

buttons.

DDial by Name

The system dials the numbers correspond-

ing to the spoken names registered in the

system.

DDial by Number

The system dials to the spoken numbers.

To make a phone call

Push the off−hook switch to turn the

hands−free system on.

To speed dial

1. Push the preset button where the de-

sired number is set. The name or tele-

phone number is displayed.

2. Push the off−hook switch to dial.

To dial by Name

1. Push the talk switch and say “Dial by

name”.

“Dial by name. Please push the talk

switch and say the stored name, or say

list names.” is heard and “Dial by Name”

is displayed.

2. Push the talk switch and say “XXXX”,

or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob

until the phone name that you want to

dial is displayed and push the knob.

When using a voice command:

“XXXX Push the off−hook switch to dial.

Otherwise, push the talk switch and say

dial, or go back.” is heard. After that, do

the one of the following:

DPush the off−hook switch.

DPush the talk switch and say “Dial”.

DTurn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Dial” is displayed and push the knob.

When using the knob:

It calls the number.

The system may not function in the follow-

ing cases:

DIf there is no number registered in the

preset button.

DIf the system does not recognize the

voice command.

07 04.26

—Making a phone call

374 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

INFORMATION

zThe phone numbers registered in

the phone book can be retrieved.

zThe system does not recognize that

the voice tag is not registered in

the registered cellular phone. For

details about voice tags, see “To

add entry” on page 363.

zA shortcut to “Dial by name” is

available. Push the talk switch and

say “Dial XXX (name you want to

dial)”.

To dial by Number

1. Push the talk switch and say “Dial by

Number”.

“Dial by number. Please push the talk

switch and say the number.” is heard and

“Dial by Num” is displayed.

2. Push talk switch and say “XXXX”.

“Push the off−hook switch to dial.

Otherwise, push the talk switch and say

dial, go back, or delete.” is heard.

To dial the number, do the one of the

following:

DPush the off−hook switch.

DPush the talk switch and say “Dial”.

DTurn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until

“Dial” is displayed and push the knob.

If the number exceeds 24 digits, the sys-

tem may not function properly.

INFORMATION

zThe system can recognize single

digits from zero to nine, # (pound),

∗ (star), and + (plus). Numbers that

are ten or greater are not recog-

nized.

zTo speed up input, it is a good idea

to group all digits into a continuous

string. However, you can enter each

digit individually or group digits to-

gether in preferred string lengths.

The display corresponding to each op-

eration appears on the screen as fol-

lows:

Input operation—

You say: “Nine, nine, five”

Voice output: “995 push the off−hook

switch to dial. Otherwise, push the

talk switch and say dial, go back, or

delete.”

Display: “995”

You say: “Seven, three, four”

Voice output: “734 push the off−hook

switch to dial. Otherwise, push the

talk switch and say dial, go back, or

delete.”

07 04.26

375

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Display “995734”

Repeat the above procedure until the

entire number that you want to dial is

input.

Go back operation—

You say: “Go back”

Voice output: “Go back, the last

numbers entered have been removed.

Push the talk switch and continue

adding numbers otherwise say dial,

go back, or delete.”

Display: “995”

Repeating the above operation deletes

the last digits in reverse order of in-

put.

Delete operation—

You say: “Delete”

Voice output: “Deleted. The entire

number to dial has been deleted.

Please push the talk switch and say

the number.”

Display: “Dial by Num”

The display will return to the initial

screen that allows a number to be

input.

Cancel operation—

Do either one of the following:

zPush the on−hook switch at anytime

during the operation.

zPush the talk switch and say

“Cancel” after the beep at anytime

during the operation except while a

call in connected.

When receiving a phone call, a ring tone

is audible and the system changes into

the telephone mode.

When receiving a phone call, the display

is as follows. The display differs depend-

ing on whether or not the vehicle is in

motion.

When the vehicle is stopped:

Number, name, or “Incoming” is displayed.

When the vehicle is in motion:

“Incoming“ is displayed.

Do either one of the following:

DPushing the off−hook switch allows you

to talk on the phone.

DPushing the on−hook switch refuses

the call.

To adjust the ring volume, push “+” or “−”

on the steering volume controls. Volume

adjustment cannot be done using the au-

dio system.

Repeatedly pushing “−” on the steering

volume controls mutes the ring.

When receiving an international phone

call, the name of the party may not be

displayed correctly depending on the cellu-

lar phone.

07 04.26

—Receiving a phone call

376 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

To transfer a call to the phone:

The received call can be transferred from

the hands−free system to the cellular

phone that is connected to Bluetoothr. For

details, refer to the user’s guide for the

cellular phone.

While talking on the phone, the display is

as follows. The display differs depending

on whether or not the vehicle is in motion.

When the vehicle is stopped:

Number is displayed.

When the vehicle is in motion:

“Talking“ is displayed.

When the call is finished, push the on−

hook switch.

In the following situations, your voice may

not reach the party.

DTalk alternately with the other party on

the phone. If you talk at the same

time, the voice may not reach each

other. (It is not a malfunction.)

DKeep the volume of receiving voice

down. Otherwise, echo is coming up.

When you talk on the phone, speak

clearly towards the microphone.

DWhen driving on a rough road.

DWhen driving at high speeds.

DWhen the window is open.

DWhen the air conditioning vents face

the microphone.

DWhen the sound of the air conditioning

fan is loud.

To transfer a call from the phone:

Pushing the off−hook switch while talking

on the cellular phone that is connected to

Bluetoothr allows you to talk hands−free.

To transfer a call to the phone:

The call can be transferred from the

hands−free system to the phone that is

connected to Bluetoothr. For details, refer

to the user’s guide for the cellular phone.

07 04.26

—Talking on the phone

377

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Air conditioning system

Manual air conditioning system

Controls 378. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Air flow selector settings 382. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operating tips 382. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic air conditioning system

Controls 386. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Air flow selector settings 390. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operating tips 390. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instrument panel and rear vents 393. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Air conditioning filter 394. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

07 04.26

SECTION 1− 9

378 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

1. Fan speed selector

2. “A/C” button

3. Air intake selector

4. Temperature selector (passenger side

temperature control)

5. Air flow selector

6. Temperature selector (driver side

temperature control)

07 04.26

Manual air conditioning system—

—Controls

XS19019

379

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Fan speed selector

Turn the knob to adjust the fan speed—to

the right to increase, to the left to de-

crease.

Temperature selector (driver side)

Turn the knob to adjust the temperature—

to the right to warm, to the left to cool.

“MAX A/C” position—Turning the tempera-

ture selector knob to the “MAX A/C” posi-

tion turns on the air conditioning and sets

the air intake selector to RECIRCULATE

for quick cooling.

Temperature selector (passenger side)

Turn the knob to adjust the tempera-

ture—to the right to warm, to the left to

cool.

Independent setting—

When the passenger side selector is

in a position other than the “SYNC”

position, the temperature only on pas-

senger side can be adjusted using the

selector. This function is canceled

when the passenger side temperature

selector is turned to the “SYNC” posi-

tion.

Simultaneous setting—

When the passenger side selector is

in the “SYNC” position, the tempera-

tures on both driver and passenger

sides can be simultaneously adjusted

using the driver side selector. This

function is canceled when the passen-

ger side temperature selector is

turned to the right.

G18021

Air flow selector

Turn the knob to select the vents used for

air flow.

1. Panel—Air flows mainly from the

instrument panel vents and the rear

vents.

2. Bi−level—Air flows from both the floor

vents, the instrument panel vents and

the rear vents.

3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floor

vents.

07 04.26

380 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

4. Floor/Windshield—Air flows mainly

from the floor vents and windshield

vents.

Turning the air flow selector to the

floor/windshield position turns on the

defogging/defrosting function with the

purpose of clearing the windshield.

In this position, air intake selector

mode changes to FRESH automatically

to clear the windshield quickly. If you

want to return the setting to RECIRCU-

LATE mode, press the air intake selec-

tor button once again.

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified

heating or cooling. This setting clears

the windshield more quickly.

5. Windshield—Air flows mainly from the

windshield vents.

Turning the air flow selector to the

windshield position turns on the defog-

ging/defrosting function and the air con-

ditioning with the purpose of clearing

the windshield.

In this position, air intake selector

mode changes to FRESH automatically

to clear the windshield quickly. It is not

possible to return to RECIRCULATE in

this position.

In this position, the air conditioning

turns on regardless of the “A/C button

indicator comes on or goes off. This is

not a malfunction.

For details about air flow selector settings,

see “Air flow selector settings” described

below. XS19014

Air intake selector

Press the button to select the air source.

1. Recirculate (indicator light is on)—Re-

circulates the air inside the vehicle.

2. Fresh (indicator light is off)—Draws

outside air into the system.

To prevent fogging up of the windshield,

the air intake mode may change automati-

cally to FRESH depending on the condi-

tion of the air conditioning system.

07 04.26

381

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

If the ambient temperature drops, the air

intake mode will automatically change

from RECIRCULATE to FRESH after a few

minutes. This automatic change control

mode can be cancelled by pushing and

holding the button for longer than 2 sec-

onds. The automatic change control mode

will be reactivated if the ignition switch is

turned to the “LOCK” or “ACC” position.

“A/C” button

To turn on the air conditioning, press the

“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicator

will come on. To turn the air conditioning

off, press the button again.

If the “A/C” button indicator flashes, there

is a problem in the air conditioning system

and the air conditioning automatically

shuts off. If this happens, take your ve-

hicle to a Toyota dealer for service.

07 04.26

382 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

:driver side :passenger side

DTo cool off your Toyota after it has

been parked in the hot sun, drive with

the windows open long enough for the

hot air to escape. This operation allows

the air conditioning to cool the interior

more quickly.

DMake sure the air intake grilles in front

of the windshield are not blocked (by

leaves or snow, for example).

DOn humid days, do not blow cold air

on the windshield. The windshield could

fog up because of the difference in air

temperature on the inside and outside

of the windshield.

DKeep the area under the front seats

clear to allow air to circulate through-

out the vehicle.

DOn cold days, set the fan speed to

high for a minute to help clear the

intake ducts of snow or moisture. This

can reduce the amount of fogging on

the windows.

DWhen driving on dusty roads, close all

windows. If dust thrown up by the ve-

hicle is still drawn into the vehicle after

closing the windows, it is recommended

that the air intake selector be set to

FRESH and the fan speed selector to

any setting except “OFF”.

07 04.26

—Air flow selector settings —Operating tips

XS19021

∗1: Double cab and Crew Max models

∗1

∗2: Crew Max models

∗1

∗2

∗1

383

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

DIf following another vehicle on a dusty

road, or driving in windy and dusty

conditions, it is recommended that the

air intake selector be temporarily set to

RECIRCULATE, which will close off the

outside passage and prevent outside

air and dust from entering the vehicle

interior.

Heating

For best results, set controls to:

Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”

Temperature—Towards red zone

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—FLOOR

Air conditioning—OFF

DFor quick heating, select recirculated

air for a few minutes. To keep the

windows from fogging, select fresh af-

ter the vehicle interior has been

warmed.

DPress the “A/C” button on for dehumidi-

fied heating.

DChoose floor/windshield air flow to heat

the vehicle interior while defrosting or

defogging the windshield.

Air conditioning

For best results, set controls to:

Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”

Temperature—Towards blue zone

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—PANEL

Air conditioning—ON

07 04.26

384 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS19013a

DFor quick cooling, turn the temperature

selector knob to the “MAX A/C” posi-

tion. The air conditioning will automati-

cally turn on and the air intake selector

will be set to RECIRCULATE.

Ventilation

For best results, set controls to:

Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”

Temperature—Towards blue zone

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—PANEL

Air conditioning—OFF

Defogging

Condition: Moisture is on the inside of the

windshield.

For best results, set controls to:

Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”

Temperature—Towards red zone to heat;

blue zone to cool

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Turning the air flow selector to the wind-

shield or floor/windshield position turns on

the defogging function with the purpose of

clearing the windshield.

When turning the air flow selector to wind-

shield or floor/windshield position, air in-

take selector mode changes to FRESH

automatically to clear the windshield

quickly. If you want to return the setting

to RECIRCULATE mode, press the air in-

take selector button once again. However,

if the air flow selector is in the windshield

position, it is not possible to return to

RECIRCULATE.

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified

heating or cooling. This setting clears the

front view more quickly.

DOn humid days, do not blow cold air

on the windshield—the difference be-

tween the outside and inside tempera-

tures could make the fogging worse.

DWhen side windows fog up, turn the

side vents toward the windows.

Defrosting

Condition: Moisture is on the outside of

the windshield.

For best results, set controls to:

Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”

Temperature—Towards red zone

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Turning the air flow selector to the wind-

shield or floor/windshield position turns on

the defrosting function with the purpose of

clearing the windshield.

When turning the air flow selector to wind-

shield or floor/windshield position, air in-

take selector mode changes to FRESH

automatically to clear the windshield

quickly. If you want to return the setting

to RECIRCULATE mode, press the air in-

take selector button once again. However,

if the air flow selector is in the windshield

position, it is not possible to return to

RECIRCULATE.

07 04.26

385

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified

heating or cooling. This setting clears the

front view more quickly.

DTo heat the vehicle interior while de-

frosting the windshield, choose floor/

windshield air flow.

07 04.26

386 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

1. Fan speed selector

2. “AUTO” button

3. Temperature selector (“TEMP”)

(with “DUAL” button indicator

on—individual setting on driver and front

passenger)

(with “DUAL” button indicator

off—simultaneous setting on driver and

front passenger)

4. “A/C” button

5. Air flow selector

6. Windshield air flow button

7. Temperature selector

(“PASS TEMP”)

(individual setting on front passenger

side only)

8. “DUAL” button

9. Air intake selector

10. “OFF” button

07 04.26

Automatic air conditioning system

(on some Double cab and Crew Max models)—

—Controls

XS19020a

387

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

“AUTO” button

For automatic operation of the air condi-

tioning, press the “AUTO” button. The

“AUTO” button will turn on, indicating that

the automatic operation mode has been

selected.

In the automatic operation mode, the air

conditioning selects the most suitable fan

speed, air flow, air intake and on−off of

the air conditioning according to the tem-

perature.

When you press the “AUTO” button with

the air intake mode at FRESH, internal

circulation may be applied for maximum

cooling.

You may use manual controls if you want

to select your own settings.

Fan speed selector

Turn the knob to adjust the fan speed—to

the right to increase, to the left to de-

crease.

In automatic operation, you do not have

to adjust the fan speed unless you desire

another fan speed mode.

“DUAL” button

Push the button to change the mode of

the temperature setting.

With the indicator on—Individual temper-

ature setting for driver and front passen-

ger

With the indicator off—Simultaneous

temperature setting for driver and front

passenger

Temperature selectors

Turn the knob to adjust the tempera-

ture—to the right to warm, to the left to

cool.

“LO” appears when you adjust to maxi-

mum cooling, and “HI” appears when you

adjust to maximum warming.

—“TEMP” knob

With the “DUAL” button indicator on—This

knob changes the temperature on the driv-

er side only.

With the “DUAL” button indicator off—This

knob changes the temperature on the driv-

er side and front passenger side simulta-

neously. This function will be cancelled

when the “PASS TEMP” knob is turned.

—“PASS TEMP” knob

This knob changes the temperature on the

front passenger side only.

“OFF” button

Push the button to turn off the air condi-

tioning system.

07 04.26

388 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS19016a

Air flow selector

Turn the knob to select the vents used for

air flow.

In automatic operation, you do not have

to select the air flow unless you desire

another air flow mode.

1. Panel—Air flows mainly from the in-

strument panel vents and the rear

vents.

2. Bi−level—Air flows from both the floor

vents, the instrument panel vents and

the rear vents.

3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floor

vents.

4. Floor/Windshield—Air flows mainly

from the floor vents and windshield

vents.

Windshield air flow button

When this button is pressed, air flows

mainly from the windshield vents.

Pressing the button once again returns the

air flow mode to the last one used.

Pressing the windshield button turns on

the defroster−linked air conditioning. At

this time, the air conditioning turns on

regardless of the “A/C” button indicator

comes on or goes off. This is not a mal-

function. This is to clean up the front view

more quickly.

For details about air flow selector settings,

see “Air flow selector settings” described

below.

XS19015a

Air intake selector

Press the button to select the air source.

1. RECIRCULATE (indicator light is on)—

Recirculates the air inside the vehicle.

2. FRESH (indicator light is off)—Draws

outside air into the system.

To prevent fogging up of the windshield,

the air intake mode may change automati-

cally to FRESH depending on the condi-

tion of the air conditioning system.

07 04.26

389

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

“A/C” button

To turn on the air conditioning, press the

“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicator

will come on. To turn the air conditioning

off, press the button again.

If the “A/C” button indicator flashes, there

is a problem in the air conditioning system

and the air conditioning automatically

shuts off. If this happens, take your ve-

hicle to a Toyota dealer for service.

07 04.26

390 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

:driver side :passenger side

DTo cool off your Toyota after it has

been parked in the hot sun, drive with

the windows open for a few minutes.

This vents the hot air, allowing the air

conditioning to cool the interior more

quickly.

DMake sure the air intake grilles in front

of the windshield are not blocked (by

leaves or snow, for example).

DOn humid days, do not blow cold air

on the windshield. The windshield could

fog up because of the difference in air

temperature on the inside and outside

of windshield.

DKeep the area under the front seats

clear to allow air to circulate through-

out the vehicle.

DOn cold days, set the fan speed to

high for a minute to help clear the

intake ducts of snow or moisture. This

can reduce the amount of fogging on

the windows.

DWhen driving on dusty roads, close all

windows. If dust thrown up by the ve-

hicle is still drawn into the vehicle after

closing the windows, it is recommended

that the air intake selector be set to

FRESH and the fan speed to any set-

ting except off.

07 04.26

—Air flow selector settings —Operating tips

XS19022a

∗

∗: Crew Max models

∗

391

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

DIf following another vehicle on a dusty

road, or driving in windy and dusty

conditions, it is recommended that the

air intake selector be temporarily set to

RECIRCULATE, which will close off the

outside passage and prevent outside

air and dust from entering the vehicle

interior.

Heating

For best results, set controls to:

For automatic operation—

Press in the “AUTO” button.

Temperature—To the desired

temperature

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air conditioning—OFF

For manual operation—

Fan speed—To the desired fan speed

Temperature—Towards red zone

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—FLOOR

Air conditioning—OFF

DFor quick heating, select recirculated

air for a few minutes. To keep the

windows from fogging, select fresh af-

ter the vehicle interior has been

warmed.

DPress the “A/C” button on for dehumidi-

fied heating.

DChoose floor/windshield air flow to heat

the vehicle interior while defrosting or

defogging the windshield.

Air conditioning

For best results, set controls to:

For automatic operation—

Press in the “AUTO” button.

Temperature—To the desired

temperature

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air conditioning—ON

For manual operation—

Fan speed—To the desired fan speed

Temperature—Towards blue zone

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—PANEL

Air conditioning—ON

DFor quick cooling, select recirculated

air for a few minutes.

07 04.26

392 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Ventilation

For best results, set controls to:

For automatic operation—

Press in the “AUTO” button.

Temperature—Towards low temperature

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air conditioning—OFF

For manual operation—

Fan speed—To the desired fan speed

Temperature—Towards blue zone

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—PANEL

Air conditioning—OFF

Defogging and defrosting

—The inside of the windshield

For best results, set controls to:

For automatic operation—

Temperature—Towards high temperature

to heat; low temperature

to cool

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—WINDSHIELD

For manual operation—

Fan speed—To the desired fan speed

Temperature—Towards high temperature

to heat; low temperature

to cool

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Pressing the windshield button turns on

the defroster−linked air conditioning. At

this time, the air conditioning turns on

regardless of the “A/C” button indicator

comes on or goes off. This is not a mal-

function. This is to clean up the front view

more quickly.

DOn humid days, do not blow cold air

on the windshield—the difference be-

tween the outside and inside tempera-

tures could make the fogging worse.

—The outside of the windshield

For best results, set controls to:

For automatic operation—

Temperature—Towards high temperature

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—WINDSHIELD

For manual operation—

Fan speed—To the desired fan speed

Temperature—Towards high temperature

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Pressing the windshield button turns on

the defroster−linked air conditioning. At

this time, the air conditioning turns on

regardless of the “A/C” button indicator

comes on or goes off. This is not a mal-

function. This is to clean up the front view

more quickly.

07 04.26

393

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

DTo heat the vehicle interior while de-

frosting the windshield, choose floor/

windshield air flow.

XS19024

OpenClose Open Close

Side and center vents

XS19023a

Open

Rear vents (Crew Max models)

If air flow control is not satisfactory, check

the instrument panel and rear vents. The

instrument panel and rear vents may be

opened or closed as shown.

07 04.26

Instrument panel and rear

vents

394 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Air conditioning filter—

XS19017

The air conditioning filter information

label is placed inside of the glove box

as shown and indicates that a filter has

been installed.

The air conditioning filter prevents dust

from entering the vehicle through the air

conditioning vent.

XS19007

The air conditioning filter is behind the

glove box.

The air conditioning filter may clog af-

ter long use. The filter may need to be

replaced if the air flow of the air condi-

tioning and heater experiences extreme

reductions in operating efficiency, or if

the windows begin to fog up easily.

To maintain the air conditioning efficiency,

inspect and replace the air conditioning

filter according to the maintenance

schedule. In dusty areas or areas with

heavy traffic flow, such as inner city or

desert areas, early replacement may be

required. (For scheduled maintenance

information, please refer to the “Scheduled

Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual

Supplement.”)

07 04.26

—Checking and replacing the

air conditioning filter

395

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS19008

1. Open the glove box, and slide off

the damper as shown.

XS19009c

2. Push in each side of the glove box

to disconnect the claws.

XS19010a

3. Remove the filter cover while push-

ing in both ends of the cover.

07 04.26

396 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS19011a

4. Pull the filter out of the filter outlet.

Inspect the filter on the surface.

If it is dirty, it should be replaced.

XS19012

When installing the filter in the filter

outlet, keep the arrow pointing up.

INFORMATION

The air filter should be installed prop-

erly in position. The use of air condi-

tioning with the air filter removed

may cause deteriorated dustproof per-

formance and then affect air condi-

tioning performance.

07 04.26

435

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

INFORMATION BEFORE DRIVING YOUR

TOYOTA

Information before driving your Toyota

Off−road vehicle precautions 436. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Break−in period 437. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuel 437. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuel pump shut off system 439. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operation in foreign countries 440. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Three−way catalytic converters 440. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine exhaust cautions 441. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Facts about engine oil consumption 442. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Iridium−tipped spark plugs 443. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Long reach iridium−tipped spark plugs 444. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brake system 444. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brake pad wear limit indicators 448. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear step bumper 448. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Your Toyota’s identification 449. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Theft prevention labels 450. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Suspension and chassis 450. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tire information 451. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle load limits 463. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cargo and luggage 464. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Types of tires 466. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

07 04.26

SECTION 2

436 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS20003

This vehicle has higher ground clear-

ance and narrower tread in relation to

the height of its center of gravity to

make it capable of performing in a wide

variety of off−road applications. Specific

design characteristics give it a higher

center of gravity than ordinary passen-

ger cars. This vehicle design feature

causes this type of vehicle to be more

likely to rollover. And, it has a signifi-

cantly higher rollover rate than other

types of vehicles. An advantage of the

higher ground clearance is a better

view of the road allowing you to antici-

pate problems. It is not designed for

cornering at the same speeds as ordi-

nary passenger cars any more than

low−slung sports cars are designed to

perform satisfactorily under off−road

conditions. Therefore, sharp turns at

excessive speeds may cause rollover.

CAUTION

Always observe the following precau-

tions to minimize the risk of serious

personal injury or damage to your ve-

hicle:

DIn a rollover crash, an unbelted per-

son is significantly more likely to

die than a person wearing a seat

belt. Therefore, the driver and all

passengers should fasten their seat

belts whenever the vehicle is mov-

ing.

DAvoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu-

vers, if at all possible. Failure to

operate this vehicle correctly may

result in loss of control or vehicle

rollover causing death or serious

injury.

DAvoid loading any items on the roof

that will raise the vehicle’s center

of gravity.

DAlways slow down in gusty cross-

winds. Because of its profile and

higher center of gravity, your ve-

hicle is more sensitive to side

winds than an ordinary passenger

car. Slowing down will allow you to

have much better control.

07 04.26

Off−road vehicle precautions

437

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

DWhen driving off−road or in rugged

terrain, do not drive at excessive

speeds, jump, make sharp turns,

strike objects, etc. This may cause

loss of control or vehicle rollover

causing death or serious injury. You

are also risking expensive damage

to your vehicle’s suspension and

chassis.

DDo not drive horizontally across

steep slopes. Driving straight up or

straight down is preferred. Your ve-

hicle (or any similar off−road ve-

hicle) can tip over sideways much

more easily than forward or back-

ward.

Drive gently and avoid high speeds.

Your vehicle does not need an elaborate

break−in. But following a few simple tips

for the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can add

to the future economy and long life of

your vehicle:

DAvoid full throttle acceleration when

starting and driving.

DAvoid racing the engine.

DTry to avoid hard stops during the first

300 km (200 miles).

DDo not drive for a long time at any

single speed, either fast or slow.

DDo not tow a trailer during the first 800

km (500 miles).

FUEL TYPE

Your new vehicle must use only un-

leaded gasoline.

To help prevent gas station mix−ups, your

Toyota has a smaller fuel tank opening.

The special nozzle on pumps with un-

leaded fuel will fit it, but the larger stan-

dard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas will

not.

At a minimum, the gasoline you use

should meet specifications of ASTM

D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5−M93

in Canada.

NOTICE

Do not use leaded gasoline. Use of

leaded gasoline will cause the three−

way catalytic converter to lose its ef-

fectiveness and the emission control

system to function improperly. Also,

this can increase maintenance costs.

07 04.26

Break−in period Fuel

438 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

OCTANE RATING

Select Octane Rating 87 (Research

Octane Number 91) or higher.

Use of unleaded gasoline with an Octane

Rating lower than 87 may result in engine

knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to

engine damage.

If your engine knocks...

If you detect heavy knocking even when

using the recommended fuel, or if you

hear steady knocking while holding a

steady speed on level roads, consult your

Toyota dealer.

However, occasionally, you may notice

light knocking for a short time while accel-

erating or driving up hills. This is normal

and there is no need for concern.

GASOLINE CONTAINING DETERGENT

ADDITIVES

Toyota recommends the use of gasoline

that contains detergent additives to

avoid build−up of engine deposits.

However, all gasoline sold in the U.S.

contains detergent additives to keep clean

and/or clean intake systems.

QUALITY GASOLINE

Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.,

Europe and Japan have developed a

specification for quality fuel named

World−Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that

is expected to be applied world wide.

The WWFC consists of four categories

that depend on required emission lev-

els. In the U.S., category 3 or 4 has

been adopted. The WWFC improves air

quality by providing for better emis-

sions in vehicle fleets, and customer

satisfaction through better vehicle per-

formance.

CLEANER BURNING GASOLINE

Cleaner burning gasoline, including re-

formulated gasoline that contains oxy-

genates such as ethanol or MTBE is

available in many areas.

Toyota recommends the use of cleaner

burning gasoline and appropriately blended

reformulated gasoline. These types of gas-

oline provide excellent vehicle perfor-

mance, reduce vehicle emissions, and im-

prove air quality.

OXYGENATES IN GASOLINE

Toyota allows the use of oxygenate

blended gasoline where the oxygenate

content is up to 10% ethanol or 15%

MTBE. If you use gasohol in your

Toyota, be sure that it has an octane

rating no lower than 87.

Toyota does not recommend the use of

gasoline containing methanol.

07 04.26

439

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

GASOLINE CONTAINING MMT

Some gasoline contain an octane en-

hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-

clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Toyota does not recommend the use of

gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel con-

taining MMT is used, your emission con-

trol system may be adversely affected.

The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the in-

strument cluster may come on. If this hap-

pens, contact your Toyota dealer for ser-

vice.

GASOLINE QUALITY

In a very few cases, you may experience

driveability problems caused by the partic-

ular gasoline that you are using. If you

continue to have unacceptable driveability,

try changing gasoline brands. If this does

not rectify your problem, then consult your

Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

zDo not use gasohol other than

stated above. It will cause fuel sys-

tem damage or vehicle performance

problems.

zIf driveability problems occur (poor

hot starting, vaporizing, engine

knock, etc.), discontinue the use.

zTake care not to spill gasohol dur-

ing refueling. Gasohol may cause

paint damage.

FUEL TANK CAPACITY

100 L (26.4 gal., 22.0 Imp. gal.)

Fuel pump shut off system

The fuel pump shut off system stops sup-

plying fuel to the engine to minimize the

risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls

or an airbag inflates upon collision. To

restart the engine after the fuel pump shut

off system activates, turn the ignition

switch to “ACC” or “LOCK” once and start

it.

CAUTION

Inspect the ground under the vehicle

before restarting the engine. If you

find that fuel has leaked onto the

ground, the fuel system has been

damaged and is in need of repair. In

this case, do not restart the engine.

07 04.26

440 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

If you plan to drive your Toyota in

another country...

First, comply with the vehicle registration

laws.

Second, confirm the availability of the cor-

rect fuel (unleaded and minimum octane

number). XS20001

4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) and 4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE)

engine

XS20002a

5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine

The three−way catalytic converter is an

emission control device installed in the

exhaust system.

The purpose is to reduce pollutants in the

exhaust gas.

CAUTION

DKeep people and combustible mate-

rials away from the exhaust pipe

while the engine is running. The

exhaust gas is very hot.

DDo not idle or park your vehicle

over anything that might burn easi-

ly such as grass, leaves, paper or

rags.

07 04.26

Operation in foreign countries Three−way catalytic converters

441

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

NOTICE

A large amount of unburned gases

flowing into the three−way catalytic

converter may cause it to overheat

and create a fire hazard. To prevent

this and other damage, observe the

following precautions:

zUse only unleaded gasoline.

zDo not drive with an extremely low

fuel level; running out of fuel could

cause the engine to misfire, creat-

ing an excessive load on the three−

way catalytic converter.

zDo not allow the engine to run at

idle speed for more than 20 minu-

tes.

zAvoid racing the engine.

zDo not push−start or pull−start your

vehicle.

zDo not turn off the ignition while

the vehicle is moving.

zKeep your engine in good running

order. Malfunctions in the engine

electrical system, electronic ignition

system/distributor ignition system

or fuel systems could cause an ex-

tremely high three−way catalytic

converter temperature.

zIf the engine becomes difficult to

start or stalls frequently, take your

vehicle in for a check−up as soon

as possible. Remember, your Toyota

dealer knows your vehicle and its

three−way catalytic converter sys-

tem best.

zTo ensure that the three−way

catalytic converter and the entire

emission control system operate

properly, your vehicle must receive

the periodic inspections required by

the Toyota Maintenance Schedule.

For scheduled maintenance

information, refer to the “Scheduled

Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s

Manual Supplement”.

CAUTION

DAvoid inhaling the engine exhaust.

It contains carbon monoxide, which

is a colorless and odorless gas. It

can cause unconsciousness or even

death.

DMake sure the exhaust system has

no holes or loose connections. The

system should be checked from

time to time. If you hit something,

or notice a change in the sound of

the exhaust, have the system

checked immediately.

DDo not run the engine in a garage

or enclosed area except for the

time needed to drive the vehicle in

or out. The exhaust gases cannot

escape, making this a particularly

dangerous situation.

DDo not remain for a long time in a

parked vehicle with the engine run-

ning. If it is unavoidable, however,

do so only in an unconfined area

and adjust the heating or cooling

system to force outside air into the

vehicle.

07 04.26

Engine exhaust cautions

442 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

DTo allow proper operation of your

vehicle’s ventilation system, keep

the inlet grilles in front of the wind-

shield clear of snow, leaves, or oth-

er obstructions.

DIf you smell exhaust fumes in the

vehicle, open the windows and

close the rear window to ensure

plenty of fresh air enters the ve-

hicle. If you can smell exhaust

fumes even though there are no

other vehicles in the surrounding

area, have your vehicle checked by

your Toyota dealer. Continued in-

halation of exhaust fumes can lead

to death by gas poisoning.

DToyota does not recommend occu-

pying the rear cargo area when it

is fitted with a slide−in camper,

camper shell or other type cover

while the engine is running. This

caution applies to both driving and

stopped or parked situations with

the engine running. Particular care

should be taken to prevent exhaust

gases from entering camper bodies,

trailers or other enclosures on or

around your vehicle. If exhaust

fumes are detected, open all win-

dows and thoroughly ventilate the

area.

FUNCTIONS OF ENGINE OIL

Engine oil has the primary functions of

lubricating and cooling the inside of the

engine, and plays a major role in main-

taining the engine in proper working order.

ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION

It is normal that an engine should con-

sume some engine oil during normal

engine operation. The causes of oil

consumption in a normal engine are as

follows.

DOil is used to lubricate pistons, piston

rings and cylinders. A thin film of oil

is left on the cylinder wall when a pis-

ton moves downwards in the cylinder.

High negative pressure generated when

the vehicle is decelerating sucks some

of this oil into the combustion chamber.

This oil as well as some part of the oil

film left on the cylinder wall is burned

by the high temperature combustion

gases during the combustion process.

DOil is also used to lubricate the stems

of the intake valves. Some of this oil

is sucked into the combustion chamber

together with the intake air and is

burned along with the fuel. High tem-

perature exhaust gases also burn the

oil used to lubricate the exhaust valve

stems.

07 04.26

Facts about engine oil

consumption

443

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

The amount of engine oil consumed de-

pends on the viscosity of the oil, the

quality of the oil and the conditions the

vehicle is driven under.

More oil is consumed by high−speed driv-

ing and frequent acceleration and decel-

eration.

A new engine consumes more oil, since

its pistons, piston rings and cylinder walls

have not become conditioned.

When judging the amount of oil con-

sumption, note that the oil may become

diluted and make it difficult to judge

the true level accurately.

As an example, if a vehicle is used for

repeated short trips, and consumes a nor-

mal amount of oil, the dipstick may not

show any drop in the oil level at all, even

after 1000 km (600 miles) or more. This

is because the oil is gradually becoming

diluted with fuel or moisture, making it

appear that the oil level has not changed.

The diluting ingredients evaporate out

when the vehicle is then driven at high

speeds, as on an expressway, making it

appear that oil is excessively consumed

after driving at high speeds.

IMPORTANCE OF ENGINE OIL LEVEL

CHECK

One of the most important points in prop-

er vehicle maintenance is to keep the en-

gine oil at the optimum level so that oil

function will not be impaired. Therefore, it

is essential that the oil level be checked

regularly. Toyota recommends that the oil

level be checked every time you refuel

the vehicle.

NOTICE

Failure to check the oil level regularly

could lead to serious engine trouble

due to insufficient oil.

For detailed information on oil level check,

see “Checking the engine oil level” on

page 543 in Section 7−2.

CY20008

Your engine is fitted with iridium−tipped

spark plugs.

NOTICE

Use only iridium−tipped spark plugs.

Do not adjust gaps for engine perfor-

mance smooth driveability.

07 04.26

Iridium−tipped spark plugs [4.7

L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine]

444 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS20015

Long reach

type

Your engine is fitted with long reach

iridium−tipped spark plugs.

NOTICE

Use only iridium−tipped spark plugs.

Do not adjust gaps for engine perfor-

mance smooth driveability.

For details about the spark plug type, see

“Service specifications” on page 582 in

Section 8.

The tandem master cylinder brake system

is a hydraulic system with two separate

sub−systems. If either sub−system should

fail, the other will still work. However, the

pedal will be harder to press, and your

stopping distance will increase. Also, the

brake system warning light may come on.

CAUTION

Do not drive your vehicle with only a

single brake system. Have your

brakes fixed immediately.

BRAKE BOOSTER

The brake booster uses engine vacuum to

power−assist the brakes. If the engine

should quit while you are driving, you can

bring the vehicle to a stop with normal

pedal pressure. There is enough reserved

vacuum for one or two stops—but no

more!

CAUTION

DDo not pump the brake pedal if the

engine stalls. Each push on the

pedal uses up your reserved vacu-

um.

DEven if the power assist is com-

pletely lost, the brakes will still

work. But you will have to push the

pedal hard, much harder than nor-

mal. And your braking distance will

increase.

07 04.26

Long reach iridium−tipped

spark plugs [5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE)

engine] Brake system

445

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

ANTI−LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

The anti−lock brake system is designed

to help prevent lock−up of the wheels

during a sudden braking or braking on

slippery road surfaces. This assists in

providing directional stability and steer-

ing performance of the vehicle under

these circumstances.

Effective way to press the ABS brake

pedal: When the anti−lock brake system

function is in action, you may feel the

brake pedal pulsating and hear a noise.

In this situation, to let the anti−lock

brake system work for you, just hold the

brake pedal down more firmly. Do not

pump the brake in a panic stop. This

will result in reduced braking performan-

ce.

The anti−lock brake system becomes op-

erative after the vehicle has accelerated

to a speed in excess of approximately 10

km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the

vehicle decelerates to a speed below

approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

Depressing the brake pedal on slippery

road surfaces such as on a manhole cov-

er, a steel plate at a construction site,

joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day

tends to activate the anti−lock brake sys-

tem.

You may hear a click or motor sound in

the engine compartment for a few seconds

when the engine is started or just after

the vehicle begins to move. This means

that the anti−lock brake system is in the

self−check mode, and does not indicate a

malfunction.

When the anti−lock brake system is ac-

tivated, the following conditions may

occur. They do not indicate a malfunc-

tion of the system:

DYou may hear the anti−lock brake sys-

tem operating and feel the brake pedal

pulsating and the vibrations of the ve-

hicle body and steering wheel. You

may also hear the motor sound in the

engine compartment even after the ve-

hicle is stopped.

DAt the end of the anti−lock brake sys-

tem activation, the brake pedal may

move a little forward.

CAUTION

Do not overestimate the anti−lock

brake system: Although the anti−lock

brake system assists in providing ve-

hicle control, it is still important to

drive with all due care and maintain

a moderate speed and safe distance

from the vehicle in front of you, be-

cause there are limits to the vehicle

stability and effectiveness of steering

wheel operation even with the anti−

lock brake system on.

If tire grip performance exceeds its

capability, or if hydroplaning occurs

during high speed driving in the rain,

the anti−lock brake system does not

provide vehicle control.

Anti−lock brake system is not de-

signed to shorten the stopping dis-

tance: Always drive at a moderate

speed and maintain a safe distance

from the vehicle in front of you.

Compared with vehicles without an

anti−lock brake system, your vehicle

may require a longer stopping dis-

tance in the following cases:

DDriving on rough, gravel or snow−

covered roads.

07 04.26

446 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

DDriving with tire chains installed.

DDriving over the steps such as the

joints on the road.

DDriving on roads where the road

surface is pitted or has other differ-

ences in surface height.

Install all 4 tires of specified size at

appropriate pressure: The anti−lock

brake system detects vehicle speeds

using the speed sensors for respec-

tive wheels’ turning speeds. The use

of tires other than specified may fail

to detect the accurate turning speed

resulting in a longer stopping dis-

tance.

LS20017

Type A

LS20018

Type B

“ABS” warning light

The light comes on when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position. If

the anti−lock brake system and the brake

assist system work properly, the light

turns off after a few seconds. Thereafter,

if either of the systems malfunctions, the

light comes on again.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and

the brake system warning light is off), the

following systems do not operate, but the

brake system still operates conventionally.

DAnti−lock brake system

DBrake assist system

DTraction control system

D“AUTO LSD” system

DVehicle stability control system

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and

the brake system warning light is off), the

anti−lock brake system does not operate

so that the wheels will lock up during a

sudden braking or braking on slippery

road surfaces.

07 04.26

447

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

If either of the following conditions oc-

curs, this indicates a malfunction some-

where in the components monitored by

the warning light system. Contact your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible to

service the vehicle.

DThe light does not come on when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position, or remains on.

DThe light comes on while you are dri-

ving.

A warning light turning on briefly during

operation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION

If the “ABS” warning light remains on

together with the brake system warn-

ing light, immediately stop your ve-

hicle at a safe place and contact your

Toyota dealer.

In this case, not only the anti−lock

brake system will fail but also the

vehicle will become extremely unsta-

ble during braking.

DRUM−IN−DISC TYPE PARKING BRAKE

SYSTEM

Your vehicle has a drum−in−disc type

parking brake system. This type of brake

system needs burnishing of the brake

shoes periodically or whenever the parking

brake shoes and/or drums are replaced.

Have your Toyota dealer perform the bur-

nishing.

BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM

When you slam the brakes on, the

brake assist system judges as an emer-

gency stop and provides more powerful

braking for a driver who cannot hold

down the brake pedal firmly.

When you slam the brakes on, more pow-

erful braking will be applied. At this time,

you may hear a sound in the engine

compartment and feel the vibrations of the

brake pedal. This does not indicate a mal-

function.

The brake assist system becomes opera-

tive after the vehicle has accelerated to

a speed in excess of approximately 10

km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the

vehicle decelerates to a speed below

approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

For an explanation of this system’s warn-

ing light, see “Service reminder indicators

and warning buzzers” on page 197 in Sec-

tion 1−6.

07 04.26

448 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS20004

The brake pad wear limit indicators on

your disc brakes give a warning noise

when the brake pads are worn to where

replacement is required.

If you hear a squealing or scraping noise

while driving, have the brake pads

checked and replaced by your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible. Expensive ro-

tor damage can result if the pads are not

replaced when necessary.

XS20005

Type A

XS20007

Type B

The rear step bumper is for rear end

protection and easier step−up loading.

CAUTION

DDo not allow more than one person

to get on the rear step bumper at

a time. It is designed for only one

person.

DNever drive the vehicle with anyone

on the rear step bumper.

DDo not stand on the rear step

bumper while the vehicle is moving.

07 04.26

Brake pad wear limit

indicators Rear step bumper

449

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS20006

The vehicle identification number (VIN)

is the legal identifier for your vehicle.

This number is on the left top of the

instrument panel, and can be seen

through the windshield from outside.

This is the primary identification number

for your Toyota. It is used in registering

the ownership of your vehicle.

XS20010

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is

also on the Certification Label.

LS20011

4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine

LS20014

4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine

07 04.26

Your Toyota’s identification—

—Vehicle identification number —Engine number

450 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS20008a

5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine

The engine number is stamped on the

engine block as shown.

Your new vehicle carries theft preven-

tion labels which are approximately 47

mm (1.85 in.) by 12 mm (0.47 in.).

The purpose of these labels is to reduce

the incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitat-

ing the tracing and recovery of parts from

stolen vehicles. The label is designed so

that once it is applied to a surface, any

attempt to remove it will result in destroy-

ing the integrity of the label. Transferring

these labels intact from one part to anoth-

er, will be impossible.

NOTICE

You should not attempt to remove the

theft prevention labels as it may vio-

late certain state or federal laws.

CAUTION

Do not modify the suspension/chassis

with lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. It

can cause dangerous handling charac-

teristics, resulting in loss of control.

07 04.26

Theft prevention labels Suspension and chassis

451

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

This illustration indicates typical tire

symbols.

1. Tire size—For details, see “—Tire

size” on page 453.

2. DOT and Tire Identification

Number (TIN)—For details, see

“—DOT and Tire Identification

Number (TIN)” on page 452.

3. Uniform tire quality grading—

For details, see “—Uniform tire

quality grading” on page 454.

4. The location of the treadwear

indicators—For details, see

“Checking and replacing tires” on

page 551.

5. Tire ply composition and mate-

rials—Plies mean a layer of rub-

ber−coated parallel cords. Cords

mean the strands forming the plies

in the tire.

6. Radial tires or bias−ply tires—A

radial tire has “RADIAL” on the

sidewall. A tire not marked with

“RADIAL” is a bias−ply tire.

07 04.26

Tire information—

—Tire symbols

XS20011

452 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

7. “TUBELESS” or “TUBE

TYPE”—A tubeless tire does not

have a tube inside the tire and air

is directly filled in the tire. A tube

type tire has a tube inside the tire

and the tube maintains the air

pressure.

8. Load limit at maximum cold tire

inflation pressure—For details,

see “Checking and replacing tires”

on page 551.

9. Maximum cold tire inflation

pressure—This means the pres-

sure to which a tire may be in-

flated. For details about recom-

mended cold tire inflation

pressure, see “Tires” on page 586.

10.Summer tire or all season

tire—An all season tire has “M+S”

on the sidewall. The tire not

marked with “M+S” is a summer

tire. For details, see “Types of

tires” on page 466.

XS20014

This illustration indicates typical DOT

and Tire Identification Number (TIN).

1. “DOT” symbol

2. Tire Identification Number (TIN)

3. Tire manufacturer’s identification

mark

4. Tire size code

5. Manufacturer’s optional tire type

code (3 or 4 letters)

6. Manufacturing week

7. Manufacturing year

The “DOT” symbol certifies that the

tire conforms to applicable Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

07 04.26

—DOT and Tire Identification

Number (TIN)

453

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS20012

This illustration indicates typical tire

size.

1. Tire use (P=Passenger car,

T=Temporary use)

2. Section width (in millimeters)

3. Aspect ratio (tire height to section

width)

4. Tire construction code (R=Radial,

D=Diagonal)

5. Wheel diameter (in inches)

6. Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)

7. Speed symbol (alphabet with one

letter)

SU21026a

1. Section width

2. Tire height

3. Wheel diameter

SU21027

1. Bead

2. Sidewall

3. Shoulder

4. Tread

5. Belt

6. Inner liner

7. Reinforcing rubber

8. Carcass

9. Rim lines

10.Bead wires

11.Chafer

07 04.26

—Tire size —Name of each section of tire

454 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

This information has been prepared

in accordance with regulations issued

by the National Highway Traffic Safe-

ty Administration of the U.S. Depart-

ment of Transportation. It provides

the purchasers and/or prospective

purchasers of Toyota vehicles with in-

formation on uniform tire quality grad-

ing.

Your Toyota dealer will help answer

any questions you may have as you

read this information.

DOT quality grades—All passenger

vehicle tires must conform to Fed-

eral Safety Requirements in addi-

tion to these grades. Quality

grades can be found where appli-

cable on the tire sidewall between

tread shoulder and maximum sec-

tion width. For example: Treadwear

200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear—The treadwear grade is

a comparative rating based on the

wear rate of the tire when tested un-

der controlled conditions on a speci-

fied government test course. For ex-

ample, a tire graded 150 would wear

one and a half (1−1/2) times as well

on the government course as a tire

graded 100. The relative performance

of tires depends upon the actual

conditions of their use, however, and

may depart significantly from the

norm due to variations in driving hab-

its, service practices and differences

in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, C—The traction

grades, from highest to lowest, are

AA, A, B, and C, and they represent

the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-

ment as measured under controlled

conditions on specified government

test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.

A tire marked C may have poor trac-

tion performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned

to this tire is based on braking

(straight ahead) traction tests and

does not include cornering (turning)

traction.

07 04.26

—Uniform tire quality grading

455

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Temperature A, B, C—The tempera-

ture grades are A (the highest), B,

and C, representing the tire’s resis-

tance to the generation of heat and

its ability to dissipate heat when

tested under controlled conditions on

a specified indoor laboratory test

wheel. Sustained high temperature

can cause the material of the tire to

degenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead to

sudden tire failure. The grade C cor-

responds to a level of performance

which all passenger car tires must

meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard No.109. Grades B

and A represent higher levels of per-

formance on the laboratory test wheel

than the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grades for

this tire are established for a tire that

is properly inflated and not over-

loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-

tion, or excessive loading, either sep-

arately or in combination, can cause

heat buildup and possible tire failure.

07 04.26

456 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Tire related term Meaning

Cold tire inflation pressure

tire inflation pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours

or more, or it has not been driven more than 1.5 km or 1 mile under that

condition

Maximum inflation pressure the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated and it is

shown on the sidewall of the tire

Recommended inflation pressure cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

Accessory weight

the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced)

of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, pow-

er seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items are available as

factory−installed equipment (whether installed or not)

Curb weight

the weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum

capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, air conditioning and addi-

tional weight optional engine

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

the sum of—

(a) curb weight;

(b) accessory weight;

(d) production options weight

Normal occupant weight 68 kg (150 lb.) times the number of occupants specified in the second column

of Table 1 that follows

07 04.26

—Glossary of tire terminology

457

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Tire related term Meaning

Occupant distribution distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table

1 that follows

Production options weight

the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over

2.3 kg (5 lb.) in excess of those standard items which they replace, not pre-

viously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty

brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim

Rim a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads

are seated

Rim diameter (Wheel diameter) nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim size designation rim diameter and width

Rim type designation the industry of manufacturer’s designation for a rim by style or code

Rim width nominal distance between rim flanges

Vehicle capacity weight

(Total load capacity)

the rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lb.) times the vehicle’s desig-

nated seating capacity

Vehicle maximum load on the tire the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle

its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two

Vehicle normal load on the tire

the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle

its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight

(distributed in accordance with Table 1 that follows) and dividing by two

07 04.26

458 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Tire related term Meaning

Weather side the surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

Bead the part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply

cords and that is shaped to fit the rim

Bead separation a breakdown of the bond between components in the bead

Bias ply tire a pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at

alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

Carcass the tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears

the load

Chunking the breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall

Cord the strands forming the plies in the tire

Cord separation the parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds

Cracking any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the tire extending to cord

material

a pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim

is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed

to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges

inside the air cavity of the tire

Extra load tire a tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures

than the corresponding standard tire

07 04.26

459

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Tire related term Meaning

Groove the space between two adjacent tread ribs

Innerliner the layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflat-

ing medium within the tire

Innerliner separation the parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass

Intended outboard sidewall

(A) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears

manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper

than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or

(B) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular

side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

Light truck (LT) tire a tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight

trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles

Load rating the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure

Maximum load rating the load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that

tire

Maximum permissible inflation pres-

sure the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated

Measuring rim the rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements

Open splice any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord

material

07 04.26

460 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Tire related term Meaning

Outer diameter the overall diameter of an inflated new tire

Overall width the linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire,

including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs

Passenger car tire

a tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles,

and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or

less

Ply a layer of rubber−coated parallel cords

Ply separation a parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies

Pneumatic tire

a mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other mate-

rials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and

contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load

Radial ply tire a pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at

substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

Reinforced tire a tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures

than the corresponding standard tire

Section width the linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire,

excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands

Sidewall that portion of a tire between the tread and bead

Sidewall separation the parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall

07 04.26

461

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Tire related term Meaning

Snow tire

a tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to

the ASTM E−1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction

test as described in ASTM F−1805−00, Standard Test Method for Single Wheel

Driving Traction in a Straight Line on Snow−and Ice−Covered Surfaces, and

which is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( ) on at least one sidewall

Test rim the rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropri-

ate for use with that tire

Tread that portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road

Tread rib a tread section running circumferentially around a tire

Tread separation pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass

Treadwear indicators(TWI) the projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication

of the degrees of wear of the tread

Wheel−holding fixture the fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing

07 04.26

462 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Table 1– Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

Designated seating capacity, number

of occupants

Vehicle normal load, number of occu-

pants

Occupant distribution in a normally

loaded vehicle

2 through 4 22 in front

5 through 10 32 in front, 1 in second seat

11 through 15 52 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third

seat, 1 in fourth seat

16 through 20 72 in front, 2 in second seat, 2 in third

seat, 1 in fourth seat

07 04.26

463

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Vehicle load limits include total load

capacity, seating capacity, towing

capacity and cargo capacity. Follow

the load limits shown below. Total

load capacity and seating capacity

are also described on the tire and

loading information label. For location

of the tire and loading information

label, see “Checking tire inflation

pressure” on page 548.

Total load capacity:

Total load capacity means combined

weight of occupants, cargo and

luggage. Tongue load is included

when trailer towing. For the total load

capacity about your vehicle, see

“Vehicle capacity weight” on page 576

in Section 8.

Seating capacity:

Regular cab models

With separate seats

Total 2

With bench seats

Total 3

Double cab and Crew Max models

With separate seats

Total 5 (Front 2, Rear 3)

With bench seats

Total 6 (Front 3, Rear 3)

Seating capacity means the maximum

number of occupants whose esti-

mated average weight is 68 kg (150

lb.) per person. Depending on the

weight of each person, the seating ca-

pacity given may exceed the total

load capacity.

NOTICE

Even if the number of occupants

are within the seating capacity,

do not exceed the total load ca-

pacity.

Towing capacity:

Towing capacity means the maximum

allowable gross trailer weight (trailer

weight plus its cargo weight) that your

vehicle is able to tow. For the towing

capacity about your vehicle, see

“Towing capacity” on page 579 in Sec-

tion 8.

Cargo capacity

Cargo capacity may increase or de-

crease depending on the size (weight)

and the number of occupants. For de-

tails, see “Capacity and distribution”

that follows.

CAUTION

Do not apply the load more than

each load limit. That may cause

not only damage to the tires, but

also deterioration to the steering

ability and braking ability, which

may cause an accident.

07 04.26

Vehicle load limits

464 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

When stowing cargo and luggage in

the vehicle, observe the following:

DPut cargo and luggage in the rear

deck when at all possible. Be sure

all items are secured in place.

DBe careful to keep the vehicle bal-

anced. Locating the weight as far

forward as possible helps maintain

balance.

DFor better fuel economy, do not

carry unneeded weight.

CAUTION

DTo prevent cargo and luggage

from sliding forward during

braking, do not stack anything

behind the front seats higher

than the seatbacks. Keep cargo

and luggage low, as close to

the floor as possible.

DNever allow anyone to ride in

the rear deck. It is not designed

for passengers. They should

ride in their seats with their

seat belts properly fastened.

Otherwise, they are much more

likely to suffer death or serious

bodily injury, in the event of

sudden braking or a collision.

DDo not drive with objects left

on top of the instrument panel.

They may interfere with the

driver’s field of view. Or they

may move during sharp vehicle

acceleration or turning, and im-

pair the driver’s control of the

vehicle. In an accident they

may injure the vehicle occu-

pants.

Cargo capacity depends on the to-

tal weight of the occupants.

(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capac-

ity) – (Total weight of occupants)

Steps for Determining Correct

Load Limit—

(1) Locate the statement “The

combined weight of occupants

and cargo should never exceed

XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your

vehicle’s placard.

(2) Determine the combined weight

of the driver and passengers that

will be riding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from

XXX kg or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and

luggage load capacity. For exam-

ple, if the “XXX” amount equals

1400 lbs. and there will be five

150 lb passengers in your ve-

hicle, the amount of available

cargo and luggage load capacity

is 650 lbs. (1400–750

(5x150)=650 lbs.)

07 04.26

Cargo and luggage—

—Stowage precautions —Capacity and distribution

465

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

(5) Determine the combined weight

of luggage and cargo being

loaded on the vehicle. That

weight may not safely exceed the

available cargo and luggage load

capacity calculated in Step 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a

trailer, load from your trailer will

be transferred to your vehicle.

Consult this manual to determine

how this reduces the available

cargo and luggage load capacity

of your vehicle.

For details about trailer towing, see

“Trailer towing” on page 475 in Sec-

tion 3.

SU21020

Cargo

capacity

Total load

capacity

Example on Your Vehicle

In case that 2 people with the com-

bined weight of A kg (lb.) are riding

in your vehicle with the total load ca-

pacity of B kg (lb.), the available

amount of cargo and luggage load ca-

pacity will be C kg (lb.) as follows:

B kg (lb.) – A kg (lb.) = C kg (lb.)

From this condition, if 3 more passen-

gers with the combined weight of D

kg (lb.) get on, the available cargo

and luggage load will be reduced E

kg (lb.) as follows:

C kg (lb.) – D kg (lb.) = E kg (lb.)

As shown in the above example, if the

number of occupants increases, the

cargo and luggage load equaling the

combined weight of occupants who

got on later must be reduced. In other

words, if the increase in the number

of occupants causes the excess of

the total load capacity (combined

weight of occupants plus cargo and

luggage load), you have to reduce the

cargo and luggage on your vehicle.

For details about total load capacity,

see “Vehicle load limits” on page 463

in this Section.

CAUTION

Even if the total load of occu-

pant’s weight and the cargo load

is less than the total load capac-

ity, do not apply the load uneven-

ly. That may cause not only dam-

age to the tire but also deteriora-

tion to the steering ability due to

unbalance of the vehicle, causing

an accident.

07 04.26

466 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Determine what kind of tires your

vehicle is originally equipped with.

1. Summer tires

Summer tires are high−speed capabil-

ity tires best suited to highway driving

under dry conditions.

Since summer tires do not have the

same traction performance as snow

tires, summer tires are inadequate for

driving on snow−covered or icy roads.

For driving on snow−covered or icy

roads, we recommend using snow

tires. If installing snow tires, be sure

to replace all four tires.

2. All season tires

All season tires are designed to pro-

vide better traction in snow and to be

adequate for driving in most winter

conditions, as well as for use all year

round.

All season tires, however, do not have

adequate traction performance

compared with snow tires in heavy or

loose snow. Also, all season tires fall

short in acceleration and handling

performance compared with summer

tires in highway driving.

The details about how to distinguish

summer tires from all season tires are

described on page 451.

CAUTION

DDo not mix summer and all sea-

son tires on your vehicle as

this can cause dangerous han-

dling characteristics, resulting

in loss of control.

DDo not use tires other than the

manufacture’s designated

tires, and never mix tires or

wheels of the sizes different

from the originals.

07 04.26

Types of tires

467

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

STARTING AND DRIVING

Starting and driving

Before starting the engine 468. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

How to start the engine 468. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tips for driving in various conditions 469. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Driving in the rain 471. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Off−road driving precautions 472. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Winter driving tips 473. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Dinghy towing 474. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Trailer towing 475. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer 490. . . . . . . . . . . . .

07 04.26

SECTION 3

468 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

1. Check the area around the vehicle be-

fore entering it.

2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle,

seat cushion angle, head restraint

height and steering wheel angle.

3. Adjust the inside and outside rear view

mirrors.

4. Lock all doors.

5. Fasten seat belts.

Once you turn the ignition switch to the

“START” position and release it, the crank-

ing hold function continues to crank the

engine in “ON” position until it starts.

The function stops cranking the engine

after about 25 seconds maximum if the

engine has not started yet. When you

crank the engine again, wait a few sec-

onds and restart it.

If you hold the ignition switch in “START”

position, the function will keep cranking

for about 30 seconds maximum.

1. Apply the parking brake firmly.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-

sories.

3. Put the selector lever in “P”. If you

need to restart the engine while the

vehicle is moving, put the selector le-

ver in “N”. A starter safety device will

prevent the starter from operating if the

selector lever is in any drive position.

4. Depress the brake pedal and hold it to

the floor until driving off.

07 04.26

Before starting the engine

How to start the engine—

—Cranking hold function (a) Before cranking

469

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Before starting the engine, be sure to

follow the instructions in “(a) Before

cranking”.

Normal starting procedure

The multiport fuel injection system/sequen-

tial multiport fuel injection system in your

engine automatically controls the proper

air−fuel mixture for starting. You can start

a cold or hot engine as follows:

With your foot off the accelerator pedal,

crank the engine by turning the ignition

switch to the “START” position. Release it

when the engine starts.

Engine should be warmed up by driving,

not in idle. For warming up, drive with

smoothly turning engine until engine cool-

ant temperature is within normal range.

If the engine stalls...

Simply restart it, using the correct proce-

dure given in normal starting.

If the engine will not start...

See “If your vehicle will not start” on page

493 in Section 4.

NOTICE

zDo not crank for more than 30 se-

conds at a time. This may overheat

the starter and wiring systems.

zDo not race a cold engine.

zIf the engine becomes difficult to

start or stalls frequently, have the

engine checked immediately.

DAlways slow down in gusty crosswinds.

This will allow you much better control.

DDrive slowly onto curbs and, if pos-

sible, at a right angle. Avoid driving

onto high, sharp−edged objects and

other road hazards. Failure to do so

can lead to severe tire damage such

as a tire burst.

Drive slowly when passing over bumps

or travelling on a bumpy road. Other-

wise, the impact could cause severe

damage to the tires and/or wheels.

DWhen parking on a hill, turn the front

wheels until they touch the curb so

that the vehicle will not roll. Apply the

parking brake, and place the transmis-

sion in “P”. If necessary, block the

wheels.

07 04.26

(b) Starting the engine

Tips for driving in various

conditions

470 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

DWashing your vehicle or driving through

deep water may get the brakes wet. To

see whether they are wet, check that

there is no traffic near you, and then

press the pedal lightly. If you do not

feel a normal braking force, the brakes

are probably wet. To dry them, drive

the vehicle cautiously while lightly

pressing the brake pedal with the park-

ing brake applied. If they still do not

work safely, pull to the side of the road

and call a Toyota dealer for assistance.

DFour−wheel drive models—Toyota rec-

ommends not using four−wheel drive on

dry hard−surfaced roads, because four−

wheel driving will cause unnecessary

noise and wear, and poor fuel econo-

my.

DFour−wheel drive models—In cold tem-

peratures, noise may occur when driv-

ing in two−wheel drive before the trans-

fer is warmed up. Therefore, first drive

in four−wheel drive until the transfer is

warmed up.

CAUTION

DBefore driving off, make sure that

the parking brake is fully released

and the brake system warning light

(parking brake reminder light) is

off.

DDo not leave your vehicle unat-

tended while the engine is running.

DDo not rest your foot on the brake

pedal while driving. It can cause

dangerous overheating, needless

wear, and poor fuel economy.

DTo drive down a long or steep hill,

reduce your speed and downshift.

Remember, if you ride the brakes

excessively, they may overheat and

not work properly.

DBe careful when accelerating, up-

shifting, downshifting or braking on

a slippery surface. Sudden accelera-

tion or engine braking, could cause

the vehicle to skid or spin.

DDo not drive in excess of the speed

limit. Even if the legal speed limit

permits it, do not drive over 140

km/h (85 mph) unless your vehicle

has high−speed capability tires.

Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) may

result in tire failure, loss of control

and possible injury. Be sure to con-

sult a tire dealer to determine

whether the tires on your vehicle

are high−speed capability tires or

not before driving at such speeds.

DDo not continue normal driving

when the brakes are wet. If they are

wet, your vehicle will require a

longer stopping distance, and it

may pull to one side when the

brakes are applied. Also, the park-

ing brake will not hold the vehicle

securely.

07 04.26

471

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Driving in the rain

Driving on a slippery road surface

Drive carefully when it is raining, because

visibility will be reduced, the windows may

become fogged−up, and the road will be

slippery.

DDrive carefully when it starts to rain,

because the road surface will be espe-

cially slippery.

DRefrain from high speeds when driving

on an expressway in the rain, because

there may be a layer of water between

the tires and the road surface, prevent-

ing the steering and brakes from oper-

ating properly.

CAUTION

DSudden braking, acceleration and

steering when driving on a slippery

road surface may cause tire slip-

page and reduce your ability to

control the vehicle, resulting in an

accident.

DSudden changes in engine speed,

such as sudden engine braking,

may cause the vehicle to skid, re-

sulting in an accident.

DAfter driving through a puddle,

lightly depress the brake pedal to

make sure that the brakes are func-

tioning properly. Wet brake pads

may prevent the brakes from func-

tioning properly. If the brakes on

only one side are wet and not func-

tioning properly, steering control

may be affected, resulting in an ac-

cident.

When encountering flooded roads

Do not drive on a road that has flooded

after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause

serious damage to the vehicle.

NOTICE

Driving on a flooded road may cause

the engine to stall as well as cause

serious vehicle malfunctions such as

shorts in electrical components and

engine damage from water immersion.

In the event that you drive on a

flooded road and the vehicle is

flooded, be sure to have your Toyota

dealer check brake function, changes

in quantity and quality of oil and fluid

used for the engine, transmission,

transfer (4WD vehicles), differentials,

etc. and lubricant condition for the

propeller shaft, bearings and suspen-

sion joints (where possible) and the

function of all joints and bearings.

07 04.26

472 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Off−road driving precautions

When driving your vehicle off−road, please

observe the following precautions to en-

sure your driving enjoyment and to help

prevent the closure of areas to off−road

vehicles.

a. Drive your vehicle only in areas where

off−road vehicles are permitted to trav-

el.

b. Respect private property. Get owner’s

permission before entering private prop-

erty.

c. Do not enter areas that are closed.

Honor gates, barriers and signs that re-

strict travel.

d. Stay on established roads. When condi-

tions are wet, driving techniques should

be changed or travel delayed to pre-

vent damage to roads.

For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and

Puerto Rico:

To obtain additional information pertaining

to driving your vehicle off−road, consult

the following organizations.

DState and Local Parks and Recreation

Departments

DState Motor Vehicle Bureau

DRecreational Vehicle Clubs

DU.S. Forest Service and Bureau of

Land Management

CAUTION

Always observe the following precau-

tions to minimize the risk of serious

personal injury or damage to your ve-

hicle:

DDrive carefully when off the road.

Do not take unnecessary risks by

driving in dangerous places.

DDo not grip the steering wheel

spokes when driving off−road. A

bad bump could jerk the wheel and

injure your hands. Keep both hands

and especially your thumbs on the

outside of the rim.

DAlways check your brakes for effec-

tiveness immediately after driving in

sand, mud, water or snow.

DAfter driving through tall grass,

mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check

that there is no grass, bush, paper,

rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or

trapped on the underbody. Clear off

any such matter from the under-

body. If the vehicle is used with

these materials trapped or adhering

to the underbody, a breakdown or

fire could occur.

DIn a rollover crash, an unbelted per-

son is significantly more likely to

die than a person wearing a seat

belt. Therefore, the driver and all

passengers should fasten their seat

belts whenever the vehicle is mov-

ing.

DWhen driving off−road or in rugged

terrain, do not drive at excessive

speeds, jump, make sharp turns,

strike objects, etc. This may cause

loss of control or vehicle rollover

causing death or serious injury. You

are also risking expensive damage

to your vehicle’s suspension and

chassis.

07 04.26

473

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

NOTICE

zIf driving through water, such as

when crossing shallow streams,

first check the depth of the water

and the bottom of the river bed for

firmness. Drive slowly and avoid

deep water.

zTake all necessary safety measures

to ensure that water damage to the

engine or other components does

not occur.

zWater entering the engine air intake

will cause severe engine damage.

zWater entering the automatic trans-

mission will cause deterioration in

shift quality, locking up of your

transmission accompanied by vibra-

tion, and ultimately damage.

zWater can wash the grease from

wheel bearings, causing rusting and

premature failure, and may also en-

ter the differentials, transmission

and transfer case, reducing the gear

oil’s lubricating qualities.

zSand and mud that has accumulated

in brake drums and around brake

discs may affect braking efficiency

and may damage brake system com-

ponents.

zAlways perform a maintenance in-

spection after each day of off−road

driving that has taken you through

rough terrain, sand, mud, or water.

For scheduled maintenance in-

formation, refer to the “Scheduled

Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s

Manual Supplement”.

Make sure your coolant is properly pro-

tected against freezing.

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”

or similar high quality ethylene glycol

based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,

and non−borate coolant with long−life hy-

brid organic acid technology. (Coolant with

long−life hybrid organic acid technology is

a combination of low phosphates and or-

ganic acids.)

See “Checking the engine coolant level”

on page 546 in Section 7−2 for details of

coolant type selection.

For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long Life

Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and

50% deionized water. This coolant pro-

vides protection down to about −35_C

(−31_F).

For Canada—“Toyota Super Long Life

Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and

45% deionized water. This coolant pro-

vides protection down to about −42_C

(−44_F).

NOTICE

Do not use plain water alone.

07 04.26

Winter driving tips

474 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Check the condition of the battery and

cables.

Cold temperatures reduce the capacity of

any battery, so it must be in top shape

to provide enough power for winter start-

ing. Section 7−3 tells you how to visually

inspect the battery. Your Toyota dealer

and most service stations will be pleased

to check the level of charge.

Make sure the engine oil viscosity is

suitable for the cold weather.

See page 544 in Section 7−2 for recom-

mended viscosity. Leaving a heavy sum-

mer oil in your vehicle during winter

months may cause harder starting. If you

are not sure about which oil to use, call

your Toyota dealer—they will be pleased

to help.

Keep the door locks from freezing.

Squirt lock de−icer or glycerine into the

locks to keep them from freezing. To open

a frozen lock, try heating the key before

inserting it.

Use a washer fluid containing an anti−

freeze solution.

This product is available at your Toyota

dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow

the manufacturer’s directions for how

much to mix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or any

other substitute because it may dam-

age your vehicle’s paint.

Do not use your parking brake when

there is a possibility it could freeze.

When parking, put the transmission into

“P” and block the front wheels. Do not

use the parking brake, or snow or water

accumulated in and around the parking

brake mechanism may freeze, making it

hard to release.

Keep ice and snow from accumulating

under the fenders.

Ice and snow built up under your fenders

can make steering difficult. During bad

winter driving, stop and check under the

fenders occasionally.

Depending on where you are driving,

we recommend you carry some emer-

gency equipment.

Some of the things you might put in the

vehicle are tire chains, window scraper,

bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,

jumper cables, etc.

XS30007

Your vehicle is not designed to be

dinghy towed (with four wheels on the

ground) behind a motorhome.

NOTICE

Do not tow your vehicle with four

wheels on the ground. This may

cause serious damage to your vehicle.

07 04.26

Dinghy towing

475

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Your vehicle is designed primarily as a

passenger−and−load−carrying vehicle. Tow-

ing a trailer will have an adverse effect on

handling, performance, braking, durability

and driving economy (fuel consumption,

etc.). Your safety and satisfaction depend

on the proper use of correct equipment

and cautious driving habits. For your safe-

ty and the safety of others, you must not

overload your vehicle or trailer. Ask your

local Toyota dealer for further details be-

fore towing.

NOTICE

When towing a trailer, be sure to con-

sult your Toyota dealer for further in-

formation on additional requirements

such as a towing kit, etc.

CAUTION

To tow a trailer safely, use extreme

care and drive the vehicle in accor-

dance with the trailer’s characteristics

and operating conditions.

The vehicle stability and braking per-

formance are affected by trailer sta-

bility, brake setting and performance,

and the hitch.

Follow all the instructions described

in this section. Failure to do so could

cause an accident resulting in death

or serious injury.

WEIGHT LIMITS

Before towing, make sure the gross

trailer weight, gross combination

weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle

weight and trailer tongue load are all

within the limits.

The gross trailer weight and tongue load

can be measured with platform scales

found at a highway weighing station, build-

ing supply company, trucking company,

junk yard, etc.

07 04.26

Trailer towing

476 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Reference

07 04.26

Vehicle weight

The tongue load is the load placed on the trailer hitch ball.

The king pin weight is the load placed on the fifth wheel trailer hitch mount.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable gross vehicle weight.

The gross vehicle weight is the total weight of the vehicle. When towing a trailer, it is the sum of the vehicle weight

(including the occupants, cargo and any optional equipment installed on the vehicle) and the tongue load (or the king pin

weight).

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable gross axle weight.

The gross axle weight is the load placed on each axle (front and rear).

GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable gross combination weight.

The gross combination weight is the sum of the total vehicle weight (including the occupants, cargo and any optional

equipment installed on the vehicle) and the weight of the trailer being towed (including the cargo in the trailer).

The gross trailer weight is the sum of the trailer weight and the weight of the cargo in the trailer.

Towing Capacity is the maximum allowable gross trailer weight.

Towing Capacity is calculated considering base vehicle with necessary vehicle equipment and 150 pound driver.

Additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo in the vehicle will reduce the towing capacity, Gross Trailer weight

includes the trailer, cargo and necessary equipment for towing.

477

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

GCWR, Towing capacity

kg (lb.)

Model code∗7Engine Cab type Driving

system Bed type

GCWR Towing capacity

With towing

package

Without tow-

ing package

With towing

package

Without tow-

ing package

GSK50L−TRADKA 1GR−FE∗1

Regular

2WD∗4Standard —4535 (10000) —2310 (5100)

GSK51L−THADKA Long —4535 (10000) —2265 (5000)

UCK50L−TRADKA

2UZ−FE∗2

2WD∗4

Standard 6120 (13500) 5440 (12000) 3855 (8500) 3175 (7000)

UCK51L−THAD-

KA Long 6120 (13500) 5440 (12000) 3810 (8400) 3125 (6900)

UCK55L−TRADKA

4WD∗5

Standard 6120 (13500) 5440 (12000) 3715 (8200) 3035 (6700)

UCK56L−THAD-

KA Long 6120 (13500) 5440 (12000) 3670 (8100) 2990 (6600)

USK50L−TRTDKA

3UR−FE∗3

2WD∗4Standard 7030 (15500) 6350 (14000) 4715 (10400) 4035 (8900)

6800 (15000)∗64490 (9900)∗6

USK51L−THTDKA Long 7255 (16000) 6350 (14000) 4895 (10800) 3990 (8800)

USK55L−TRTDKA 4WD∗5Standard 7030 (15500) 6350 (14000) 4580 (10100) 3945 (8700)

6800 (15000)∗64350 (9600)∗6

USK56L−THTDKA Long 7255 (16000) 6350 (14000) 4760 (10500) 3900 (8600)

∗1: 4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine

∗2: 4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine

∗3: 5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine

∗4:Two−wheel drive models

∗5: Four−wheel drive models

∗6: With P275/55R20 tires

07 04.26

478 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

∗7: The model code is indicated on the Certification label. See “Your Toyota’s identification” on page 449 in Section 2 for the Certifica-

tion label location.

07 04.26

479

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

kg (lb.)

Model code∗6Engine Cab

type

Driving

system Bed type Grade

GCWR Towing capacity

With towing

package

Without towing

package

With towing

package

Without towing

package

GSK51L−CRASKA 1GR−FE∗1

Double

2WD∗4Standard SR5 —4535 (10000) —2175 (4800)

UCK51L−CRASKA

2UZ−FE∗2

2WD∗4Standard SR5 6120 (13500) 5440 (12000) 3670 (8100) 3035 (6700)

UCK51L−CRALKA Limited 6120 (13500) 5440 (12000) 3670 (8100) 2990 (6600)

UCK52L−CHASKA Long SR5 6120 (13500) —3625 (8000) —

UCK56L−CRASKA

4WD∗5Standard SR5 6120 (13500) 5440 (12000) 3535 (7800) 2900 (6400)

UCK56L−CRALKA Limited 6120 (13500) 5440 (12000) 3535 (7800) 2855 (6300)

UCK57L−CHASKA Long SR5 6120 (13500) —3490 (7700) —

USK51L−CRTSKA

3UR−FE∗3

2WD∗4Standard SR5 7255 (16000) 6350 (14000) 4805 (10600) 3900 (8600)

USK51L−CRTLKA Limited 7255 (16000) 6350 (14000) 4805 (10600) 3900 (8600)

USK52L−CHTSKA Long SR5 7255 (16000) —4760 (10500) —

USK56L−CRTSKA

4WD∗5Standard SR5 7255 (16000) 6350 (14000) 4670 (10300) 3760 (8300)

USK56L−CRTLKA Limited 7255 (16000) 6350 (14000) 4670 (10300) 3760 (8300)

USK57L−CHTSKA Long SR5 7255 (16000) —4625 (10200) —

∗1: 4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine

∗2: 4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine

∗3: 5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine

∗4:Two−wheel drive models

∗5: Four−wheel drive models

∗6: The model code is indicated on the Certification label. See “Your Toyota’s identification” on page 449 in Section 2 for the Certifica-

tion label location.

07 04.26

480 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

kg (lb.)

Model code∗5Engine Cab

type

Driving

system Bed type Grade

GCWR Towing capacity

With towing

package

Without towing

package

With towing

package

Without towing

package

UCK51L−PSASKA

2UZ−FE∗1

Crew

Max

2WD∗3

Short

SR5 6120 (13500) 5440 (12000) 3625 (8000) 2945 (6500)

UCK51L−PSALKA Limited 6120 (13500) 5440 (12000) 3625 (8000) 2945 (6500)

UCK56L−PSASKA 4WD∗4SR5 6120 (13500) 5440 (12000) 3490 (7700) 2810 (6200)

UCK56L−PSALKA Limited 6120 (13500) 5440 (12000) 3490 (7700) 2810 (6200)

USK51L−PSTSKA

3UR−FE∗2

2WD∗3SR5 7255 (16000) 6350 (14000) 4715 (10400) 3810 (8400)

USK51L−PSTLKA Limited 7255 (16000) 6350 (14000) 4715 (10400) 3810 (8400)

USK56L−PSTSKA 4WD∗4SR5 7255 (16000) 6350 (14000) 4580 (10100) 3670 (8100)

USK56L−PSTLKA Limited 7255 (16000) 6350 (14000) 4580 (10100) 3670 (8100)

∗1: 4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine

∗2: 5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine

∗3:Two−wheel drive models

∗4: Four−wheel drive models

∗5: The model code is indicated on the Certification label. See “Your Toyota’s identification” on page 449 in Section 2 for the Certifica-

tion label location.

07 04.26

481

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

CAUTION

DThe gross trailer weight must never

exceed towing capacity described in

the table on page 477.

DThe gross combination weight must

never exceed the GCWR described

in the table on page 477.

DThe gross vehicle weight must nev-

er exceed the GVWR indicated the

Certification Label as shown.

DThe gross axle weight on each axle

must never exceed the GAWR indi-

cated the Certification Label as

shown.

DExceeding the towing capacity,

GVWR, GCWR or GAWR can cause

an accident resulting in death or

serious personal injuries.

XS20010

Certification Label

XS30012

Gross trailer weight Tongue load

Tongue load

Gross trailer weight

100 = [9to11]%

Conventional towing

XS30013a

Gross trailer weight

King pin weight

Gross trailer weight

100 = [15 to 25]%

King pin weight

Fifth wheel towing

07 04.26

482 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

CAUTION

DA recommended tongue load or

king pin weight varies in accor-

dance with the types of trailers or

towing as described below.

DIn order to ensure the recom-

mended values shown below, the

trailer must be loaded by referring

to the following instructions.

1. Conventional Towing

The tongue load is 9 to 11 % of

the Gross Trailer weight.

If the gross trailer weight is over

907 kg (2000 lbs), it is necessary

to use a sway control device with

sufficient capacity.

If the gross trailer weight is over

2268 kg (5000 lbs), it is necessary

to use a weight distributing hitch

with sufficient capacity.

If using a weight distributing

hitch when towing, keep your ve-

hicle level with the ground.

2. Fifth wheel Towing

The king pin weight is 15 to 25

% of the Gross Trailer weight.

Current fifth−wheel trailer designs

are not compatible with Short bed

(Crew Max models).

DTrailer hitch assemblies have differ-

ent weight capacities established by

the hitch manufacturer. Even though

the vehicle may be physically capa-

ble of towing a higher weight, the

operator must determine the maxi-

mum weight rating of the particular

hitch assembly and never exceed

the maximum weight rating speci-

fied for the trailer−hitch. Exceeding

the maximum weight rating set by

the trailer hitch manufacturer can

cause an accident resulting in death

or serious personal injuries.

07 04.26

483

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

HITCHES

DIf you wish to install a trailer hitch, you

should consult with your Toyota dealer.

DUse only a hitch recommended by the

hitch manufacturer and the one which

conforms to the gross trailer weight

requirement.

DThe hitch must be bolted securely to

the vehicle frame and installed accord-

ing to the hitch manufacturer’s instruc-

tions.

DThe hitch ball and king pin should have

a light coat of grease.

DToyota recommends removing the trail-

er hitch whenever you are not towing

a trailer to reduce the possibility of

additional damage caused by the hitch

if your vehicle is struck from behind.

After removing the hitch, seal any

mounting holes in the vehicle body to

prevent entry of pollutants such as ex-

haust fumes, dirt, water, etc.

TRAILER BALL

Follow these easy steps to properly deter-

mine the correct trailer ball for your ap-

plication:

1. Determine the correct trailer ball size

for the trailer coupler. Most couplers

are stamped with the required trailer

ball size. The sizes you will most likely

find stamped on the coupler are:

Trailer class Typical trailer ball size

IV 2 5/16 in.

II and III 2 in.

I1 7/8 in.

2. Select the appropriate trailer ball to

match or exceed the gross trailer

weight rating of the trailer. The trailer

ball load rating should be printed on

the top of the ball.

3. When mounted in the ball mount, the

threaded ball shank must protrude be-

yond the bottom of the lock washer

and nut at least 2 threads. The trailer

ball shank must be matched to the ball

mount hole diameter size.

LS30011

1 Trailer ball load rating

2 Ball diameter

3 Shank length

4 Shank diameter

07 04.26

484 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS30001

BUMPER TOWING (steel bumper only)

The rear bumper of your vehicle is

equipped with a hole to install a trailer

ball.

For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

The gross trailer weight (trailer

weight plus cargo weight) when tow-

ing with the bumper must never ex-

ceed 2268 kg (5000 lb.).

XS30002

FIFTH WHEEL TRAILER

NOTICE

When towing a fifth wheel trailer, be

careful not to hit the cabin or deck

by the trailer while making a sharp

turn.

MATCHING TRAILER BALL HEIGHT TO

TRAILER COUPLER HEIGHT

No matter which class of tow hitch ap-

plies, for a safe trailer hookup, the trailer

ball setup on must be the proper height

for the coupler on the trailer.

07 04.26

485

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS30003

XS30004

1. Coupler

2. Trailer ball

BRAKES AND SAFETY CHAINS

DToyota recommends trailers with

brakes that conform to any applica-

ble federal and state/provincial regu-

lations.

DA safety chain must always be used

between the towing vehicle and the

trailer. Leave sufficient slack in the

chain for turns. The chain should

cross under the trailer tongue to

prevent the tongue from dropping to

the ground in case it becomes dam-

aged or separated. For correct safety

chain procedures, follow the hitch or

trailer manufacturer’s recommenda-

tions.

CAUTION

DIf the gross trailer weight exceeds

453 kg (1000 lb.), trailer brakes are

required.

DNever tap into your vehicle’s hy-

draulic system as it would lower its

braking effectiveness.

DNever tow a trailer without using a

safety chain securely attached to

both the trailer and the vehicle. If

damage occurs to the coupling unit

or hitch ball, there is danger of the

trailer wandering over into another

lane.

07 04.26

486 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS30014a

Trim board

Clip

Scuff

plate

Connector

cover

SERVICE CONNECTOR FOR TOWING

BRAKE CONTROLLER (with towing

package)

Your vehicle is equipped with a service

connector for the trailer brake controller

as shown.

Access the service connector.

1. Remove the scuff plate.

2. Remove the clip (screw type) and trim

board.

Remove the connector cover from the ser-

vice connector before connecting the con-

nector.

Link the connector to the trailer brake

controller via the sub wire harness stored

in the glove box. The detailed explanation

of the sub wire harness circuit is packed

together with the sub wire harness.

Be sure to position the trailer brake con-

troller where it does not prevent the driver

from operating the pedal.

Toyota recommends that the sub wire har-

ness be stored in the glove box when it

is not in use.

TIRES

DEnsure that your vehicle’s tires are

properly inflated. See page 548 in Sec-

tion 7−2 and page 586 in Section 8 for

instructions.

DThe trailer tires should be inflated to

the pressure recommended by the trail-

er manufacturer in respect to the gross

trailer weight.

07 04.26

487

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS30005

4−Pin connector

XS30006

4−Pin, 7−Pin connector

TOWING CONNECTOR FOR TRAILER

LIGHTS

DYour vehicle is equipped with wire har-

ness sockets for trailer lights under the

rear bumper. Use them to connect and

operate the trailer lights. However, the

trailer lights must comply with federal,

state/provincial and local regulations.

See your local recreational vehicle

dealer or rental agency for the correct

type of wiring and relays for your trail-

er. Check for correct operation of the

turn signals and stop lights each time

you hitch up. Direct splicing may dam-

age your vehicle’s electrical system

and cause a malfunction of your lights.

The towing connector can be also con-

nected to the trailer brake and trailer

sub battery.

BREAK−IN SCHEDULE

DIf your vehicle is new or equipped with

any new power train components (such

as the engine, transmission, differential

and wheel bearing), Toyota recom-

mends that you do not tow a trailer

until it has been driven for over 800

km (500 miles). After the vehicle has

been driven for over 800 km (500

miles), you can start towing. However,

drive the vehicle at a speed of less

than 80 km/h (50 mph) when towing a

trailer for another 800 km (500 miles).

In addition, avoid full throttle accelera-

tion.

MAINTENANCE

DIf you tow a trailer, your vehicle will

require more frequent maintenance due

to the additional load. For this

information, please refer to the

scheduled maintenance information in

the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or

“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

DRetighten all fixing bolts of the towing

ball and bracket after approximately

1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving.

07 04.26

488 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

PRE−TOWING SAFETY CHECK

DCheck that your vehicle remains level

when a loaded or unloaded trailer is

hitched. Do not drive if the vehicle has

an abnormal nose−up or nose−down

condition, and check for improper

tongue load, overload, worn suspension

or other possible causes.

DMake sure the trailer cargo is securely

loaded so that it cannot shift.

DCheck that your rear view mirrors con-

form to any applicable federal state/

provincial or local regulations. If not,

install the rear view mirrors required

for towing purpose.

TRAILER TOWING TIPS

When towing a trailer, your vehicle will

handle differently than when not tow-

ing. The three main causes of vehicle−

trailer accidents are driver error, exces-

sive speed and improper trailer loading.

Keep these in mind when towing:

DSpeed limits for towing a trailer vary

by state or province. Do not exceed

the posted towing speed limit.

DBefore starting out, check operation of

the lights and all vehicle−trailer connec-

tions. After driving a short distance,

stop and recheck the lights and con-

nections. Before actually towing a trail-

er, practice turning, stopping and back-

ing with a trailer in an area away from

traffic until you learn the feel.

DBacking with a trailer is difficult and

requires practice. Grip the bottom of

the steering wheel and move your hand

to the left to move the trailer to the

left. Move your hand to the right to

move the trailer to the right. (This pro-

cedure is generally opposite to that

when backing without a trailer.) Also,

just turn the steering wheel a little at

a time, avoiding sharp or prolonged

turning. Have someone guide you when

backing to reduce the risk of an acci-

dent.

DBecause stopping distance may be in-

creased, following distance should be

increased when towing a trailer. For

each 16 km/h (10 mph) of speed, allow

at least one vehicle and trailer length

between you and the vehicle ahead.

Avoid sudden braking as you may skid,

resulting in jackknifing and loss of con-

trol. This is especially true on wet or

slippery surfaces.

DAvoid jerky steering and sharp turns.

The trailer could hit your vehicle in a

tight turn. Slow down before making a

turn to avoid the necessity of sudden

braking.

DRemember that when making a turn,

the trailer wheels will be closer than

the vehicle wheels to the inside of the

turn. Therefore, compensate for this by

making a larger than normal turning

radius with your vehicle.

DCrosswinds and rough roads will ad-

versely affect handling of your vehicle

and trailer, causing sway. Pay attention

to the rear from time to time to pre-

pare yourself for being passed by large

trucks or buses, which may cause your

vehicle and trailer to sway. If swaying

happens, firmly grip the steering wheel

and reduce speed immediately but

gradually. Never increase speed. Steer

straight ahead. If you make no extreme

correction with the steering or brakes,

the vehicle and trailer will stabilize.

DBe careful when passing other ve-

hicles. Passing requires considerable

distance. After passing a vehicle, do

not forget the length of your trailer and

be sure you have plenty of room be-

fore changing lanes.

07 04.26

489

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

DIn order to maintain engine braking effi-

ciency when driving on a long steep

downgrade, do not use the transmis-

sion in “D”. Select an appropriate shift

range in “S” mode (See “Automatic

transmission” on page 209 in Section

1−7).

DBecause of the added load of the trail-

er, your vehicle’s engine may overheat

on hot days (at temperatures over

30_C [85_F]) when going up a long or

steep grade with a trailer. If the engine

coolant temperature gauge indicates

overheating, immediately turn off the air

conditioning (if in use), pull off the road

and stop in a safe spot. Refer to “If

your vehicle overheats” on page 497 in

Section 4.

DAlways place wheel blocks under both

the vehicle and trailer wheels when

parking. Apply the parking brake firmly.

Put the transmission in “P”. Avoid park-

ing on a slope with a trailer, but if it

cannot be avoided, do so only after

performing the following:

1. Apply the brakes and hold.

2. Have someone place wheel blocks un-

der both the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel blocks are in place,

release your brakes slowly until the

blocks absorb the load.

4. Apply the parking brake firmly.

5. Shift into “P” and turn off the engine.

When restarting out after parking on a

slope:

1. With the transmission in “P” position,

start the engine. Be sure to keep the

brake pedal depressed.

2. Shift into gear.

3. Release the parking brake and brake

pedal, and slowly pull or back away

from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply

your brakes.

4. Have someone retrieve the blocks.

CAUTION

DDo not use cruise control when you

are towing down long, steep grades

or with heavy loads.

DSlow down and downshift before

descending steep or long downhill

grades. Do not make sudden down-

shifts.

DAvoid holding the brake pedal down

too long or too frequently. This

could cause the brakes to overheat

and result in reduced braking effi-

ciency.

07 04.26

490 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Improving fuel economy is easy—just take

it easy. It will help make your vehicle last

longer, too. Here are some specific tips

on how to save money on both fuel and

repairs:

DKeep your tires inflated at the cor-

rect pressure. Underinflation causes

tire wear and wastes fuel. See page

548 in Section 7−2 for instructions.

DDo not carry unneeded weight in

your vehicle. Excess weight puts a

heavier load on the engine, causing

greater fuel consumption.

DAvoid lengthy warm−up idling. Once

the engine is running smoothly, begin

driving—but gently. Remember, howev-

er, that on cold winter days this may

take a little longer.

DPut the selector lever into the “D”

when engine braking is not required.

Driving with the selector lever in a

position other than “D” will reduce the

fuel economy (For details, see

“Automatic transmission” on page 209

in Section 1−7.)

DAccelerate slowly and smoothly.

Avoid jackrabbit starts. Get into high

gear as quickly as possible.

DAvoid long engine idling. If you have

a long wait and you are not in traffic,

it is better to turn off the engine and

start again later.

DAvoid engine lugging or over−rev-

ving. Use a gear position suitable for

the road on which you are travelling.

DAvoid continuous speeding up and

slowing down. Stop−and−go driving

wastes fuel.

DAvoid unnecessary stopping and

braking. Maintain a steady pace. Try

to time the traffic signals so you only

need to stop as little as possible or

take advantage of through streets to

avoid traffic lights. Keep a proper dis-

tance from other vehicles to avoid sud-

den braking. This will also reduce wear

on your brakes.

DAvoid heavy traffic or traffic jams

whenever possible.

DDo not rest your foot on brake ped-

al. This causes premature wear, over-

heating and poor fuel economy.

DMaintain a moderate speed on high-

ways. The faster you drive, the greater

the fuel consumption. By reducing your

speed, you will cut down on fuel con-

sumption.

DKeep the front wheels in proper

alignment. Avoid hitting the curb and

slow down on rough roads. Improper

alignment not only causes faster tire

wear but also puts an extra load on

the engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.

DKeep the bottom of your vehicle free

from mud, etc. This not only lessens

weight but also helps prevent corrosion

DKeep your vehicle tuned−up and in

top shape. A dirty air cleaner,

improper valve clearance, dirty plugs,

dirty oil and grease,brakes not

adjusted, etc. all lower engine

performance and contribute to poor fuel

economy. For longer life of all parts

and lower operating costs, keep all

maintenance work on schedule, and if

you often drive under severe

conditions, see that your vehicle

receives more frequent maintenance.

(For scheduled maintenance

information, please refer to the

“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or

“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)

07 04.26

How to save fuel and make

your vehicle last longer

491

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

CAUTION

Never turn off the engine to coast

down hills. Your power steering and

brake booster will not function with-

out the engine running. Also, the

emission control system operates

properly only when the engine is run-

ning.

07 04.26

492 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY

In case of an emergency

If your vehicle will not start 493. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If your engine stalls while driving 497. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If you cannot increase engine speed 497. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If your vehicle overheats 497. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If you have a flat tire 498. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If your vehicle becomes stuck 511. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If your vehicle needs to be towed 511. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever 516. . . . . . . .

If you lose your keys 518. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If you lose your wireless remote control transmitter 518. . . . . . . . . . . . .

07 04.26

SECTION 4

493

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

Before making these checks, make sure

you have followed the correct starting pro-

cedure given in “How to start the engine”

on page 468 in Section 3 and that you

have sufficient fuel. If your vehicle is

equipped with the engine immobilizer sys-

tem, also check whether the other keys

will start the engine. If they work, your

key may be broken. Have the key

checked at your Toyota dealer. If none of

your keys work, there may be a malfunc-

tion in the immobilizer system. Call your

Toyota dealer. (See “Keys (with engine

immobilizer system)” on page 18 in Sec-

tion 1−2.)

If the engine is not turning over or is

turning over too slowly—

1. Check that the battery terminals are

tight and clean.

2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switch

on the interior lights or personal lights.

3. If the light is out, dim or goes out

when the starter is cranked, the battery

is discharged. You may try jump start-

ing. See “(c) Jump starting” for further

instructions.

If the light is O.K., but the engine still will

not start, it needs adjustment or repair.

Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair

shop.

NOTICE

Do not pull− or push−start the ve-

hicle. It may damage the vehicle or

cause a collision when the engine

starts. Also the three−way catalytic

converter may overheat and become a

fire hazard.

If the engine turns over at its normal

speed but will not start—

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC”

or “LOCK” position and try starting the

engine again.

2. If the engine will not start, the engine

may be flooded because of repeated

cranking. See “(b) Starting a flooded

engine” for further instructions.

3. If the engine still will not start, it needs

adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota

dealer or qualified repair shop.

If the engine will not start, your engine

may be flooded because of repeated

cranking.

If this happens, turn the ignition switch to

the “START” position with the accelerator

pedal fully depressed. Keep the key and

accelerator pedal in these positions for 15

seconds and release them. Then try start-

ing the engine with your foot off the accel-

erator pedal.

If the engine does not start after 15 se-

conds of cranking, release the key, wait

a few minutes and try again.

If the engine still will not start, it needs

adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealer

or qualified repair shop for assistance.

NOTICE

Do not crank for more than 30 se-

conds at a time. This may overheat

the starter and wiring systems.

07 04.26

If your vehicle will not start—

(a) Simple checks (b) Starting a flooded engine

494 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

To avoid serious personal injury and

damage to your vehicle which might re-

sult from battery explosion, acid burns,

electrical burns, or damaged electronic

components, these instructions must be

followed precisely.

If you are unsure about how to follow this

procedure, we strongly recommend that

you seek the help of a competent me-

chanic or towing service.

CAUTION

DBatteries contain sulfuric acid

which is poisonous and corrosive.

Wear protective safety glasses when

jump starting, and avoid spilling

acid on your skin, clothing, or ve-

hicle.

DIf you should accidentally get acid

on yourself or in your eyes, remove

any contaminated clothing and flush

the affected area with water imme-

diately. Then get immediate medical

attention. If possible, continue to

apply water with a sponge or cloth

while en route to the medical office.

DThe gas normally produced by a

battery will explode if a flame or

spark is brought near. Use only

standardized jumper cables and do

not smoke or light a match while

jump starting.

NOTICE

The battery used for boosting must

be 12 V. Do not jump start unless you

are sure that the booster battery is

correct.

JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE

1. If the booster battery is installed in

another vehicle, make sure the vehicles

are not touching. Turn off all unneces-

sary lights and accessories.

When boosting, use the battery of

matching or higher quality. Any other

battery may be difficult to jump start

with.

If jump starting is difficult, charge the

battery for several minutes.

2. If required, remove all the vent plugs

from the booster and discharged batter-

ies. Lay a cloth over the open vents

on the batteries. (This helps reduce the

explosion hazard, personal injuries and

burns.)

3. If the engine in the vehicle with the

booster battery is not running, start it

and let it run for a few minutes. During

jump starting, run the engine at about

2000 rpm with the accelerator pedal

lightly depressed.

07 04.26

495

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

LS40034

Jumper

cable

Positive

terminal

(“+” mark) Positive terminal

(“+” mark)

Discharged battery

Booster

battery

4. Make the cable connections in the or-

der a, b, c, d.

a. Connect the clamp of the positive

(red) jumper cable to the positive (+)

terminal on the discharged battery.

b. Connect the clamp at the other end

of the positive (red) jumper cable to

the positive (+) terminal on the booster

battery.

LS40035

Discharged battery

Negative terminal

(“−” mark)

Jumper cable

Booster

battery

c. Connect the clamp of the negative

(black) jumper cable to the negative (–)

terminal on the booster battery.

d. Connect the clamp at the other end

of the negative (black) jumper cable to

a solid, stationary, unpainted, metallic

point of the vehicle with the discharged

battery.

The recommended connecting points

are shown in the following illustrations:

XS40001

Connecting point for 4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE)

engine

XS40002

Connecting point for 4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE)

engine

07 04.26

496 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

XS40003a

Connecting point for 5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE)

engine

Do not connect the cable to or near

any part that moves when the engine

is cranked.

CAUTION

When making the connections, to

avoid serious injury, do not lean over

the battery or accidentally let the

jumper cables or clamps touch any-

thing except the correct battery termi-

nals or the ground.

5. Charge the discharged battery with the

jumper cables connected for approxi-

mately 5 minutes. At this time, run the

engine in the vehicle with the booster

battery at about 2000 rpm with the ac-

celerator pedal lightly depressed.

6. Start your engine in the normal way.

After starting, run it at about 2000 rpm

for several minutes with the accelerator

pedal lightly depressed.

7. Carefully disconnect the cables in the

exact reverse order: the negative cable

and then the positive cable.

8. Carefully dispose of the battery cover

cloths—they may now contain sulfuric

acid.

9. If removed, replace all the battery vent

plugs.

If the cause of your battery discharging is

not apparent (for example, lights left on),

you should have it checked at your Toyota

dealer.

If the first start attempt is not success-

ful...

Check that the clamp on the jumper

cables are tight. Recharge the discharged

battery with the jumper cables connected

for several minutes and restart your en-

gine in the normal way.

If another attempt is not successful, the

battery may be depleted. Have it checked

at your Toyota dealer.

07 04.26

497

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

If your engine stalls while driving...

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping

a straight line. Move cautiously off the

road to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC”

or “LOCK” position, and try starting the

engine again.

If the engine will not start, see “If your

vehicle will not start” on page 493 in this

Section.

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the pow-

er assist for the brakes and steering

will not work so steering and braking

will be much harder than usual.

If engine speed does not increase when

the accelerator pedal is depressed, there

may be a problem somewhere in the elec-

tronic throttle control system.

At this time, vibration may occur. Howev-

er, if you depress the accelerator pedal

more firmly and slowly, you can drive your

vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle

checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as

possible.

Even if the abnormality of the electronic

throttle control system is corrected during

low speed driving, the system may not be

recovered until the engine is stopped and

the ignition switch is turned to the “ACC”

or “LOCK” position.

CAUTION

Be especially careful to prevent erro-

neous pedal operation.

If your engine coolant temperature

gauge indicates overheating, if you ex-

perience a loss of power, or if you hear

a loud knocking or pinging noise, the

engine has probably overheated. You

should follow this procedure...

1. Pull safely off the road, stop the ve-

hicle and turn on your emergency

flashers. Put the transmission in “P”

and apply the parking brake. Turn off

the air conditioning if it is being used.

2. If coolant or steam is boiling out of the

radiator or reservoir, stop the engine.

Wait until the steam subsides before

opening the hood. If there is no coolant

boiling over or steam, leave the engine

running.

CAUTION

To help avoid personal injury, keep

the hood closed until there is no

steam. Escaping steam or coolant is

a sign of very high pressure.

07 04.26

If your engine stalls while

driving

If you cannot increase engine

speed If your vehicle overheats

498 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

3. Visually check to see if the engine

drive belt (fan belt) is broken or loose.

Look for obvious coolant leaks from the

radiator, hoses, and under the vehicle.

However, note that water draining from

the air conditioning is normal if it has

been used.

CAUTION

When the engine is running, keep

hands and clothing away from the

moving fan and engine drive belts.

4. If the engine drive belt is broken or the

coolant is leaking, stop the engine im-

mediately. Call a Toyota dealer for as-

sistance.

5. If the engine drive belt is O.K. and

there are no obvious leaks, you may

help the engine cool down more quickly

by running it at about 1500 rpm for a

few minutes with the accelerator pedal

lightly depressed.

6. Check the coolant reservoir. If it is dry,

add coolant to the reservoir while the

engine is running. Fill it about half full.

For the coolant type, See “Coolant type

selection” on page 546 in Section 7−2.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to remove the radiator

cap when the engine and radiator are

hot. Serious injury could result from

scalding hot fluid and steam blown

out under pressure.

7. After the engine coolant temperature

has cooled to normal, again check the

coolant level in the reservoir. If neces-

sary, bring it up to half full again. Seri-

ous coolant loss indicates a leak in the

system. You should have it checked as

soon as possible at your Toyota dealer.

1. Reduce your speed gradually,

keeping a straight line. Move cau-

tiously off the road to a safe place

well away from the traffic. Avoid

stopping on the center divider of

a highway. Park on a level spot

with firm ground.

2. Stop the engine and turn on your

emergency flashers.

3. With the transmission in “P” firmly

set the parking brake.

4. Have everyone get out of the ve-

hicle on the side away from traffic.

5. Read the following instructions

thoroughly.

07 04.26

If you have a flat tire—

499

2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

CAUTION

When jacking, be sure to observe

the following to reduce the possi-

bility of death or serious injury:

DFollow jacking instructions.

DDo not put any part of your

body under the vehicle sup-

ported by the jack. Otherwise,

personal injury may occur.

DDo not start or run the engine

while your vehicle is supported

by the jack.

DStop the vehicle on a level firm

ground, firmly set the parking

brake and put the transmission

in “P”. Block the wheel diago-

nally opposite to the one being

changed if necessary.

DMake sure to set the jack prop-

erly in the jack point. Raising

the vehicle with jack improper-

ly positioned will damage the

vehicle or may allow the ve-

hicle to fall off the jack and

cause death or serious injury.

DNever get under the vehicle

when the vehicle is supported

by the jack alone.

DUse the jack only for lifting

your vehicle during wheel

changing.

DDo not raise the vehicle with

someone in the vehicle.

DWhen raising the vehicle, do

not place any objects on top

of or underneath the jack.

DRaise the vehicle only high

enough to remove and change

the tire.

NOTICE

Do not continue driving with a

deflated tire. Driving even a

short distance can damage a

tire and wheel beyond repair.

07 04.26

500 2007 TUNDRA from Jul. ’07 Prod. (OM34463U)

The temporary spare tire is de-

signed for temporary emergency

use only.

Toyota 2007 Tundra Owners Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation